JP2018175994A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine including a main control device for controlling a game and a performance control device for executing a performance of a game, the performance control device includes a display performance execution part for executing a performance for displaying an image on a display device and an image information storage part for storing image information required for displaying an image. The display performance execution part includes a processing call part for calling processing for dealing with image information and can call processing for controlling a performance of a game when displaying image information by the processing call part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  In the gaming machine, a rendering effect for displaying an image or a moving image on a liquid crystal display device is executed. In drawing effect, by executing a program according to the contents of the effect, drawing data corresponding to elements such as background, symbol, advance notice, and hold display are called up and displayed on the liquid crystal display device in combination (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-106982, A

  However, in recent years, a wide variety of effects have been required to enhance the interest of gaming, so the development of programs for executing effects is enormous due to the complexity of the effect contents and the diversification of drawing contents. It came to require man-hours.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and while suppressing the increase of the number of man-hours required for the development of a gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of suppressing the decline in the interest of the game by enabling various effects. Intended to provide.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, in a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine including a main control device for controlling a game and an effect control device for executing an effect of the game, the effect control device is And a program data storage unit for storing program data necessary for displaying the image. The program data includes a predetermined process. The display effect execution unit calls the predetermined processing corresponding to the effect identification information set in the program data, and includes the item in which the effect identification information to be executed is set. When the process is executed and the process by the program data is repeatedly and continuously performed for a predetermined period, the process by the program data is repeatedly executed. Wherein by calling the predetermined processing corresponding to the effect identification information each time, characterized in that to be able to execute the predetermined process continuously.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and suppressing a decrease in the interest of playing a game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower tray in the state which removed the lower tray cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a) (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made divisible, and (b) is a schematic illustration showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing the lower tray of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line J-J in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. 74 (b). In (a), when the main screen is directed forward and the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, it is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. In (a), the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward, in an attempt to hide it by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. (A) is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit is there. It is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG. 78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotary body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotation body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the third rendering operation unit shown with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating unit facing forward, (b) is a direction in which the central axis of the operating button extends in (a) It is explanatory drawing seen from. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which orient | assigned the 1st decoration surface part ahead in the 3rd production operation unit, (b) is the 2nd decoration surface part front in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the movable presentation which rotates a decoration rotation body unit in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable presentation which rotates a decoration rotation body unit in the state which made the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part rotate in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd rendering operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the structural example of a 1st decoration surface part mainly in the 1st modification of a 3rd rendering operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the 1st modification of a 3rd rendering operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the structural example of a 2nd decoration surface part mainly in the 2nd modification of a 3rd rendering operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the 2nd modification of a 3rd rendering operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 97 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line N-N in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in FIG. 101 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. 101 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in FIG. 101 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 106 taken along the line R-R. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-S in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 133 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 133 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 133 taken along the line T-T. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 133 taken along the line U-U. It is the front view which cut the front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game field. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit in the front unit of a game board, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the table unit cut from the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area and shown from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center character in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center character from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in a back unit, (b) is the expanded sectional view cut | disconnected and expanded by the VV line | wire in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up movable presentation knit mainly for every structure unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up movable presentation unit for every main structure unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 1st decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 1st decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a drive system from the front when a back decoration 1st decoration unit is in a closed position, (b) is a drive system when a back decoration 1st decoration unit is in an open position from the front FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back decoration unit in the back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view seeing the back 2nd decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd back decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper 2nd decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the closed position, and (b) is a drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the open position FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper 3rd decoration body unit in the back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the back upper 3rd decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 3rd decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 3rd decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the open position FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up rotation base unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up rotation base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up rotation base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up rotation base unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back up rotation base unit from a front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action | operation lever in a back up rotation base unit from the front at the action position, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state from which the action lever is non-action from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up raising / lowering unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering unit into the movable side unit and the fixed side unit and was seen from the front, (b) disassembles the back up raising / lowering unit into the movable side unit and the fixed side unit And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable side unit of the back-up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable side unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a drive system from the front when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a raising position, (b) shows the driving system when the movable side unit of a back raising raising / lowering unit is a falling position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a raising position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a fall position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in an operation position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is in a horizontal position in a back up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit when a back side rotation base unit is a horizontal position and a back up rotation base unit is a fall position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit when the back side rotation base unit rotates 45 degree | times clockwise from a horizontal position in the down position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit in case a back up rotation base unit is in a down position, and a back up rotation base unit is a perpendicular | vertical position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is a perpendicular position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state where the operation lever regulates the rotation at the operation position when the movable unit is at the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is at the vertical position in the back movable effect unit. When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back movable presentation unit, the action lever is in the action position, the back decoration first decoration unit, the back second decoration unit, and the back decoration second It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which has acted on three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of a back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the back-to-back movable effect unit, and (c) is a back-to-back movable decorative unit in the back-to-back movable effect unit. It is a rear view shown in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back middle left decoration body and the middle back right decoration body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the center side appearance position. After moving the back left decoration and back right decoration of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit to a position where the center is closer to the center, the first decoration surface of each is directed forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board showing the second movable surface of the left movable effect unit and the lower right movable effect unit in a state in which the second left decorative member is turned forward to rotate the second decorative surface forward from the state of FIG. 190. . FIG. 190 is a front view of the gaming board showing the third decorative surface of each of the left movable effect unit and the rear right movable effect unit in a state where the third decorative surface is turned forward by rotating the back left decoration and the back right decoration of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit and the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the back upper second decorative unit in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit With the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decoration unit respectively in the closed position, the back upper first decoration unit, the back upper second decoration It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it has moved to a descent | fall position with a back top rotation base unit being in the state of a horizontal position so that a body unit and a back top third decoration unit may be arranged horizontally. From the state of FIG. 193, the back top rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction in a front view, and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in a lined state. From the state shown in FIG. 194, the back top rotation base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view to be in the vertical position, and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where decoration units are arranged vertically. From the state shown in FIG. 181, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first back decoration unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decoration lens of the second back decoration unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit respectively in the state of the open position It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which enabled visual recognition. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the lower back movable ornament unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit to the first raised position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back bottom movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 197 and moved to the second rising position. Explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the LED for making the light emission decoration of the stage of a center character and the back front lower central lens of a back front decoration unit in the back up movable production unit of a back unit as another embodiment of a game board It is. In the back up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back up rotation base unit is placed in the vertical position, and the first left movable decoration lens and the first right movable decoration lens of the back up first decoration unit, the back The state of the open position of the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition of each 1st fixed decoration lens, 2nd fixed decoration lens, and 3rd fixed decoration lens. While attaching the third effect operation unit to the plate unit instead of the effect operation unit, with the first decorative surface of the decorative rotating unit facing forward, a front view of the pachinko machine showing the gaming board in a normal state is there. In FIG. 201, after setting the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating unit to the front, in the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative unit, and the back upper third With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the decorative unit as the open position, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens can be viewed. It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in a state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a periphery control board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a payment control board etc. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of a peripheral control board and a board connected thereto. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. FIG. 202 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 207. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 210. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power supply ON of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of a payment control part power-on process following on FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball look determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a rental ball. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout ball look operation judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball ball operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of retry operation monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inconsistency counter reset judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and input signal confirmation processing (A) from CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduction sound and the reproduction channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing relation with a game state, reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in, when performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of the sound (stopping the reproduction of the sound) when the channel is not available at the time of the output of the new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing to which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the presentation example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure showing an example of screen composition of an effect in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the second half of a change of a modification of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effects which shows volume (sound volume) control for every total reproduction | regeneration time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half of a flow chart showing the procedure of volume control processing that performs sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing of performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished besides the alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting mode, alerting | reporting time according to the kind of alerting sound illustrated in FIG. (A) shows an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced Is a figure. (B) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, when the notification sound which belongs to 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated It is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (C) is a figure showing an example of processing when output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (D) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, while the alarm | sound of 1 which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure which illustrates separately about the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the contents of the information progress under production processing. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a figure which shows the other example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when channel special release processing is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when processing related to channel assignment cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the jackpot determination, and the state on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in processing other than the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment, the movable state It is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a decoration. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side. . In the time chart showing an example of the assignment situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality occurs respectively in a plurality of movable ornaments at two different timings in the period in which the symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side is there. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a figure showing the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure showing the circuit composition when a plurality of sensor signal input parts respectively connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors were connected in parallel with a plurality of base terminals of a transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 4) which arranged a detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit on a main control board. FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing another example (fifth embodiment) in which the detection circuit unit of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing the example (example 6) which arranged the avoidance part of a magnetic sensor input circuit, and a detection circuit part in the main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 7) which arranged a voltage output part of a magnetic sensor input circuit, an avoidance part, and a detection circuit part in a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic composition of an electrical connection with a detection sensor part, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in the game machine of a panel relay substrate and a main control substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay substrate or a main control substrate. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the example of arrangement | positioning of a panel relay board | substrate and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the fundamental structure of an electrical connection about the peripheral control board, a drive board, a drive means, and the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a movable performance object. It is the front view which showed notionally the grouping of the several movable character for effects provided in the game machine, and the several movable character. It is a timing chart which shows an example in the case of performing recovery operation to the initial position of a plurality of movable roles belonging to the role group 01. It is a functional block diagram explaining the composition and the outline of the function for performing the effect control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module configuration in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a basic concept of effect control in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid-crystal drawing production | presentation of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of scheduler data of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a function of a sound module of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a function of a lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and sound in presentation control of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound in the production control of the game machine of this embodiment, and a motor. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance presentation effect performed in a series of fluctuation displays from the fluctuation start of the special symbol in this embodiment to the stop, and shows an example of the scheduler used and scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / blink control of the lamp | ramp in step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in star character thing preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo combination thing fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data performed at the time of the power activation of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the periphery control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of the power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice production in a series of change displays from a change start of a special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and (A) performs an effect performed by the time from a change start to an end, and the effect concerned FIG. 6 shows scheduler data for execution and a scheduler to be executed, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of a prison object in a prison notice of a drop of a prison object. It is a figure explaining the content of the button prisoner first-half falling notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the button prisoner first-half falling notice which is the first half part of the prisoner falling warning of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the prisoner object second half falling notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the second half of the jail object falling notice of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the second half of the prisoner goods late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the seminal goods fall second notice which is the latter half part of a prison object fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal presentation block data combination block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to the fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern classified sub production block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the sub production block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of production control of the first half change (normal change 12 seconds) of change pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs advance notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) is the timing which performs advance notice production, and the execution time of the notice effect concerned, (B) is It shows scheduler data driven by each scheduler in order to execute the advance presentation effect. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern classified liquid crystal rendering block data and the fluctuation pattern classified liquid crystal block data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing by the step-up production | presentation unit (step-up 1 production-4 production) by the imaging | video synthetic * motion preparation graphic tool of the liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the composition of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the composition of the step-up notice sub-effect block data Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the presentation SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which step-up notice production is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of a step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid-crystal rendering scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect The drawing image which used scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and presentation SW corresponding to exchange data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and shows the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined by the presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of composition of a production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code which defines a production SW information table, (B) bit assignment of production SW control information, (C) Is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the presentation SW number corresponding to presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the presentation SW flag of this embodiment, and a presentation SW information table, (A) shows a presentation SW flag, (B) shows a presentation SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines presentation SW replacement table information and presentation SW replacement table included in the presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is presentation SW replacement table information, (B) is presentation SW Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice) Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid-crystal layer table and liquid-crystal production common block in this embodiment, (A) is a liquid-crystal layer table of step-up notice production, (B) shows the structure of a liquid-crystal production common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal presentation block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which define the liquid-crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines each common block of button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which define the liquid crystal presentation block data for performing the button mini character presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by production SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of the separate layer at the time of the advance production | presentation effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block which spans a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the execution timing of display of a symbol and advance notice production, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, and is common across a plurality of periods The composition of the liquid crystal advance presentation block by the block is shown. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by each writing the image written in each layer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which converts into a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of temporarily storing the display list command group in this embodiment in peripheral control RAM, and transferring to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers display list command group in this embodiment to sound source built-in VDP, without memorize | storing in periphery control RAM.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and detachably mounted to the main body frame 4 from the front side while being able to be viewed from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and is attached to the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 in the front view left end side of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 Attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the effect decoration rotary unit 530 capable of presenting participatory effects A door frame left side unit 540, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side A door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 is provided.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. , And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a rear L attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side Of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main frame base 600 and the base unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main frame base 600; And a back cover 980 covering the rear side.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 for guiding the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320 and discharging the game balls from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e; A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and invited from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a full taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a substrate unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a pair of left and right lower speakers 921 provided on the body frame base 600 on the left side of the substrate unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a left speaker 921 L and a lower right speaker 921 R), a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and containing a power supply substrate therein; An interface control board box 940 attached to the side, in which the interface control board is accommodated, a power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940, and a payout for controlling the payout of gaming balls inside Control board 951 is housed The includes a dispensing control board box 950, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. When the gaming balls driven into the game area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. There is.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and a shutter plate And an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in a front view of the member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to the lower end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position near the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, a curtain plate member And 50 a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the F. 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is provided with an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is engaged. ing.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. The upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step 12 which is recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in a front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are the same as the upper It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  The lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. An upper left connecting member 85A and a rear lower lower fixing portion 88 of the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted into and attached to the projecting portions 32, 42.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting portion 57 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end of the upper surface. And have. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. The front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The front end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. By rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 is completely It can be in the through state. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A flat plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 are vertically penetrated, and only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the front side of the projection 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. As a result, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are respectively fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 While the lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a "く" shape, the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the groove 63, a space is formed in which a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  In this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 Almost no load is applied to the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly turns. In the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c Moves the lock member 66 to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Since the upper end of the upright wall portion 54 is provided with the forwardly extending return portion 55, when the unauthorized tool in contact with the upright wall portion 54 is bent upward, the forward end of the incorrect tool is further Since it can be turned forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from invading the back side of the main body frame 4 and cheating can be performed via the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be reliably stopped.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the effect decoration rotary unit 530 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left of the base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame A door frame attached to the top front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 And Ppuyunitto 570, is equipped with a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect decoration rotary unit 530 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the horizontal direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player, and the effect image is displayed to the player It can be presented. Although this effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail later, a door frame which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and a large operation button 410 which can be operated by the player And a side effect display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, although the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described later in detail, has a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) provided on the left and right, and a top middle decorative member projecting forward at the center of the front A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided for 576, and top left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the front lower corner and a dish unit 320 to which the effect decoration rotary unit 530 is attached at the lower front of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and has a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a through hole attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit 210 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. The ball feed unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the fowl cover unit 270 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball loan button 328, return button 329, ball loan return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424 (heat source), press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display A door main body relay board is provided for relaying the connection between the device 461), the pair of upper speakers 573 and the like, and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the

  The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting surface 112 at the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left and right direction and makes the ball outlet 276 of the far cover unit 270 face forward. It is penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in the front view of the passage opening 116 for plate and the door frame base 110 and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward In the passage opening 117 and the glass unit attachment portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner periphery of the through opening 111 and the upper left and right upper corners of the door frame base 110 It has the speaker insertion port 119 which penetrates back and forth and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a minus driver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is not shown in the drawings, the portion projecting downward below the lower projecting piece 141 a is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141 a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  A portion of the door frame upper hinge member 140 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141 a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a door frame lower hinge pin of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be decorated to emit light.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, so the glass unit attachment member 170 Even if vibration or the like acts on the whole, the projection 172 does not rotate so as to project upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state in which the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projection 202, and its strength and rigidity are high. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. The security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening and closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a at the front and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit 700 attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotating a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. And a cylinder mounting plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the box 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1 k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and at the same time, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be It can be pulled out to the lower plate by the operation of the removal button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction An entrance 251a, and a box-like front cover 251 having a ball outlet 251b opened to the lower side of the entrance 251a and opened at the rear, and a box closing the rear end of the front cover 251 and opening the front And a rear cover 252 having a striking ball supply port 252a for supplying to the ball launcher 680 the gaming ball which has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front and rear direction, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition 25 that is pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and that divides the entrance 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The game balls on the separating member 253a of the ball removing member 253 and the ball removing member 253 having a are sent one by one to the ball supplying port 252a of the back cover 252, and the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 A ball feed member 254 rotatably supported about an axis extending thereto and a ball feed solenoid 255 for turning the ball feed member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 is arranged such that the ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251 a in front view, The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251 c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251 b in front view. The actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, is designed to extend forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guiding path 323e of the pan unit base 323 and the upstream end side of the ball removing guiding path 323f It is formed so as to close from the rear side the part opened to the rear of the.

  The ball removing member 253 divides the space between the entrance 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b below the entrance 251 a and divides the space between the entrance 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b in the direction of the ball feeding member 254. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b from near the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end is turned around an axis extending in the front and rear direction From the side surface of the pivoting rod 253b below the actuating rod 253c, the pivoting rod 253b supported movably, the rod-like operating rod 253c projecting forward from the upper end of the pivoting rod 253b, and the operating rod 253c And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253 c of the ball removing member 253 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 251 c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The actuating rod 253 c abuts on the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327 a operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball release button 327 of the disc unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feed member 254 is directed toward the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and has a blocking portion 254a having a fan-like plan view centering on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. The ball holding portion 254b is recessed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 is sized to be able to hold one gaming ball. The ball feed member 254 is pivoted about the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 254 c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 254b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 252a at the same time as the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a. It pivots between the holding position facing it. When the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 252a to the ball firing device 680 and the game ball entered into the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement toward the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the movement of the ball holding portion 254b remains on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange portion 254c side closes the hitting supply port 252a. The game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b by only one.

  The ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed actuating rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and a movement of the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 257 for pivoting the ball feeding member 254 around the vertically extending axis while rotating around the extended axis. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left and right direction from an engaging portion 257a and a side engaged with the ball feed operating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b And a transmission portion 257c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 255 which is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 It can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip end is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position. It will be located in When the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 pivots to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one gaming ball and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launch device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  The pivotingly supported ball extracting member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight portion 253 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. The pivoting of the hook 253c is restricted by the abutment of the hook 253c with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball releasing button 327 of the disc unit 320. The part 253a divides the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b.

  When the player depresses the upper disc ball release button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper disc ball out slider 327b slides downward with the operation transmission portion 327a, and the movement of the operation transmission portion 327a is moved downward. Thus, the actuating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the actuating rod 253c moves downward together with the actuating transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Be done. Thereby, the game ball entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 327b in which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the actuating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is biased upward by the upper disc ball removal spring 327c. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper disc ball release spring 327c via the actuating rod 253c, and breakage of the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252 and the attachment recess An anti-tamper member 260 is mounted in 252b. The fraud preventing member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252 b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends in the left and right direction, and is separated vertically at a substantially central position in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262, and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other . The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper-proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 260. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove which spreads as it goes to the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is in communication with the inside of the bat striking hole supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud preventing member 260, the illegal gaming ball attached with the string is driven from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 and attached to the illegal gaming ball When a cheating operation is performed such that an illegal game ball is moved into and out of the first starting opening 2002 etc. by operating the string, the force of the illegal game ball fired (hit ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes an illegal action. The string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262, and then V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262 It can be cut off by a part, and it can prevent that the fraudulent act using the illegal game ball which attached the string is performed.

[3-1 l. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. Fig.37 (a) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, FIG.37 (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed.

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit body 271 272, and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320 A channel 273 and a full tank receptacle 274 which is opened rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball channel 273 and which can communicate with the full channel guide 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 And have.

  A game in which the foul cover unit 270 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full ball reception opening 274 and is not reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball ball receptacle 275 for receiving the ball (far ball) and the gaming ball which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and which is received by the full ball receptacle 274 and the ball receptacle 275 is released forward And a ball discharge port 276 in communication with the lower ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball receptacle 274 and the far ball receptacle 275 and the ball outlet 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. The storage passage 277 having a wide width, the flat plate-like movable piece 278 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and the movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball outlet 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of them are stored in the storage passage 277 Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls moves so that the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls, so that when the full detection is detected by the full detection sensor 279, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 322 be completely filled.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and the opening / closing door 863 of the lower full ball passage unit 860 in the dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening and closing contact portion 281 capable of being in contact with the operation protrusion 863 e is provided (see FIG. 131). The door opening and closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 281 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts. When the actuating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full induction passage 862 (front opening ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, and the handle 302 attached at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner base have a shaft member 305 having a portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 306 And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 interposed therebetween.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached such that one end is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end is attached to the handle 302 to return the handle 302 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 304, the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 at the rear of inner base 304, tip end is outward from the left side in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of handle base 301 While projecting, the proximal end is behind the inner base 304 A single-shot button 311 rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth to the dollar base 301, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 for detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 301a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 301b radially projecting from the front end of the base 301a, and a cylindrical base 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. The three grooves 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in a state in which the three grooves 301c coincide with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively inserted in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side in the clockwise direction of the portion of the handle 302 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in a clockwise direction, and bulges outward. The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by about a 85 degree rotation angle. Is slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges so as to expand outward, and the side surface in the direction around the opposite side is curved inward. It is concaved and formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is located at the most projecting part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in the clockwise direction from the most projecting part of the second protrusion 302b. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 302a It also protrudes slightly high. The fourth protrusions 302 d are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle, with the side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially linear manner.

  The handle cover 303 has three round mounting bosses 303 a that are rounded forward on the front and bulge forward. The three mounting bosses 303 a are attached to the front of the handle base 301 by penetrating the slit 302 e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180. The handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 682 in the ball emission device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 is plated with conductive, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the player's touch, when the handle 302 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the strength of the firing solenoid 682 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive is controlled and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. It can not be done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311, and the emission control unit of the payout control board 951 (not shown) ) Causes the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 to be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. The game ball can be reentered into the game area 5a by the strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 includes, in the handle 302, four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, and the handle 302 is rotated most in a clockwise direction in a front view The fourth protrusion 302d positions the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is most strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right hit"). Since the fourth protrusion 302d is used as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by replacing the fourth protrusion 302d with the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an enlarged explanatory view of a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The plate unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. On the front surface of the plate unit 320, an effect decoration rotary unit 530 described later is attached.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 which can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is attached to the upper surface of the plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side greatly protrudes forward from the left and right center An upper tray main body 324 forming the upper tray 321, and a lower tray main body 325 attached to the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 323 further to the left than the center, and bulging forward to form the lower tray 322. And a pan unit cover 326 attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper disc ball release button 327 mounted so as to be capable of pressing from above in the front view right side of the upper disc 321 on the upper surface of the disc unit cover 326 and a front view right side of the upper disc ball release button 327 The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the front view right of the ball lending button 328, the ball lending button 328 and the return A sphere rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the button 329 and an effect selection attached to the dish upper front decoration portion 326 b in front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321 It projects forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 and the lower plate 322. And a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side largely bulges forward from the center on the left and right in a front view, and is formed into a container shape opened upward. It is done. In the upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and an induction passage portion 321a is formed in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the induction passage portion 321 a is lowered at the right end side, and the right end side of the induction passage portion 321 a in a front view (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is placed below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, against the upper end of the upper plate ball feed opening 323d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply opening 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guiding path 321a. The ball feed port 323d can be supplied.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the upper portion 321 is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326 j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530 A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A).

  The induction passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball contacts (rolls) to make the game ball It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in a front view. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a which penetrates the bottom wall 325a vertically and can discharge the game balls, and the plate unit cover 326 And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the selected effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A). The relief portion 322 b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner thereof is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower tray 322 includes a lower tray main body 325 which is open at the upper side and a rear side, a lower tray cover portion 326k of the lower plate body cover 326 which covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325 The tray unit is formed by the tray unit base 323 closing the back and the lower tray cover 340 covering the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape extending in the right and left directions in a plan view, and a trapezoidal shape whose upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. And the right and left sides of the trapezoidal shape are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower tray main body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open. The lower bowl body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower countersink hole 322a penetrating up and down with a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides of the quadrilateral extending in the left and right directions are disposed on the front side with the upper side shorter than the base and the rectangular side extending to the left and right. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid and. The bottom wall 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower countersink hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height twice to five times the diameter of the gaming ball. The lower countersink ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower disk main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower tray main body 325, the curved portion of the bottom front wall portion 325a and the main body vertical wall portion 325b in the front right-hand front corner corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325. The lower cover 340 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, substantially formed from a cover upright wall 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and an upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover upright wall 340a rises from a portion from the part on the front side of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. The front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover upright wall portion 340 a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening portion 326 d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling portion 340 b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326 k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover upright wall portion 340a and a portion obliquely extending between the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (effect decoration rotating body unit 530) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view near the left end of a portion extending short to the left and right with the front end side It is located to the rear of the rotator unit 530. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half thereof wraps around the rear of the effect decoration rotary unit 530. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 described later. Lower dish second region A2 (in FIG. 45) located on the rear side of the opening 326d (on the front end side of the effect decorative rotator unit 530, the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). And the shaded area). In other words, the lower plate 322 is half or more of the storage area (the area obtained by combining the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 corresponding to the storage area in plan view). It is located behind the effect decoration rotary unit 530. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted hatching is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the pan unit cover 326.

  In the lower tray 322, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the front view left-right direction. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323 c of the lower tray 322 includes the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a (right outer side of the lower tray opening 326 d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the lower tray cover 340. Is disposed in the lower tray second area A2 which is the rear of the front end side of the. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower ball and ball supply port 323c can not be seen from the player through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower tray 322 is formed so as to turn from the lower tray opening 326 d on the left side surface of the tray unit 320 (tray unit cover 326) bulging forward to the rear of the effect decoration rotary unit 530 The storage volume of the game ball is larger than the range viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray 322 is formed larger in the lower tray second region A2 than in the lower tray first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), it is possible to store more gaming balls in the lower plate 322 more than it looks.

  In the lower tray 322, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the right half (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray main body 325 in the right and left direction is a rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a (attachment space 326j) of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 projecting into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. When the player inserts a finger in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening portion 326d by the lower plate cover 340, the fingertip is on the rear side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) It can prevent touching.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in the front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed in an openable / closable manner by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower ball ball extraction button 333. Under the normal condition, the lower tray 322 is closed by the cover member 334 and the gaming ball can be stored in the lower tray 322. When the lower disc ball extraction button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the gaming balls in the lower board 322 can be discharged from the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a to the lower side of the dish unit 320.

  The lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is disposed in front (directly in front of) the lower countersink supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 which forms the rear wall of the lower tray 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower countersink hole 322a is located to the rear of the frame unit 415 in the effect decoration rotary unit 530 on the right side of the lower counter opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326. Therefore, it can not be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of the rectangular shape extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It inclines to become lower toward the head. Therefore, with the lid 334 open and the lower countersink hole 322a open, the gaming balls supplied from the lower countersink supply opening 323c into the lower tray 322 are directly in front of the lower countersink supply opening 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersink hole 322a. The lower end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, so the lower ball ball supply hole 322a is open. The gaming ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located on the left of the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower plate 322 from near the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c. The ball comes in contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it abuts on a sloped part, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower ball open hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower ball open hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower ball open hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed to guide the gaming balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the gaming balls supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c are immediately lowered from the lower ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. It can be discharged to (dollar box). As a result, when the lower ball ball removing hole 322a is kept open, the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and the player is paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. The player can play the game by making it difficult for the game balls, etc. to be discharged directly into the dollar box and making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. And the effect image etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The lower plate 322 of this embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if supplied and the game ball jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from entering from the lower plate 322 to the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is a decoration decoration Contact with the rear side of the rotating body unit 530 (the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) can be prevented. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 or the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) It is possible to prevent the rear side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower disc ball supply hole 323a is provided in front of the lower disc ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower disc ball supply port 323c is released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c. The game ball can be made to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 because it can be made to enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (dollar box) as it is Can. Since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball facing the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 has an inclined bottom As it climbs, the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the game ball released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate supply opening 323c can reduce the impact when it contacts the lower plate cover 340, 340A or the main body standing wall portion 325b, and they are broken. It can be difficult.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a lid member 334 that closes the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a may be interlocked with the upper ball ball extraction button 327. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. As a result, the player can be strongly illusoryed as if the gaming balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 which constitute the lower tray 322 are separate members which can be disassembled, but the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 can not be disassembled. It may be integrated. Although an example in which the cover upright wall 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is shown, the cover upright wall of the lower tray cover 340 from the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 The part 340a may stand up. The ceiling 340b of the lower cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. It may extend substantially horizontally.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the relief portion 322 b for avoiding the contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530 A) is provided. The lower plate 322 may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of through holes through which the game ball can not pass It may have the Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap where game balls can not pass through. It is good also as what was formed in thing or net-like. A light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (attachment space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (lighted and decorated) through the fence-like or net-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the four members may be united in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are One united, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrally formed, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, or the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrally formed. A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 integrated with each other; a lower plate body 325; a plate unit base 323; That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
An embodiment including a ball guiding portion 322c or the like for guiding the gaming ball from the lower ball feeding opening 323c to the lower ball dropping hole 322a in the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with still another different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  An example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a) is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the portion between the lower circular plate feed port 323c and the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the bottom of the lower plate 322. It has a pair of ball guiding parts 322c which are disposed to be separated left and right by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322 c is formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding portions 322c without crossing over the ball guiding portion 322c. It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower tray 322 of this example is, similarly to the above, on the rear (lower tray second area A2) on the right side of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a are arranged in line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are provided behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the effect decorative rotator unit 530, the dish unit cover 326, and the lower disc cover 340. It is located in the center of the city and is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the gaming ball supplied from the lower peripheral ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower counterball opening 322a is opened. Can be discharged from the lower countersink opening 322a downward (dollar box) immediately without entering the area on the left side of the lower countersink opening 322a in the lower tray 322. Since the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest .

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c is shown as a rail, but the invention is not limited to this, and the gaming ball may be lowered like a groove extending toward the lower ball ball opening 322a. Any guide can be used as long as it can be guided to the countersink hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the gaming ball released to the right of the lower wall of the lower plate ball opening 322a in the lower plate 322 is diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In addition to being shaped in such a way as to reflect in the direction of the lower ball ball opening hole 322a, the buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322 d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a just in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls discharged straight forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c are discharged from the lower ball removal hole 322a downward (dollar box). On the other hand, the gaming ball discharged to the right front from the lower ball supply opening 323c is reflected by the buffer portion 322d in the direction of the lower ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate removal hole 322a. Be done. At this time, since the gaming ball abuts and reflects on the buffer portion 322d, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Furthermore, the lower plate 322 in this example is also disposed at the rear of the lower right plate opening portion 326 d of the lower plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above It is arrange | positioned at the production operation unit attachment part 326a and the back of the coating | cover wall of the front end side of the lower saucer cover 340 etc.), and it can not be seen from a front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 in this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game balls, even if the game balls are not released forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c, By the buffer portion 322d, it can be reflected in the direction of the lower countersink hole 322a without sound and can be discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the clash is also directly discharged to the dollar box because the collision sound of the game balls is not heard from the lower plate 322 By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image, etc.) and to suppress the decline in interest. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the lower surface of the lower surface 322 (bottom wall portion 325a) is a portion on the opposite side to the lower surface ball supply port 323c with the lower surface ball opening 322a interposed therebetween. , And a return portion 322e for reflecting the gaming ball having jumped over the lower ball ball release hole 322a to the lower ball ball release hole 322a side. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may use a shock absorbing material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. The return part 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower tray 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line sequentially from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 The rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 which is the lower dish second region A2 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326 and the lower end of the lower dish cover 340 It is arranged in) and it can not be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the gaming ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side is made by the return part 322e. It can be reflected and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersink hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made dividable, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower tray of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2. The region indicated by the dotted hatching in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first expansion unit 325B is configured to have the remaining space (rendering decoration rotary unit 530 or the like) of the mounting space 326j in which the decorative decoration rotating body unit 530 (second decorative decoration rotating body unit 530A) is accommodated further than the main body portion 325A. It protrudes into the space behind the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear. In the first extension portion 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is formed at the right front corner.

  Next, in the examples shown in FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 does not protrude rearward relative to the front end of the lower plate 322, and the example shown in FIG. Rather, the space behind the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wider. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower disc ball opening 322a, and a main body 325A. And a second extension part 325c which constitutes the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 and which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As illustrated, the second extension portion 325c has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and the storage area of the game ball is larger than the first extension portion 325B. The lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340 having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325c (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325c to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (connected), and the storage areas of the game balls are stored. Will expand. A boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325c is a dividing line PL. The first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325c in the lower tray main body 325 have a predetermined gap (connected to the mounting space 326j) with the rear surface of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 or the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. Space is created so as to occur.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be splittable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Since the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divisible, to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 The extension part (the first extension part 325B or the second extension part 325c) having a size corresponding to the amount of protrusion of

  In the above embodiment, the lower tray second region A2 disposed behind the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) has been described as the dividing line PL. PL may be disposed on the boundary between the lower tray first region A1 and the lower tray second region A2, or may be disposed within the lower tray first region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the lower disc main body 325 (the lower disc 322) is provided with the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a in the main body portion 325A, but the lower disc main body 325 (lower disc 322) The ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the first extension 325B and the second extension 325c are attached to the right of the main body 325A of the lower tray main body 325, but the game ball storage area is on the right of the main body 325A. A flat plate-like closing member may be attached.

  Furthermore, although the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described in the above embodiment, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion It may be shaped according to the size of 325c.

[3-3 c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit base 323 is attached below the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened) It is formed in a shallow box shape).

  The pan unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 323a, which extends cylindrically rearward. A speaker slit 323b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower circular sphere supply port 323c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side from the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extends backward; The lower disc ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper disc ball feed port 323d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the lower disc ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and whose upper part is positioned at the right end of the upper disc body 324.

  The bowl unit base 323 guides the ball feeding guide path 323e for guiding the gaming ball sent to the rear side of the bowl unit base 323 through the upper bowl ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feeding unit 250, It is extended in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the cylindrical right side view of the lower ball and ball supply port 323c after hanging down from the lower side of the path 323e and is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 Between the lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and the lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and the upper end of the ball guide path 323f. Opening that penetrates back and forth at a height position and abuts against the actuating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operates by the upper disc ball release button 327 so that the actuating transmission portion 327a faces rearward Includes a 323g, the. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opening into a cylindrical portion of the lower ball feed port 323c.

  Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view, and the handle insertion opening 323 h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted And a cylinder insertion opening 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 323a of the pan unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper pan 321, and the cylindrical rear end is an upper pan passage port for the door frame base 110 A front end of the through hole 117 is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper counterspin supply port 323a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 323 c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower disc 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower disc passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side And the front end of the ball outlet 276 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower ball supply port 323c. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c is located at the rear of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, etc. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it is arranged so as not to be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3 d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The pan unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325. The pan unit cover 326 bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction and opens largely at the center in the left-right direction, and a presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a to which the presentation decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached; A dish upper upper decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 on both sides, and a dish front lower decorative portion 326c formed on the lower side of each of the left and right front dish upper decorative portions 326b; Have.

  The rendering operation unit attachment portion 326 a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 of the entire width in the left and right direction of the pan unit 320 in the left and right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320 It is formed in height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined to move rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front portion of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end portion on the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 and the left and right sides The middle portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of The lower front end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined to move upward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides, and the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction It is formed so that the up-and-down direction may be narrowed from the unit attachment portion 326a) toward the left and right ends. The dish unit cover 326 has the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view.

  The lower front portion of the dish lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 and the left and right ends The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is recessed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of

  A lower plate opening portion 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view, and the lower plate 322 faces the front from the lower plate opening portion 326d. In the lower front dished decorative portion 326c on the left side in a front view, a lower circular ball release button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening portion 326d in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view. The lower speaker port 326 e is located in front of the speaker slit 323 b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates the back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed which penetrates back and forth on the upper side of the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h It covers the upper right side. An upper bowl ball release button 327, a ball loan button 328, a return button 329, and a ball loan return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The pan unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-like bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the pan front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the pan unit base 323. The lower side of the tray unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step-like shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed downward from below, and a lower-disc bowling base 335 described later is attached to the portion. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole vertically penetrating at a position corresponding to the lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 is opened forward at the site of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, and the mounting space 326j into which the rear side of the rendering decorative rotation unit 530 (second rendering decorative rotation unit 530A) is inserted (accommodated) Have. The pan unit cover 326 has a lower pan cover portion 326k that extends in a plate shape rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower pan opening 326d and covers the lower pan 322 (see FIG. 44). The lower end cover portion 326k is in contact with the left end at the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower end body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower end cover 340.

[3-3 e. Upper bowl ball release button]
The upper bowl and ball withdrawal button 327 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 in a front view, and pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is below the top board portion 326 h by the ball extraction button holder attached to the lower side of the top board portion 326 h of the dish unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis extending to. An upper end of the ball-drawing lever which extends vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disc ball-extracting button 327. The ball release lever is slidably mounted in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the upper plate ball release button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disk ball extraction button 327 is in contact with the upper portion of the upper disk ball extraction slider 327b slidably mounted vertically by the disk unit base 323 from above. . The upper disc ball removal slider 327 b includes an operation transmission portion 327 a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327 a passes through the opening 323 g in the pan unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts on the operating rod 253 c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper disc ball removal slider 327b is urged upward by the upper disc ball release spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper disc ball release spring 327c is via the upper disc ball removal slider 327b and the ball extraction lever. The upper bowl ball release button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the upper disc ball extraction spring 327 c, the operation transmission portion 327 a of the upper disc ball extraction slider 327 b moves downward, and the operation transmission portion 327 a Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball outlet guiding path 323f of the tray unit 320, and are discharged to the lower tray 322 through the lower ball inlet 323c. It can be (supplied).

  In addition, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a may be moved in an interlocking manner. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the game balls on the upper plate 321 are discharged directly to the dollar box, making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by concentrating the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3 f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display portion 330 have a circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is attached to

  The ball lending button 328 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. The unit 320 is to be lent (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state in which cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after subtracting the portion of the game ball which has been lent out.

  The ball rental return display unit 330, though not shown, has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Effect selection left button and effect selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end close to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view in the plate unit cover 326 as illustrated. The presentation selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The presentation selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape in which one vertex is directed to the right on the right side of the presentation selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are played on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotary unit 530 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image for prompting the user to make a selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. It is.

[3-3 h. Lower bowl ball release button]
The lower bowl sphere removing button 333 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the front of the lower tray decoration part 326c on the left side in a front view on the lower side of the lower tray opening 326d in the tray unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. The lower disc ball extraction button 333 can be pressed to operate the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball outlet hole 322a of the lower disc 322, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower bowl ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the bowl unit 320.

  The lower disc ball release button 333 can slide in the front-rear direction by the lower disc ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the lower plate body 325 below the lower disc body 325. Is attached to The lower disc ball extraction button 333 is disposed on the left with respect to the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower disc 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The lower countersinking base 335 is housed in a bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 at a position below the lower tray 322 and is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side, It is attached to the bottom plate portion 326i. The lower countersinking base 335 has a discharge port 335a, which has the same size as the lower countersink opening 322a and is vertically penetrated, at a position immediately below the lower countersink opening 322a for the lower tray 322. . The lid member 334 is disposed between the lower disc main body 325 and the lower disc ball removing base 335, although the detailed illustration is omitted. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball opening hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower ball ball sink base 335 is also opened, and the lower ball ball outlet hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower countersink base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position on the left side of the lower countersink button 333 in plan view. The lower disc ball withdrawal button 333 is connected to a part between the part for closing the lower disc ball withdrawal hole 322 a in the lid member 334 and the part to which the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335 is rotatably attached. As a result, when the lower countersunk ball release button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 can pivot around an axis extending in the vertical direction to open and close the lower countersink spherical opening 322a (discharge port 335a).

  Although not shown, the holding device for holding the lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 when the lower bowl ball withdrawal button 333 is pressed and moved to the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335, and the lower bowl ball withdrawal button A lower ball ball release spring biasing the 333 forward is attached. With the lower disc ball release button 333 projecting forward and closing the lower disc ball release hole 322a with the lid member 334, when the lower disc ball outlet button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened to move, and the lower ball ball extraction button 333 is held by the holding device so as to be moved backward. In this state, even if the lower disc ball release button 333 is released, the lower disc ball release button 333 does not move forward, and the lower disc ball out hole 322a is maintained in the open state, and the lower disc The game balls in the ball 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower ball ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  With the lower disc ball extraction button 333 held by the holding device and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a open, when the lower ball extraction button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 333 is released, the lower ball removing button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower ball removing spring and returns to the protruded state, and the cover member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed to move. Thereby, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower disc ball extracting button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extracting hole 322 a (discharge port 335 a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 327. The lower countersink hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the dollar box disposed below the tray unit 320, the dollar box via the lower tray 322 can be operated simply by operating the upper tray ball release button 327. Can be discharged to simplify the labor involved in ball removal. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 55 and the like. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 48 (b). Fig.53 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player It is possible.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the player can operate the operation button 410 which can be pressed and operated, and the outer appearance of the operation button 410 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration substrate unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player through the operation button 410 Door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an effect image , And a.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. Fig. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. The button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface having no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state in which it is recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section from the back surface and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the portions of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is an inside of the button lens 411. It includes an inner extension portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side), the along the.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side The display screen of can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed on the entire periphery of the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state where it projected backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d is configured such that the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 are assembled when the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is assembled. , 423b, and divides between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect decoration rotating body unit 530), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of indents extending in a zigzag manner along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63) . The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 correspond to the respective second LEDs 422b on the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. , 423b, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration respectively ing.

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be imparted to the decorative rotating body unit 530.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. And, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the effect decorative rotary unit 530, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the second The LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In the assembled state in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the whole of the effect decoration rotation body unit 530.

[3-4 d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431 a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically at the central portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431 a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, an operation button inner decorative member 432 attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and having a short cylindrical extension in the longitudinal direction Of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 and the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434 which are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432 Manipulations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a at the front of the unit base 431 at the rear A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front of the unit base 431, and respective sensor holders 439. Three pressing detection sensors 440, each mounted for detecting pressing operation of the operation button 410, a rendering operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rear side of the rendering operation unit relay board 441 And a relay substrate cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially square through hole 431 a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431 a has a size that fits in the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 431 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted slidably.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Of the four holding holes 431 b, the holding hole 431 b on the upper right side has a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). To a position rotated approximately 47 degrees. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b disposed at the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431 c projecting forward in a flat plate form between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached. ing. The light shielding wall portion 431 c allows the light emitting decoration of the frame top lens 418 to be performed only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a which extends in the front and rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening portion 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b back and forth and extending vertically, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432 e that project rearward from the rear and are attached to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to have substantially the same size as an inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432 c penetrating the front plate 432 b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed in a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is depressed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b and bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b And a second in-button decorative portion 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decoration 432 g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432 c.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear end of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can not be clearly seen behind by the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be decorated to emit light. By emitting and decorating the operation button inner decoration member 432, it is possible to cause the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 to emit light and decorate.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are each full color LED It is assumed. The front left side of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white.

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431 b in the unit base 431. When assembled into the effect decoration rotary unit 530, the rear end of the operation button spring 438 is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operating button spring 438 biases the operating button 410 forward.

  The three pressure detection sensors 440 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 439 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 431. The three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431 a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, an operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, an operation button inner decoration substrate Connection of the door main body relay substrate (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100 with the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460. To relay the

  The relay substrate cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay substrate 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 442 a attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i, the downward movement of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a rectangular display screen on the front and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a bottomed square cylindrical mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof has the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape abuts on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side in a state assembled to the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432. It projects into 432a (see FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall 432a of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the periphery control board 1510 in the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the operation button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The full-width of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full-width of the door frame 3. The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in front view.

  The upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 attached to the dish unit 320, the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom is between the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the dish unit 320, and is mounted in a suspended state.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thus, in the effect decoration rotary unit 530, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line And are inclined to move upward as they move forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (the effect decoration rotating body unit 530) The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect decoration rotary unit 530 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 or the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect decoration rotary unit 530, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. There is. In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, in the normal state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is a frame unit by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416 of 415.

  In the normal state, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 moves from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (the center axis CL side) forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotary unit 530, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 of this embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. In this case, the part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) Because the shape of the operation button 410 is pushed away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is hung so that the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 can be suspended. Is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration occurs at a portion farthest from the attached portion Thus, the whole of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect decoration rotating body unit 530. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the vibration motor 424 is strong against the player pressing the operation button 410 The vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 forming the lower surface and the dish unit cover 326. A gap is formed between the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or smashed, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the lower plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and breakage of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect is displayed when the player is presented to the player the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotary unit 530. Since the decoration rotating unit 530 and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and it is difficult to damage the game hall side. It is possible to suppress the increase in burden.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and the rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it difficult to break.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation member in the operation button 432 are made of transparent members, The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In the part where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change of the plate thickness, and therefore the rear side is difficult to be seen through the part where the decoration of the unevenness is formed.

  Since the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a The rear portion of the button lens 411 can be viewed backward by the decoration of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is a decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430 by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420 and the like which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the lens are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and thus the whole of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530.

  In contrast to the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL Since the lines are arranged concentrically, as shown in FIG. 63, the unevenness line of the first button decoration 411a and the unevenness line of the second in-button decoration 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, since the first button decoration 411a and the second in-button decoration 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, since the first button decoration 411a and the second in-button decoration 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a Since the degree of overlap between the uneven line of the second line and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 plays a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432. Since the player can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is disposed in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is located behind the second button decoration 411 b facing from the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 in the decoration board unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is disposed behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, with the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LEDs 423 b of the decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by causing the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the rendering decoration rotation unit 530 is mounted on the front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the LED of From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, the flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of second embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, a second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A which is a second embodiment of the above-mentioned effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the above-described effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Like the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the same components as those of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect decorative rotator unit 530A has a circular outer shape and is formed to be transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and encloses the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate. And a frame unit 415 attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decoration substrate unit disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. 420, a second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration substrate unit 420 attached to the front, and the second base visible through the operation button 410 from the player side Door frame side second attached to the unit 450 and capable of displaying effect images And output display device 460A, includes a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side.

  The second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A includes the second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view, and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and the relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 is an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482, a switching drive motor 492 (heat source) It is for relaying the connection between the projector 500 and the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4 g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. . The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 It has an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The configuration is substantially the same as that of the operation button 410 of the decorative rotary unit 530.

  A specific difference is that, with the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A and the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the button base The shape of the guide boss portion 413 c 413 is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is located at one portion toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a triangle with its vertex pointing and a triangle with one vertex on the opposite side to the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction along the entire circumference, and a button in the truss-like pattern A right triangle having a base facing the center of the lens 411, sides extending from both ends of the base to the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base , The hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, and the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss shaped triangle to the center side of the button lens 411, and the tip of that side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the hypotenuse of the leading end of the pattern of a right triangle from, in are formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in polyhedron shape. Thus, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron at the portion of the first button decorative portion 411a, so the first button decorative portion 411a The thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately at the part of the point of, and the light passing through this part will be irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometrical pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413 c is inserted into the holding hole 451 d of the second base unit 450, and is a button shaft 452 held in a cylindrical inside of the holding hole 451 d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Is slidably inserted. In the present example, the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4 g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can be imparted with vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, and the same reference numerals are attached thereto, and the detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second rendering operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is mounted. It is attached to

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a cylindrical guide boss portion 413c projecting from the front surface of the unit base 451 on the button base 413 of the operation button 410 Operation button spring which inserts four cylindrical cylindrical button shafts 452 which are respectively slidably inserted from the inside and four button shafts 452 are inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown) and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b which protrudes hemispherically from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c which penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially rectangular shape extending up and down when viewed, four holding holes 451d which are recessed backward from the front surface of the main portion 451a, and a main portion 451a An upper bearing 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the upper part, and a semicircle coaxial with the upper bearing 451e from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body 451a The lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 is formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in which the inner circumference and the outer circumference are formed in a C-shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. Cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when screen unit 470 of door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by upper bearing portion 451e and lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451 c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A to pass from the rear.

  The four holding holes 451 d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of the holding hole 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In the four holding holes 451 d, a button shaft 452 is attached coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451 d protrudes more forward than the front surface of the main body 451 a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be attached slidably in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can.

  The upper left holding hole 451 d of the four holding holes 451 d is counterclockwise around the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451 d, the holding hole 451 d on the upper right side has a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). To a position rotated approximately 47 degrees. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 451 d, the two holding holes 451 d disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451 d. .

  Operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut on the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c, so that the operation button 410 is inserted via the guide boss portions 413c. It is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape in which the front is opened and the rear extends. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are coaxially located at the center of the portion extending in a semicircular arc shape. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are inserted with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 A from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Can be rotatably supported on the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A by being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (face) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in the same manner, and is separated in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle around the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restricts the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by the abutment of the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. doing. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g and magnetically contact the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b to abut the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b cause the main screen 471 to face forward, or the sub screen 472 to face forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement by which the screen unit 470 tries to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 etc. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at a position corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one of the three pressure detection sensors 454 remains on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals circumferentially around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4 g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A has a screen unit 470 rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounted on the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450; and attached to the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounted on the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed in the rotational drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 by rotationally driving the screen unit 470, and the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from behind and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. It is attached so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above at a front view left side of the box-like projector attachment member 505 whose front is open and the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450 Upper cover 506 and the upper hippo And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the mounted by which the screen unit 470 (the rotational position) 506, and a.

[3-4 g-5 a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending up and down, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, and has a milky white light transmitting main screen 471 and a disk shape whose one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery, and the central portion is an axis A milky-white, translucent sub-screen 472 that curves to bulge outward in a direction, and a cylindrical shape that protrudes outward in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, and the actuating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially a half of the outer periphery, and the subscreen 472 Sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 etc.) which is formed in the shape of a relief that imitates a predetermined character (dot) to be The sub screen decoration substrate 477 (see FIG. 75 etc.) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the side facing the sub screen 472 and the side opposite to the sub screen 472 of the main screen 471 And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 extending short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times as large as the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both axial ends are bordered by the peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and closes the inside of the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal irregularities are arranged in a row And a curved surface general screen portion 472b. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed with a through hole, and the sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably inserted from the front into the upper bearing 451 e and the lower bearing 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotational drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed substantially along the circumference and the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b is provided, and a detection piece 475c projecting outward in the form of a flat plate from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in a circular arc centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state assembled to the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave part 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b in contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and the iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. .

  The screen unit 470 can be pivoted between a first position where the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472 b of the sub screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complexly changed, transmitted light is irregularly refracted in a complex manner, and the rear is viewed It is difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the subscreen decorative member 476.

  The sub screen decoration substrate 477 is attached on the back side of the sub screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477 a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub screen 472). Has been implemented. The outer surface of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub screen decorative member 476, and its surface is white. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477, the sub screen decoration member 476 and the sub screen 472 can be lighted and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can cause the LED 477a to emit light, thereby strongly emitting and decorating the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH".

  Since the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, when the LED 477 a emits light, the LED 477 a The player can recognize the point light source of Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can cause the sub screen 472 to project the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472. Similar to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is for projecting the effect image from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape, and is intended to display the effect image which is noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the subscreen 472 is a narrow area where the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central subscreen decoration member 476 by the presence of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 in the center on the back side (narrower than the main screen 471). Of the sub screen decoration member 476 and pressing the operation button 410 to the player by the light emission decoration of the sub screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to

[3-4 g-5 b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f which are open forward of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are units in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front to the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by attaching to the front surface of the base 451.

  The upper bearing member 480 is mounted on the upper portion of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recessed portion 481 a which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recessed portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 is located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed portion 481a allows the stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is assembled behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second rendering decoration rotary unit 530A. positioned. Thus, by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed substantially in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451 f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4 g-5 c. Rotary drive unit]
The pivot drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow unit case 491 inside, and the switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotary shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-like first gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 The transmission gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear are meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect decoration rotary unit 530A. The rotational drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 back and forth around the axis via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be turned.

[3-4 g-5 d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector 500 is disposed in the hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by emitting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens portion 502 projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the projector main body 501 and irradiating the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are disposed in the cover portion 451b. Mounted as.

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4 g-5 e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector attachment member 505 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and the projector 500 is attached to the inside and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410 . The rear wall of the projector attachment member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505 a penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505 a.

  A second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and a relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in a front view.

[3-4 g-5 f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated by a rotational angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470 The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 have a detection piece 475c at a first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected. The rotational drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotational drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475 c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4 g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and relieves an impact when the second effect decorative rotary unit 530A is hit from above, and the plate in the plate unit 320 It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of the unit cover 326.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat buffer member 511 which is in contact with the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view And 512b. The leg portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the pan unit cover 326 in the pan unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly pressed downward or hit down. Move down to The shock absorbing member 511 is compressed to absorb an impact. When the projector attachment member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512 a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector attachment member in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-like body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed also by the bending of the body portion 512a. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the downwardly bent main body portion 512a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the pan unit cover 326, and further bending of the body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. Thus, when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly hit from the upper side, the impact can be absorbed in multiple steps, and the attaching portion 416 e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 g-7. Operation effect of the second rendering operation unit]
The effects of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in a state in which the main screen of the screen unit is directed forward; (b) is a sub of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned the screen forward. FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line K-K in FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 in accordance with the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, or The effect image can be displayed in the operation button 410 to entertain the player, and the player can operate the operation button 410 to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player. It is a thing.

  The second effect decorative rotary unit 530A is formed to have a height substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The entire width of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect decorative rotary unit 530A is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  The upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 of the second effect decoration rotary unit 530A is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. With the second effect decorative rotary unit 530A attached to the dish unit 320, the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 A gap is formed between the That is, only the upper part of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is attached to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is perpendicular. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward at an angle of 63 degrees to the line. Thereby, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is above the plate unit 320 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A) In order to be located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 disposed, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 Each is slidably inserted and biased forward by a control button spring (not shown). In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, in the normal state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is a frame by the biasing force of the operation button spring. A portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 of the unit 415 abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a.

  In the second effect decorative rotary unit 530A, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. Protruding forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotary unit 530A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A of this embodiment is The central axis CL of the operation button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side like the conventional pachinko machine, from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 It will push the part which left | separated (refer FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a substantially spherical surface) Because the shape of the part) is used, when the position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the whole of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 becomes straight backward. You can move to Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is suspended As only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the part farthest from the attached part Since the vibration is generated, the entire second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is transmitted to the player pressing the operation button 410 And surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector attachment member 505 and the dish unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of FIG. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body 512a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511, bending of the main portion 512a of the buffer base 512, or the like. The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, etc. can be absorbed, and an unnecessary force can be prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 may be pressed or hit with a strong force. Since the operation button 410 and the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A and the like are not broken, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the breakage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest and damage. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, compared with the case where it is flat. The strength and the rigidity are high, and even if struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed to the whole button lens 411, and the breakage is difficult.

  In the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side of them Decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In the part where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change of the plate thickness, and therefore the rear side is difficult to be seen through the part where the decoration of the unevenness is formed.

  Since the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a It is possible to make the rear difficult to see at the portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavities and convexities in which the plurality of triangles are combined. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located, but the outer side or the back side of the screen unit 470 is viewed from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the space. Can be obscured. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing, deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who saw the operation button 410 can While being able to prevent having a sense of discomfort, the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  Describing in detail, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is a door frame side second effect display device by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc. located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 etc. in 460A pass through the transparent button lens 411 It is formed so as not to be seen from the side. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the right The outer part (in FIG. 76, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) is made invisible from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the dashed dotted line in FIG. ) But from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside or the back side of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and hence the whole of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part 472b of the sub screen 472 and the button frame 412 etc. of the button lens 411 and the second button decoration 411b The sub screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are less visible (see FIG. 76). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 exists, the main screen 471 can be rotated, etc. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated and switched from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472 A movement beyond the player's expectation in the button 410 can be made to have a strong impact on the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is obscured (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 (the sub screen decoration member 476) can be rotated, thereby increasing the impact when the sub screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated, The player can be entertained.

  The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is a button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display disposed inside the rear of the operation button 410 while having a polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a combining a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range The apparatus 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thus, the triangular decoration (first button decoration 411a) disposed on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

  As described above, since the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle, and the peripheral decoration 472a mainly consisting of a square and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the position of the player's eyes is As the degree of overlapping changes as they move, the geometric pattern that is seen overlapping changes, and it is possible to show the player a decorative with motion, and show the player a decorative with a three-dimensional feel with depth. And can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 to direct the main screen 471 forward, or a sub screen 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated vertically and extend vertically. The decoration of the geometric pattern is such that the decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in a row crosses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular ring of the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and a decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern overlapped with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change of the decoration attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410, or The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) having different switchable forms on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image which is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, and a strong impact on the player Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub screen 472 having a sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center in the center, and the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided separately in the circumferential direction of the rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, from the front It looks like a square (rectangle) extending up and down when viewed (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and the milky white light transmitting property is obtained. The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of FIG. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. Thus, while the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the conventional display screen appears to the player And the player can be surprised, the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position where the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-like central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 It appears that the sub screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque subscreen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the subscreen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 And the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central part of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, in the sub screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub screen 472 The screen decoration member 476 can be lighted and decorated. By making the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472 can be obscured by the light from the projector 500. You can make it bright and decorative.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A emits the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, and the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub screen 472 where the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the portion outside the sub screen decoration member 476 consisting of the decoration imitating a skull The sub screen decoration member 476 which becomes the inner side of the light emitting decoration is emitted by the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emission decoration of the fixed sub screen decoration member 476 is decorated by the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect which is completely different from the light emission decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine While being able to show the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the sub screen 472 strongly. In this state, since the light of the LED 477a is brighter (high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image in the inside of the effect image, a partial high-intensity effect image which can not be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device is displayed As well as being able to attract the player's interest strongly, it is possible to display an effect image that can further entertain the player.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the main screen 471 is appropriately rotated to change the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472 while the projector 500 emits the effect image forward. , And when the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are rotated, a portion of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 located in the projection range of the projector 500, The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, such a strange visual effect that the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and the sub screen decorative member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500 It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

  Thus, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 Since the player can show the player a decorative and three-dimensional decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  The second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can emit light such as a subscreen decoration board 477 on the front surface of which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and a front side of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second outside of the operation button left decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 behind the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A and the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410 The first LEDs 422a of the first operation button and the first LEDs 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are caused to emit light by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 The second LEDs 423 b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decorative substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

  By rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed at the rear inside of the operation button 410, the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A has display screens having different forms. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that can not be realized with a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (is switched). Can give the player a strong impact and enjoy it.

[3-4 h. Overall configuration of third embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, a third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B which is a third embodiment of the above-mentioned effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78 to FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78 (b) is a right side surface of the third effect operation unit. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80 (a) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along line L-L in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back FIG.

  The third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B can be attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the above-mentioned effect decoration rotating body unit 530 or the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be pressed by the player similarly to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Hereinafter, in the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the same components as those of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The third effect decorative rotator unit 530B has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and encloses the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate. And a frame unit 415 attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decoration substrate unit disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. 420, a third base unit 520 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration substrate unit 420 attached to the front, and a third base visible through the operation button 410 from the player side A decorative rotator unit 530 attached to the unit 520; Eteiru.

[3-4 h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. . The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided.

  The operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, and the same reference numerals are given thereto, and the detailed description is omitted.

[3-4 h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a cutout cut out with a predetermined width at the upper front of the central opening 416a. It has a portion 416c and is attached from the rear side to the frame main body 416 so as to close the frame-like frame main body 416 attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 A pair of light transmitting frame side lenses 417 and a light transmitting frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416 c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530.

[3-4 h-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 can emit light and decorate only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410 and the frame side of the frame unit 415 And a second LED 422 b and a second LED 423 b capable of emitting and decorating only the lens 417.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530 B has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the decorative rotary unit 530 is mounted and mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 It is.

  The third base unit 520 includes a receiving wall portion 521a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and recessed in a semispherical shape in the central portion rearward, and a blind hole opened forward on the outside of the receiving wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 mounted on the front upper portion of the unit base 521, and four inserted in the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. Operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 attached to the front of unit base 521, three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 for detecting pressing operation of operation button 410, unit During the third rendering operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  The third base unit 520 includes a rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 (heat source) mounted on the left side surface of the unit base 521, and a spur gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528. , And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 meshed with the first drive gear and rotatably mounted on the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating gear 531 a of a decorative rotating unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 521 includes, in addition to the housing wall 521 a and the holding hole 521 b, a light shielding wall 521 c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached A plurality of ventilating openings 521d penetrating through the wall 521a, a left projecting part 521e projecting forward from substantially the center of the left outer side and the up and down direction of the housing wall 521a, and housed so as to face the left projecting part 521e A right protrusion 521f protruding forward from substantially the center of the right outer side and the vertical direction of the wall 521a, a left shaft 521g extending cylindrically from the left protrusion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft 521g And a right bearing portion 521h coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrating the right protrusion 521f.

  The housing wall portion 521a which is semispherically recessed rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so as to be able to be housed in a state in which substantially the rear half of the decorative rotary unit 530 is not in contact with the recessed front side.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at the four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the housing wall 521a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 521b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Of the four holding holes 521b, the holding hole 521b on the upper right side has a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). To a position rotated approximately 47 degrees. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 521b, the two holding holes 521b disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light shielding wall portion 521 c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. It is to do.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has its left end fixed horizontally to the left protrusion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotary member-side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotary unit 530. It is a thing. In the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical rotary member-side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotary unit 530 is rotatably inserted. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are coaxially disposed with respect to a first axis line CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. The decorative rotator unit 530 can be rotatably mounted about a horizontally extending first axis CL1 by the left shaft 521g and the right bearing 521h of the unit base 521.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and the light emission decoration of the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be achieved by making the LEDs emit light. The frame top lens decorative substrate 522 has a white front surface, and the mounted LED is a full color LED.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 521 b in the unit base 521. When assembled into the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B, the rear end of the operation button spring 523 is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operation button 410 is urged forward by the operation button springs 523.

  The three pressure detection sensors 525 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 521, one of the three pressure detection sensors 525 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 524 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 521b. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 521. The three pressing detection sensors 525 can detect three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay substrate 526 is attached to the rear of the unit base 521 outside the decorative rotator unit 530 and on the left outside (right side in front view) of the accommodation wall 521 a in a rear view. The third effect operation unit relay substrate 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration substrate 522, a pressing detection sensor 525, and a production operation unit first drive motor 528 The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 (heat source) of the decoration rotating body unit 530, the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535, and the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536, and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 It is for relaying the connection with.

  The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the part covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 527a attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay substrate cover 527, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg 527a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is restricted downward, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like, and damage to them can be prevented.

  The rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotator unit 530 rotatably mounted by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated about a horizontally extending first axis CL1.

[3-4 h-5. Decorative Rotor Unit]
The decoration rotation body unit 530 of the third effect decoration rotation body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotator unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotator unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and can show the player a movable effect through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The outer surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 is generally formed in a generally spherical shape as shown in the drawing.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 (decorative movable member) is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has a disc-shaped rotator base unit 531 and a disc-shaped rotator base The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably mounted on the outside of one surface of the unit 531 and the rotary surface of the rotating body base unit 531 mounted on the outside of the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532 The second decoration surface 533 having a different decoration from the first decoration surface 532 and the rotating body base unit 531 are mounted in the rotating body base unit 531, and the rendering operation unit for rotating the first decoration surface 532 and the second decoration surface 533 And a second drive motor 534 (see FIG. 83).

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotator base unit 531 and is capable of emitting light toward the first decorative surface 532 (a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) , The heat source is mounted on the opposite side of the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 mounted thereon and the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 of the rotating body base unit 531, and light is emitted toward the second decorative surface 533 And a second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) capable of emitting light are mounted. The driver circuit itself of the mounted LED is not mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the mounted LED is outside the decorative rotator unit 530. Energization is controlled by the provided driver circuit. Thus, when the driver circuit is provided outside, the driver circuit can be less susceptible to the heat generation of the LED.

  The rotor base unit 531 has a disk-like shape with a predetermined thickness, and the inside is hollow. The rotor base unit 531 is attached at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the center of the spur gear-shaped rotor gear 531a meshing with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520, and the rotor gear 531a. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted cylindrically from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b into which the left shaft portion 521g is inserted so as to be capable of relative rotation and the rotating body gear 531a. The rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted and a stopper 531d projecting outward on the base end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotating body gear 531a, the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis line CL2 passing through the disk-like center in the rotating body base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface It is coaxially arranged with respect to the single axis line CL1. The stopper 531 d is formed to abut on the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531 d regulates the rotation range around the horizontally extending first axis CL 1 of the decorative rotator unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angular range (here, 180 degrees).

  The rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylindrical portion 531e extending in a cylindrical shape concentrically with the second axis line CL2 passing through the center of the disk shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f decorating the outer peripheral surface. Have. The shaft member 532 d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the inside of the bearing cylindrical portion 531 e, and the shaft member 532 d can be rotatably attached by the bush attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decorative portion 531 f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, and can decorate the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 to improve the appearance. Although this peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can release the heat in the rotating body base unit 531 to the outside as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the heat generation amount of the LED built in the rotating body base unit 531 is taken into consideration In such a case, implementation of further cooling control is desired along with trying to realize the gorgeous effect using this LED.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 is generally formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a light transmitting property formed radially around a logo decoration portion 532a consisting of a predetermined character provided at the center of the bulging surface and a logo decoration portion 532a. An opaque first sub decoration which is formed to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b and whose outer peripheral end forms a circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532 It has a portion 532c, and a shaft member 532d projecting cylindrically along the center from the back surface.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are lighted and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylindrical portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length extending through the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 to the opposite side when assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is a first axis It will be in the state which corresponded with 2nd axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The whole of the first decorative surface portion 532 can be rotated around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  On the other hand, the second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531, and And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to the base unit 531. Since the rotation decoration part 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decoration surface part 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate about the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotation decoration part 533a is formed in a decoration shape provided with a plurality of fins (feathers) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending in the circumferential direction concentrically. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate a wind by rotating. The fixed decorative portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines. The rotating decoration portion 533a and the fixed decoration portion 533b are partially translucent, and are lighted and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotation axis protrudes rearward. A spur gear-like second drive gear 534 a is attached to the rotation shaft of the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear shaped decorative surface portion gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotational decorative portion 533a) are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 via the second drive gear 534a, the decorative surface portion gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. It can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are configured such that the front surface is white and that the mounted LEDs are colored in full color.

  In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 which are different in decoration from each other are arrayed in the circumferential direction around the second axis line CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at an interval of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.

[3-4 h-6. Function and Effect of Third Effect Operation Unit Next, the function and effect of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78, 81, 88 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third rendering operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotator unit facing forward, and FIG. 88 (b) is a front view of the central button of the operation button in FIG. FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface in a state where the first decorative surface is directed forward in the third rendering operation unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface in the third rendering operation unit It is an explanatory view showing rotation of the 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned to the front.

  The third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by hitting the game ball in the game area 5a of the game board 5, The player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect presented to the player by operating the operation button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, etc., the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B has a height that is the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is formed in substantially the same height. The full width of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The third effect decorative rotary unit 530B is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  The upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530 B is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. With the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay substrate cover 527 which is the bottom surface is the surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A gap is formed between them. That is, only the upper part of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached to the dish unit 320, and is mounted in a suspended state.

  In the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is perpendicular It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward at an angle of 63 degrees to the line. Thereby, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is above the plate unit 320 (third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B) In order to be located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 disposed, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the decoration rotary unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect decorative rotary unit 530 B, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521 b of the third base unit 520, and the operation button spring 523 moves forward It is energized. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B is subjected to the effect decorative rotator unit 530 and the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A by the biasing force of the operation button spring 523 Similarly, the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416 a on the rear surface of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. Protruding forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B of this embodiment is The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, similarly to the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 and the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. Similarly, when the operation button 410 is pressed from the upper side, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. 61, a portion apart from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed and operated by the player has a curved surface (a substantially spherical surface) Because the shape of the part) is used, when the position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the whole of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 becomes straight backward. You can move to Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B is suspended As only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the part farthest from the attached part Since the vibration is generated, the entire third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, and the player can You can be surprised and enjoy the production.

  Furthermore, the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state and the plate unit and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay substrate cover 527 forming the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the cover 326 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or knocked down. In the meantime, the impact can be absorbed by the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like being bent downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B downward is restricted, and the rendering operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is performed. Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a and the like, and damage to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the user depresses the operation button 410 by pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B or the like, the operation button 410 is operated. Since the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and the damage can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. In comparison with the strength and rigidity being high, even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the whole button lens 411, and it becomes difficult to be broken.

  Since the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a By the decoration of the concave and convex portions, it is possible to make the rear difficult to see at the portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 The gap between the outer periphery of the decorative rotator unit 530 can be made difficult to see from the front side (player's side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. . As a result, even if the rotating decorative rotator unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing, deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who saw the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable And the decorative rotary unit 530 can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and the decorative rotary unit 530, and hence the entire pachinko machine 1 can be prevented. You can do better.

  Furthermore, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B includes a first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and a second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 on the decorative rotating body unit 530 disposed inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The light emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be performed in the operation button 410 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. When the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 emit light and decorate, the inside of the operation button 410 can be decorated to emit light. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with a cylindrical main body portion 413a surrounding the outer periphery of the decoration rotation body unit 530, light from the decoration rotation body unit 530 is outside the main body portion 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is an operation button left outer decorative substrate in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b that faces from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410 The first LED 422a of the second button 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. It can be done. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a (the decorative rotary unit 530 side) and the inner cylinder There is no leakage to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B is disposed behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button The second LEDs 423 b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  In the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated by emitting light by emitting the plurality of LEDs. From the lower side of the portion of the third base unit 520 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 of the unit base 521 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  The third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment can visually recognize from the front the decoration rotating body unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is directed forward. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). In a normal state, the rotational position of the first decorative surface 532 about the second axis CL2 is rotationally stationary with the logo decoration 532a having directivity oriented in the correct direction.

  In a normal state, the stopper 531 d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the upper front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520 above the right bearing portion 521 h. That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves backward is restricted by the stopper 531d with respect to the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally.

  In this normal state, the rotary gear 531a of the decorative rotary unit 530 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated about the first axis line CL1 so that the upper part thereof moves forward. When the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis line CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d abuts on the front surface lower than the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation is restricted At the same time, the rotational drive by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  Although not shown, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the decoration rotation unit 530, and the third base unit 520 is configured of the decoration rotation unit 530 based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis line CL1 from the normal state, as shown in FIG. 88, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be favorably viewed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis line CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially coincides with the central axis line CL of the operation button 410.

  The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface portion gear 534b by the effect operating unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotating body unit 530. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated simultaneously (see FIG. 89). In other words, rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can.

  Although illustration is omitted, the decoration rotation body unit 530 is provided with a rotation detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533, and the first rotation detection sensor detects the rotation position sensor. The decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 can be stopped at any rotational position. Therefore, even if it has the logo decoration part 532a with directivity like the first decoration surface part 532, since it can be made to stop rotation at the position according to the directivity, the decoration of the first decoration surface part 532 is impaired. There is no need to be used, and the decorativeness can be exhibited with certainty.

  The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B includes a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530. Each can be decorated to emit light. The light emitting decorations of the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotate around the first axis line CL1 in which the decorative rotator unit 530 extends horizontally. It can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes the rotating decorative portion 533a and the stationary decorative portion 533b which does not rotate, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotating decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, a part of the light irradiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is an opaque portion, a colored portion, etc. of the rotating decorative portion 533a. Therefore, it is possible to periodically interrupt the player, and to show the player a flickering light emitting decoration to the player, which can strongly attract the player's attention.

[3-4 h-7. Movable effects in the third effect operation unit]
Next, movable effects in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect for rotating the decoration rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect in which the decoration rotating body unit is rotated in a state in which the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 etc., the movable effect of the decoration rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a) etc., the first decoration surface 532 having the logo decoration 532a is directed forward.

  As an example of the movable effect to rotate only about the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally, from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90 (a)), the first drive gear (shown in FIG. Omitted) First rotation by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in the counterclockwise direction in right side view through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotator gear 531a without stopping halfway in the counterclockwise direction. The second decorative surface portion 533 disposed on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, it is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, the first decorative surface portion 532 can give the player an impression as if suddenly switching to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and changes the decoration. The player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation of the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As the movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative operation unit 530 reciprocates within the angle range of 0 degree to 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in right side view, The drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse several times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is turned downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531 f interposed above the first decorative surface portion 532 (Refer to FIG. 90 (b)), the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533, which appears and disappears when the decorative rotary unit 530 reciprocates. The player's expectation for the arrival of the chance can be enhanced by whether or not the second decoration surface 533 faces forward. Thereafter, the decorative rotary unit 530 is returned to the original state (the state shown in FIG. 90 (a)), thereby making it possible to suggest that the player does not have a chance. On the other hand, it can be suggested that a chance will come by further rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 to bring the second decorative surface 533 in the forward direction (the state of FIG. 90 (d)). Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  As a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward by rotating the decoration rotating body unit 530 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in right side view (See FIG. 90 (c)). Thereby, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward being in between, with the first decorative surface 532 facing downward at the lower side, the second decorative surface 533 facing upward at the upper side , Because the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are obscured, a plurality of peripheral surface decorations provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 relatively The decoration of the part 531 f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the circumferential decoration part 531 f can be enjoyed. It is possible for the player to foretell a change in the game situation by stopping rotation of the decorative rotary unit 530 at an intermediate position facing the plurality of circumferential surface decoration parts 531 f forward, and the player's expectation for the game It can make you feel better. Thereafter, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the state where the decoration rotation body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view from the normal state (see FIG. 90 (c)), a predetermined angle centering on the rotation angle In order to reciprocate within the range, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse several times. As a result, the player is likely to see more on the first decoration surface 532 side or more on the second decoration surface 533 side, with the rotating body base unit 531 (plural circumferential surface decoration portions 531 f) interposed, Whether the first decorative surface 532 is facing forward or the second decorative surface 533 is facing forward, the player can be excited and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, the decorative rotary unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. The effects and effects of

  As a movable effect different from the above, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decoration surface portion 533 is turned forward (see FIG. 90 (d)), and this state is As a reference, it is also possible to perform a movable effect in which the operation reverse to the above is performed, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward and the first decorative surface 532 appears from the lower side, so that the player feels an upward momentum. And increase the sense of expectation for the game, and by the upward rotation of the second decorative surface portion 533, the line of sight of the player is in the game area 5a above the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B. It is possible to direct the game, to enjoy the game or the effect in the game area 5a, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 appropriately emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second The decorative surface portion 533 is in a state where light emission decoration is appropriately performed. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 viewed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be more easily seen, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference in the decoration. As well as being able to fully exhibit the premium feeling due to the difference in the decoration, it is possible to enjoy those decorations and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's game. By making the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 emit light and decorate, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the operation button 410, so when executing the player participation type effect for pressing the operation button 410, The player can be urged to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect to be entertained.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 91 etc., the movable rendering of the decoration rotation body unit 530 using the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 and the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the first state, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first decoration surface 532 having the logo decoration 532a is directed forward, and the first decoration surface 532 is the second operation motor of the effect operation unit. By 534, it is rotated about a second axis CL2 (here, a clockwise direction) extending to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality is hard to be recognized from the player side.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state in which the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are rotated by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface 532 (second decorative surface 533) has a second axis While rotating around CL2, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees without stopping halfway in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is in a state of being directed forward (see FIG. 91D). Thereby, while the 1st decoration surface part 532 rotated clockwise is suddenly switched to the 2nd decoration surface part 533 with a different decoration, the 2nd decoration surface part 533 (rotation decoration part 533a) becomes the 1st decoration surface part 532 and Is rotating in the counterclockwise direction in the opposite direction, so it can have a strong impact on the player and can attract the player's attention strongly and It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As the movable effect different from the above, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, The rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in right side view. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the upper side of the first decorative surface 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 And the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f are visible, and a portion of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL 2 is slightly visible above the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, as the decorative rotator unit 530 reciprocates and pivots around the first axis CL1, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 which is hidden or seen, and the second decorative surface portion Whether 533 points forward can increase the player's expectation for the arrival of the chance. Thereafter, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction about the first axis line CL1 so that the first decoration surface 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decoration When the face portion 533 is turned forward (the state shown in FIG. 91B) and the player desires, it is possible to convince the player of an opportunity, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. It can be done. The rotation may be stopped so that the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532 is correctly oriented after the first decoration surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward. As a result, since it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance, and the player's expectation for the game is enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  As the movable effect different from the above, from the state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis line CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the decorative rotator unit 530 is The outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is turned forward by rotating 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in right side view with respect to the first axis line CL1 (see FIG. 91C). Thereby, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward being in between, with the first decorative surface 532 facing downward at the lower side, the second decorative surface 533 facing upward at the upper side And because they are positioned so that they move in the same direction, the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be obscured. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral surface decoration parts 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched between them can be clearly shown. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Thereafter, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, while rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 to front the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. In the state directed to (see FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is extended multiple times so as to reciprocate within the predetermined angle range around the first axis CL centering on that state. Rotate forward and reverse. As a result, with the rotary base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) interposed, the first decorative surface portion 532 side that rotates around the second axis CL2 is more visible, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is more visible. And the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. It can be done. Thereafter, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction about the first axis line CL1 so that the first decoration surface 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decoration By setting the surface 533 to the front (the state of FIG. 91 (b)), the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  As the movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotator unit 530 is 180 degrees around the first axis line CL The second decorative surface 533 is rotated by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 180 degrees around the first axis line CL from the state in which the rotating second decorative surface 533 is turned forward or from the normal state. Is directed forward, and then the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are rotated about the second axis CL2, and reverse to the above with reference to this state (see FIG. 91 (d)). It is also possible to perform a movable effect to perform the operation of the above, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis line CL1 so as to move upward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is reverse with respect to the second axial line CL2 Since the first decorative surface 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, it is possible to make the player feel a rising momentum, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and the second axis The upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 allows the player's line of sight to be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B, and the game area It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the game or the effect in 5a.

  In addition, when performing the above-described movable effect, the rotation around the second axis line CL2 of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversely rotated on the way Alternatively, it may be reciprocated within a predetermined angle range. The rotational speed of the decoration rotary unit 530 around the first axis line CL1 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, and the second axis line CL2 of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 by the presentation operation unit second drive motor 534 The rotation speed may be the same as or different from the rotation speed of the surroundings. By combining these as appropriate, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of movable effects by the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, make it difficult for the player to get bored by abundant variations of the movable effects, and suppress a decrease in interest be able to.

  When performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately lit and rotated around the second axis line CL2 The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately light emitting and decorated. Thus, in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis line CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 looks like blinking due to periodical light blocking by the rotary decorative portion 533a. It can be made to emit light by light. As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be decorated to emit light colorfully, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect for pressing the operation button 410 At the time of execution, it is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in and enjoy the player participation type effect.

[3-4 h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third rendering operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, the decoration rotating body unit 530 disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410 includes the unit base 521 of the operation button 410 and the third base unit 520 (accommodating wall portion 521a And the front and back are closed in the button internal space AS (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilating openings 521d penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed in the accommodation wall portion 521a which forms the rear part of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotary unit 530. Therefore, the button inner space AS is in communication with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the pan unit cover 326 to which the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B is attached, through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  In the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, in the decoration rotating body unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably mounted coaxially with the second axis line CL on the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531. A first decorative surface 532 and a second decorative surface 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends respectively, and the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 can rotate together. A rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. A plurality of peripheral surface decoration parts 531f consisting of through hole-like decorations are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body base unit 531, and the inner and outer sides of the rotary body base unit 531 are formed through the peripheral surface decoration parts 531f. Are in communication with each other.

  Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 mounted rotatably around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated about the second axis CL The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating a wind when it is rotated.

  In the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B configured as described above, with the first decorative surface 532 of the decorative rotary unit 530 directed forward, the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are subjected to a rendering operation. When the unit second drive motor 534 rotates the second decorative surface 533 in a predetermined direction about the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 covers the rear of the accommodation wall 521a. Through the plurality of ventilating openings 521d, it comes off behind the accommodation wall 521a (see FIG. 92 (a)). By the flow of the wind, the air in the button internal space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is accommodated can be forcibly exhausted to the outside and ventilated. Since the in-button space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is converted into the plurality of peripheral surface decoration It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530B (in the mounting space 326j of the pan unit 320) through the portion 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilating opening 521d. As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decorative rotator unit 530 or the operation button 410, and to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to heat.

  In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, with the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 directed forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction about the second axis line CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533 a in the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410 As a result, the plurality of ventilating openings 521d of the accommodation wall 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotation unit 530 are removed rearward relative to the accommodation wall 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). The air flow in the button space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated can be forced to be discharged to the outside and ventilated by the flow of the wind, so that the air is installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is passed through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation port 521 d to the rear of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530 B (In the space 326j). As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decorative rotator unit 530 or the operation button 410, and to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to heat.

  The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a of the unit base 521 passes through an exhaust port (not shown) formed on the bottom plate part 326i and the lower cover 340. Discharged to the outside of the

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 to 100. Fig. 97 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in FIG. The door frame left side unit 540 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 (door frame left side decoration substrate 160) above the plate unit 320 It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 540 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 541 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 542 attached to the front surface, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylindrical frame to the front and extending vertically The left unit is attached to the decorative base 544 and the front lower portion of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit lower decoration base 545 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 544 and the left unit upper decoration base 544 and the left unit lower decoration base 545 A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 541 and a plurality of decorative members 547 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 541 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 541a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 541 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. The respective opening portions 541a of the left unit base 541 are formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is a square lens of a front view circle corresponding to the circular opening 541a of the left unit base 541 and a square of a front view square corresponding to the square opening 541a. And a lens unit 542 b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled in the door frame 3 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed in the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 542a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 542c which is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 542c at the front surface. , The input lens portion 542e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 542c) And a front reflector 542 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 542 d of the square lens portion 542 b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 542 c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is arched backward in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the ridge portion between the grooves is forward It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusion lens portion 542 d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 542e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 542 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. The front reflection portion 542 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  In the square lens portion 542b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the square lens portion 542 b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is input from the input lens portion 542 e into the square lens portion 542 b. Since the input lens portion 542 e bulges backward in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-back direction by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 542c (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160) ) To be diffused and travel along the front surface of the square lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 542c travels from the center side to the outer side (a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 542c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 542b.

  When light reflected inside the rectangular lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 542f, the front reflection portion 542f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 542 f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it gets away from the central diffuse reflection portion 542 c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 542 b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 100). As a result, in the central diffusive reflection part 542c, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens part 542b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection part 542f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542 b through the front diffusion lens portion 542 d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 542 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 542 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The prismatic lens portion 542 b is divided into a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 542 d and the front reflection portion 542 f, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves bordering the dividing line. Are arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated forward from the front of the square lens portion 542b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 542 b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 542 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and the front of the square lens portion 542 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 by the light of which the circular decoration portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 Each of the lights is decorated to emit light.

  The left unit upper decoration base 544 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined such that a portion forming the lower surface in the outer periphery protrudes downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 544 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 544, Connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and the upper end of the lower V-shaped portion along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 545. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 547 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. Fig. 101 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 105 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 101 (a), and FIG. 105 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 101 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. Is mounted on the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and being decorated, a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover mounted on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and a front right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the center of the front view of the right unit base 551. And a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending vertically and longitudinally and a sheet attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and decorated Right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right opened. A box-shaped non-light transmitting right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light shielding attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the lens members 561 and the right and left sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover 563. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552c mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552e. The left LED 552 c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 d is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 e is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b short in a plan view right short in plan view from the rear side of the main body portion 553a; The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left and formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the left side of the main portion 553a in front view An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes to the front It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. As shown in FIG. 105, the whole of the main body portion 553a slightly moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side. It is inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of cutouts 553 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552 e of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552e of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552e light the right unit decoration lens member 561 favorably. It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552 c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552c can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the grooves of the concentric arc shape, in each groove, the surface close to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 553a, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 553e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side surface reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. .

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552c is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is refracted in the main body portion 553a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552c mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552c is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f It becomes.

  Light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the side surface reflection portion 553f, and is emitted outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. The Rukoto. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  In the side surface reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by the plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to surround the concentric circular arc grooves. Because they are alternately arranged in the direction, it is possible to prevent the light irradiated from the left surface of the main body portion 553a outward (leftward) from becoming light having concentric stripes of light and shade. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light of gray level. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. As shown in FIG. 105, the whole of the main body 556a slightly moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side to the front. It is inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552e of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552e of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552e can favorably decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561 with light.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552 d of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, light from the right LED 552d can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface close to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. .

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552d of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552d is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552d mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a strikes the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552d is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main portion 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f It becomes.

  Light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by striking the side reflection portion 556f, and is emitted outward from the right surface of the main portion 556a. The Rukoto. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  In the side surface reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction bordering the dividing line to surround the concentric circular arc grooves. Because they are alternately arranged in the direction, it is possible to prevent the light irradiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a outward (rightward) from becoming light having concentric stripes of light and shade. It is possible to emit more uniform light in the right direction. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a A notch 559c which is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and is formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction and extends rightward from the right surface And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfered shape It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and the outer shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are formed substantially the same.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552e of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552e of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552e light the right unit decorative lens member 561 favorably. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes to the front It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 105, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552e of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are respectively emitted forward from the left LED 552 c, the middle LED 552 e, and the right LED 552 d in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 The left unit 552c, the right unit 552d, and the middle unit 552e correspond to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561, respectively, for preventing the light from interfering with each other. The light emission can be decorated only by.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the inner LED 552e of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 is , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on the left and right sides It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the part located forward, in the three parts from the top, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is disposed one by one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a disposed at the center in the vertical direction. Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is lighted and decorated by the inner LED 552e of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 540, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine Can exert an effect like a partition. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it follows the island facilities The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance, even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the attendant of the game hall, and to be able to respond quickly to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustration and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109 and the like. Fig. 106 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame top unit as viewed from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 106 taken along the line R-R. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and mounted on the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the front of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality (three each in the left and right directions) of each extending and penetrating each in the front-rear direction and separated vertically A unit main body 574 having a lid 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and closing the pair of openings 574a And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit body 574.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit body 574 and has the light transmitting top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576 at the rear side. The door frame top has a plurality of LEDs mounted on it, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front of the unit main body 574 and closed on the front of the unit main body 574, and from near both right and left ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of (three each in the left and right) transparent flat light guide members 578 extending to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574 straddling the opening 574 a and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the front of the unit body 574 The top left decorative lens member 579 and the tote that are respectively attached to the front cover of the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 attached to the It is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front side of each of the right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right sides of the unit body 574, and the LEDs are mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at locations facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective portions and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front of the center base 571 in the unit body 574 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. Relay substrate cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and a unit body 574 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached thereto.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a front view such that it has a rectangular shape extending left and right, which is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a square shape extending in the left and right direction, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrilateral It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 574, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 574 with the left and right ends of the front end of the portion projecting forward on both sides of the portion projecting forward in the left and right direction center in the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front and back direction are respectively formed in a portion from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to a position outside the portion projecting forward. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits 574b extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height and passing through in the front-rear direction at diagonally extending portions of the front-side projecting portion in a trapezoidal shape. It is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 obliquely forward to the vicinity of the opening 574 a. The plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 so as to be separated vertically three by three respectively.

  The unit body 574 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center of the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. Have. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 574 includes a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f which extend vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward in the lateral center. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the front projecting portion of the front surface of the unit body 574. When the side close to both ends in the lateral direction of the unit body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is described as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the center side A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 574 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end side to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586 a and 587 a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top from the diffusion input portion 578 d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578 b The light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, LEDs 583 a are mounted at positions facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction. The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 such that the portion that is open is closed by the unit body 574. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 574 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 574 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the right and left center in the unit body 574 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574 of the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit body 574 I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on both sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570, the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 arranged in the center, from the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 The unit body 574 is formed so as to extend to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 574. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The light from the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the light from the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and The entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the fronts of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. Body unit 530A), so that the front (the front of the dish lower lower decoration portion 326c) of the lower half (portion lower than the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is turned backwards Recessed front (the front of both left and right sides of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is positioned behind the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the plate unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 Concavely curved)). As a result, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 attached to the front surface in the left-right direction center of the plate unit 320 appears to largely project forward, so that the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is made noticeable to the player It can be emphasized and can be made to pay attention to the effect decoration rotary unit 530.

  The door frame 3 is disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward to the front on the decorative decorative body unit 530. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in a tilted state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his line of sight and effects decoration rotation When the body unit 530 is viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visibly visually recognized, and a sense of expectation is enhanced for effects using the operation button 410 And the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, You can entertain a sufficient image.

  The door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so when operating the operation button 410, the operation button is operated by a short distance of hand movement It is possible to touch any part of 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right Alternatively, the operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 with good operability.

  The door frame 3 is mounted with the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration according to the gaming state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which surprises the player The effect using the operation button 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect decoration rotating body unit 530) extending across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front of the plate unit 320, it is superior to the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 under the plate 321 becomes less noticeable, it can make it easy for the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize as clearly different, and attracts the player's interest strongly The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 wraps the lower plate 322 to the rear side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the front surface of the dish unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326 d, and the number of gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. Since the rear part of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The flat ball opening hole 322a is disposed linearly in the front and rear direction, and is disposed on the right outside (lower side than the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view . That is, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outer side of the lower disc opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the lower disc cover 340 Of the lower ball and ball supply port 323c and the lower ball and ball removal hole 322a from the player's side, so that the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the lower frame 322, since the lower frame ball removal hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, assuming that the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, As soon as the gaming balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322, they are discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box and the like. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply port 323c, and the rising of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. The gaming ball supplied from the lower bowl ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly bent to the lower plate ball relief hole because the wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball relief hole 322a. It can be guided to 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall to be guided indirectly to the lower circular ball opening 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  The door frame 3 is provided with the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (the effect decoration rotator unit 530) and the lower speaker opening 326e Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. When the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches it, the player can feel tactilely the vibration due to the deep bass by the lower speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the player It can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  Since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes in a plate shape from the right side of the through hole 111 to a large extent, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right Since the side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it seems that the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room It is possible to give an illusion and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to players. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, A concave shape (the line between the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 is more It is formed in the concave curved shape so that the front of right-and-left both sides may be located back. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with a good stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has the effect decoration rotary unit 530 attached to the plate unit 320 below and above the through hole 111 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. However, since they are projected forward largely at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of unity at the top and bottom where virtual lines passing through the center in the left-right direction stand out. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  Since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the stage decoration rotating body unit 530 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 And, when the decoration decoration rotating body unit 530 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emission line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated inside. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  The main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and is mounted on a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and to the right side surface of the main unit base 600 Locking unit 700 which locks between outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 and door frame 3 and main body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 Reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  The main unit frame base 600 has a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and front and rear in the front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 A cylinder insertion port 605 which penetrates and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and which penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view left and right for door frame of the substrate unit 900 For circular speakers that penetrate front and rear in the front view lower left side of the gaming board placement portion 602 and the connection opening 606 for facing the relay board 911 forward, and for the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to face forward And an opening 607.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in the front view of the game board slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is pivotable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of upper and lower end portions of the left end in front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment portion 609 for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame lower hinge member 640. And a lower hinge attachment portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached at a position slightly lower on the left side than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front view left and right of the opening cover 615 closing the opening for connection 606 openably. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the board insertion slot 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110 to FIG. The body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. A portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main frame base 600.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the upper end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrate and the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame 3 extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main frame base 600 by bending the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. The reinforcing frame 660 is positioned leftward to restrict forward and upward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the rear of the portion extending rightward from the front end. The members 661 are mounted one above the other at a distance from each other.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 from the left (between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4) (game board 5) It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110, 112 and 113. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main unit frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength according to the rotation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. The game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 275 of the lower far cover unit 270 and is discharged into the lower tray 322 through the inside of the far cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the locking of either the frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 132. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Fig. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. Fig. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-S in FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 124 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state .

  FIG. 125 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 125 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 126 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball channel unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the rear. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full cylinder passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the door cover full cover unit and the lower full ball unit. FIG. 132 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  The dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper portion of the dispensing unit base 801 as shown in FIGS. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 132) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the payout unit below the ball guidance unit 820. A dispensing device 830 for dispensing gaming balls removably attached from the base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950; Is equipped. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 321 in the tray unit 320 The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A main channel guide 862 for guiding to the full tank receptacle 274, and a front end opening of the main channel 861 and the main channel 862 4 is provided with a guide path door 863, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having the opening and closing in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 3, a relative.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the front and rear ends through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 A pair of movable piece fronts 825 and movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the rod-like shaft member 824 attached and the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 respectively 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right of the front case 821. The front case 821 is provided with a notch 821 g on a wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821 e in the guiding passage 821 c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e to the left and right width of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front and rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. When the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a and the inner surface of the guide passage 821c Match In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. When the movable piece member 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a and the inner surface of the guide passage 822c Match In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are provided in a state in which the plurality of gaming balls are aligned. The lower dispensing device 830 can be guided back and forth in two rows by 822 (see FIG. 132). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  When the game ball circulates in the guiding passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the gaming balls abut against the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are guided The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When payout or the like of the gaming balls is performed by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820, the gaming balls in the guiding paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  The ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 respectively, and the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c is exhausted, the front of the movable piece 825 or The movable piece 825a, 826a of the movable piece member 826 is rotated so as to protrude into the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the detection piece 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball is lost is detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. Therefore, the game balls can be detected at an early stage, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. The upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece member 826 protrudes at the lower end into the guiding passage 821c, 822c through which the game ball flows. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a is movable by the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. The upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment parts 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is a movable piece even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece member 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e). Since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the gaming ball flows in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, the gaming ball contacts the movable piece 825a, 826a, so that the movable piece 825a, 826a can be vibrated by the abutment of the gaming ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. Even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from within the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence of the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a, 826a, so A ball can be replenished, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in front box 831 with the rotation axis passing through front box 831. Dispensing motor 834 extending into the cover 833, drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 834, and driving gear 835 meshingly mounted by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 for rotation The intermediate gear 836 in the form of spur gear, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear end is A shaft member 838 which is attached to the rear box 832 through the front box 831 and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838, and a delivery of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 A discharge blade 834 disposed in the paths 831 d and 832 d and integrally rotating with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to detect rotation of the discharge blade 834. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a post box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 834, the payout path 831d and 832d, and the ball release path 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 834 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831. It branches between the heights near the center.

  The front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view and the guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d And a lever mounting portion 831g for slidably mounting the lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right in front view, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 834 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  The rear box 832 is formed at the top of the right side surface in a front view, with a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the lever 844 up and down.

  The delivery passages 831 d and 832 d and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The delivery passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the delivery blade 834 is disposed. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 834 .

  Dispensing blade 834 is cylindrically extended in the front and back direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of base cylindrical portion 834a from the front end of base cylindrical portion 834a into which shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of base cylindrical portion 834a. (A plurality of (three) front vanes 834b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base tubular portion 834a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base tubular portion 834a at constant intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front vanes 834b Three) rear blade 834c, and a connected portion projecting cylindrically forwardly from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 834a and having projections and recesses that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 834 d.

  The front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c of the discharge blade 834 are provided three by three at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 834c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 834b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the discharge blade 834 of this embodiment, three front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c), ball housing portions 834e in which only one game ball can be stored are formed.

  The diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 834b and the rear blades 834c around the axis of the base cylindrical portion 834a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 834a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 834a in the portion of the arc (the ball accommodation portion 834e) between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) is It is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 834e is 0.1 to 0. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 834e) of the arc between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) (ball housing portion 834e).

  In the delivery blade 834 of this embodiment, the front blade 834b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 834c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. The delivery blade 834 is disposed at a location where it is cranked below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the delivery passages 831 d and 832 d. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 834 is located directly below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 834 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 834 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c It is formed in the shape of a circular arc separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 834e to the arc-shaped portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 passes the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 834 abut the outer circumferences of the front blades 834 b and the rear blades 834 c. And can not be discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 834e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 834, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward from the

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and 1/7 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball is obtained Since the depth of ̃1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 834 as much as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 834 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 834 e and sent to the payout outlet 831 b, 832 b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken for the game balls to be paid out can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of the V-shaped outer surface of the main portion 843a, and a main portion 843a And a weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 124) including a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper cylindrical portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832 In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly above the portion bent downward Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 124A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side vertically extends beyond the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned directly below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 124 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction of the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passage 831e, 832e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball releasing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball releasing passage 831e, 832e, the game ball entering from the payout port 831a, 832a abuts on the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843. Thus, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  Since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole, the weight can be used as the ball removal movable piece 843 (weight) even if the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the mounting portion 843d). Since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 is concerned. Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper dispensing ball socket 850a which is open upward to allow game balls to pass through in the upper surface so that the game ball can pass through in the left side from the center in the front view The game ball is formed between the upper ball removal inlet 850b which is open upward to allow passage of the game ball, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and is received by the upper payout ball receptacle 850a The upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which the water flows, the normal discharge port 850d opened downward at the lower end of the upper discharge ball socket 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and the upper ball storage passage 850c Between the full discharge port 850e which opens downward at the site excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the frame, and the normal discharge port 850d and the full liquid discharge port 850e A partition member 850f that partitions the lower portion of the upper ball reservoir passage 850c on the left and right protrudes upward, and a.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 includes an upper ball removal passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper ball removal opening downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And an outlet 850 h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the discharge unit 800, and the upper discharge ball socket 850a is located directly below the discharge outlets 831b and 832b of the discharge device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b. Are located directly below the ball removal outlets 831 c and 832 c of the dispensing device 830. The upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, and the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are the normal guiding paths 861 of the lower full-ball path unit 860, Each of the full tank induction passage 862 and the lower ball extraction passage 865 opens directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 132).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensed ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be stored, and furthermore, the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with gaming balls The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and are full It will be discharged downward from the outlet 850e and will be sent to the lower tray 322 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 321 according to the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 according to this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame And a full induction channel 862 for guiding game balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3 from the front end, A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the gaming ball released from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and discharges it onto the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the center right end in the front and rear direction. The lower ball out guiding path 865 is provided.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the gaming balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is mounted rotatably on an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full-time guideway 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863 e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863 d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 281.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is the ball passing passage 273 in the far cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the full tank reception 274 and the door opening / closing It is attached to the position which opposes the contact part 281 (refer FIG. 131). In the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the actuating projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open relative to the main body frame 4. It is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863 c abuts on the boss portion 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 130). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end surface of the operation projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863. Due to the inclination of the front end face of 863e, a force acts to turn the guideway door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is open (see FIG. 130 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full The through ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving hole 274 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receptacle 274 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863 Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 321. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. When the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released 850 d in the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the partition piece and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, far cover The payout of the gaming ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the unit 270. Thereafter, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is full of the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball can not be supplied to the lower plate 322, the fall cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, it is informed that the upper tray 321 and the lower plate 322 are full by the game ball At the same time, the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279. In the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of is discharged, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 110 thru | or FIG. The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 in a front view left side of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and the lower portion for bass inside A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls are housed in the inside And a dispensing control board box 950, There.

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 142. FIG. 133 is a front view of the gaming board in which the panel board of the gaming panel is in an opaque state. Fig. 134 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of Fig. 133 as viewed from the right front, Fig. 135 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of Fig. 133 as viewed from the left front. It is a perspective view. FIG. 137 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line T-T in FIG. 133, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. Further, FIG. 139 is a front view of a front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 140 is a front view of the gaming board in which the panel board of the gaming panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. A game performed by striking the game ball into the game area 5a attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the content. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 Attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the normal lottery selected by the lottery, the second starting port 2004 where the game ball can be accepted according to the result of the game and the first special lottery result according to the result of the reception of the game ball into the first starter port 2002 The second big prize that can be accepted according to the result of the first special winning opening 2005 that can accept the ball and the second special lottery result that is drawn by the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting hole 2004 It is provided with a 2006, a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has the first start port 2002 and the left front view of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 and having a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001, and a side slope 2300 mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view , One front winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, which is attached to the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the front right lower corner in the gaming area 5a. And an attacker unit 2400 having a second winning opening 2006, a starting opening unit 2100 and a side unit 2 00 upwards than, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the panel side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 attached to the lower surface of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the rear view of the panel 3031, a lower left relay substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 And a lower right relay substrate 3034 attached to the left side in a rear view of 3031.

  Furthermore, back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached from the front end of back box 3010 to the left side and the lower side in a front view, and the back mounted to surround opening 3010 a in back box 3010. Inside the middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 mounted on the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The back-up movable effect unit 3500 is mounted, and the back-down movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a right end of the lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in the front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion curves inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001. A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a clockwise direction as viewed from the upper side extending from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 which can be turned only between the open position where it is pivoted in the direction to open between the outer rail 1001 and the closed position and biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side , Equipped.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning projections can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by inserting the positioning projections into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that project rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  The front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1011 corresponds to the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to lower full ball path The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is provided with an out-concave portion 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. A plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed by round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lengths extending in the front-rear direction and extending vertically extending And a hole. The fitting holes and the long holes are disposed outside the game area 5a, and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps are notched up to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes and the long holes, and the panel plate 1110 Is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The depth of the holding step of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front, and the front of the panel 1110 held in the holding step is substantially the same as the front of the panel holder 1120 It becomes the same side. The front side inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature change and temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step, from the front surface of the holding step toward the front. It is extended and provided with a plurality of projecting pins which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned to each other.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw and an engagement piece which engage with the engagement step at a position corresponding to the engagement step of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claws are disposed on the upper side of the holding step of the panel holder 1120, correspond to the upper engaging step on the panel plate 1110, and project forward from the front of the holding step, Elastically engage with the engagement step. The engagement claws are sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece is formed on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder, with a gap of a size that allows the insertion step of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted between the engagement piece and the front surface of the holding step. A predetermined amount extends toward the end. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement steps of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws and the engagement pieces.

  The panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the notch part 1127 which is notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch portion 1127 is coincident with the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, these notch portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated and the lower full ball passage unit 860 is The front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front and rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (with the front component 1000) The game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  The panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 137) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first receiving sensor 2434, a second receiving sensor 2435, and a second starting port sensor via a panel relay substrate 3032. 3113, first big winning opening sensor 2403, start opening solenoid 2105, first attachment solenoid 2108A, second attachment solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning opening sensor 3111, first start opening sensor 3112, magnetic The sensor 2404 and the vibration sensor 2405 are connected.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 133 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled with the game board 5 attached thereto (see FIG. 200). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown, the function display unit 1400 comprises a state indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a number drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start opening 2002 A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying a special lottery result, and a first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 The second special lottery result selected by the receipt of the game ball to the second start port 2004 A special symbol display 1405, a second special number-of-retentions display 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery When the result is a "big hit" or the like, a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs is displayed, which displays the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 and 142 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, various decoration boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect driving board 3031, etc. There is.

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 141 and FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the gaming board 5. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side in the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view left side in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen directed to the front. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010 c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, which can receive game balls in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed at the height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed between the second starting opening 2004 and the first large winning opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is provided with a sub-out port 2007 for discharging the game balls from the inside of the game area 5a between the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 and having three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view, and a starting opening unit Attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, first large winning opening 2005, and second large winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center character 2500 attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, start port unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 (a) is a front perspective view of the starting opening unit, side unit, side slope, and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of FIG. is there. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. At the top of the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is always open upward at a size that can receive only one game ball at a time.

  The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and is attached to the light transmitting unit main body 2101 attached from the front to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and to the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a start-up decorative substrate 2102 (see FIG. 139) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The starting opening unit 2100 can emit light and decorate the lower side of the first starting opening 2002 by causing the LED of the starting opening decorative substrate 2102 to emit light.

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and then is opened upward, and the first starting opening 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the chance exit 2536 in the stage 2530 of the center work 2500. Therefore, when the gaming ball is released downward from the chance outlet 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability. The starting opening unit 2100 guides the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers it to the center delivery opening 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 which are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side, and the three general winning openings 2001 are set higher toward the left in front view.

  When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and also below the first start opening 2002 and at the start It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. FIG. Side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of panel plate 1110 and delivers it to delivery opening 3151 of ball guiding unit 3150 in back decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

5-8 c. Side slope]
Next, the side slopes 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that protrudes forward and extends in the left and right direction so that the right end in the front view is lowered.

  With the side slope 2300 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf 2301 approaches the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located on the left. With the side slope 2300 attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf 2301 is positioned above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Thereby, the side slope 2300 can guide the gaming ball having flowed down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. A game ball may be accepted in any of the starting opening 2002 and the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200.

[5-8 d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. FIG. 145 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from the front and back in the approximate center of the game area in the front-rear direction. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has one general winning opening 2001 among four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, a second large winning opening 2006, and a sub-out opening 2007. Is equipped.

  As shown in FIG. 145 and the like, the outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view has a base inclined such that the right end is positioned slightly upward, a right side rising substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the base, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect with the left end of the bottom side. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate unit 2003 through which gaming balls flow up and down (upper side) is disposed in the upper right corner, and a second starting opening 2004 which can be opened forward is disposed directly under the gate unit 2003. . The second large winning opening 2006 which can be opened upward is disposed at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and the sub out opening which is always open left at the lower left of the second large winning opening 2006 2007 is deployed. Furthermore, while the first large winning opening 2005 which can be opened upward is disposed on the left slightly below the sub-out opening 2007, the attacker unit 2400 is always open upward at the lower left of the first large winning opening 2005. The general prize winning slot 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls passing through the gate portion 2003, a second starting opening sensor 3113 for detecting gaming balls received by the second starting opening 2004, and a first large winning opening 2005. A first large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the accepted gaming ball and a second large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 are provided.

  The attacking unit 2400 has a second starting opening door 2411 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the normal drawing drawn by passing the gaming balls of the gate unit 2003, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 The first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special drawing result that is drawn by the acceptance of gaming balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 The second special winning opening door 2413 opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result drawn by drawing the game ball to the starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically at the upper right corner in a front view and can circulate game balls, and a left side passage 2421 extends vertically at the left side of the gate passages 2420 and can circulate game balls. The right side passage 2422 which extends vertically up and down on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which gaming balls can flow, the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 The attacking passage 2423 extends leftward than the left side passage 2421 and allows the game ball to flow, and extends leftward so that the left end becomes lower below the left side of the attacking passage 2423 and guides the game ball And a possible attachment shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion, and the second start port 2004 is disposed in the lower portion. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 pass through so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends up and down with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The second passage winning opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421 in the attacking passage 2423. In the attacker passage 2423, a second large winning opening door 2413 which closes the second large winning opening 2006 so as to be able to open and close forms a part of the bottom wall. The lowest left end side of the attachment passage 2423 opens downward. The second large winning opening 2006 is opened about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The first large winning opening 2005 is opened, and the first large winning opening door 2412 which closes the first large winning opening 2005 so as to be openable and closable forms a part of the attachment shelf 2424. The first large winning opening 2005 is opened about three times as wide as the outer diameter of the gaming ball. At the right end of the attachment shelf 2424, a sub out port 2007 is open. At the lower left than the left end of the attachment shelf 2424, one general winning opening 2001 is opened.

  The second start opening door 2411 is capable of closing the second start opening 2004 opened forward from the front, and in the vicinity of the lower end of the second start opening 2004, the lower side is rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward It is attached. The second start opening door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second start opening 2004 and closing the gate passage 2420 and flowing down the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second start opening 2004 side and received into the second start opening 2004. The second start opening door 2411 is formed to rotate by driving of a start opening solenoid (not shown), and closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is OFF (during non-energization), and the start opening When the solenoid is ON (during energization), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first large winning opening door 2412 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the first large opening by moving forward and backward The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first large winning opening door 2412 closes the first large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attachment shelf 2424 and forms the left of the game ball which has flowed down onto the attachment shelf 2424. It is guided to the bottom and discharged downward from the left end of the attachment shelf 2424. The first large winning opening door 2412 opens the first large winning opening 2005 by retreating, and the gaming ball having flowed down onto the attachment shelf 2424 through the attacking passage 2423 and the like is put into the first large winning opening 2005. It can be accepted. The first big winning opening door 2412 is formed to advance and retreat by the driving of a first attachment solenoid (not shown), and closes the first big winning opening 2005 when the first attachment solenoid is OFF (during non-energization). When the first attachment solenoid is ON (during energization), the first large winning opening 2005 is opened.

  The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the second large opening by moving forward and backward The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second large winning opening door 2413 closes the second large winning opening 2006 by moving forward and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacking passage 2423, and the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage The gaming ball which has passed any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attack path 2423. The second large winning opening door 2413 can be retracted to open the second large winning opening 2006 and allow the second large winning opening 2006 to accept the gaming ball having entered the attack passage 2423 with high probability. The second big winning opening door 2413 is formed to move forward and backward by the drive of a second attachment solenoid (not shown), and closes the second big winning opening 2006 when the second attachment solenoid is OFF (during non-energization). When the second attacker solenoid is ON (during energization), the second large winning opening 2006 is opened.

  The attacker unit 2400 has an inner passage 2430 through which gaming balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, a first inlet 2431 and a second inlet 2432 opened at the bottom of the inner passage 2430, and an inner A distribution piece 2433 for distributing the gaming balls to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the passage 2430, and a first receiving sensor 2434 for detecting the gaming balls received in the first receiving port 2431; And a second receiving sensor 2435 for detecting the gaming ball received by the second receiving port 2432.

  The inner passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second big winning opening sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed immediately below the portion of the second large winning opening sensor 2402 through which the game ball passes, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in a front view . The distribution piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the inner passage 2430, and the lower side thereof is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In the distribution piece 2433, a state where the second large winning hole 2006 and the first receiving port 2431 are in communication with each other by rising vertically, the upper side moves leftward in a front view, and the side wall on the left side of the internal passage 2430 It is attached so as to rotate in a state in which the second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are in communication with each other in an abutting (or approaching) manner. The distribution piece 2433 is formed to rotate by the drive of a distribution solenoid (not shown), and when the distribution solenoid is OFF (during non-energization), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 and distribution is performed. When the solenoid is ON (during energization), the game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  In the state attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center member 2500 described later, and the gate portion 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500. The first large winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Subsequently, the flow of gaming balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate unit 2003 is held even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. There is no passing through. Therefore, only the gaming balls having flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 may pass through the gate unit 2003. The upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed is opened right below the opening on the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2540 in the center character 2500, so the right side of the center character 2500 The game ball having flowed down enters the gate passage 2420 with high probability and passes through the gate section 2003.

  The gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 closing the second start opening 2004 directly thereunder. At this time, when the second start opening door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second start opening door 2411 and the second It is guided to the starting opening 2004 side and is accepted by the second starting opening 2004. The second starting opening door 2411 is based on the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit” At the same time, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” is accepted by the second starting opening 2004 by appropriately setting the drawing time of the normal drawing result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting opening door 2411 and the like. be able to.

  The gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004 are detected by the second starting opening sensor 3113, and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start opening 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passed through the gate portion 2003 A ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a portion which rarely communicates. That is, the gaming ball having passed through the gate unit 2003 does not necessarily pass in front of the second starting opening door 2411.

  If the gaming ball which has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 disposed on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  The gaming ball released from the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 to the attacher passage 2423 is guided leftward along the slope of the attacher passage 2423, and downward from the left end of the attacher passage 2423. Released into At this time, when the second large winning opening door 2413 closing the second large winning opening 2006 is retreated and the second large winning opening 2006 is opened, the gaming ball released into the attack passage 2423 is It is highly likely to be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2402 and is then sent to the inner passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 by the distribution piece 2433 It is distributed to any of.

  The gaming balls received in the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 are detected by the first receiving port sensor 2434 or the second receiving port sensor 2435, and then the lower side of the game panel 1100 (substrate holder Discharged on the

  The second large winning opening 2006 has a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, so the second large winning opening door 2413 recedes and the second large winning opening 2006 Even if it is open, the game ball may jump over the second large winning opening 2006 and may not be accepted by the second large winning opening 2006, depending on the speed, behavior, etc. of the gaming balls circulating in the attack path 2423. .

  The gaming ball discharged from the adjacency passage 2423 flows down onto the adjacency shelf 2424, is guided to the adjacency shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the adjacency shelf 2424. At this time, when the first large winning opening door 2412 is retreated and the first large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 will be accepted by the first large winning opening 2005. . Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, if you hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 5a so as to circulate the right side of the center role 2500, the gaming ball in the first big winning opening 2005 with high probability It can be accepted.

  The gaming balls received in the first large winning opening 2005 are detected by a first large winning opening sensor 2403 (not shown), and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The gaming balls discharged downward from the attachment shelf 2424 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 disposed below. The gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then delivered to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out port 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the back side of the game panel 1100.

5-8 e. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the center part in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the center part from the rear. The center character 2500 is disposed slightly above the center of the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 It is done. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is in the frame It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 is capable of releasing the warp ball 2520 having the game ball in the game area 5a open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball having entered the warp ball 2520 within the frame. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 139 etc.) .

  The stage 2530 of the center character 2500 is a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. This stage 2530 can release the game balls into the game area 5a from the lowermost portions on both sides of the center formed in a wave shape.

  The center character 2500 is opened forward at the highest position of the central slightly elevated part of the stage 2530, and the gaming ball enters the chance entrance 2535 where the game ball can enter and the chance entrance 2535. And a chance outlet 2536 for discharging into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in a state where the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when the gaming ball is released from the chance outlet 2536, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  The center product 2500 is provided with a right guiding passage 2540 that guides the gaming ball, which has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in a front view, to the left slightly and then releases the gaming ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located immediately above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 when the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. It is done.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed such that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the assembled state to the gaming board 5. Therefore, when the gaming ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center character 2500, and all the gaming spheres circulating on the right side of the center character 2500 are in the right guiding passage 2540. It is approached and guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so that the game ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 147 to 150. FIG. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main component members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main component members and the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. On the rear side of the back unit 3000, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the panel side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 attached to the lower surface of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the rear view of the panel 3031, a lower left relay substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 And a lower right relay substrate 3034 attached to the left side in a rear view of 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit A decoration substrate, a drive motor, and the like provided in the 3500 and the under-the-back movable effect unit 3700 are controlled. The panel relay substrate 3032 includes a main control substrate 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first large winning opening sensor 2403, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first receiving sensor 2434, and a second receiving sensor 2435. , Second start opening sensor 3113, start opening solenoid 2105, first attachment solenoid 2108A, second attachment solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning opening sensor 3111, first start opening sensor 3112, and magnetic sensor The connection with 2404 and the vibration sensor 2405 is relayed.

  The lower left relay substrate 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive substrate 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay substrate 3034 is connected to the effect driving substrate 3031 with the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back lower movable effect unit 3700 Are relayed.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the effect drive substrate 3031, the panel relay substrate 3032, the lower left relay substrate 3033, and the lower right relay substrate 3034 respectively. A panel relay substrate cover 3036, a lower left relay substrate cover 3037, and a lower right relay substrate cover 3038 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached from the front end of the back box 3010 to the left side and the lower side in a front view, and back movable movable in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010 a. It is mounted on the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010, and the rendering unit 3200. And a back downward movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 147 to 150. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in the back view.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. FIG. 151 (a) is a front view of the back decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the front side left side to the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (crescent type) along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and is a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010; A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting gaming balls received in the first starting openings 2002 of the front unit 2000; The game area 5a is provided with a magnetic sensor 2404 capable of detecting an incorrect magnetism externally applied, and a vibration sensor 2405.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 extends up and down along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110. The back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back box 3010 from the lower end of the back front left decoration unit 3120 The back front and bottom decoration unit 3130 which extends left and right along the side of the unit base 3110 and the back front and bottom decoration unit 3130 is disposed at the bottom of the front view left of the unit base 3110 And a ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front.

  As shown in the figure, the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is a light transmitting flat plate back front left decoration decoration body 3121 having a decoration of characters of "dodododo" and a back front left decoration A transparent flat flat back left light guiding lens 3122 mounted on the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123 a capable of emitting light toward the left side of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 are mounted A back front left decorative substrate 3123 is provided (see FIG. 151 (b)).

  The back front left light guiding lens 3122 has a plurality of conically formed reflecting portions 3122 a on the rear face behind the decoration of the letter “D” in the back front left decoration 3121. The light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3122 a, and the back front left decoration decoration body disposed in front of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 The 3121 can be illuminated and decorated in a plane.

  The back front and bottom decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed to correspond to the center of the game area 5a in the left and right direction, and has a back front bottom central lens 3131 on which a predetermined three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front. The back front lower left lens 3132 and the back front lower right lens 3133 which are disposed on the left and right sides of the back front lower center lens 3131 and on which the predetermined three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front, and the back front lower center lens 3131 , A back front lower left lens 3132, and a back front lower decoration substrate 3134 disposed on the back side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the back front lower decoration substrate, the back front lower central lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be made to emit light in an independent state.

  The back front lower decoration unit 3130 is open toward the front at the upper center of the back front lower central lens 3131 and can be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the game ball guided backward can enter Center delivery opening 3135 and the lower right rear side of the lower back central lens 3131 open forward and accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball guided backward can enter And a left delivery port 3137. The gaming ball having entered the central delivery opening 3135 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3112. The gaming ball having entered the right delivery opening 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery openings 3151 into which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the gaming ball having entered from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball entering the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the back wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010 a. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is disposed on the left side in front view, extends up and down higher than the height of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration in the back middle left decoration body 3210, And the right inner body 3220 of the back middle which extends vertically upwards and higher than the height of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and the opening 3010 a of the back wall in the back box 3010 A back middle drive unit 3250 is mounted on the upper and lower outer sides and moves the back middle left decoration 3210 and the middle back right decoration 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back decoration left-handling body 3210 is disposed on the front side of the light-transmissive plate-like back-left decoration lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front, and the back decoration center-left decoration lens 3211 A back-to-back left decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back-to-back mounted on the back side of the back-to-left decorative lens 3211 to cover the back surface of the back-to-back left decorative substrate And a left decoration base 3212. Although not shown, the back decoration center left decoration base 3212 is provided with a rack gear which extends in the left and right direction and has gear teeth formed upward at the lower end. The back middle left decoration body 3210 can make the back middle left decoration lens 3211 emit light and decorate by emitting the LED of the back middle left decoration substrate.

  The back right decoration 3220 is disposed on the front side of the translucent back flat right back decoration lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front, and the back back right decoration lens 3221 on the front. A back-to-back right decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back-to-plate back mounted on the back side of the right decorative lens 3221 to cover the back surface of the back-to-right And a right decoration base 3222. Although the illustration is omitted, the back decoration right decoration base 3222 is provided at the lower end with a rack gear which extends to the left and right and the gear teeth are formed downward. The back-right decorative body 3220 can emit light to decorate the back-right decorative lens 3221 by causing the LEDs of the back-right decorative substrate to emit light.

  The back decoration center left decoration lens 3211 and the back decoration center right decoration lens 3221 of the back decoration left decoration body 3210 and the back middle right decoration body 3220 are formed in the shape of left-right symmetry mutually, in the approximate center of the up-down direction The side close to the center in the left-right direction of 5 is formed in a shape in which it curls up.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and supports the top of the back middle left decoration 3210 and the top back of the middle back right decoration 3220 so as to be slidable in the lateral direction. A flat unit base 3252 slidably supporting the lower ends of the middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 in the left and right direction, and an opening 3010 a attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252 in the back box 3010 And a back-to-back drive motor 3254 mounted on the front of the unit base 3252 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252; The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the rotation on the front surface of the mounting base 3253 Rack and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below is attached to the ability (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the left back and right back decoration 3210 and the back and right back decoration 3220 are in the state of the retracted position where they are most apart from each other. In this state, the back center left decoration 3210 and the back center right decoration 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 133 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise from the normal state by driving the back-to-back drive motor 3254 in a front view counterclockwise direction, the rack gear of the back-to-back left decorative body 3210 and the back-to-back right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear By the rack gear, the back decoration center left decoration body 3210 is moved to the right, and the back decoration center right decoration body 3220 is moved to the left.

  As a result, the back-rear left decoration 3210 and the back-middle right decoration 3220 which are separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and the movement is stopped immediately before they abut each other. In this state, the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are positioned approximately at the center (appearing position) of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decoration 3210 In the back, the decorations with the right decoration 3220 combine to form a single large decoration (a decoration imitating the petals of a cherry tree) (see FIG. 189).

[5-9 d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the left outside in a front view of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decoration 3310 formed in a triangular column shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 for rotating the back left decoration 3310 around an axis extending up and down, and a back box 3010. A back left moving drive unit 3350 attached to move the upper end side of the back left rotation driving unit 3330 in the left and right direction, and mounted in a back box 3010 guide the lower end side of the back left rotation driving unit 3330 in the left and right direction A lower left guide rail 3370, and a rear upper left decoration 3390 attached to the front side of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism extending vertically, and extends shorter than the height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left decoration body 3310 has a first decoration surface 3311 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decoration surface 3312 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a second decoration surface 3312 And a third decorative surface 3313 on which the decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have a light transmitting property. The back left decorative body 3310 is provided with a cylindrical shaft at its lower end, although illustration is omitted.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to project forward and the movement base 3331 extended vertically so as to be movable in the left and right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350. A lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude upward of the back left decoration 3310; The rotating shaft is attached to the upper rotating base so as to project downward, and the rotating shaft penetrating the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310, and the unshown back left rotating drive motor (heat source) , A motor cover 3333 attached to the movement base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and a back left decoration 3310 Lower with is arranged therein includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 138), the.

  The movement base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end, although not shown. The lower rotation base 3332 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decoration 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion which protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided to the back lower left guide rail 3370.

  The back left decoration substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decoration 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft. Although the illustration of the back left decorative substrate 3334 is omitted, the upper end side is supported relatively rotatably at the lower side of the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thereby, only the back left decoration body 3310 is formed to rotate by the drive of the back left rotation drive motor. The LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3334 always face forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative substrate 3334 (that is, the front facing decorative surface) should be illuminated it can.

  The back left moving drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010 a on the front surface of the rear wall which is inside the back box 3010 and a rotation axis projecting backward through the unit base 3351 The rear left movement drive motor 3352 (heat source) attached to the front of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 mesh with A pinion gear (not shown) engaged with a rack gear of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and rotatably mounted to the unit base 3351 and a back left rotation drive unit 3330 attached to the lower front of the unit base 3351 Mounting the movement base 3331 of the Doreru (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  When the back left movement drive unit 3350 rotates the pinion gear in a counterclockwise direction in a front view through the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive motor 3352, back left rotation drive is performed by the rack gear engaged with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decoration 3310) can be moved to the right.

  The lower left lower guide rail 3370 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a and near the left end. The lower left lower guide rail 3370 extends in the left and right direction, and is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The back left lower guide rail 3370 guides the projection slidably in the left and right direction by inserting the projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening of the upper surface. Can.

  The back upper left decorative body 3390 is attached to the back upper left decorative lens 3391 having a light transmitting property on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and the back left upper back decorative lens 3391 of the unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350. It is equipped with a decoration base 3392 attached to the front, and a back left decoration substrate (not shown) mounted between the decoration base 3392 and the back left top decoration lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can emit light and decorate the back upper left decorative lens 3391 by causing the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in the state (back position) where the back left rotary drive unit 3330 (back left decoration body 3310) is moved to the most left by the back left movable drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decoration body 3310 is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decoration unit 3120 and can be seen almost from the front Not possible (see Figure 133 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decoration 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, When the right end position (appearing position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350 is reached, the movement is stopped. In the state of this appearance position, the back left decoration 3310 is positioned to the right of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display It is located near the left end of the front of the device 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center piece 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 rotates the back left decoration body 3310 by the back left rotation drive motor (heat source) of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decoration surface 3311 of the back left decoration body 3310, the second It is possible to stop the rotation so that any of the decorative surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 face forward. The back left decoration 3310 can be rotated at any position of the retracted position and the appearance position.

5-9 e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 in a front view. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a back right decoration 3410 formed in a triangular column shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decoration 3410 around an axis extending up and down, and a back box 3010. A back right movement drive unit 3450 is attached and moves the upper end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left and right direction, and is mounted in the back box 3010 and movably guides the lower end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left and right direction. And a rear upper right decoration 3490 attached to the front side of the rear right movement drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decoration 3410 is formed in a triangular prism extending vertically, and extends shorter than the height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right decoration 3410 has a first decoration surface 3411 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decoration surface 3412 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decoration surface 3412 And a third decorative surface 3413 on which the decoration is formed. The back right decoration 3410 is formed to have a light transmitting property. The back right decorative body 3410 is provided with a cylindrical shaft at its lower end, although not shown.

  The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward and the movement base 3431 extended vertically movably mounted in the left and right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450 and back right decoration A lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude upward of the back right decoration 3410; The rotating shaft is attached to the upper rotating base so as to project downward, and the rotating shaft penetrating the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration 3410 and a not-shown back right rotating drive motor (heat source) , The motor cover 3433 attached to the movement base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor, and the inside of the back right decoration 3410 Lower with is arranged is provided with a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see Figure 138), to.

  The moving base 3431 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end, although not shown. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decoration 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion which protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided to the back lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decoration substrate 3434 is disposed inside the back right decoration 3410 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft. The back right decorative substrate 3434 is, although not shown, relatively rotatably supported at the upper end side below the upper end of the back right decoration 3410. Thereby, only the back right decoration body 3410 is formed to rotate by the drive of the back right rotation drive motor. The LEDs of the back right decorative substrate 3434 always face forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative substrate 3434 (that is, the front facing decorative surface) should be illuminated it can.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010 a on the front surface of the rear wall which is inside the back box 3010 and a rotation axis projecting backward through the unit base 3451 The rear right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and the drive gear 3453 mesh with the rear right rotation A pinion gear (not shown) engaged with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and rotatably mounted to the unit base 3451 and a movement base of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 mounted on the lower front of the unit base 3451 A slide rail that mounts the 3431 so that it can move laterally (Not shown) is provided with a.

  When the back right movement drive unit 3450 rotates the pinion gear clockwise in a front view through the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive motor 3452, the back right rotation drive unit is engaged by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear 3430 (back right decoration 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The back lower right guide rail 3470 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a and near the right end. The back lower right guide rail 3470 extends in the left and right direction, and is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The back lower right guiding rail 3470 guides the projection in the lateral direction by inserting the projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening of the upper surface. be able to.

  The back upper right decoration body 3490 is attached to the back right side of the back right upper decoration lens 3491 having a light transmitting property on which the predetermined decoration is formed and the back right upper decoration lens 3491 and of the unit base 3451 It has a decoration base 3492 attached to the front, and a back right decoration substrate (not shown) attached between the decoration base 3492 and the back right upper decoration lens 3491 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front side. ing. The back upper right decoration body 3490 can emit light and decorate the back upper right decoration lens 3491 by emitting the LED of the back upper right decoration substrate.

  In the normal state, this back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the state (back position) where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (back right decoration 3410) has moved to the most right by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decoration 3410 is located behind the right side of the center character 2500, and a part can be viewed through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 133, etc.). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decoration 3410 can be moved to the right via the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When the left end position (appearing position) of the slide rail of the right moving drive unit 3450 is reached, the movement is stopped. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decoration 3410 is located on the left side of the right side in the center character 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430 and at the front of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located in the vicinity of the right end, and the whole is visible in the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 rotates the back right decorative body 3410 in a round shape by the back right rotation drive motor of the back right rotation drive unit 3430, or the first decoration surface 3411 and the second decoration surface 3412 of the back right decoration 3410. , And any of the third decorative surface 3413 can be rotationally stopped so as to face the front. The back right decoration 3410 can be rotated at any position of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9 f. Overall configuration of back-to-back movable effect unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 177. FIG. 152 (a) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back-side movable effect knit unit mainly disassembled into component units and seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a back-side movable effect unit as the main component units disassembled and viewed from the back It is a disassembled perspective view. In the back box 3010, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a at the front of the back wall.

  The back top movable effect unit 3500 has a back top first decoration unit 3510 having a decoration of a predetermined character and a back top second decoration unit having a decoration of a character different from the back top first decoration unit 3510. A back top third decoration unit 3550 having a different character decoration than the back top first decoration unit 3510 and the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top first decoration at the center in the longitudinal direction The unit 3510 is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front and back direction, and the back upper second decoration unit 3530 and the back upper third decoration unit 3550 extend back and forth respectively near both longitudinal ends. The back upper rotation base unit 3570, which is mounted rotatably relative to the rotation axis, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 And a back-up lifting unit 3600 mounted in the back box 3010. The first back-up decoration unit 3510 and the back-up first rotation base unit 3570 are raised and lowered. ing.

5-9 f-1. Back side first decoration unit]
Next, the back first decoration unit 3510 in the back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 155 to FIG. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the back top first decoration unit in the back up movable rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a back perspective view of the back top first decoration unit. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration first decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration first decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back top first decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 158 (b) is a drive system when the back top first decoration unit is in the open position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The back first decoration unit 3510 of the back up movable effect unit 3500 has its rear end non-rotatably attached to the front of the movable side unit 3610 in the back up lift unit 3600.

  The first decorative unit 3510 has a first character and a second character, and a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 each having a light transmitting property. A light transmitting first fixed decorative lens 3513 disposed on the rear side of the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a back of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 It is attached to the back side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the back surface of the back top first decoration substrate 3514 disposed on the side and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back top first decoration substrate 3514 And a first decorative base 3515 in the form of a flat plate. In the first fixed decorative lens 3513, a decoration imitating lightning is formed.

  The back top first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the left end is the left outside of the first decorative body base 3515 after the first left movable decorative lens 3511 A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a attached to the side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b extending in the front and rear direction on the lower side of the rack gear 3516a and a slit of the first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through 3516b and slidably mounting the first lower arm 3516 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515; ing.

  The back top first decorative unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper portion on the rear side of the first decorative base 3515 and the right end is the right outside of the first decorative base 3515 after the first right movable decorative lens 3512 A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a attached to the side and extending left and right at the lower side, and a slit 3518b penetrating left and right forward and backward above the rack gear 3518a, and a slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518 And an upper arm presser 3519 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the first arm 3518 so as to slide the first upper arm 3518 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515; There is.

  Furthermore, the rear upper first decorative body unit 3510 is provided on the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a and the transmission gear portion 3520a that respectively mesh with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The back first decoration unit 3510 is flat and extends vertically in the front view left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decoration body base 3515, and the right side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is A first drive rack gear 3521a meshing with the drive gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b cylindrically projecting rearward from the lower part of the rear surface, and a slit 3521c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side It is attached to the back side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521 c of the first opening / closing arm 3521 so that the first opening / closing arm 3521 can slide vertically in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515 And an open / close arm presser 3522 attached to the

  Furthermore, the rear upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, and the first upper arm 3518 is viewed from the front And a first mounting base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening and closing gear member 3520. And the horizontal lock hole 3525a attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and opened in the outer peripheral surface on the right side, the front-rear direction is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the outer peripheral surface on the lower side And a mounting shaft 3525c which protrudes cylindrically rearward on the rear side of the vertical locking hole 3525b, and the mounting shaft 3525c Rear end is provided with, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back top first decoration unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back top first decorative unit 3510 is located between a closed position where the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 come close to each other and in contact with each other, and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back top first decorative unit 3510, the first upper arm 3518 having the first right movable decorative lens 3512 mounted thereon is disposed above the first lower arm 3516 to which the first left movable decorative lens 3511 is mounted. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with the rack gear 3516a extending in the left and right direction, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with the rack gear 3518a extending in the left and right direction downward. The rack gear 3516 a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518 a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first open / close gear member 3520 meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively. doing. Thus, when the first open / close gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 When the first open / close gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3512 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) away from each other.

  In the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the first open / close gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and a vertically extending drive rack gear that meshes with the drive gear portion 3520b A first open / close arm 3521 having 3521 a is provided. Since the first opening and closing arm 3521 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the first opening and closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening and closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening and closing gear member 3520 in a front view, the first opening and closing arm 3521 slides downward when the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. When the open / close gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back top first decoration unit 3510 has a first open / close spring 3523 urging the first upper arm 3518 to move leftward, so that a force acts on the first open / close arm 3521 When not moving (in the normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the biasing force of the first opening and closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position where the lens 3512 abutted mutually. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first open / close gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 I am engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a in the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 158A).

  When the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid upward to resist the biasing force of the first opening and closing spring 3523 from the state of the closed position, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide is stopped (see FIG. 158 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening and closing arm 3521 The lower arm presser 3517, the upper arm presser 3519, and the open / close arm presser 3522 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Is positioned in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated, and The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  The back first decoration unit 3510 appropriately emits the LED of the back first decoration substrate 3514 so that the first left movable decoration lens 3511, the first right movable decoration lens 3512, and the first fixed decoration lens 3513 can be obtained. The light emission can be appropriately decorated. Specifically, when the LED of the back top first decoration substrate 3514 is made to emit light when the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512 are in the closed position, the first fixed decoration lens 3513 is used. The light emitting decoration can be performed with the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, when the LED of the back first decorative substrate 3514 is made to emit light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-2. Back side second decoration unit]
Next, the back second decoration unit 3530 in the back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit in the back up movable rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 (b) is a perspective view of the back top second decoration unit from the back. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 162 (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decoration unit is in the open position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The back end of the back second decoration unit 3530 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 is in the front-rear direction near one end of the back top rotation base unit 3570 in the longitudinal direction (near the right end at the time of horizontal position) It is rotatably mounted about an axis extending to it.

  A second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 having a light transmitting property are formed by forming a decoration that forms a predetermined character in a pair on the back upper second decoration unit 3530; A translucent second fixed decorative lens 3533 disposed behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a back of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 It is attached to the back side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the back surface of the back upper second decoration substrate 3534 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the back surface of the back top second decoration substrate 3534 And a second decoration base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is formed with a decoration imitating lightning.

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and the left end is the left outside of the second decorative body base 3535 behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 A second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a attached to the side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b extending in the front and rear direction on the lower side of the rack gear 3536a and a slit of the second lower arm 3536 A lower arm presser 3537 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through 3536b and slidably mounting the second lower arm 3536 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535; ing.

  The back upper second decoration unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the back side of the second decoration base 3535 and the right end is the right outside of the second decoration base 3535 behind the second right movable decoration lens 3532 A second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a attached to the side and extending left and right at the lower side, and a slit 3538b extending leftward and backward through the upper side of the rack gear 3538a, and a slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538 And an upper arm presser 3539 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the second arm so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. There is.

  Furthermore, the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530 is provided on the rear surface of the large diameter transmission gear portion 3540a and the transmission gear portion 3540a that respectively mesh with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 A second open / close gear member 3540 having a small diameter drive gear portion 3540b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is flat and extends vertically in the front view left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decoration base 3535, and the right side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 It has a drive rack gear 3541a which is engaged with the drive gear portion 3540b, a receiving boss 3541b cylindrically projecting rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side. The second opening and closing arm 3541 and the slit 3541 c of the second opening and closing arm 3541 are attached to the rear side of the second decoration base 3535 and cooperates with the second decoration base 3535 to make the second opening and closing arm 3541 vertically. An open / close arm presser 3542 slidably mounted.

  Furthermore, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 has the left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and the right end attached to the rear side of the second decoration base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 can be viewed from the front right And a second mounting base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And have. The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is located between a closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 abut each other, and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back upper second decoration unit 3530, a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is disposed above the second lower arm 3536 to which the second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 is provided with the rack gear 3536a extending in the left and right direction, and the second upper arm 3538 is provided with the rack gear 3538a extending in the left and right direction, the second lower arm The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 are opposed to each other. Between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second open / close gear member 3540 meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, respectively. doing. Accordingly, when the second open / close gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 When the second open / close gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3532 approaches each other (direction of the closed position). The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) away from each other.

  In the back upper second decoration unit 3530, the second open / close gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b integrally rotating with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and a vertically extending drive rack gear meshed with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is disposed on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 in a front view, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides downward when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. When the open / close gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening and closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening and closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper second decoration unit 3530 has the second open / close spring 3543 urging the second lower arm 3536 to move rightward, a force acts on the second open / close arm 3541. When not moving (in the normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the second opening and closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position where the lens 3532 abutted mutually. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second open / close gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a in the second lower arm 3536, and near the right end of the rack gear 3538a in the second upper arm 3538 I am engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second open / close gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3541a in the second open / close arm 3541 (see FIG. 162A).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward against the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543 from the state of the closed position, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide is stopped (see FIG. 162 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening and closing arm The lower arm presser 3537, the upper arm presser 3539, and the open / close arm presser 3542 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the second back movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Is positioned in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so that the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the second left movable decoration lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration lens 3532 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other, The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

  The back second decoration unit 3530 is configured to emit the second left movable decoration lens 3531, the second right movable decoration lens 3532, and the second fixed decoration lens 3533 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back second decoration substrate 3534. The light emission can be appropriately decorated. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, through the second fixed decorative lens 3533 The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can emit light. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, when the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 which faces from between the decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-3. Back side third decoration unit]
Next, the back third decoration unit 3550 in the back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper third decoration unit in the back up movable rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 163 (b) is a perspective view of the back top third decoration unit from the back. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back-top third decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back-top third decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 166 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 166 (b) is a drive system when the back upper third decoration unit is in the open position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The rear end of the rear upper third decoration unit 3550 of the rear upper movable presentation unit 3500 is near the end opposite to the rear upper second decoration unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 (horizontal position Is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back third decoration unit 3550 has a light emitting third left movable decoration lens 3551 and a third right movable decoration lens 3552, each of which has a decoration forming a predetermined character as a pair. A light transmitting third fixed decorative lens 3553 disposed on the rear side of the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and the back of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 It is attached to the back side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the back surface of the back top third decoration substrate 3554 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the back surface of the back top third decoration substrate 3554 And a plate-like third decoration base 3555. A decoration imitating lightning is formed on the third fixed decorative lens 3553.

  The back top third decoration unit 3550 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 and the left end is behind the third left movable decoration lens 3551 on the left outside of the third decoration base 3555 A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a attached to the side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3556b extending leftward and backward through the lower side of the rack gear 3556a, and a slit of the third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 through 3556b and slidably mounting the third lower arm 3556 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decoration base 3555; ing.

  The back top third decoration unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the back side of the third decoration base 3555 and the right end is the right outside of the third decoration base 3555 behind the third right movable decorative lens 3552 A third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a attached to the side and extending left and right at the lower side, and a slit 3558b extending leftward and rightward through the upper side of the rack gear 3558a, and a slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558 And an upper arm presser 3559 attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 through and slidably mounting the third upper arm 3558 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decoration base 3555; There is.

  Furthermore, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is provided on the rear surface of the large diameter transmission gear portion 3560a and the transmission gear portion 3560a which are respectively meshed with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. It has a third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555.

  The back top third decoration unit 3550 is flat and extends vertically in the front view left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decoration body base 3555, and the right side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is A third open / close arm 3561 having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3561a meshing with the drive gear portion 3560b, and a slit 3561c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side, and a third open / close arm 3561 through a slit 3561c An open / close arm presser 3562 attached to the rear side of the decorative body base 3555 and slidably attaching the third open / close arm 3561 in the vertical direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555.

  Furthermore, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has the left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and the right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so that the third lower arm 3556 is viewed from the front And a third mounting base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 and the third opening / closing spring 3563 biased to move toward the And have. The third mounting base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back top third decoration unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back third third body unit 3550 is located between the closed position where the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 approach each other and the open positions where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back upper third decoration unit 3550, the third upper arm 3558 to which the third right movable decoration lens 3552 is attached is disposed above the third lower arm 3556 to which the third left movable decoration lens 3551 is attached. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with a rack gear 3556a extending leftward and rightward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with a rack gear 3558a extending leftward and rightward and is provided with a third lower arm The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 are opposed to each other. Between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third open / close gear member 3560 meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, respectively. doing. Thus, when the third open / close gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the third open / close gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 When the third open / close gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (direction of the closed position) The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) apart from each other.

  In the back top third decoration unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and a vertically extending drive rack gear that meshes with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third open / close arm 3561 having 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560, it is slid downward when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view When the open / close gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening and closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening and closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper third decoration unit 3550 has the third open / close spring 3563 urging the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, a force acts on the third open / close arm 3561 When not moving (in the normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the third opening and closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position which the lens 3552 contact | abutted mutually. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third open / close gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a in the third lower arm 3556, and near the right end of the rack gear 3558a in the third upper arm 3558. I am engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third open / close gear member 3560 is engaged with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3561a in the third open / close arm 3561 (see FIG. 166 (a)).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward against the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563 from this state of the closed position, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide away from each other through the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 166 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third open / close arm 3561 The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the open / close arm presser 3562 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is combined with the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so that the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated and a third of them is separated The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 can be seen.

  The back third decoration unit 3550 appropriately emits the LEDs of the back third decoration substrate 3554 so that the third left movable decoration lens 3551, the third right movable decoration lens 3552, and the third fixed decoration lens 3553 can be obtained. The light emission can be appropriately decorated. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, and the LED of the back third third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, through the third fixed decorative lens 3553 The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be made to emit light. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position and the LED of the back third third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-4. Back-up rotation base unit]
Next, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 167 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable presentation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotation base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotation base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view showing the gear configuration of the back-to-back rotation base unit from the front. Fig. 171 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state from the front of the action lever.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable rendering unit 3500 is rotatably attached to the front of the movable side unit in the back-up lifting unit around an axis extending in the front and back direction, and back up at both longitudinal ends The second decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are rotatably mounted relative to the front and rear extending axes, respectively.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center in the longitudinal direction A mounting cylindrical portion which cylindrically protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c which pass through and the first hole 3571a and is rotatably attached to the movable side unit 3610 of the rear upper lifting unit 3600 It has a back-up rotation base having 3571d. The first hole 3571a (inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed in such a size that the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back top first decoration unit 3510 can pass. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a, and are formed to have the same size. The second hole 3571 b and the third hole 3571 c are respectively formed in the vicinity of the right end and in the vicinity of the left end in a front view when the back-upper rotation base 3571 extends horizontally (in the horizontal position). In the following description, the back-up rotation base 3571 is described as extending horizontally.

  The back top rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 attached to the back side of the back top rotation base 3571 and extending in a semicircular arc concentric with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotary base driven gear 3572 is formed in an upper half shape with respect to the annular ring in a state in which the central axis is extended in the front and back direction, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3752 is mounted such that a gap is formed between the rotation base driven gear 3752 and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571 d. The rotation base driven gear 3752 engages with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 described later.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is fan-shaped concentrically from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3573a and the shaft portion 3573a which are rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571 The second drive link gear member 3573 to which the second link gear portion 3573b is attached and the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 is attached to the front, and the back upper rotation base 3571 And a pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 and having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571 b. The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. The second link gear portion 3573 b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the pressing member 3574 is attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b, thereby restricting the movement of the second hole 3571b in the back and forth direction. It is rotatably mounted in the condition.

  Furthermore, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the back side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second hole 3571b in a front view, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573 The first link gear 3575 for spur gear meshing with 3573b and the second link gear 3575 are rotatably mounted on the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in a front view. The second link gear 3576 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3575 for the second and the second link gear 3576 can be rotated to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 in front view left side The second link gear 3576 attached to the second link gear 3576 is engaged with the second link gear 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second link gear 3575 are engaged with each other through an opening formed in the upper rear rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second link gear 3577 approaches the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder 3571 d of the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is fan-shaped concentrically from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3578a and the shaft portion 3578a which are rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571 The third drive link gear member 3578 to which the third link gear portion 3578b is attached and the back surface of the third mounting base 3564 of the back top third decoration unit 3550 is attached to the front surface, and the back top rotation base 3571 And a pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 and having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571 c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. The third link gear portion 3578 b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the pressing member 3579 is attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c, whereby the movement of the third drive link gear member 3578 against the third hole 3571c is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the condition.

  Furthermore, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the right side in a front view of the third hole 3571c, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 And a third link gear 3580 for meshing with the first link gear 3580 and the first link gear 3580 for the third link gear 3580 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view right side The second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580 and the second link gear 3581 in a front view right side rotatably on the back side of the back upper rotation base 3571 And a spur gear-like third link gear 3582 attached and engaged with the third link gear 3581.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back-upper rotation base 3571. The right end side of the third link gear 3582 approaches the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571 d of the back upper rotation base 3571. The third link gear 3582 meshes with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 described later.

  The back top rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the lower back side between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b in the back top rotation base 3571, and the rotation axis passes through the back top rotation base 3571 to the front The projecting action lever drive motor 3583 (heat source), the spur gear-like action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotation shaft of the action lever drive motor 3583, and the action lever drive gear 3584 mesh with each other and rotate on the back side. It has a spur gear-like operating lever pinion gear 3585 rotatably mounted on the front surface of the base 3571 and an operating lever rack gear 3586a meshing with the operating lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extending leftward and rightward. The action lever 3586 slidably mounted in the left and right direction on the front surface of the upper rotation base 3571 The action lever presser 3587 which restricts the forward movement of the action lever 3586 and is attached to the front of the back upper rotation base 3571, and is attached to the front of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the lateral direction of the action lever 3586 And an operation lever movement detection sensor 3588 for detecting movement of the lens.

  The action lever 3586 is connected to a horizontally long rectangular main body 3586b having an action lever rack gear 3586a at its lower side, and is connected to the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends like a band plate to the left beyond the main body 3586b. A slide mounting portion 3586c slidably attached to the front upper portion of the back upper rotation base 3571 and a first mounting shaft member 3525 projecting leftward from the left side of the main body portion 3586b in the back upper first decoration unit 3510 The lock piece 3586d which can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, the first extension 3586e extending downward from the main body 3586b, and the lower end of the first extension 3586e than the lock 3586d The first working portion 3586f protruding leftward and the upper side of the main portion 3586b A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity of the end and extending rightward, and a second extension extending downward from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first working portion 3586f The second working portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h and the lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h, and the lower end of the first extending portion 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c And a third working portion 3586k extending leftward from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j (see FIG. See 171).

  The back top rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the back top rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the action lever drive gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585; So as to cover the front side of the back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 and the back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a and detecting the rotational position of the back up rotation base unit 3570 A back top rotation base relay board 3591 attached to the front of the back top rotation base 3571 and a board cover 3592 mounted on the front top of the back top rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back top rotation base relay board 3591 And have.

  The back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the back up rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 It is. The back top rotation base relay substrate 3591 is the back top rotation drive motor 3612 (heat source) of the movable side unit 3610 in the back top lifting unit 3600, the back top second decoration board 3534, the back top third decoration board 3554, and the action lever drive. The connection with the motor 3583, the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and the back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Furthermore, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is configured to cover the back side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. It is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the third link gear 3581 and the third link gear 3582. And a motor cover 3595 mounted on the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the operation lever drive motor 3583.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-up rotation base unit 3570, a mounting cylindrical portion 3571d that protrudes to the rear of the back-up rotation base 3571 is inserted into the barrel portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit Thus, the front surface of the movable unit 3610 is mounted to rotate about an axis extending back and forth. In addition, the movement to the front is restricted by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 which is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit by penetrating the mounting cylinder portion 3571 d from the front and attaching the back upper rotation base unit 3570 Be done. The back top rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably mounted in the second hole 3571 b of the back top rotation base 3571, as a second attachment in the back top second decoration unit 3530. By attaching the rear surface of the base 3544, the back second decoration unit 3530 can be rotatably attached to the back rotation base 3571. Furthermore, the back top rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably mounted in the third hole 3571 c of the back top rotation base 3571, By mounting the rear surface of the three mounting base 3564, the back upper third decoration unit 3550 can be rotatably mounted relative to the back top rotation base 3571.

  The rotary base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotary base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610 in a state where the rear rotary unit 3570 is attached to the front of the movable unit 3610 in the rear lift unit 3600. The second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are in mesh with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 182). When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the back upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is inserted into the first hole 3571a (mounting cylindrical portion via the rotation base driven gear 3572 It rotates around an axis extending back and forth around the axis of 3571 d). The back-up rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position in which the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are aligned) extends horizontally, and a vertical position extending vertically. Can be rotated 90 degrees between. In the state of the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is positioned to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the state of the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is positioned below the first hole 3571a. At the horizontal position, the back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable side unit 3610 in the back up lifting unit 3600.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571 a, the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 move the movable unit 3610. To revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are in mesh with the central link gear 3611 b, when revolving around the central link gear 3611 b, the second third link The gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 rotate respectively, and each rotates relative to the back top rotation base 3571.

  When the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are rotated, the rotation of the second link gear 3576 and the second link gear 3576 for the second link It is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577, and the third link The third drive link gear member 3578 is transmitted from the gear 3582 to the third link gear portion 3578 b through the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580. It rotates in the opposite direction to the three link gear 3582.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b is performed. The angle is the same as the rotation angle of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573 b and the third link gear portion 3578 b. Since the center link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably mounted, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move back and forth when the back upper rotation base 3571 rotates. It will revolve around the central link gear 3611 b without rotating around the extended axis. That is, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is configured such that the first hole 3571 a (movable side) is maintained with the back-up second decoration unit 3530 and back-up third decoration unit 3550 kept in a constant vertical direction. The central link gear 3611 b) of the unit 3610 can be revolved.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 can move the action lever 3586 to the left via the action lever rack gear 3586a when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the action lever drive motor 3583 When the acting lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the acting lever 3586 can be moved rightward via the acting lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the main body 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view in a state where the action lever 3586 is assembled to the back up rotation base unit 3570. The slide attachment portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper outside of the first hole 3571a. The first working portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extension 3586 g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571 b above the second hole 3571 b. The second lower extending portion 3586 h extends such that the lower end is located below the second hole 3571 b. The second application portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower portion of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extending portion 3586 j extends below the third hole 3571 c. Therefore, the third working portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

  When the action lever 3586 is moved to the leftmost position (state of action position), as shown in FIG. Is projected into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second operation portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586 j of the action lever 3586 is detected by the action lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the action lever 3586 is moved to the most right (state in the non-action position), the lock piece 3586 d and the first action portion 3586 f are located to the right of the first hole 3571 a. The left end of the second application portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and is in a non-detection state.

  The action lever 3586, which will be described in detail later, is moved to the action position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back top first decoration unit 3510. By doing this, the rotation of the back up rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 can be restricted (locked). Therefore, when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the non-operation position, the lock piece 3586d comes out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates back to the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  The left end of each of the first operation portion 3586f, the second operation portion 3586i, and the third operation portion 3586k is a first opening / closing arm 3521 of the back first decoration unit 3510; The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the second decoration unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the third back decoration unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm The arm 3561 can be slid upwards.

5-9 f-5. Back lift unit]
Next, the back-up lifting unit 3600 of the back-up movable rendering unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 172 to 177. FIG. 172 (a) is a perspective view of the back up elevating unit in the back up movable presentation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 (b) is a perspective view of the back up elevating unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 173 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back raising and lowering unit disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit and seen from the front, and FIG. 173 (b) is a back raising and lowering unit as a movable unit and a fixed unit It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back. FIG. 174 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up raising and lowering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up lift unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up lift unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 177 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the movable side unit of the back-up raising and lowering unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 177 (b) is a drive when the movable side unit of the back-raising and raising unit is at the lowered position It is an explanatory view showing a system from the front.

  The back up lift unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 on the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the back wall of the back box 3010. The back up lift unit 3600 has a movable side unit 3610 to which the back up first decoration unit 3510 and the back up rotation base unit 3570 are attached on the front, and a fixed side unit up and down the moveable unit 3610 to be mounted in the back box 3010 And 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 174, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up raising / lowering unit 3600 is attached to the substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in front view and the upper right corner of the front side of the movable side base 3611 A back-up rotation drive motor 3612 with a pivoting rotation shaft projecting rearward through the movable side base 3611, a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612, and a rotation drive gear 3613 And a rotation base drive gear 3614 meshed with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the movable side base 3611.

  The movable unit 3610 has a motor cover 3615 attached to the front of the movable base 3611 so as to cover the back top rotational drive motor 3612 and a flat base cover 3616 attached to the rear of the movable base 3611. And a movable side relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616.

  The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3611a and the barrel portion 3611a, which cylindrically protrudes forward from the lower portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. A central link gear 3611b which meshes with the second link third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and penetrates back and forth at a position on the upper left from the center in the left and right direction A rotation detection piece 3611d attached to the long hole-like elevation slit 3611c and the lower surface of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 See FIG. 177).

  The axial cylindrical portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 is formed to have a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the rear upper rotation base unit 3571 in the rear upper rotation base unit 3570, and rotates the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d. It can be inserted as possible. The center link gear 3611 b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 in the upper back rotation base unit 3570 and the third link gear portion 3578 b of the third drive link gear member 3578. Are formed at the same pitch.

  The movable side relay substrate 3617 includes the back upper relay substrate 3659 of the fixed side unit 3650, the first back decoration substrate 3514 of the first back decoration unit 3510, and the second back rotation base relay substrate 3591 of the second rotation base unit 3570. The connection with the back rotation drive motor 3612 is relayed. The base cover 3616 has the lifting slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 attached to the left and right ends of the rear surface. On the rear side of the base cover 3616, the lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the fixed side unit 3650 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600 is a substantially square fixed side base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending leftward and rightward in front view, and the fixed side base 3651. In the movable gear unit 3610, a spur gear-like elevation gear portion 3652a rotatably mounted around a front and back axis in the front center of the front face and a column shape projecting forward from near the outer periphery of the front face of the elevation gear portion 3652a An elevation rotating body 3652 having an elevation drive pin 3652b slidably inserted in the elevation slit 3611c of the movable side base 3611, and a detection piece 3652c fan-shaped extending outward from the elevation gear portion 3652a; Lifting drive gear 3653 which meshes with lifting gear portion 3652a of lifting lifter 3652, and lifting drive gear 653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 (a heat source) that is attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed unit 3650 is attached to the front of the fixed base 3651, and is mounted on the front and rear sides of the fixed base 3651 in the vicinity of the left and right sides of the fixed base 3651. The base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the upper and lower ends of the lower surface of the fixed base 3651 outside the pair of elevating slide rails 3656 and the pair of elevating slide rails 3656. The lower side is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 and the movable side base 3611 is urged to move upward, and the pair of elevating springs 3657 are provided.

  Furthermore, the fixed side unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a which penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular arc shape through which the elevation drive pin 3652b of the elevation rotary body 3652 can pass, and a pair of elevation slide rails The fixed front cover 3658 is attached to the front of the fixed base 3651 so as to cover the front of the raising / lowering rotating body 3652 between 3656 and the back of the fixed base 3651. The back upper relay board 3659 connecting the movable side relay board 3617, the back up and down drive motor 3654 (heat source), and the elevation detection sensor 3655 to the lower right relay board 3034 and the back side of the back upper relay board 3659 And a substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed side base 3651 so as to cover it.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up lifting unit 3600 will be described. In the back-up raising / lowering unit 3600, the mounting cylinder 3571 d of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably inserted into the barrel portion 3611 a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 through the mounting cylindrical portion 3571 d of the back top rotation base 3571. Thus, the movable side unit 3610 rotatably mounts the back up rotation base unit 3570 in a state where it can not move forward, around an axis extending back and forth centering on the axial cylindrical portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) be able to.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is engaged with the rotation base driven gear 3752 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the drive of the back up rotation drive motor 3612, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about the barrel portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). It can be done. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back-up rotation base unit 3570 90 degrees between the horizontally extended horizontal position and the vertically extended vertical position. The rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  In the assembled state, the back-up lift unit 3600 can move (lift) the movable unit 3610 only vertically with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of lift slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650. . In the movable unit 3610, the elevation drive pin 3652b of the elevation rotary member 3652 in the fixed unit 3650 is slidably inserted in the elevation slit 3611c of the movable base 3611 in the lateral direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is restricted by the height position of the elevation drive pin 3652 b in the elevation rotary member 3652. The movable unit 3610 is biased to move upward by a pair of lift springs 3657.

  In the back-up lift unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), in the normal state, the lift drive pin 3652b, which revolves by the rotation of the lift rotary body 3652, is directly above the rotation center of the lift rotary body 3652. On the other hand, the movable unit 3610 is positioned at the uppermost position by the elevation drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652 c of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3655. In this state, the elevation drive pin 3652 b is in contact with the right end in the elevation slit 3611 c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610.

  Therefore, the weight on the movable side unit 3610 acts on the lift drive pin 3652b, and even if the lift rotary body 3652 tries to rotate clockwise in a front view through the lift drive pin 3652b, the lift drive pin 3652b Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevation slit 3611c, the elevation rotary body 3652 can not rotate in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is blocked. ing. That is, the movable side unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Thus, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 does not act on the back up and down drive motor 3554 via the up and down gear portion 3652 a of the up and down rotating body 3652 and the up and down drive gear 3653. The load is not applied to the upper and lower drive motor 3554.

  When the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back-up lifting and lowering drive motor 365 from the state of the lifting position, the lifting and lowering drive pin 3652 b of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 moves leftward. The movable unit 3610 moves to the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 3657 via the lift slit 3611 c while the lift drive pin 3652 b slides leftward in the lift slit 3611 c. It will move downward against it. The lift drive pin 3652b, which revolves by rotating the lift rotating body 365 counterclockwise, revolves downward below the same height as the rotation center of the lift rotating body 3652, the left-right direction of the lift drive pin 3652b The direction of movement is changed to move downward while moving rightward, and it slides rightward in the inside of the elevation slit 3611c.

  When the elevating drive pin 3652b is positioned directly below the center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the rotation of the elevating rotary body 3652 is stopped, and the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is stopped simultaneously, and the movable side unit 3610 is the most It will be in the state of the descent | fall position which descent | falled (refer FIG. 177 (b)). When moving the movable unit 3610 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up lift drive motor 3554 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the lift rotary body 3652 clockwise in a front view. Can be returned to the raised position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 3657, and the load on the back-up lift drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  As described above, the back-up lift unit 3600 rotates the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, the back-up third decoration unit 3550, and the back-up rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved (lifted) up and down between the raised position and the lowered position.

5-9 f-6. Operation of back-to-back movable effect unit]
Next, the operation of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 178 to 183. FIG. 178 is an explanatory drawing showing a drive system for lifting and lowering when the movable side unit of the lifting and lowering unit in lifting and lowering unit in lifting and lowering unit in lifting and lowering unit is in lifting position and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the side unit is a fall position. FIG. 180 is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the acting position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is at the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back up rotation base unit is at the horizontal position. FIG. 182 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the down position and the back up rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back up movable effect unit, and FIG. 183 is the back up movable effect unit FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position in the down position of the movable side unit in FIG. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is at the vertical position.

  FIG. 185 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is at the down position and the back up rotation base unit is at the vertical position in the back up movable effect unit. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever regulates the rotation at the acting position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is at the vertical position. When the unit is in the lowered position and the back top rotation base unit is in the vertical position, the action lever acts on the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit in the action position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is.

  In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 178 etc., the back up movable effect unit 3500 is in the state of the rising position where the movable side unit 3610 of the back up raising and lowering unit 3600 is at the highest position, and The 3570 is in a horizontally extended horizontal position. In this state, with the back top first decoration unit 3510 at the center, the back top second decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back top first decorative unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back top second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are biased by the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563, respectively. Thus, they are in the closed position where they abut each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 178, the elevation drive pin 3652b of the stationary unit 3650 in the back elevation unit 3600 is positioned slightly to the right with respect to the center of rotation of the elevation rotator 3652. And the right end in the raising / lowering slit 3611c extended to the left and right of the movable side base 3611. As a result, through the elevating slit 3611c of the movable unit 3610, the raising / lowering driving pin 3652b, the back first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, the back third decoration unit 3550 Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable unit 3610 acts, the elevation drive pin 3652b can not revolve further clockwise in a front view direction, and is moved downward of the movable unit 3610. Movement is restricted and locked in the raised position.

  Therefore, in the normal state, the loads of the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, the third back decoration unit 3550, the second rotation base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 The back up and down drive motor 3554 is not acted on, and no load is applied to the back up and down drive motor 3554. In the normal state, a detection piece 3652 c of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 which revolves the lifting and lowering drive pin 3652 b is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the lifting drive pin 3652b of the lifting rotary body 3652 is revolved in the counterclockwise direction in front view by driving the back-up lifting drive motor 3654, the lifting drive pin 3652b is moved in the lifting slit 3611c. The movable unit 3610 moves downward as the elevation drive pin 3652b descends, and when the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position, the revolution of the elevation drive pin 3652b is stopped. Then, the movable side unit 3610 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 179).

  The back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 to the lowered position, whereby the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, the back-up third decoration The body unit 3550 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned at the top of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 193).

  When moving the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up lift unit 3600 between the raised position and the lowered position, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the acting position. There is. In a state where the operating lever 3586 is moved to the left operating position by the driving of the operating lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. It is in the state of being inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525. As a result, the action lever 3586 can not rotate around the first attachment shaft member 3525, so the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to which the action lever 3586 is attached is the first attachment shaft member 3525 (movable side The rotation is locked with respect to the barrel portion 3611 a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

  In addition, since the lock piece 3586 d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 even if the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly deviated from the horizontal position. By inserting the back up rotation base unit 3570, the back up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position and the rotation can be locked.

  In the action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extension 3586g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extending portion 3586j (the left end of the slide attaching portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with the predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decoration unit 3550 from the right. Thus, by the action lever 3586, rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530 around the axis about the second hole 3571 b and rotation of the back upper third decoration unit 3550 in the back upper direction. Rotation about an axis about the third hole 3571 c of the base 3571 is blocked. Therefore, by moving (raising and lowering) the movable side unit 3610 of the back up and down lifting unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back up second decoration unit 3530, the back up third decoration unit 3550, and the back up rotation base unit 3570 Even if vibration acts, the back upper second decoration unit 3530, the back upper third decoration unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 do not swing by the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position. ing.

  The back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, the back top third decoration unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are provided via the movable side unit 3610 of the back top lifting unit 3600, When the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 via the operating lever drive gear 3584 while in the lowered position, the motor is engaged with the operating lever pinion gear 3585 The operating lever 3586 in the horizontal state is moved to the right non-operating position by the operating lever rack gear 3586a, and the lock piece 3586d is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 181). As a result, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back-up rotation base 3571, and the barrel portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to

  In the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable presentation unit 3500, as shown in FIG. The third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are in mesh with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  With the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to turn the rotation base drive gear 3614 in a front view counterclockwise When rotated in the peripheral direction, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated by the center link gear 3611 b (the first hole 3571 a, the mounting tube portion 3571 d, and the like) via the rotation base driven gear 3752 meshed with the rotation base drive gear 3614 And rotates clockwise in a front view (see FIG. 183). At this time, since the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611 b, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 meshes with the second link gear 3577 and the third third gear for meshing with the center link gear 3611 b. The link gear 3582 will rotate while revolving around the center link gear 3611 b, and will rotate in the clockwise direction with respect to the back top rotation base 3571, respectively. When the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are rotated, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573 b and the third link gear portion 3578 b, and the second drive is driven. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back top rotation base 3571. That is, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the second hole 3571 b and the third hole 3571 c are rotatably attached to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base 3571. Drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578 revolve clockwise around first hole 3571a, and second drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578 However, each of the second hole 3571 b and the third hole 3571 c of the back-up rotation base 3571 rotates in a counterclockwise direction (rotation).

  Because the second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578 b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable unit 3610 The rotation angles of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611 b and the rotation angles of the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573 b, and the third link gear portion 3578 b are the same. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated about the center link gear 3611 b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 maintain the rotation direction constant while maintaining the center link gear. It revolves around 3611 b (see FIGS. 183 and 184). Since the back upper second decoration unit 3530 and the back upper third decoration unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively. When the rotation base 3571 is rotated, the second back decoration unit 3530 and the third back decoration unit 3550 keep the upper and lower orientations constant, and the circumference of the first back decoration unit 3510 is It will revolve around.

  In the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the back-up second decoration unit 3530 is disposed on the right side of the back-up first decoration unit 3510 when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. Since the back upper third decoration unit 3550 is disposed on the left side of the first decoration unit 3510, when the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it is in the vertical position. The two decoration units 3530 and the back third decoration unit 3550 are arranged on the lower side and the upper side of the first back decoration unit 3510, respectively, with their top and bottom orientations unchanged (FIG. 184). See). Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back-up third decoration unit 3550, the back-up first decoration unit 3510, and the back-up second decoration unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top . In this state, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a in the closed position, respectively. It is positioned so as to cross over substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 195).

  In a state where the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. The 3586 d is directed upward. In this state, when the operation lever pinion motor 3583 is driven to rotate the operation lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the operation lever 3586 is moved upward from the non-operation position to the operation position The lock piece 3586 d of the action lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525 b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 186). As a result, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the vertical position.

  In the back-up movable presentation unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, the action lever 3586 moves with the upward movement. The tip (upper end) of each of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of 3586 is a receiving boss of the first opening and closing arm 3521 in the back first decoration unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the back upper third decoration unit 3550 from below respectively The arm 3521, the second opening and closing arm 3541, and the third opening and closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  When the first openable arm 3521, the second openable arm 3541, and the third openable arm 3561 move upward, respectively, the first left movable decorative lens of the first decorative unit 3510 on the back is in the closed position. 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the third left movable decoration of the back upper third decoration unit 3550 The lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be apart from each other to be in an open position (see FIG. 183).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the first in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between one left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decoration in the back upper second decorative unit 3530 The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the lens 3532 and the lens 3532 is in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, when the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are in the open position, respectively, the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back front decoration unit 3100 are positioned so as to be cut across substantially the entire height within the frame of the character 2500. They are lined up and down with approximately the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower central lens 3131 (see FIG. 196).

  Note that, in order to return the back-up movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the operation reverse to the above.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the first back decorative unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens 3531 of the second back decorative unit 3530. When the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decoration unit 3550 abut each other, they are different from each other. It is possible to show the decoration of the character, and in the state where the third decorative unit 3550, the first decorative unit 3510, and the second decorative unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right, three characters. And a state in which a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally to make the player recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It can be. When the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are arranged from the top to the bottom, The logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is in the state of vertical writing, and in this state, the logo can be recognized by the player.

  Thus, according to the back-up movable rendering unit 3500, the relative positions of the back-upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 The back decoration first decoration unit 3510, the back decoration second decoration unit 3530, and the back by the action lever 3586 which moves between the action position and the non-action position according to the rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position). It is possible to show different effects to the player by exerting another action of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action) to the upper third decoration body unit 3550, so that the player can be varied by various effects. As a result, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

[5-9 g. Back and forth movable production unit]
Next, the back and bottom movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 188 and the like. Fig. 188 (a) is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the back-to-back movable effect unit, and (c) is a back-to-back movable decorative body in the back-to-back movable effect unit. It is a rear view shown in the state which raised the unit. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. Back-to-back movable effect unit 3700 is mounted in back-to-back movable decoration unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration and back box 3010 to move back-to-back movable decoration unit 3710 up and down. And a lower drive unit 3750.

  Under the back movable decoration unit 3710, a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged side by side is formed under the roof extending to the left and right, and the part of each gate penetrates back and forth A plurality of back lower door members 3712 attached to the main body 3711 and the back lower decorative body main body 3711 so as to open and close in the form of a double door in pairs as a pair, and a back lower door member 3712 It is attached to the back lower side of the lower back decoration body main body 3711 more back than the lower back decoration base base 3713 which is attached to the right and left so that it can slide horizontally in the front lower part of the lower back decoration base 3713 A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the back lower door member 3712 on the left side in a front view of a plurality of back lower door members 3712 in the pair and the left and right direction at the upper front of the back lower decoration base 3713 Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  The back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the back side of the back bottom decoration base 3713 and slides the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 in different directions in the left-right direction. And one end side is attached to the upper end of the opening / closing rotary body 3716 and the other end side is attached to the back lower decoration base 3713 and the lower back door member 3712 And a door closing spring 3717 biasing the opening and closing rotary body 3716 so as to hingely rotate in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 biases the opening and closing rotary body 3716 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view.

  Furthermore, the back rear movable decoration unit 3710 is disposed on the back side of the back bottom decoration lens 3718 (see FIG. 198) attached to the back side of the back bottom decoration body 3711 and the back side of the back bottom decoration lens 3718 Wiring cable 3701 which is attached to the underside decorative substrate 3719 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and the back side decorative substrate 3719 attached to the underside decorative body base 3713 and connects the underside decorative substrate 3719 and the underside relay substrate 3757 And an upper wiring cover 3720 that can be guided. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713 to form a space opened downward that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view and extends short from the right end An under-back drive base 3751 having an extending link slit 3751 a, and an under-back support unit 3710 mounted on the upper and movably mounted on the top of the under-back drive base 3751. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 rotatably mounted respectively near the left and right ends of the front of the back lower drive base 3751 and moving the back lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and a rear lower drive base 3751 behind The lower back drive motor 3754 attached to the side and the lower back drive motor 3754 transmit rotation to transmit a pair of Includes a plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the descending arm 3753 to different directions, the.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably mounted in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751 on the lower end side and rotatably mounted on the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decoration unit 3710 at the upper end side. A rod-like link arm 3756 is provided. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached at a position on the right side in a rear view with respect to the rotation center of the opening / closing rotary body 3716. As a result, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotary body 3716 rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear against the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Furthermore, the back bottom drive unit 3750 is attached to the back side of the back bottom drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 and the back bottom drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay substrate 3034. A lower portion of the substrate 3757 which can be guided through the wiring cable 3701 attached above the lower rear relay substrate 3757 on the rear side of the lower rear drive base 3751 and connecting the lower rear relay substrate 3757 and the lower rear decoration substrate 3719 And a wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the lower back driving base 3751 to form an upwardly open space capable of accommodating the wiring cable 3701. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758 a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in rear view.

  Subsequently, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back downward movable effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the back downward movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 188 (a) and (b)). In this state, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotary body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717. A plurality of doors 3711 (back and bottom door members 3712) are in a closed state. In this state, it is located lower than the upper end of the portion forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center character 2500 and can hardly be seen from the front (see FIG. 133 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the back lower drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lift arms 3753 so that the side facing each moves upward, the back lower lift base 3752 moves upward, causing the back lower to move. An under-back movable decoration unit 3710 attached to the lifting base 3752 is lifted.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 in the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710, the link arm 3756 is lifted together with the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710, and the bottom end is back bottom The link slit 3751a in the drive base 3751 is slid upward (left in rear view).

  When the lower back movable ornament unit 3710 rises, when the lower end side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 can not move further upward. At this position (first rising position), the back downward movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the vertical movement of the back downward movable decorative unit 3710. In this state, the plurality of gate parts of the back bottom decoration body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center character 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center character 2500. Multiple gates of the state can be viewed (see FIG. 197).

  In the state of the first elevation position, when the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 is further raised, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link The opening / closing rotary body 3716 attached to the upper end side of the arm 3756 is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear against the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 188 (c)). When the opening / closing rotary body 3716 rotates clockwise in a rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in the direction of opening the plurality of back lower door members 3712. As the door of the gate (back lower door member 3712) is opened, the lift is stopped. When the lower back door member 3712 is in the open position (the second raised position), the lower back decoration lens 3718 disposed on the rear side can be seen through the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 (FIG. 198) See). In this state, the light emission decoration of the open gate can be performed by making the LED of the back bottom decoration substrate 3719 emit light.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3700, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back-to-back decorative substrate 3719 of the back-to-back movable decorative unit 3710 and the back-to-back relay substrate 3757 of the back-to-back drive unit 3750 is the upper wiring cover 3720 And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 includes an upper guiding portion 3720a which is curved between the upper side and the right side in the rear view and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758 a which is curved between the lower side and the right side in the rear view and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 and the back bottom relay substrate 3757 extends rightward in the back view at the left end in the back view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 side. It is attached so that it extends to the right in the rear view at the rear end on the lower side of the lower wiring cover on the lower rear drive unit 3750 side. Thus, in the normal position where the back-bottom movable decorative unit 3710 is lowered most, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a without extremely bending. The under-back decorative substrate 3719 and the under-back relay substrate 3757 are well connected (see FIG. 188 (b)).

  On the other hand, in a state where the back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 is lifted, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the wiring cable 3701 has the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 and the right side in a rear view (upper guide portion 3720a) and the lower wiring. The under-back decorative substrate 3719 and the under-back relay substrate 3757 are connected in a state of being separated respectively from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side (lower guide portion 3758 a) in a rear view. When the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 descends from the elevated state, it is smoothly bent without being bent by being guided to the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a respectively, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower wiring cover It will be housed in 3758. Therefore, even if the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 and the back bottom drive unit 3750 is repeatedly raised and lowered by the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710, Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 189 to 198. FIG. 189 is a front view of the game board showing the back middle left decoration and the middle back right decoration of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit in a state of being moved to the center side appearance position. In FIG. 190, after moving the back left decoration and back right decoration of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit to the appearance position closer to the center, each first decoration surface is directed forward. FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board shown in a broken state, and FIG. 191 shows the state of FIG. 190 by rotating the back left decoration body and the back right decoration body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the left is directed forward, and the back left decoration and the back right decoration of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are rotated from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 3rd decoration side in the state which turned to the front.

  FIG. 193 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first rear decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens of the second rear decorative unit, and the second With the two right movable decorative lenses and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decoration unit in the closed position, respectively, the back upper first decoration unit, the back upper It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved to the lowered position while the back top rotation base unit is in the horizontal position so that the second decoration unit and the back top third decoration unit are arranged horizontally, In FIG. 194, the back top rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view from the state of FIG. 193 and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit Diagonally FIG. 195 is a front view of the gaming board shown in FIG. 194 when the back-up rotation base unit is further rotated 45 degrees clockwise in a front view clockwise direction from the state of FIG. FIG. 196 is a front view of the game board showing the unit, the back second decoration unit, and the back third decoration unit vertically aligned, and FIG. 196 is a view from the state of FIG. 195 of the first decoration unit. First left movable decorative lens and first right movable decorative lens, second left movable decorative lens of second back movable unit and second right movable decorative lens, and third left movable decoration of second back movable unit In the front view of the game board which shows the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in a state where the lens and the third right movable decorative lens are respectively in the open position. is there.

  FIG. 197 is a front view of the game board showing the back movable movable decoration unit of the back lower movable presentation unit in the back unit moved to the first raised position, and FIG. 198 is the back downward movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which raised the body unit further and moved it to the 2nd raising position.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 133 and FIG. 140, etc., the game board 5 is a display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center character 2500. Can be visually recognized well from the player side (forward). In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are located at the back of the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 at the retracted position. It is in the state, and a part of the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 is slightly visible through the frame of the center character 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decoration body 3310 is in the retracted position where it has moved to the leftmost position, and is positioned behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 can not see. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decoration body 3410 is in the state of the retracted position where it has moved to the rightmost, and a part is visible through the frame of the center work 2500 on the right side of the center work 2500 There is.

  In the normal state, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the state of the most raised position, and the horizontal position where the back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in the state of The back top second decoration unit 3530 is on the right side with the back top first decoration unit 3510 at the center, and the back top third decoration unit 3550 is on the left side. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back top first decorative unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back top second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are biased by the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563, respectively. , Respectively, in the closed position where they are in contact with each other, each forming a decoration of a predetermined character. In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, the third to third decoration unit 3550, the first to back decoration unit 3510, and the second to back decoration unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown horizontally by one letter, and the predetermined logo is in the upper part in the frame of the center character 2500 above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 It is visible from the player side (forward).

  The game board 5 has the back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. 3100, back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-left movable effect unit 3300, back-to-right movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, and back-to-back movable effect unit 3700, perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect) Do.

  Specifically, for example, as effects using the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back-to-back left decorative body 3210 and the back-to-back right decoration that are separated from each other to the left and right by driving the back-to-back drive motor 3254 The body 3220 is moved closer to one another and moved to a generally central emerging position (see FIG. 189). As a result, the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are positioned approximately at the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration The decoration with 3220 will be in the state of uniting. In the state of this appearance position, the back middle left decoration body 3210 and the back middle right decoration body 3220 interrupt the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, attracting the player's interest strongly In addition to being able to make it possible to form one big decoration (decoration that imitates the petals of a cherry tree) by uniting, it is assumed that there may be something good for the player and there is a sense of expectation for the game. It can be enhanced.

  As effects using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right movement drive of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the motor 3452, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are positioned closer to the center closer to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center character 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center role product 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  This makes it possible to surprise the player by making the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 visible, and attracting the player's attention to the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 It can be done. At this time, the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the back left decoration substrate 3334 and the back right decoration substrate 3434 to further attract the interest of the player. It can be done. In this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410, the effect collaborating with the effect image can also be enjoyed.

  The back left rotation drive motor (heat source) and the back right rotation drive (not shown) of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430 with the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 moved to the appearance position The player can be entertained by rotating the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 around a vertically extending axis by a motor (heat source). When stopping the rotating back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410, the first decoration surface 3311, 3141 of the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 may be stopped so as to face forward ( 190) (see FIG. 191), the second decorative surfaces 3312 and 3412 may be stopped forward (see FIG. 191), and the third decorative surfaces 3313 and 3314 may be stopped forward (see FIG. 192). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 are stopped, the player can enjoy the changing decoration and the back decoration 3310 and the back right decoration with the desired decoration. Whether the body 3410 is stopped or not can cause harahara or pounding, which can enhance the player's interest.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 can be moved independently of each other, so only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the front facing decorative surface may be different. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  As an effect using the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, with the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the action position in the normal position When the elevation drive pin 3652b is revolved counterclockwise in a front view by the upper elevation drive motor 3554, the movable unit 3610 moves downward and is attached to the movable unit 3610 along with the revolution of the elevation drive pin 3652b The first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are lowered. When the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and the revolution stops, the back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top third decoration via the movable side unit 3610 The body unit 3550 is positioned at the lowered position side by side (horizontally) (see FIG. 193).

  In this state, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are located above the center in the vertical direction of the center character 2500 and above the center. The upper half of the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, predetermined logos formed by three of the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Since it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the effect image being displayed, it can make the player think that something good may have happened, raising the player's expectation for the game It can be done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 193, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 from the operating position to the non-operating position to the right, the first mounting The lock piece 3586d inserted in the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is in a state of coming out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is released by the action lever 3586 and the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 rotates the rotation base drive gear 3614 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front The back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates clockwise in a front view centering on the center link gear 3611 b through the rotation base driven gear 3752 meshing with the base drive gear 3614. At this time, since the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611 b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 meshing with the center link gear 3611 b form the center link gear. It rotates while revolving around 3611b, and their rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear The members 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decoration unit 3530 and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 keep the vertical direction constant, and the back-up first decoration is maintained. It revolves around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 194 and 195).

  When the back second rotating base unit 3570 rotates, the back second second decoration unit 3530 and the back third decoration unit 3550 orbit around the first back decoration unit 3510. Since the upper and lower orientations of the decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are maintained, it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently recognize a predetermined logo by three decoration characters. You can enjoy the changing movement of the logo into a vertical logo.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view from the horizontal position, the vertical position is reached and the rotation stops. In this state, the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 195). Thereby, the logo formed by the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 has its frame at the center of the center character 2500 frame. Since it looks like it goes through substantially the entire height of the inside, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to enhance the player's interest.

  The back top rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are vertically arranged. The action lever drive motor 3583 rotates the action lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and when the action lever 3586 in the non-action position is moved upward to the action position, the action lever 3586 is locked. The piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back-upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotationally locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k of the action lever 3586 (Upper end) is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decoration unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541 b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the back upper third decoration The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the unit 3550 is brought into contact with the lower end, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first first decoration unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back second second decoration unit 3530 are in the closed position. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other And the open position (see FIG. 196).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decoration so as to vertically cross the left and right center in the game area 5a The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and the second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 The 3533 and the back front lower central lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are aligned straight from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player It can be done.

  In this state, the LEDs mounted on the third back decoration substrate 3554, the first back decoration substrate 3514, the second back decoration substrate 3534, and the lower back decoration substrate 3134 are appropriately lighted to By making the fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 sequentially emit light, the line of sight of the player can be guided upward or downward. , Can entertain the player. In addition, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530. Because the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower central lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that crosses the center of the direction (see FIG. 200).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the lower unit 3000, for example, when the lower back movable decoration unit 3710 is moved to the first elevation position from the normal state by the lower back drive motor 3754, the lower back decoration The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center character 2500. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the ability to see the under-back decoration body 3711 (see FIG. 197). In the state of the first elevation position, the plurality of gates of the back bottom decoration body 3711 are closed by the plurality of back bottom door members 3712.

  When the lower back movable decoration unit 3710 slightly rises from the first elevation position to the second elevation position, the plurality of back lower door members 3712 are hinge-rotated to open the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration main body 3711 (See FIG. 198). By opening the gate (the lower back door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that something is good or not, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. In this state, when the LED of the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light to make the open gate emit light, it is possible to convince the player that the opportunity has come and to further enhance the player's interest .

  As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back lower movable It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3700 etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the interest for the player's game decreases. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different Embodiments of the Game Board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 shows another embodiment of the game board in which the back-side movable presentation unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for emitting and decorating the back front and bottom center lens of the center character stage and the back front decoration unit. FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 199, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of emitting light downward are provided on the back second decoration substrate 3534 of the second back decoration unit 3530 in the second back movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Thus, by rotating the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back-up second decoration unit 3530 is in the center of the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) or the back front decoration With the lower LED 3534a emitting light in this state, the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the lower back central lens 3131 can be decorated by emitting light by bringing the lower LED 3534a into light emission in this state. . Therefore, even at a portion where the decorative substrate provided with the LED can not be arranged at the back, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to emit light and decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted A light emission can be performed.

5-12. Effects by door frame and game board]
Next, effects using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202. In FIG. 200, in the back up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back up rotation base unit is placed in the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right move of the back up first decoration unit The decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative unit, respectively It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition of each 1st fixed decoration lens, the 2nd fixed decoration lens, and the 3rd fixed decoration lens as a state of an open position. In FIG. 201, a third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached to the plate unit 320 instead of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and the first decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit faces forward, and It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in a normal state. In FIG. 202, in FIG. 201, with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotator unit facing forward, in the back movable presentation unit in the back unit of the game board, the back up rotation base unit is in the vertical position. And the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit respectively in the state of the open position It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition.

  First, effects by the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 having the door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. As effects by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there are effects using the effect decoration rotary unit 530 in the door frame 3 and the back up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is vertically positioned with the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position. , And move the operation lever 3586 from the non-operating position to the operating position, so that the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit are in the open position.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 200, a third fixed decorative lens 3553, a first fixed decorative lens 3513, a second fixed decorative lens 3533, and a back formed at substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower central lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are aligned from the top to the bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3554, the first back decorative substrate 3514, the second back decorative substrate 3534, and the lower back decoration substrate 3134. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower central lens 3131 are lighted and decorated sequentially from the top to allow the player's line of sight to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotary unit 530 in the door frame 3. While it is possible to guide the player to enjoy the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 and operate the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 to ensure the player participation type effect Can be entertained.

  In the above embodiment, a second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A provided with a door frame side second effect display device 460A in place of the above-mentioned effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the dish unit 320, In the state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is directed forward, the same effect as described above may be performed. Also by this, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

  Subsequently, an effect by the pachinko machine 1 in which the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B including the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. In this pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 201, in the normal state, in the third effect decoration rotary unit 530B attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface 532 of the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side (inside) is visible from the player side (front side). In the first decorative surface 532 rotatable about a second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1, the logo decoration 532a having the center orientation is correctly oriented.

  Above the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B (dish unit 320), in the game area 5a of the game board 5 seen through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3, through the frame of the center character 2500 back side of the back unit 3000 The display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the player can be visually recognized well from the player side (forward). In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the left back and right back decoration 3210 and the back and right back decoration 3220 are in the state of retracted positions that are most apart from each other, and pass through the frame of the center character 2500 Some are slightly visible. The back left decoration 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state of a retracted position behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100, and can hardly be seen from the front. The back right decoration 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the state of the retracted position, and a part is visible through the inside of the frame on the right side of the center character 2500.

  In the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 is in the rising position, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. With the body unit 3510 at the center, the second back decoration unit 3530 is on the right side, and the third back decoration unit 3550 is on the left side. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back top first decorative unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back top second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third third body unit 3550 are in a closed position in which they are in contact with each other, and in each case the decoration of a predetermined character ( The illustration is omitted. Therefore, in the upper part within the frame of the center character 2500, a predetermined logo in which three characters are aligned left and right is visible from the player side (forward).

  In the state shown in FIG. 201, for example, in the back up movable rendering unit 3500, with the movable side unit 3610 of the back up and down lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decoration unit and the second left movable of the back top second decoration unit by moving the action lever 3586 from the inactive position to the active position. The decoration lens and the second right movable decoration lens, and the third left movable decoration lens and the third right movable decoration lens of the back third decoration unit are in the open position.

  In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower back central lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. , From top to bottom, can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3554, the first back decorative substrate 3514, the second back decorative substrate 3534, and the lower back decoration substrate 3134. By making the second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower central lens 3131 emit light sequentially from above, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third effect decoration rotary unit 530B in the door frame 3. . When the light emitting decoration from above reaches the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the light emitting decoration of the decoration rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 is performed by the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536 At the same time, the decoration rotary unit 530 with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis line CL1 horizontally extending by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, and the second decorative surface portion Let 533 be directed forward (see FIG. 202). Thereby, the first decoration surface portion 532 seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is different in decoration from the player's line of sight guided by the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B below from inside the game area 5a. To the second decorative surface portion 533, and thus the player can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance, and the sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotary unit 530B. It is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As described above, the effect by the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is triggered by the arrival of the light emitting decoration from above in the game area 5a to the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B. It is desirable to do so, and the player can enjoy a continuous presentation. In addition, the effect by the decoration rotation body unit 530 is the above-mentioned [3-4h-7. It is sufficient to execute the effect as described in the movable effect in the third effect operation unit].

  As an effect different from the above, for example, from the state of FIG. 201, the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is rotated 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, and the second decoration The surface 533 is directed forward. In this state, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are lighted and decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the player's interest is the third effect decoration below the gaming area 5a. The rotor unit 530B is attracted. After that, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated about the first axis line CL so that the second decorative surface 533 that is facing forward moves upward, and the first decorative surface 532 on the opposite side of the second decorative surface 533 is , So as to appear upward from the bottom. By switching between the second decorative surface 533 and the first decorative surface 532, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the upper side (within the game area 5 a) of the third effect decorative rotary unit 530 B.

  Subsequently, with the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lift unit 3600 in the back up movable rendering unit 3500 moved to the lowered position, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the action lever 3586 is not The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative unit and the second right The movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back-top third decorative unit are respectively moved to the open position, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the third The two fixed decorative lenses 3533 and the back front lower central lens 3131 are arranged vertically. Since the effects started from the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B can be made to appear to have moved upward than the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B by emitting and decorating them in order from the bottom, the lift momentum is It is possible to show the player the effect that can be made to be felt, and it is possible to raise the player's mood and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. The effect starting from the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B may be started when the player presses the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing when the player participation type effect is executed.

  In this way, various effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by the various effects, and at the same time it is possible to entertain the player, and the interest for the player's game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls contact the obstacle nails. Thus, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the gaming ball to enjoy the movement. In the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game balls is provided at an appropriate position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. When the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball enters the central chance entrance 2535 at the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the gaming area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002, so there is a high probability Accepted at the first starting port 2002. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the attack unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the state's first big winning opening 2005 and so on.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300 , And may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951.

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center work 2500 to the top of the attacker unit 2400. Just below the downstream end of the right guiding passage 2540, the gate passage 2420 provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 is disposed, and the gaming ball enters the gate passage 2420 with high probability. Do.

  When the game ball hit to the right enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening The second starting opening door 2411 closing the door 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls are received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball for which the “normal hit” is drawn at the gate unit 2003 is accepted by the second start port 2004.

  It should be noted that if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. The number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. The special lottery result that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 15R big hit "," per probability change (probability change) "," time reduction (time shortening) per "," probability change time per shot "," probability change time per short loss "," second big hit (for example, per character) ", etc. is there.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first large winning opening 2005 when the first large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830 is determined by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. ) Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball, by causing the first large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, it is possible to pay out many game balls, which makes the player enjoy. Can.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state that can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big winning after the first big winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting gaming balls. If any of the conditions for receiving a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the mouth 2005 is satisfied, the open / close pattern that makes the game ball into an unacceptable closed state (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps") or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  When the special lottery result is "second big hit (for example, per character)", the second large winning opening 2006 has a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 3.0 seconds) or It will be in the open state until any condition of reception of a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. When the second large winning opening 2006 is in an open state and the gaming ball is received by the second large winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are paid out. When the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 by the distribution piece 2433, the first large winning opening 2005 opens and closes as a "5R big hit", and the second dividing prize 2433 When the second entrance 2432 is assigned, the first large winning opening 2005 opens and closes as "15R big hit".

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each symbol row is fluctuated and fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the drawing result of the special drawing is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, The time until the finalized image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect decoration rotary unit 530 in the door frame 3 according to the drawn special lottery result. , The door frame side effect display device 460, the back unit 3000 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3200, the back left operation effect unit 3300, the back right operation effect unit 3400, the back operation effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the rear effect movable effect unit 3700 etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible for the player to It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 203 is a block diagram of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. FIG. 205 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 203 and a substrate connected thereto.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, then the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and finally the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control output circuit for outputting various signals to an external board or the like. 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitoring a sign of a power failure of a predetermined voltage or a momentary power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Have.

  The main control MPU 1350a is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a ROM for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data. The main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on.

  In addition to its built-in RAM (corresponding to the above "main control built-in RAM") and ROM (hereinafter referred to as "the main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also monitors the operation of its own watchdog timer It also has built-in functions to prevent fraud. The main control built-in RAM, as part of its storage area, is a big hit determination random number storage area for each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area described later, a special symbol random number storage area, a reach determination random number storage area And a random number storage area for variation type, and a start storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area, which will be described later.

  Among these, the starting memory information storage area includes a first starting memory information storage area for a first special symbol and a second starting memory information storage area for a second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a big hit flag area capable of storing the value of the big hit flag described later. The big hit flag indicates not only whether it is lost (00H) or big hit (01H) but also small hit (02H), as described later.

  Therefore, if the main control MPU 1310a accesses one storage area, ie, the big hit flag area, without accessing the small hit flag area capable of storing the value of the small hit flag, the main It is also possible to grasp simultaneously whether it is a small hit.

  The main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique (world only) code for identifying an individual is assigned by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM for reference.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). The main control output circuit 1310 c has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like at its various input terminals. The function-equipped main control output circuit 1310 ca and the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb provided with this reset terminal and not having a reset function are provided.

  The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The first start opening sensor 3112 detects the game ball entering the first start opening 2002, while the second start opening sensor 3113 detects the game ball entering the second start opening 2004. The general winning opening sensor 3111 detects the gaming ball having entered the general winning opening 2001. The detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113 and the general winning opening sensor 3111 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are respectively determined by the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input port of the input port.

  The gate sensor 2401 detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate unit 2350. The general winning opening sensor 3111 detects the gaming ball having entered the general winning opening 2201. The first large winning opening sensor 2403 outputs a detection signal when detecting that the gaming ball has been accepted in the first large winning opening 2005. The second large winning opening sensor 2402 outputs a detection signal when it is detected that the game ball has been accepted in the second large winning opening 2006. The magnetic sensor 2404 detects fraudulent activity using a magnet. The vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 caused by an external force (a so-called doglike action or the like).

  Detection signals from the distribution detection sensor 2580, the gate sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3111, the first large winning opening sensor 2403, the second large winning opening sensor 2402, the magnetic sensor 2404, and the vibration sensor 2405 described above are respectively An input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a is input through the panel relay board 4161 and the main control input circuit 1310 b attached to the game board 5.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310 ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d. The main control MPU 1310a outputs drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108A, the attacker solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 via the panel relay board 4161.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of the switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. First special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, 1310 ca through panel relay substrate 4161 and function display substrate 1191 A drive signal is output to the symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit with reset function 1313ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca Output various information (game information). The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310 ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e It outputs a signal (blackout clear signal).

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening sensor 3112, the second start opening sensor 3113, the gate sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2403 and the second large winning opening sensor 2402 are, for example, non-contact type electromagnetic type In contrast to the use of the proximity switches of the above-described embodiments, contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011, for example.

  This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 3112, the second start opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2401.

  When the big hit game state which becomes advantageous for the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is opened and the gaming ball frequently enters, so the first or second large winning opening sensor 2402 Detection of gaming balls according to 2403 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long life are used for the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, thereby the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Send various commands as serial data. The payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 is completed as serial data. This signal (payout ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, whereby the input terminal of the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b Receive various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310 a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control with a reset function is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the output circuit 1310 ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the payout control board 951.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. No reset function The main control output circuit 1310 c b transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310 a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310 aa, and in addition to the above-described main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310 ae or the like which is one of various main control serial I / O ports Connected via bus 1310ah. The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, a serial management unit 1310 aec, and the like.

  When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data.

  The transmission buffer register 1310 aeb has, for example, a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310 aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec after setting the plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb.

  The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor” as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ") BC0 is provided. Due to the capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a stores various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off.

  When an operation switch 952 of a payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 952 is outputted from the payout control board 951 and the main The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the control input circuit 1310 b. The various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310 a triggered by this input.

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Next, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing an example of an electrical configuration of the payout control board 951. As shown in FIG.

  The payout control board 951 is a payout control for performing various controls related to payout as shown in FIG. 204 in addition to the operation switch 952 having various functions and the error LED display 953 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A unit 954 is provided. Here, various power supplies supplied to the payout control unit 954 and the payout control board 951, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, the excitation method of the payout motor 834, the switching circuit of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834, power on and off The drive voltage to the payout motor 834 and the switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 will be described.

7-2-1. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 954 performs various controls regarding the payout. The payout control unit 954 receives detection signals from the payout control MPU 954a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 954b, a payout control output circuit 954c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit 954d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830; The CR unit input / output circuit 954e is provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for exchanging various signals with a CR unit (not shown) installed on a pachinko island facility in the game hall.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payment control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payment control built-in ROM"), the operation ((6) The system also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control input circuit 954b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 954b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset IC (hereinafter, referred to as a "dispense control system reset IC") which is a dedicated IC outputting a reset signal not shown ing. That is, since the payout control input circuit 954b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset IC, the various signals based on the information are various outputs It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 954c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). The payout control output circuit 954c has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. A function-based payout control output circuit 954ca and a reset function-free payout control output circuit 954cb not having a reset terminal and not having a reset function are provided.

  The payout control output circuit with reset function 954 ca is a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 954cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset IC is not input. That is, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 954cb is based on the fact that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset IC. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The ball out detection sensor (ball out switch) 827 detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the two ball guide paths formed in the ball guide unit. The counting switch 838 detects gaming balls flowing down in the winning ball passage of the payout device 830. Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the count switch 838 are respectively input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 954a through the payout control input circuit 954b.

  A blade rotation detection switch (rotation angle switch) 840 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to detect the rotation of the discharge blade 834, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 846 is First, it is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout ball inner substrate 847 of the payout device 830 and the payout control input circuit 954b.

  A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a through the control input circuit 954b.

  Whether or not the inside of the full induction channel formed in the lower full ball path unit leading to the full ball receiving hole of the door frame 3 is full with gaming balls (the lower plate 322 is full with gaming balls) The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects the is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  The payout control MPU 954a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box of the game board 5 via the payout control input circuit 954b at the input terminal of the serial input port.

  When the payout control MPU 954a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board as serial data, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (invoice ACK signal) to that effect. By outputting to 954ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca to the main control board.

  The payout control MPU 954a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 954cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby providing a reset function-free payout control output. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit 954 cb to the main control board.

  When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 951 as serial data is completed, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  The payout control MPU 954a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output with reset function is output. The drive signal is output from the circuit 954ca to the payout motor drive circuit 954d, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 954d to the payout motor 834 while the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an error from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The drive signal for displaying on the LED display 953 is outputted to the payout control output circuit 954 ca with reset function, and the drive signal is outputted from the reset control payout control circuit 954 ca to the error LED display 95 3.

  The error LED display 953 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 953 include the following.

  For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal” is displayed. When the number “0” is displayed, it reports that “connection abnormality” (specifically, an abnormality in the electrical connection between the main control board and the payout control board 951 has occurred) doing.

  For example, when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates that “the ball is out” (specifically, the two balls formed in the ball guiding unit 820 based on the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the guiding passage). For example, when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that “the ball is seen” (specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the bending passages 831b and 832b of the dispensing device 830 and the ball At the entrance communicating with the delivery space, 832k, the sprocket and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance to indicate that the sprocket is difficult to rotate.

  For example, when the number "3" is displayed, it is informed that "counting switch error" (specifically, the counting switch 838 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838). ing. For example, when the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that the "retry error" (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the dispensing operation has reached the preset upper limit value).

  For example, when the number "6" is displayed, it is indicated that it is "full" (specifically, based on a detection signal from a full tank switch (not shown), guidance is made to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3) It is reported that the inside of the full tank induction route formed in the lower full tank path unit 860 is full of gaming balls). For example, when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR not connected" (from the payout control board 951 to a CR unit (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko It is reported that the electrical connection is disconnected at any point in the communication. For example, when the number "9" is displayed, it informs that it is "in stock" (specifically, it indicates that the number of gaming balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number). There is.

  The payout control MPU 954a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the resistance from the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca is output. The number of balls and the like of the gaming balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the game hall through the (not shown).

  The payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board to an external terminal board 784 electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall through a resistor not shown. There is. The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) incorporating, for example, an infrared LED and a photo IC.

  The external terminal board 784 is configured to transmit the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information) to the hall computer installed in the game hall through the plurality of photo couplers. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the hall The computer is configured not to malfunction or fail.

  The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer do not malfunction or fail by applying an abnormal voltage to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is configured as. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending button 328 of the lending operation unit (dish unit 320) and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pachinko of the gaming hall It is input to the CR unit (not shown) installed in the island facility.

  The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial method, and this signal is transmitted via the CR unit input / output circuit 954e. Input to the input port of the input port. The CR unit updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of the lent game balls and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit of the rental ball operation unit, and this signal Is input to the display unit. The CR unit lamp (not shown) disposed in the vicinity of the display unit emits light when the supply voltage from the CR unit is supplied.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 and the main control substrate 1310 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 951 and the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The capacitors of FIG. Due to the capacitor for the payout control board 951, the payout control MPU 954a stores various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off.

  The microprocessor (hereinafter referred to as "main control MPU") mounted on the main control board 1310 by the capacitor for the main control board is a RAM (main control MPU) that incorporates various information in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Hereinafter, it can be stored in “main control built-in RAM”. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is given via the payout control input circuit 954b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 954a. The payout control MPU 954a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 954a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Completely erased (cleared).

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 954 cb, and is output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 954 cb to the main control board. When an operation signal corresponding to the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined time period from when the power is turned on and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control substrate 951 The main control MPU determines that the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is a RAM clear signal for completely deleting, and triggered by this, the main control MPU is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. Ru.

7-2-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 951 will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

  The power supply substrate 931 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 931a, a power factor improvement circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power supply generation circuit 931d. The main power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is, for example, AC 24 V, and is supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 931a. The synchronous rectification circuit 931 a rectifies the power supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 931 b. The power factor improvement circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter referred to as "+37 V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931 c. The smoothing circuit 931 c removes the supplied +37 V ripple and smoothes +37 V and supplies it to the power supply generation circuit 931 d.

  The power supply generation circuit 931d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (hereinafter referred to as +12 V DC), and +24 V DC (+24 V DC, hereinafter) They are respectively creating “+ 24V”.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 931 d of the power source board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and of these three types of voltages, two types of voltages of +12 V and +24 V are The main control board provided on the game board 5 is supplied via the payout control board 951. Further, the three kinds of voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 931 d of the power source substrate 931 are the peripheral control substrate 1510 provided on the game board 5 and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. Are supplied separately.

  The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit to remove noise. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a capacitor for the payout control substrate 951 (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the payout control substrate 951. It is also supplied to the payout motor drive circuit 954 d and the like. The +12 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is supplied not only to the payout control input circuit 954 b but also to the payout motor drive circuit 954 d etc., and is provided on the game board 5 via the payout control board 951. Supplied to the main control board.

  The main control board provided on the game board 5 is provided with a +5 V production circuit (not shown). In this +5 V production circuit, a power source of +12 to +5 V supplied via the payout control board 951 is produced Supply to the control filter circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a main control MPU, etc., provided on the power supply substrate 931 via a not shown diode provided on the main control substrate, to the not shown main control substrate capacitor. It is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the power supply of +5 V is supplied to each of the payout control board 951 and the main control board provided on the game board 5, the payout control board 951 supplies power of While the +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d is supplied to the payout control MPU 954a, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, etc. via the payout control filter circuit, the main control board provided on the game board 5 The power supply from +12 V to +5 V created in the power supply creation circuit 931 d of the power supply substrate 931 is created in the non- + 5 V creation circuit, and +5 V created in the main control substrate provided on the game board 5 is the main control filter circuit. The power supply system is to be supplied to the control MPU.

7-2-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 954 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. The payout motor drive circuit 954 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 954 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 954da are generated by the +12 V power supply line to which the +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931d of the power supply substrate 931 is supplied and by the power generation circuit 931d of the power substrate 931 The +5 V power supply line to which the +5 V DC power supply is supplied via the payout control filter circuit is electrically connected, and +12 V and +5 V are respectively applied. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is grounded to the ground (GND).

  A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. The voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 954ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. Be done.

  The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60, and the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834 and the electricity. Of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal that is connected and input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954 da. While supplying to the No. terminal and No. 10 terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834. A detailed description of controlling switching between the case where +12 V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 and the case where +5 V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 will be described later.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively.

  The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals which are the collector terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 correspond to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals which are the base of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. doing. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the drive pulse which is the excitation signal is It outputs to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, and driven from the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca via the resistors PR60 to PR63. It is outputted to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are base terminals of the ICPIC 60 respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834.

  In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD60 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

7-2-4. Discharging Motor Excitation Method]
Next, an excitation method of the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 834, the same small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used.

  In such a dispensing motor 834, when control is performed by a one-phase excitation method in which the coils of a small stepping motor are excited one phase at a time, the generated torque becomes extremely small. So, in this embodiment, when making a discharge motor 834 generate a driving torque and a standstill torque, control by two phase excitation system which excites a coil of a discharge motor 834 two phases at a time is adopted. In this two-phase excitation method, since the coils of the dispensing motor 834 are excited in two phases, it is possible to obtain about twice as much torque as the one-phase excitation method in which the coils of the dispensing motor 834 are excited one phase at a time. As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing control of the dispensing motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the driving torque and the stationary torque.

7-2-5. Switching Circuit of Drive Voltage to Dispensing Motor]
Next, the switching circuit of the motor drive voltage of the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 834, the same small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. In such a dispensing motor 834, the output shaft can be rotated with extremely small torque in the non-excitation state, that is, in a state where no voltage is applied to each phase of the dispensing motor 834.

  As described above, the winning ball motor gear is fixed to the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and the rotation of the winning ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft is the winning ball intermediate gear 841 and the detection disc 842. The sprockets are transmitted to rotate the sprockets via a ball sprocket gear 844. That is, in the non-excitation state of the dispensing motor 834, when the voltage is not applied to each phase of the dispensing motor 834 and no current flows, the output shaft can be rotated with extremely small torque.

  Therefore, for example, the weight of a plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box is added to the recess of the sprocket, and this addition acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket to generate torque. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotated by this torque. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is not rotated, a voltage is applied to each phase of the dispensing motor 834 to flow a current in order to obtain a stationary torque of the dispensing motor 834. .

  In order to obtain the stationary torque of the dispensing motor 834, it is necessary to constantly apply a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, the B phase and the A phase) to maintain a state in which current flows. In other words, although the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is not rotated, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is Power is consumed as in the case of rotating.

7-2-6. Drive voltage to the dispensing motor at power on and power off]
Next, drive voltages to the payout motor 834 at power-on and power-off will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI Control to supply +12 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 by setting it to the voltage switching circuit 954 da while holding torque for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. In the case of obtaining it, by setting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply +5 V as the motor driving voltage to the payout motor 834.

  The payout control MPU 954a performs a power-on process, which is a payout control program, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the present embodiment, in addition to the case of turning on power to pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after the power to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off due to a power failure, the concept at the time of such power on is described. And power recovery is also included after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off due to a momentary power failure.

  When the power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to first supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. Control to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  This is because, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in a state where +12 V is supplied as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 without forcibly supplying +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 The power consumed by is extremely large.

  That is, on the main control board provided on the game board 5 supplied with +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931 d of the power supply substrate 931, +5 V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from this +12 V is +5 V As it is generated in the circuit, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, +12 V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, so that the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes extremely large. It becomes difficult for the voltage level of the Along with this, with the main control board provided on the game board 5, it is difficult to create +5 V as the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from this +12 V by the +5 V creation circuit and the main control MPU starts operation Can be prevented.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, by supplying +5 V to which the low voltage is set as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, the power is switched on. Even if +5 V becomes unstable, the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the dispensing motor 834 is not exceeded. That is, it is possible to prevent the failure of the dispensing motor 834 due to the unstable power supply when the power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 954a performs an initial setting process to the drive IC PIC 60. In this initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60, an initial value of the drive IC PIC 60 is set. Information to output a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) in order to obtain a stationary torque of payout motor 834 as this initial value Are set in the internal register of the output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 954a.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 954a performs a constant position setting process of the sprocket after performing a weight timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this sprocket fixed position setting process, it is determined whether or not the sprocket is positioned at the aforementioned fixed position.

  Specifically, based on the detection signal from blade rotation detection switch 840, payout control MPU 954a is not in the state where the sprocket is positioned at the above-described fixed position when the detection notch is not detected. In order to determine and switch from +5 V to +12 V as the motor drive voltage, the logic (for example, LOW to HI) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954 da.

  The payout control MPU 954a sets information for outputting a payout motor drive signal to rotate the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in an internal register of an output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates in accordance with the payout motor drive signal output from the output port.

  When the payout control MPU 954a detects the detection notch 842b, after rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, the information for outputting the payout motor drive signal to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is used. It sets to the internal register of the output port incorporated in payment control MPU954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output port.

  In order to switch the motor drive voltage from +12 V to +5 V, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI to LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby waiting the sprocket at a fixed position. Maintain the state.

  The payout control MPU 954a is a payout control main process (process of receiving and analyzing a command from the main control board provided on the game board 5 every 2 ms, a process of setting a main operation related to game ball payout, error LED indicator A process of creating display data to 953 is repeated.

  When the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the payout control MPU 954a determines that the sprocket is in the above-described fixed position. The sprocket fixed position setting process is ended as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout control MPU 954a shifts from the payout control main processing that is repeatedly performed every 2 ms to the payout control power-off processing. In the present embodiment, the concept of “power off” includes the case where the power is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stop, in addition to the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off. In the above-described payout control power-off process, logic of the voltage switching signal (in order to store various information related to payout as backup information in the payout control internal RAM and forcibly supply +5 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834) For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and control is performed to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  Since the voltage of +5 V is supplied to the payout control MPU 954a in addition to the voltage switching circuit 954da as described above, the drive system of the payout motor 834 and the payout control MPU 954a when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. The control system is said to be down at the same time.

  This is because, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout motor 834 is not supplied with +5 V as the motor drive voltage forcibly but supplied with +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. The power consumed by is extremely large.

  That is, in the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 to which the +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931 d of the power substrate 931 is supplied, +5 V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU is +5 V from this +12 V Because it is created by the creation circuit, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, +12 V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, so that the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes extremely large. The voltage level of the

  Along with this, before the main control MPU performs the main control power-off process to complete storing various information on the game in the main control built-in RAM, the operation control voltage level also drops sharply and the main control It becomes a mechanism that it can prevent that MPU becomes inoperable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 forcibly supplies +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 to supply voltage to the voltage switching circuit 954da. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the switching signal, the control system as the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 and the drive system as the payout motor 834 are the same when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. (Ie, the operation control voltage of +5 V is supplied to the control system of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951), and the motor of the drive system of the payout motor 834 is ) (By supplying +5 V as a drive voltage), And when the control system that U954a stops operating, and when the drive system of dispensing the motor 834 is deactivated, it is possible to match the. As a result, with the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 grasping the rotational position of the output shaft of the payout motor 834, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shut off.

  That is, the payout motor 834 can be controlled by the payout control MPU 954 a of the payout control board 951 until immediately before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft of the payout motor 834 from rotating under the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

7-2-7. Switching timing of drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI Control to supply +12 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 by setting it to the voltage switching circuit 954 da while holding torque for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. In the case of obtaining it, by setting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply +5 V as the motor driving voltage to the payout motor 834.

  When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates, as described above, the rotation of the winning ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft rotates the winning ball intermediate gear 841 and the winning ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket through.

  On the outer periphery of the sprocket, as described above, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball table box, three recesses into which the game balls fit are formed equally by every 120 degrees, and In the ball delivery space formed in the back box 832, three recesses 837b in which the game balls fit are formed equally by every 120 degrees, and are disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box The three recesses of the sprocket and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 are disposed mutually offset by 60 degrees. Each time the sprocket rotates one turn, it is possible to send the game balls received by three recesses and 837b at the maximum at six game balls downstream.

  The game balls received by the three recesses of the sprocket disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box are sent out to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the count switch 838 as described above. The game balls received by the three recesses 837b of the sprocket disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 are sent out to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the count switch 838 as described above. Ru.

  The payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da to perform control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, thereby outputting the payout motor 834 In the case where the axis is driven to rotate and the sprocket is rotated to pay out the gaming balls, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate and the recess of the sprocket, 837b Finally, the accepted game balls are sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a takes a time (a preset time, for example, several hundred millimeters) to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the winning ball passage 831c, 832c and the gaming ball sent out last. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until the second is set.

  When this time elapses, the payout control MPU 954a stops the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and switches the logic of the voltage switching signal as a trigger (for example, , To set the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal and output it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby supplying +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834. By doing this, a state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by maintaining the static torque in the payout motor 834 is maintained.

  Specifically, for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504, the ball launch device 680 drives the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. . When the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning openings.

  When a game ball is received at the start-up winning opening as a winning opening, the game board 5 is provided with a command (a winning ball command) for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 as a winning ball. The main control board (not shown) for controlling the progress of the signal is sent to the payout control board 951.

  The payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 performs control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 by setting the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 954da. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket, and the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball are one ball at a time in the recess of the sprocket, 837b. The accepted game balls are sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a takes a time (a time set in advance, for example, a time set in advance) to be detected by the count switch 838 through the winning ball passages 831c and 832c and the third game ball sent out last. The output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 continues to rotate and drive until the several hundred milliseconds is set.

  When this time elapses, the payout control MPU 954a stops the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and switches the logic of the voltage switching signal as a trigger (for example, , And sets the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby performing control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. As a result, a stationary torque is generated in the dispensing motor 834 to maintain the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 in a stopped state.

  As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when stopping the rotation position of the sprocket at the fixed position. After rotating the output shaft of the motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, the sprocket is kept on standby at a fixed position by maintaining the stopped state.

  That is, when the payout control MPU 954a detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when stopping the rotational position of the sprocket at a fixed position, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is predetermined. The "predetermined rotation angle" is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and +12 V is used as the motor drive voltage. In the case where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprockets and the gaming balls are paid out by performing control to be supplied to the payout motor 834, when stopping the output shaft of the payout motor 834, The game ball received by the recess of the sprocket, 837b, is rotationally driven the output shaft of the payout motor 834 Winning balls passage 831c, sent out to the end to 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a takes a time (a preset time, for example, several hundred millimeters) to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the winning ball passage 831c, 832c and the gaming ball sent out last. Continues to rotate the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 until this time elapses, and when this time passes, stops the rotational driving of the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 and sets the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to Stop it.

  The payout control board 951 can be operated by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V as an operation control voltage. Payout control board 951 is supplied to voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply +12 V drive voltage to payout motor 834 when the output shaft of payoff motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out gaming balls. It outputs a voltage switching signal which is a control signal. On the other hand, payout control substrate 951 supplies voltage +5 V for stopping voltage to dispensing motor 834 to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of dispensing motor 834 is stopped, to voltage switching circuit 954da. It outputs a voltage switching signal which is a control signal. The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to forcibly supply the +5 V stop voltage to the payout motor 834 when the power is shut off.

  Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 is the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) Is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby performing control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

  On the other hand, in the case of obtaining a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to By outputting to the switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

  The payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 is used as a motor drive voltage at the time of power-off (including the case where the power is shut off due to a power failure or a momentary interruption besides the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off). In order to forcibly supply +5 V to the payout motor 834, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and the state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped is maintained. It is configured to perform control to generate a stationary torque for driving.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the output voltage of the payout motor 834 is supplied by supplying the +12 V drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834. To drive the motor to obtain the driving torque for paying out the game ball, and to keep the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped by supplying the +5 V stop voltage to the payout motor 834. It is possible to obtain a stationary torque of

  The payout control board 951 outputs a +12 V drive voltage when supplying a driving voltage to the payout motor 834 when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for dispensing the gaming ball. A voltage switching signal which is a control signal is output to switching circuit 954da. At the same time, the payout control board 951 performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited two phases at a time. On the other hand, in order to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of dispensing motor 834 is stopped, a control signal to voltage switching circuit 954da is used to supply a stopping voltage of +5 V to dispensing motor 834. While the voltage switching signal is output, the payout control board 951 performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited by two phases.

  Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to switch the voltage Control is performed to supply +12 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 by outputting the circuit 954 da. At the same time, the payout control MPU 954a performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited two phases at a time.

  On the other hand, in the case of obtaining the stationary torque for keeping the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da. Thus, control is performed to supply +5 V to the payout motor 834 as a motor drive voltage, and control is performed according to a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited two phases at a time.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is supplied by supplying +12 V as the driving voltage to the dispensing motor 834. To drive the motor to obtain the driving torque for paying out the game ball, and to keep the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped by supplying the +5 V stop voltage to the payout motor 834. It is possible to obtain a stationary torque of

  In the case where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven by supplying the +12 V drive voltage to the payout motor 834 to obtain the drive torque for paying out the gaming balls, or the +5 V stop voltage is supplied to the payout motor 834 Even when obtaining a stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 by stopping the control of the dispensing motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method of exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 834 by two phases at a time By doing this, the torque generated by the dispensing motor 834 can be increased compared to, for example, a one-phase excitation method in which the coils of the dispensing motor 834 are excited one phase at a time, so the driving torque and the stationary torque are increased. be able to.

  This can contribute to increasing the drive torque by controlling the payout motor 834 according to the two-phase excitation method. For example, a plurality of game balls passing through the bending path formed in the prize ball front box The load is biased in the recess formed in the sprocket so that the load acts in the direction of rotation opposite to the direction in which the sprocket is rotationally driven by the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834. The driving torque of the payout motor 834 is superior to the generated torque. Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft of the dispensing motor can be transmitted to the sprocket, and the sprocket can be rotated smoothly.

  By controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, this can contribute to increasing the static torque, so, for example, the weights of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box By being biased to the recess formed in the sprocket, even if this load acts in the direction to rotate the sprocket, the torque generated by the payout motor 834 is superior to the torque generated thereby. Therefore, the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor is stopped can be maintained, and the state in which the sprocket is stopped can be maintained.

  Therefore, a small stepping motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 834. The adoption of the same type of small stepping motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 834 can also contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950 that performs payout control by rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 that pays out the game balls. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a count switch 838 and a voltage switching circuit 954da in the payout motor drive circuit 954d.

  The counting switch 838 is capable of detecting the game balls paid out by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834. Voltage switching circuit 954da is a voltage for driving +12 V for rotationally driving the output shaft of dispensing motor 834 and a voltage for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of dispensing motor 834 is stopped, compared with the driving voltage It is possible to switch between the low voltage of +5 V and the stopping voltage.

  Payout control board 951 is supplied to voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply +12 V drive voltage to payout motor 834 when the output shaft of payoff motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out gaming balls. A voltage switching signal which is a control signal is output, while a voltage for supplying a stopping voltage of +5 V to the dispensing motor 834 to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining a state in which the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is stopped. A voltage switching signal which is a control signal is output to switching circuit 954da.

  Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) While controlling to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834 by outputting to the switching circuit 954da, the dispensing is performed in the case of obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 stopped. The control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby performing control to supply +5 V as the motor driving voltage to the payout motor 834.

  The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954 da to supply a +12 V drive voltage to the payout motor 834 to rotate the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to dispense the gaming balls. When stopping the output shaft of the payout motor 834, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate, and the time taken for the counting switch 838 to detect the last paid-out gaming ball has elapsed. When this time elapses, the control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 954 da to switch the +12 V drive voltage to the +5 V stop voltage and supply it to the payout motor 834. .

  Specifically, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply the +12 V motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 to thereby output the payout motor 834. When the output shaft of the motor is rotated to rotate the sprocket and the gaming balls are dispensed, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to receive the recess of the sprocket Finally, the game ball is sent to the winning ball passage 831c, 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 until the predetermined time required for detecting the game ball sent out last is detected by the count switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. When this time passes, the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

  In response to this, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, for switching from HI to LOW). By performing control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834 by outputting to, the state where the stationary shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is generated and the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is stopped is maintained.

  As described above, the payout control MPU 954a supplies the +12 V drive voltage to the payout motor 834 based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da. A state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a +5 V stopping voltage to the payout motor 834 while being able to obtain the drive torque for paying out the gaming ball by rotationally driving the output shaft of 834. You can get a stationary torque to maintain the

  The control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the +12 V drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 834, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven, and the gaming ball is In the case of paying out, when stopping the output shaft of the payout motor 834, it takes time for the counting switch 838 to detect the gaming ball that is finally driven by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 continues to be rotationally driven until this time passes, and when this time passes, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da as a trigger for driving The voltage is switched from +12 V to +5 V for stop voltage and supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The payout control board 951 is accommodated in the payout control board box 950. Payout control board 951 is supplied to voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply +12 V drive voltage to payout motor 834 when the output shaft of payoff motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out gaming balls. The dispensing control substrate 951 outputs a voltage switching signal which is a control signal, and the dispensing control substrate 951 dispenses the stopping voltage of +5 V as the dispensing motor 834 in order to obtain a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 stopped. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply the voltage.

  Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) While controlling to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834 by outputting to the switching circuit 954da, the dispensing is performed in the case of obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 stopped. The control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit, thereby performing control to supply +5 V as the motor driving voltage to the payout motor 834.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven by supplying +12 V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 834 based on the control signal input to the voltage switching circuit, and the gaming ball is Drive torque can be obtained, and by supplying a +5 V stop voltage to the payout motor 834, a static torque can be obtained to maintain the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in a stopped state. it can. The adoption of the same type of small motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 834 can also contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  The payout motor 834 is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted to a sprocket that pays out the gaming balls to the player as a winning ball, and is controlled by the payout control board 951. In a state in which control to stop the rotation of the sprocket is being performed by the payout control board, a state in which the load by the weight of the gaming ball by the weight of the gaming ball is given to the sprocket is maintained by connecting the following gaming ball to the gaming ball received by the sprocket. The Rukoto.

  The dispensing device 830 at least includes a dispensing motor 834 and a sprocket. The payout motor 834 is an electric drive source, and the sprocket can transmit and rotate the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

  On the outer peripheral part of the sprocket, there are provided a predetermined number of front recesses which can receive one game ball passing through a bending passage constituting a ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls as a ball passage formed forward, A predetermined number of back recesses capable of receiving one game ball passing through a bending passage constituting the ball passage are provided by a pair of bending passage walls as a ball passage formed on the rear side.

  Specifically, a sprocket is rotatably disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box. On the outer periphery of the sprocket, in the ball delivery space, three recesses in which the game balls are fitted are formed equally by every 120 degrees. A ball delivery space is also formed in the prize ball back box covering the rear face of the prize ball front box, and the sprocket is also rotatably disposed in this ball delivery space. On the outer periphery of the sprocket, in the ball delivery space, three recesses in which the game balls are fitted are formed equally by every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses of the sprocket disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box are disposed in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box. It is disposed forward of the three recesses of the sprocket.

  In a state where the dispensing motor 834 is stop-controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951, the ball passage is formed by a pair of bent passage walls as a ball passage formed forward on the ridge line which is the boundary between the sprocket and the front recess. By receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage, the weight of the game ball is biased by the sprocket in one rotation direction. At the same time, on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the rear recess, the game ball passing through the bending passage constituting the ball passage is received by the pair of bending passage walls as the ball passage formed rearward. As a result, the weight of the gaming ball is urged by the sprocket in the other rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

  Specifically, in a state where the sprocket is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box, the prize ball front box is formed on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess. The ball is placed on the winding line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box while being in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the formed bending passage. It is controlled by the payout control board 951 to be in a state of receiving gaming balls passing through the bending passage formed in the above.

  Thus, the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball outer box is received on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess, and the ball formed in the prize ball back box In the delivery space, the sprocket is maintained at a fixed position by receiving game balls passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball back box on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess. In this state, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box is the sprocket viewed from the front side of the sprocket with respect to the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess. Thus, the load can be applied in the direction of clockwise rotation. On the other hand, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the sprocket against the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess, the payout device 830 front side In this case, it is possible to apply a load in the direction of counterclockwise rotation.

  As described above, in a state where the dispensing motor 834 is stopped and controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951, it is a ball passage formed forward on a ridge line which is a boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess as the front recess. The game ball's own weight is in the direction of one rotation on the sprocket (the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side clockwise by holding the game ball passing through the bend passage constituting the ball passage by the pair of bend passage walls) It is biased to rotate). At the same time, the game ball passing through the bending passage forming the ball passage is received by the pair of bending passage walls as the ball passage formed on the ridge line which is the back of the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess as the back recess. By setting it in the state, the other rotation direction (the payout device 830) in which the weight of the game ball is in the opposite direction to the one rotation direction (the direction to rotate the payout device 830 clockwise as viewed from the front side) Seen from the front side, it is biased in a counterclockwise direction).

  As a result, the sprocket is urged in one rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side) by the weight of the gaming ball, and the one rotation direction (the payout device 830). By being urged in the other rotation direction (the direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front side) opposite to the direction in which it is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side, Rotation in the direction of rotation can cancel each other.

  For this reason, even if a small motor having a very small static torque as compared to the static torque of a large motor is adopted as the payout motor 834, the sprocket is held in a state where the payout motor 834 is stop-controlled by the payout control substrate 951. It is possible to maintain the stopped state. Therefore, a small motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 834. By adopting the same type of small motor as the payout motor 834, which operates the movable body provided on the game board 5, the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, the payout control MPU 954a controls the voltage switching circuit and the drive ICPIC provided in the payout motor drive circuit to drive the drive torque and the stationary torque of the payout motor 834, which is a small stepping motor, for example. Although control to generate is performed, such a circuit and control can be applied to a small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5.

7-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1530, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a. The peripheral control unit 1530 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310.

  The liquid crystal and sound controller 1540 includes a VDP 1540 a. The VDP 1540a performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the frame side second effect display device 460A, while controlling sound such as BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Do.

  The volume adjustment volume 1510a includes a rotatable knob, and adjusts the volume of BGM and sound effects output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 according to the rotation operation of the knob. (Hereafter referred to as "hole side volume control function"). The peripheral control unit 1530 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 may be separate units as shown, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be substituted for the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 or vice versa.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, when the volume control volume 1510a is operated by the rotation operation of the knob, the peripheral control MPU 1530a creates the operation history information of the volume control volume 1510a as the history information of the detection signal output along with this Alternatively, it may be set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in association with the hall-side volume adjustment function.

  That is, each created operation history information is linked to the hall side volume adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated while each function is operating. Is written. The peripheral control MPU 1530a determines, for example, whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a has been operated while the hole-side volume adjustment function is activated based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area (for example, Can be grasped after the fact.

  As described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the hall clerk controls the energization of an amplifier (not shown) so that the volume is intentionally set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6 and the speaker The output aspect can be changed to the desired aspect.

  On the other hand, on the peripheral control board 1510, a player-side volume adjustment function is mounted. As the player-side volume adjustment function, first, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the operation signal of the operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) operable by the player responds to the operation content. The function of changing the volume and setting the volume of the speaker to the volume after the change can be illustrated.

  Further, as the player-side display light amount adjustment function, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 operable by the player responds to the operation content and the game board side effect display device 1600 It can be mentioned that the light amount of (or the door frame side effect display device 460) is changed and the light amount of the game board side effect display device 1600 (or the door frame side effect display device 460) is made the light amount after the change. .

  In addition, as the player-side light emitter light amount adjustment function, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 operable by the player controls the LED group (or The light amount of the lamp group is changed, and the light amount of the game board side effect display device 1600 (or the door frame side effect display device 460) is set as the light amount after the change.

  According to the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display light amount adjustment function, or the player-side light emitter light amount adjustment function as described above, the player can continue playing the game under the desired environment set by intention. become able to.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1530 includes a peripheral control MPU 1530a, a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1530e. The peripheral control MPU 1530a is a type of microprocessor. The peripheral control ROM 1530 b controls various processes, such as a sub control program, which controls power-on processing executed at power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on, and various data such as a sub control program. It stores various control data and various scheduler data.

  The peripheral control RAM 1530c is a variety of information (for example, game board side effect display) inherited across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from a VDP 1540a of liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 described later is input. It stores scheduler data defining a screen to be drawn on the device 1600, information for managing scheduler data defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, and the like.

  The peripheral control SRAM 1530 d stores various information (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like) continuing over the day. The peripheral control external watchdog timer 1530 e monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1530 a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1530 e”).

  The peripheral control RAM 1530c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1530d, the backup power is supplied by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate. The stored content can be held for about 50 hours.

  By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the backup control power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1530d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1530d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1530 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a is out of control, and when this timer times out, hardware reset is performed. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1530e to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e within a certain period of time (until the timer performs tie mapping), the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 1530a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1530e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e within a predetermined period, it is configured not to be reset.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from main control board 1310, each decoration board of game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Send to drive substrate.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a is a game board motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5, serial I / O for motor drive board Transmit from the port to the motor drive board via the peripheral control output circuit.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a is a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I for outputting door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3. Transmit from / O port to peripheral control output circuit etc. In the present embodiment, a substrate that performs drive control related to decoration on the frame side is generically called "frame decoration drive amplifier substrate".

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1530a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the attitude mode of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, and pressure detection for detecting the operation of the operation button 410 The detection signal from the switch is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the door frame relay substrate 911 or the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier substrate as a heat source). Serialized operation unit detection data from the door side serial transmission circuit, through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, the operation unit detection serial I / I of the peripheral control MPU 1530a O port has been input.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position, movable position and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board side serials not shown provided on the motor drive board 4180 Serialized by the transmission circuit, the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1530a through the peripheral control input circuit. . The peripheral control MPU 1530a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a has a watchdog timer built-in (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and whether or not its system is out of control by using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1530e in combination. I have a diagnosis.

[7-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 205, peripheral control MPU 1530a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1530ac, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control MPU core 1530aa. / O port 1530 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530 ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1530 ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa reads and writes various data from / to peripheral control built-in RAM 1530 ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac via internal bus 1530 ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1530 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, Various data are read / written to / from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak via the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai.

  Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa reads various data from peripheral control ROM 1530b via internal bus 1530ah, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and external bus 1530h, while internal to peripheral control RAM 1530c and peripheral control SRAM 1530d. Various data are read and written via the bus 1530 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and the external bus 1530 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1530 ab, peripheral control ROM 1530 b, peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1530 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, peripheral control various parallel I It is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1530ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without using peripheral control MPU core 1530aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1530 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1530 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1530 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1530 a, and WDT 1530 af Data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without using peripheral control MPU core 1530aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1530 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1530 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1530 ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1530Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and peripheral bus 1530Ai, reading and writing.

  Peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac includes peripheral control ROM 1530 b, peripheral control RAM 1530 c, storage devices such as peripheral control SRAM 1530 d, and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530 ae incorporated in peripheral control MPU 1530 a, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, peripheral control In order to perform data transfer independently between peripheral input / output ports such as various parallel I / O ports 1530ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without using peripheral control MPU core 1530aa The storage devices such as the control ROM 1530 b, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1530 d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad and the external bus 1530 h, while various peripheral control serials are performed. For input / output devices such as / O port 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak via peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and peripheral bus 1530ai Read and write.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1530ad controls internal bus 1530ah, peripheral bus 1530ai, and external bus 1530h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1530aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, peripheral control ROM 1530b, peripheral control RAM 1530c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1530 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530 ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1530 ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1530ae: serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1530af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1530a is out of control, and when this timer is tie mapped, it is reset by hardware It has become. That is, the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started, when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af within a predetermined period (until the timer performs tie mapping). It will take When the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e, in addition to outputting various latch signals such as a game board motor drive latch signal and a door motor drive light emission latch signal. Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 1530ag is provided with a detection signal from various detection switches for detecting original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 A movable object information acquisition latch for serializing with the board side serial transmission circuit and receiving the serialized movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1530a It outputs a signal or outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decoration substrate of the upper decoration unit in the door frame 3.

  This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag is shortened. Noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and LED etc. other than this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the voltage into 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. . In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6.

  According to the setting of such a substrate volume, in the present embodiment, for example, as volume control function on the hole side (hereinafter referred to as “hole volume control function”), muffled at substrate volume 0 and maximum volume at substrate volume 6 The volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume 6.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, BGM is applied to the speakers housed in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speakers of the door frame 3 so that the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 becomes the volume set to the substrate volumes 0-6. Output sound effects. As described above, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion, the speaker contained in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided on the door frame 3 are configured to output the sound such as BGM and sound effects. ing.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to BGM and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction or an illegal act regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1, or for notifying the content about the game effect, etc. Although the notification sound is configured to be output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, the notification sound and the notification sound are reproduced without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob at all. It is a mechanism to be The volume from the mute to the maximum volume is adjusted by the effect control program controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 (VDP 1540 a described later).

  The volume adjusted by this effect control program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, the BGM reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 or An announcement sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating although the effect sound such as the sound effect is reduced. Can be output. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the store clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the notification sound output due to the occurrence of a failure or the player's fraudulent act.

7-3-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1530b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1530, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, the RTC control unit 1565, etc., various data, various control data, various scheduler data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter (Prescribed individual information) is stored in advance (effect control storage unit).

  Various scheduler data includes screen generation scheduler data for displaying a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and light emission mode generation for controlling the light emission modes of various LEDs There are scheduler data, scheduler data for sound generation for reproducing BGM, sound effects, notification sound and the like, and electric drive source scheduler data for controlling the drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

  The screen generation scheduler data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. It is done. The light emission mode generation scheduler data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series.

  The sound generation scheduler data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order of reproducing sounds such as BGM and sound effects. The sound command data defines a channel number for instructing which channel among the plurality of channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1540a, sound data such as BGM and sound effects are to be incorporated. Here, in the present embodiment, although the embodiment in which the sound source is built in the VDP 1540a is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be mentioned that the sound source may be externally attached to the VDP 1540a. It's too late.

  The electrical drive source scheduler data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b may be directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various scheduler data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b are also directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 1565, the luminance correction for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 The program is included.

  This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, and will be described later. Acquire the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM built in the RTC control unit 1565 and receiving power backup also at the time of power failure, The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information.

  The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530 b. The luminance setting information is, as described later, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range over which the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present And the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. Light up.

  On the other hand, when December has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness setting is made. When the luminance of the LED included in the information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the luminance is 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to be lit.

[7-3-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 1530c, as shown in FIG. 205, is a backup management target work area which exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs, and this backup Backup first area and backup second area for exclusive storage of copied various information stored in the management target work area, and copied for various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1530b Control program copy area to be stored, various control data copy area to exclusively store the copy of various data, various control data, and various scheduler data etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and various control The program is run Of the various types of information to be updated, a backup unmanaged work area dedicated to store what is not a backup target, are provided by the.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written in the backup unmanaged object work area and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. For the management target work area, backup first area, and backup second area, the main control board 1310 (power on command output means) when power supply is started by the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (at power on) The power-on command (see FIG. 207) output by the command instructs the RAM clear effect start and the respective state effect start (for example, the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power on) It is cleared to zero when it is something to instruct the start of the effect at the time).

  The work area subject to backup management includes effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from VDP 1540a of liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and peripheral information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs And Bank0 (1 ms) to be stored exclusively.

  Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit.

  The “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from the backup first area to the backup second area to be described later have the same storage area size as “Bank 0”. It means that you are doing. “(1fr)” is, as described later, when VDP 1540a outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, from peripheral control MPU 1530a In order to output to the peripheral control MPU 1530a a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data can be received, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed every time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every one frame. From the place where is performed, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are also appended (the presentation information (1 fr) and the presentation backup information (1 fr) to be described later) , Used in the same sense). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed whenever And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) is provided with a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, a reception command storage area, an RTC information acquisition storage area, a scheduler data storage area, etc. There is. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area is set with game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area outputs lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3. Is a storage area in which the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set, and the reception command storage area is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and various received commands are set. The RTC information acquisition storage area is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 1565 (RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a described later) is set. The scheduler data storage area on the basis of the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU1310a of), which is a storage area where various scheduler data corresponding to the received command is set. In the scheduler data storage area, various scheduler data copied from peripheral control ROM 1530b to various control data copy areas are read and set, while various scheduler data are directly read from peripheral control ROM 1530b and set. Some are done.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area, a movable object information acquisition storage area, an operation unit information acquisition storage area, a history information storage area, etc. It is provided.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area, a frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area is a game board side for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which motor drive data SM-DAT is set.

  On the other hand, in the movable body information acquisition storage area, various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. Storage area, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area is the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 of the decorative rotator unit 530 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotator unit 530. Information (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the decoration rotating body unit 530) and the like (rotational direction) of the rotation and operation of the operation button 410, etc. ) Is a storage area to be set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area of Bank0 (1 ms) and motor drive The substrate-side transmission data storage area is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in a certain cycle, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit steady in the next cycle. When the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, and every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, The game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle, the peripheral control unit steady processing of the previous cycle is executed. At this time, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area.

  When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in a certain cycle, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area, and the peripheral data is stored in the next cycle. When the control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area for the LED.

  That is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area. For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit steady process of the current cycle, the peripheral control unit steady state of the previous cycle is set. When the process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area.

  When peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area, and the next When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the cycle is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area. The frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Ru.

  For example, when the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the current period, the previous cycle When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control section of the next cycle is performed. When the 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed. Each time it is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area.

  Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this cycle When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the previous cycle is executed, the process is performed based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area. proceed.

  Next, a backup first area and a backup second area which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area will be described.

  In the backup first area and the backup second area, two pairs in which two banks form one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms), which is the content to be copied to the backup first area and the backup second area at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, As effect backup information (1 ms), whenever peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed whenever 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, it is copied at high speed by peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac to backup first area and backup second area. Ru. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) form one pair, Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. There is. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed by Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  In the backup second area, Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac. The consistency of this page is determined depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area has two pairs, i.e., a pair of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). It is an area for managing, and backup 2nd area makes Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair, and a total of 2 pairs as one page It is an area to manage. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and backup second area.

  In the present embodiment, effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is peripheral control unit steady processing for each frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr) At the same time, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies data to the backup first area and backup second area at a high speed, and effect information that is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms). The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac in the backup first area and backup second area. Is copied faster Program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-3-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1530 d includes a backup management target work area 1530 da, which exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs, and the backup management target work area 1530 da. There are provided a backup first area and a backup second area, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored therein.

  The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is that the power-on command from the main control board 1310 is RAM when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure as described above). Even when the clear effect start and each state effect start are instructed, zero clear is not performed. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area, backup first area, and backup second area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described above are cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1530da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information to be continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It has Bank0 (SRAM) for storing information etc. exclusively for backup. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following 0 means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit.

  The “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from the backup first area to the backup second area to be described later have the same storage area size as “Bank 0”. It means that you are doing. “(SRAM)” is added to “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” because various information stored in peripheral control SRAM 1530 d is a backup target. (The effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, a backup first area and a backup second area which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1530 da will be described. The backup first area and the backup second area are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair.

  The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at high speed to the backup first area and the backup second area by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1530 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1530 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area is It is an area for managing one pair as one page, with one pair being Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and backup second area.

7-3-2. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control Unit]
The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the sound control of BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. And do.

  The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 has a built-in sound source for performing sound control such as BGM and sound effects (hereinafter, also referred to as "built-in sound source") and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device Various character data as display contents to be displayed in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 and a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1540a for performing drawing control of 460 Liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b for storing various data such as BGM and sound effects, and sprite data with sprite numbers attached, and a relay board for a door frame as audio data such as serialized BGM and sound effects 911 or the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier substrate as a heat source) And an audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Furthermore, this liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b is a size conversion used to change the display size to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 and display the common image. Image data is stored in advance.

  In peripheral control unit 1530, peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts scheduler data for screen generation corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b of peripheral control unit 1530 or peripheral control RAM 1530c. It is set to 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the first screen data of the screen generation scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, In the peripheral control unit 1530, the next screen data following the leading screen data is output according to the scheduler data for screen generation set in the scheduler data storage area, triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. It is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and output to the VDP 1540 a.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation scheduler data according to the screen generation scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area each time a V blank signal is input. It outputs to the VDP 1540a one by one from the top screen data.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation scheduler data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b of peripheral control unit 1530 or peripheral control RAM 1530c. It is set to 1530 c in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the first sound command data of the sound generation scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c Output to

  Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1530a takes the next sound command data following the sound command data at the top according to the scheduler data for sound generation set in the scheduler data storage area in response to the V blank signal being input. It extracts from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or peripheral control RAM 1530 c of 1530 and outputs it to the VDP 1540 a.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs necessary sound command data to the VDP 1540a according to the sound generation scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area each time the V blank signal is input.

7-3-2a. VDP]
The VDP 1540a (drawing control means) includes an internal RAM capable of temporarily storing data, in addition to the above-mentioned internal sound source. As a part of such built-in RAM, the VDP 1540a is provided with a material image RAM capable of temporarily storing material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwriting many material image data.

  Furthermore, when VDP 1540a receives screen data included in scheduler data for screen generation from peripheral control MPU 1530a, it extracts character data and door frame character data from liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data. And stores the drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated to create sprite data and display them on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It also incorporates a VRAM for storing drawing data of one screen (one frame) for processing (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM").

  Among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM (the frame buffer), the VDP 1540a outputs image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side effect display The game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized by outputting image data for the device 460 from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the VDP 1540a, the VDP 1540a receives the screen Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the data, sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Is generated on the built-in VRAM. The VDP 1540a outputs image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the generated drawing data from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. It outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to generate above.

  The VDP 1540a outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect When output to the apparatus 460, a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1530a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a can be received.

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later in response to the input of the V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1530a and the VDP 1540a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The VDP 1540a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the present embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

  The VDP 1540a extracts the sound command data of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b when each sound command data including the reproduction channel is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a based on the command from the main control board 1310 by the sound control by the automatic channel method described later. Then, by controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data of the rendering sound such as BGM and sound effects are incorporated into the channel designated from the peripheral control MPU 1530a. At the same time, the VDP 1540a controls the audio data transmission IC 1540c by using the reproduction channel specified by the peripheral control MPU 1530a in the automatic channel method described later, and controls the audio data transmission IC 1540c to output BGM or sound effects from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Play the sound of The sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the channel in which the sound data is incorporated.

  In addition to the sound data of the effect sound and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the VDP1540a internal sound source, the specified value (maximum sound volume value) of the sound volume related to the sound data of the notification sound is set. Subvolume values are built in. As for the effect sound, any value of the substrate volumes 0 to 6 adjusted according to the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub volume value. On the other hand, with regard to the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub volume value regardless of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The sound command data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of each sound assigned to each reproduction channel.

  When the notification sound is reproduced in a state where the above-mentioned effect sound is reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, the effect sound is overwritten by the notification sound and only the notification sound is paired. It will be reproduced from the pair of lower speakers 921.

7-3-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound ROM]
In the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540 b, character data used for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored in advance. The sound data of sound effects and notification sounds are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b. In the present embodiment, the types of each sound are mainly classified into BGM (music), sound effects, and notification sounds.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of each sound, for example, notification sounds 1 to 3 which may generate a reproduction request regardless of the state of the game, and notification sounds such as a big hit determined sound notifying that a big hit has been decided I have listed. In addition, the types of each sound may include normal BGM reproduced in the first half of special symbol fluctuation, reach BGM reproduced in the second half of special symbol fluctuation, and jackpot BGM reproduced during a jackpot it can.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as sound effects among the sounds, a pending winning sound for which a reproduction request is generated regardless of the state of the game, a button depression sound for which a reproduction request is generated when the button is operated, and reproduction at left symbol stop The left symbol stop sound to be played, the right symbol stop sound to be played at the right symbol stop, the middle symbol stop sound to be played at the middle symbol stop, the full screen preview sound effect to be played when the full screen preview occurs, The first half notice A sound effect reproduced when the first half notice A occurs, the first half notice B sound effect played when the first half notice B occurs, the first half First half notice C sound effect reproduced when notice C occurs, second half notice A sound effect reproduced when second notice A occurs, second half notice B sound effect reproduced when second notice B occurs, And after being reproduced when the second half notice C occurs It illustrates a prior notice C sound effects.

7-3-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When audio data is input from the VDP 1540a through the reproduction channel, the audio data transmission IC 1540c is a relay board 911 for a door frame as a frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of a difference system in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. (And, if necessary, it is transmitted to the door frame left side decoration substrate 160).

  As described above, when serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1540a, the audio data transmission IC 1540c also transmits the relay board 911 for door frame as serial data of the difference system in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. It transmits toward the door frame left side decoration board | substrate 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier board | substrate). Thus, the VDP 1540a can reproduce BGM, sound effects, and notification sounds in stereo when using two reproduction channels from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 via the audio data transmission IC 1540c. On the other hand, when one reproduction channel is used, BGM, sound effects and notification sounds can be reproduced in monaural. In the present embodiment, the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 are configured by four speakers, but it is needless to say that the number of speakers is not limited to this. Absent.

7-3-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 1565 is configured centering on the RTC 1565a as shown in FIG. 205, and holds, for example, calendar information capable of specifying a date and time information capable of specifying an hour, minute, and second.

  The RTC 1565a incorporates a RAM 1565aa which holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as "RTC built-in RAM"). The RTC 1565a is supplied with power from a battery 1565b (in this embodiment, a so-called button battery is adopted as an example) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply (second power supply) of the RTC built-in RAM.

  That is, the RTC 1565a is supplied with power from the battery 1565b independently of the peripheral control substrate 1510 without any supply of power from the peripheral control substrate 1510. Thereby, even if the power from the main power supply that supplies power is cut off, the RTC 1565a updates and holds calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 1565b.

  Battery 1565b supplies power in response to receipt of a power failure notification signal described later, separately from the main power supply, while stopping power supply in response to the start of power supply from the main power supply. In such a power supply configuration, the RTC 1565a is supplied with power from the main power supply or the battery 1565b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a and sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, based on the acquired calendar information and time information. The effects can be developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As such an effect, for example, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears on December 25 is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and if it is New Year's Eve The screen for executing the countdown to receive the event may be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  Although details will be described later in the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, the peripheral control board 1510 performs main control after the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The time to the time (second time) when the power on command output from the substrate 1310 is received, that is, information on the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, in addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM. ing. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. .

  The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the backlight of the game board side, from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In the RTC built-in RAM, in addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM as input date and time as information of date and hour / minute / second Information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1530a performs switching control of ON / OFF of the backlight or ON. Only.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM is set in a production line of a gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input in the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  Thus, in the RTC built-in RAM, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information, the input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type , And stores and holds information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  The brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM relate to, for example, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. After the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the operation button 410 of the decoration rotary unit 530 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 etc. When the operation button 410 is operated in a waiting state for a demonstration by a game board side effect display device 1600 or the like, a screen for performing a setting mode is the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like. Is displayed on.

  Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the operation button 410 of the decoration rotary unit 530 according to the screen of this setting mode, or the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to a desired brightness. Can be The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, specifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and calendar information for specifying the date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. Light up.

  On the other hand, when December has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness setting is made. When the luminance of the LED included in the information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the luminance is 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to be lit.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 at control power on and reset processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

7-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As already described, the volume adjustment volume 1510a may adjust the volume of BGM, sound effects and notification sound reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 by rotating the knob portion. it can. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value as its knob portion is rotated. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak electrically connected to this converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion from an analog value to a digital value, for example, the value 0 Convert to 1024-step value up to the value 1023.

  In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven, and the volume values are managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6 as described above. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6, respectively. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 (VDP 1540a) sets the BGM, the sound effect, and the notification sound from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 so that the tone value of any of the substrate volumes 0 to 6 is set. It is configured to play.

[8. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 206 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. FIG. 207 shows an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is a table. FIG. 208 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 207, and FIG. 209 is a table showing various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310. It is a table showing an example.

  First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has detection signals from various sensors (switches) such as the general winning opening sensor 3111, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403. When it is input, based on these detection signals, it sends to the payout control board 951 a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball.

  The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected (corresponding to a so-called “CR machine”), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 , The command 10H to the command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. The CR unit 6 communicates with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (dispensing device 830) to pay out the gaming ball as a rental ball on the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322. It is an apparatus. In the command 10H described above, one prize ball is designated, in the command 11H, two prize balls are designated,..., And in the command 1EH, fifteen prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to perform payout control of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game arcade (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine.” In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, commands 20H to 2EH are prepared. In addition, a ball lending machine is a device that pays out gaming balls directly to upper plate 321 and lower plate 322, which are storage dishes, as rental balls.

  In the command 20H described above, one prize ball is designated, in the command 21H, two prize balls are designated,..., And in the command 2EH, fifteen prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is designated in this command 30H.

  When the transmitting side does not receive an ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of a command from the receiving side over a predetermined period after command transmission, the transmitting side transmits a command 30H to check whether the ACK signal is input or not. Check the status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is divided into display, test related, and others.

  These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) as shown in FIGS. And STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing variations of effects.

  For the status (STTS value) and the mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as "RWM") secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1530 can disassemble this command in bit units to grasp the status and the mode.

[8-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3112, and the division relates to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191, as shown in FIG. Special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the command of the name of fluctuation state specification is provided. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is a command for instructing the special figure tuning effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, etc. Is the command of The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is a command for instructing transition to at least one of the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 The tuning effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process described later (command transmission means).

8-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
Special figure 2 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the 2nd starting opening sensor 3113, as the division, as shown in Figure 207, concerning the 2nd special symbol indicator 1405 of function indicatory board 1191 2 has a command named tuning production start, special symbol 2 specified, and special figure 2 tuning production end. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command instructs the special figure tuning effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, the special symbol 2 designation command is out, and the specific big hit, the non specific big hit is specified, the special figure 2 tuning effect The end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 207, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command instructs the jackpot opening start, the jackpot opening 1 open N-th display command starts the jackpot opening 1 open during the 1st to 16th round (, jackpot opening of the attacker unit 2100 N, winning opening 2005, 2006 During the opening of the second round (or start opening), the special winning opening 1 closing indication command starts during the special winning opening 1 closing between rounds (during closing between the big winning openings 2005, 2006 of the attacking unit 2100) Or a closing start is instructed, and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the count is 0 to 10 (the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 have been detected and entered the special winning opening 2005, 2006) The big hit ending command indicates the start of big hit ending, and the big hit figure Display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command indicates the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command indicates the small hit opening start (open opening or opening opening of the attacker unit's jackpot 2005, 2006 at the small hit). The small hit count display command, small hit medium large winning a prize winning a prize production (in the case of small hit during the game ball entered the large winning opening 2103 when the game ball is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2402, 2403) Instructing, the small hit ending command instructs the small hit ending start.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open time (Attacker unit big winning Sent at the opening of the Nth round of the mouth 2005, 2006), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the big winning opening 1 (at the start of closing of the winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacking unit) , A special winning opening 1 count display command, when the special winning opening 1 is open and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (When the special winning opening of the attacker unit 2005, 2006 is open, and the special winning opening 2005, 2006 Game ball is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, 2402), and the big hit ending command is Sent when the jackpot ending start, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker units).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the large winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker unit at the small hit), the small hit The count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005, 2006 during the small hitting is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2402, 2403, The hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
In the section of power on, as shown in FIG. 207, various commands named power on are provided. In this power on command, “D * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power on command instructs start of RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, command to start effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated at the time of power on Is).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at the time other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated, processing on the main control side power on described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The common figure tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 and, as shown in FIG. 207, the common pattern tuning effect start regarding the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191 It is equipped with the command of the name of common pattern designation, common figure synchronous production end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The common drawing tuning effect start command instructs the common drawing tuning effect start with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the common symbol designation command designates a loose, specified big hit, non specified big hit, and the common drawing tuning effect end command is , And indicates the end of the common figure synchronization effect, the fluctuation state specifying command is to specify the probability and time saving state.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2105 which are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105, and the divisions thereof are, as shown in FIG. It has a command named Ending per popular map.

  These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105 State or when it is expanded), and the ending command per common figure indicates the start of ending per common figure.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the starting port solenoid 2105 (When expanding in the left and right direction), the ending command per common drawing is transmitted at the beginning of the ending per common drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 208, the notification display categories include a prize error display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door open and door close command. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1). However, FIG. 208 shows a part of the commands prepared as the notification display, and for example, the command in the case where abnormality detection occurs in the vibration sensor 2405 or the movable piece 2105 is in the open state. Descriptions of other various commands such as a command in the case where the start winning prize abnormality detection occurs when the game ball is received to the second start port 2004 when there is no, are omitted.

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker unit 2100 when it enters the large winning opening 2103 (except in the big hit) except during the big hit (during condition device operation) When the game ball is detected by the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command instructs, for example, the start of the connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the route between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality The display command is, for example, a case where a disconnection or a short circuit occurs in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and any of the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, the special winning port sensor 2402, 2403 and the like. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the magnetic sensor 2404 has an abnormality.

  The door frame open command is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the payout control substrate 951 The door frame closing command is a door when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. It instructs the end of the release notification. On the other hand, with the main body frame open command, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame open switch 619 input via the payout control board 951. In some cases, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 In this case, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormality display command is paid out from the main control board 1310 as a payout control board 951. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is transmitted when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to the first start opening sensor 3112, second start opening sensor 3113, and special winning opening sensor The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of the circuits 2402 and 2403 and the like is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic sensor 2404 is detected.

  On the other hand, the door frame open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618).

  While the main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619) The body frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). . Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
In the state display section, as shown in FIG. 208, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a command named frame status 2 command are provided. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame status 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and the detailed description of these will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 208, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310 adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
The test-related section includes various commands named test, as shown in FIG. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is predetermined by the contents of specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510. As such a test command, for example, a command to inspect various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 1530, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, the door frame relay substrate 911, and the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 may be mentioned. it can.

  The main control board 1310 assigns ports for test commands one by one on the convenience of the hardware side. Instead of the aspect in which management on the hardware side is difficult to manage, to facilitate management on the software side, it is used for test commands. As ports, those that can be managed by software timers are allocated to predetermined ones of a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by flags are allocated to specific ports.

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated, processing on the main control side power on described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in peripheral control board command transmission processing in the main control timer interrupt processing.

8-2-10. Other]
The other divisions, as shown in FIG. 208, are starting opening winning, variable shortening operation termination designation, high probability termination designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect includes the command of the name. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening starting winning effect production start, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3112 When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3113, the start of the effect is instructed. The fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening inoperative state. The high probability end designation command instructs state transition from a high probability state (corresponding to a probability fluctuation state described later) to a low probability state (corresponding to a normal gaming state described later). The special symbol 1 memory command is used for the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191 as the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 and the special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 pieces It tells you the number of balls not being held (the number of reservations). The special symbol 2 memory command is used for the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display substrate 1191 as the game ball enters the second start port 2004 with 0 to 4 special symbol 2 suspension It tells you the number of balls not being held (the number of reservations). The normal symbol memory command is normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the number of balls not used for variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191) The number of pending))).

  Special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command (preceding judgment instruction command), before special symbol 1 suspension is used for the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191 The first special symbol display 1403 based on 1 hold is for instructing the start of the pre-reading effect for notifying the advance notice of the display result.

  Special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command (preceding judgment instruction command), before special symbol 2 hold is used for the variation display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191 The second special symbol display 1405 based on the hold is to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect of notifying the advance notice of the display result. In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command and the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command are collectively referred to as "memory prefetching effect command".

  The start opening winning command is performed when a detection signal is detected from the first start opening sensor 3112 in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 2002 or with the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 2004. When a detection signal is detected from the second starting opening sensor 3113 (hereinafter referred to as "starting opening prize winning"), the main effect is voiced from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided on the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3. Sent to broadcast the

  The fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension stop period) after the fluctuation is determined, which has settled the specified number of fluctuation shortenings. The high probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined, which is obtained by digesting the high probability frequency in the case of “high probability N times”. Special symbol 1 memory command, when the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change (The game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display board 1191 still displays the variation of the special symbol In the state that there is a number of reservations not being used, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or from the number of reservations, the first special symbol display 1403 changes the special symbol display Is sent when the number of reservations decreases.

  Special symbol 2 memory command, when the special symbol 2 operation pending ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function indication board 1191 still shows the variation of the special symbol In the state that there is a number of reservations not being used, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of reservations increases and the number of the special symbols changes in the second special symbol display 1405 from the number of reservations Is sent when the number of reservations decreases.

  Normal symbol memory command is normal symbol 1 operation pending ball number change (The game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the number of pendings not used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 In the presence of, when the game ball passes gate part 2350 further and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases because it is used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with the normal symbol display 1189 from the number of reservations Sent to).

  The special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of holding increases). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increases (when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holding increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described. As shown in FIG. 209, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into sections of frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and commands named frame status 2. For the various commands, for example, it is assumed that the priority is set in the order of the frame state 1, the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2.

  As the frame state 1 command, "ball out", "full", "in stock of 50 or more", "connection abnormal" and "CR not connected" are prepared. In the case of a broken ball, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit), and the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when full. The value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3) in the case of a connection failure, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in the case of CR disconnection. . In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

  The error cancellation navi command is provided with "ball look", "counting switch error" and "retry error". In the case of a ball, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3) for counting switch errors, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) for retry errors. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the counting switch 838 is in trouble. The "retry error" means that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, The value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, for example, "deep ball removal" is prepared. During unballooning, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B7. The value 0 is set to.

  The transmission timings of these various commands are as follows. The frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when an error is canceled. The error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation. The frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, it is mainly used for deciding the initial value of the jackpot judging random number used for deciding whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the jackpot judging random number. A random number for determining the initial value for the big hit, and a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not the reach is generated when the big hit gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol display 1403 And random number for the variation pattern to be used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol when generating a big hit gaming state The jackpot random number used to determine the jackpot symbol displayed and displayed on the display 1405 and the jackpot used to determine the initial value of this jackpot random number And the pattern for the initial value determination random number, are prepared. In addition, the big hit symbol random number used for the determination of the small hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small hit gaming state It is also used as a random number.

  On the other hand, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol initial value determination random number is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Also, in addition to these random numbers, an ordinary symbol determination random number for use in determining whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for this ordinary symbol determination random number for determination A random number for determining an initial value per normal symbol determination, a random number for a normal symbol variation pattern for use in determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on a regular symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware incorporated in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value) The maximum value is updated within the value 32767, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination.

  When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter".

  The jackpot determination initial value determination random number is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the same method as the above-described update method of the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the jackpot judging random number is counted up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judging random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for the jackpot judgment The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value is based on the ID code extracted from the non-volatile RAM built in by the main control MPU 1310a and based on the extracted ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set.

  In the case where the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the main control MPU 1310 a is operated when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated at the time of power on. A check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of game information stored in the control built-in RAM as a numerical value and stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) The case where it does not correspond with the value (sum value) of a thumb etc. can be mentioned.

  The above-described jackpot determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is derived using the ID code, and is prevented from being analyzed by the following two steps of security measures being taken. Ru.

  First, as a first security measure, if a manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a stores an ID code in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the ID code is prevented from being rewritten even if an external device is used. It is. On the other hand, a second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the big hit judgment.

  For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that acquires fraudulently and updates the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value, the ID code is given a unique code to identify the individual. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided on another game board.

  That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is not useful because it is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines, and thus the predetermined obtained by analyzing it Even when aiming for a starting winning combination of causing a game ball to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 at every predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state can not be generated. .

9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 1310a takes out the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this taken out ID code Execute the initial value derivation process which always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter to be updated. The derived fixed value is set to the initial value update type counter.

  The initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value in the first cycle, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judgment random number, it draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number as a jackpot judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set.

  In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table.

  In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range ranging from the value 0 to the value 32767 as the minimum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range from the middle value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 10 to the value 209 is set in the low probability and the value 10 to 339 is set in the high probability.

  That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that will be a big hit is 200, and in the high probability, the number of big hit random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent synchronization between the plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated, the number of other random number values to be acquired simultaneously is 200 except when acquisition times of random number values are different. For example, prime numbers are used.

  That is, in the present embodiment, if the random number for the big hit judgment is different from the acquisition time of the random number (for example, the value of the random number for the big hit game mode determination obtained when the game ball passes to the gate 2575 described later) The number of random numbers that will be a big hit can not be prime numbers. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, the number (50) of big hit judgment random numbers for the number obtained by dividing the number (200) of the big hit symbols with low probability by 4.

  When considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of

  In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the first value 10 in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely low in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The former range is the latter range compared to the range following the last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range.

  Then, for example, the game ball is illegally acquired by timing the value of the initial value update type counter to be 0 by some method and irradiating the electric wave toward the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. If cheating is done as if entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the value of the initial value update type counter is either within the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), The probability of becoming a value of is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is an intermediate value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value. When the value is set in the range close to the maximum value side, the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) In comparison with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely high in the former period compared to the latter period.

  In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) Comparing the range over to the range from the first value (the value 32668 for the low probability, the value 31768 for the high probability) to the maximum (the value 32767), the former range is more comparable to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high.

  Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit determination. It counts up and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery.

  When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , It will count up toward the maximum value from the value obtained by lottery.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is the median value (value 16384) from the minimum value to the maximum value to the maximum value side If the value is set in a range close to 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is low (low The period over which the probability is 32667 and the probability is 31767) is irregular and random.

  Thereby, for example, the game ball is illegally acquired by any method when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, and the radio waves are emitted toward the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Even if cheating as if entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) It can be said that the probability of becoming any value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) by the counter in the second cycle The required time is time T0.

  The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (the first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1 and time T1 is shorter than time T0. .

  The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from time T1 to the fourth cycle is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. .

  As described above, in the initial value update type counter, the fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter is the minimum value (the first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) (periodicity The player is not aware of this by leaving the

9-3. Main control side power on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs processing at the time of main control side power on as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Do.

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S10, the main control program starts output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e includes a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC 22.

  The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic value becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while a power failure or momentary interruption occurs Then, the logic value thereof becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Be done.

  Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification.

  Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure notice voltage and become stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set.

  In the determination of step S14, it is determined whether the power failure advance signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22 as a power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of a power failure notice signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilized after power on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of D type flip flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15).

  Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when the logic value becomes LOW to be latched and inputted to the PR terminal which is its preset terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time of power on (when the game side power is on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated (step S16).

  In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951. It does depending on whether it is done or not.

  The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not to be instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 952 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20).

  That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after power-on. (The game control side power on operation control means).

  The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer process 2 (step S22). In this weight timer process 2, wait until the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) There is. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time (boot timer) until boot.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted.

  When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S30).

  The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S32).

  In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to the value 0, and information on power recovery is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). Is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where power has been turned on from the state where the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, and detection of high frequency irradiation being detected and reset. Also includes the state of recovery after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs power-on command generation processing (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) at step S24, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S28. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) at step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the main control program The area is cleared (step S36).

  That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value.

  When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 instructs to clear the RAM and erases the game information, the main control MPU 1310 a normally performs processing when the sum values do not match or when the main control side power is shut off. If it has not ended, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter which updates the big hit judgment random number. An initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to a random number for jackpot determination initial value determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-described jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power on command classified as power on to clear the main control built-in RAM and to notify that initialization has been performed is created, and various types of peripheral control boards 1510 are generated. A test command classified into a test relation for inspection is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Following step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the main control program generates an error cancel navigation command It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient).

  Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S48 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S50). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number regardless of the collision judgment (big hit judgment) is updated. In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-coincidence random number updating process.

  After step S50, the process returns to step S46, and the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether or not there is an input of a power failure notification signal. If there is no signal input, the non-coincidence random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The process of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start opening solenoid 2105, the attachment solenoids 2108A, 2108B, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the second special The drive signal being output to the symbol storage indicator 1187, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, the round indicator 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as described above.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is reset, and then the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. The process of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Specifically, for example, the main control program enters each of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011 for detecting gaming balls having entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Detection signals from the large winning opening sensor 2403, 2402 for detecting the gaming ball that has made a ball, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting the gaming ball having entered the first starting opening 2002, to the second starting opening 2004 A detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3113 for detecting the entered gaming ball, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the gate unit 2350, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet. The payout control board 951 receives detection signals from the sensor, detection signals from other sensors omitted, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Reading always 払主 ACK signal from the dispensing control board 951 to convey the fact that it has received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area as the input information.

  A detection signal from a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting opening sensor 3113 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 When each is read, the start-up winning combination command corresponding to this and the other is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3112, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3113 The start-up winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and large gaming balls for entering the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. Detection signals from the winning opening sensors 2403 and 2402, detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2002, and detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3113 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, After a predetermined time (e.g., 10 [mu] s) has elapsed, it is read again as a second time.

  The result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program is from the general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011, the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2352 Chattering and noise by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the detection signal between the first and third times and two readings comparing the second and fourth times. Since false detections due to the influence of etc. can be avoided, general winning opening sensors 3111 and 3011, large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, first starting opening sensor 3112, second starting opening sensor 3113, and gate sensor 2352 The reliability of the detection signal can be enhanced.

  Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, a fluctuation time (first special fluctuation time) in which the first special symbol display 1403 is lit in accordance with a fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) determined in the special symbol and special motorized symbol control processing described later. , Special fluctuation time) and fluctuation time (second special fluctuation time, special fluctuation time) in which the second special symbol display 1405 lights, fluctuation patterns determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric bonus game control processing described later (ordinary symbol) In addition to the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) in which the normal symbol display 1189 lights in accordance with the fluctuation pattern), the fact that the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is transmitted. ACK signal input judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether the payer ACK signal is input or not Performing the time management.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed, When the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern or the normal symbol variation pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S78). In this success random number update process, the above-described random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit symbol, and the random number for small hit symbol are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination and the small hit symbol, which are updated in the non-falling random number update processing of step S50 in the main control side power on processing (main control side main processing) The initial value determination random numbers are also updated.

  The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter is only executed each time this hit random number update processing is performed. Count up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value) The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination.

  When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this false random number updating process. The jackpot determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing. The normal symbol determination random number is the same as the above-described method for updating the jackpot determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the big hit determination initial value, the random number for determining the big hit symbol initial value, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) The non-coincidence random number update process of step S50 and the epidemic random number update process of step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine are respectively updated.

  It should be noted that the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time from the occurrence of unevenness in the processing time of this routine each time the interrupt timer is generated to the next interrupt timer being generated. When the number of times of execution of processing becomes random, random number for the big hit decision initial value decision random number for the big hit design initial value decision random number, and the small hit design random number decision random number in non-falling random number renewal processing of step S50 It may be a mechanism to update only.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out the game ball based on the input information, or with the main control board 1310 A self check command is created to confirm the connection between the delivery control substrate 951 and the substrate. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self check command as the main payment serial data to the payout control board 951.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and, for example, the big prize hole sensor 2402 with the acceptance of the game ball to the big prize hole 2103, Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detection signal output from 2403 is written in each corresponding definition bit area defined continuously by 1 bit over several minutes of the large winning opening 2005, 2006. For example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be dispensed as a prize ball, and is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (disbursement control means).

  In the case where two large winning openings, for example, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, are provided, for example, the main control program serves as the above-mentioned definition bit area in advance in the main control RAM. Out of a plurality of prepared definition bit areas, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2005 and 2006 are used. Hereinafter, they will be referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in order. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a gaming board in which the number of large winning opening is one, one definition bit area is used.

  The definition bit area used is, for example, 1 bit, and is an area adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2103, the detection information based on the detection signal output from the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, for example, is written in the first definition bit area where "1" is for example the fourth bit. Be Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing "0", and is provided to receive the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which state of the defined bit area is to be confirmed. For example, when the main control program defines the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 of the special winning opening 2103 as the fourth bit, the main control program acquires information of the fourth defining bit area .

  Furthermore, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with the prize ball effective range of the large winning opening 2005, 2006 described later to create a prize ball command and transmit it to the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether to write and not to output to the payout control board 951.

  If it is determined that the prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs mask processing for each definition bit area to which detection information based on the detection signals from the above-mentioned large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 is written. For example, the bit may be forcedly set to OFF (“0”), and the award ball command may not be written to the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program indicates that the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 has received one game ball in the first special gaming state, and the first large winning opening sensor Triggered by the fact that the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2402 or the second large winning opening 2403 is written in the above definition bit area corresponding to any of these large winning openings, for example, 15 balls are paid as a winning ball A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to be issued, and the command is written in the transmission information storage area described above.

  At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 and causes the peripheral control MPU 1530a to Output a sound that sounds like

  On the other hand, in the first special game state, the main control program indicates that the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 has received one game ball, the first large winning opening sensor 2403 or the second large winning opening sensor If the detection information based on the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2402 is not written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to any of these special winning openings, for example, a winning ball indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a winning ball Do not create a prize ball command as an instruction.

  Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (the payout control means). The game ball payout operation is not performed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to any one of these winning prize openings, and detects information based on the detection signal from the first winning prize opening sensor 2403 or the second winning prize opening sensor 2403. By clearing the game ball, the game balls can be paid out.

  At this time, when the main control program pays out the game balls for the specified payout number or more which can be paid out in response to the reception of the game balls to the big winning opening 2103, the prize overrun abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 36) Is written to the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in a command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 1530a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since the illegal game balls will not be paid out substantially, damage to the game arcade (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, when the acceptance of the game ball to the big winning opening 2005, 2006 is detected instead, the main control program immediately writes the prize excessive abnormality command in the transmission information storage area, and the peripheral control MPU 1530a The control may be made to notify the speaker.

  After that, the main control program reads the award ball command from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits it to the payout control board 951 (dispensing control means).

  As described above, when the game balls are accepted for the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, the first large winning opening sensor 2403 or the second large winning opening sensor 2403 corresponding to each is received. It can be checked by hearing whether or not it is functioning.

  On the other hand, the main control program is configured such that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 do not receive a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 951 has completed reception of the winning ball command normally within a predetermined time. A self check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) divided into status displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952.

  In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. The main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame) State 2 command)) is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S84). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning opening 2103 by the big winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the big winning game state is not detected. The main control program creates a winning-abnormality display command which is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special motorized prize control process, the main control program updates the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number by +1 each by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 That is, triggered by the start winning (starting condition is satisfied), the value of the counter mentioned above is taken out as the big hit random number value for each starting memory information for which the starting condition is met, and this big hit random number is included in the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as a "special lottery".

  The main control program determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is to be generated based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (a predetermined winning condition is established) ) In the case, the game state is shifted to the big hit game state. The jackpot gaming state corresponds to a special gaming state, a first special gaming state, and a second special gaming state, which will be described later.

  In addition, when determining the big hit game mode, the main control program, for example, as the number of rounds, opening time, as data for defining the big hit game mode set in the big hit game mode determination process (see FIG. 107) described later. A definition is a part of the main control built-in RAM designated by an address offset according to the number of large winning openings with definition data (table) representing the opening time and the winning number limit count number of gaming balls Reading from the data area (not shown).

  In the special symbol and special motorized symbol control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the probability variation judgment value stored in advance in the main control internal ROM (this embodiment) Then I call this "special lottery").

  The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the probability variation hit determination value (a probability variation transition condition is satisfied) If so, then it shifts to a probability variation state, but if the jackpot random number value does not match this probability variation hit determination value (the condition is not satisfied after probability variation), it shifts to a gaming status other than that probability variation ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability fluctuation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Furthermore, in this special symbol and special electric combination control process, the main control program is a special variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined as a result of each special lottery according to the lottery result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery. A variation pattern command including time (variation time) and success / failure information of each special lottery is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this special symbol and special electric combination control process, the main control program creates various commands related to the special image 1 synchronization effect according to the lottery result of the first special lottery described above, while the main control program In accordance with the lottery result, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created. As described above, the main control program stores various commands created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  At the same time, the main control program determines the start pending display mode with reference to the preceding determination table (not shown) based on various random number values acquired in response to the start winning combination, and displays the variation after this starting winning combination. A command used to execute a process (hereinafter referred to as “preceding determination process”) that causes the lottery result of a special lottery to be implied in advance before disclosing the stop symbol of the special symbol If a command “is listed” is to be made and this precedent determination processing is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At this time, the main control program includes the information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game as will be described later, in place of the random number value of the special lottery itself. It is like that. Details of this advance determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the first special symbol display 1403 according to the variation pattern determined at the start winning according to the type of the special symbol, or the second special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set to light 1405 and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

  The main control program, for example, when transitioning to the big hit gaming state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning opening 1) Generates a count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command), stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or opens / closes the opening / closing member to drive the actuator solenoid 2108A or 2108B. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  The main control program performs two rounds so as to light a two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the number of times the big winning opening 2005, 2006 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two times. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 6 round display lamp to light the 6 round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190 when the round is 6 times, and outputs information as output information Store in storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp to light the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 12 times, and outputs information as output information Store in storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 16 round display lamp to light the 16 round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190 when the round is 16 times, and stores the output information as output information Store in the area.

  The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the game state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence or absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

  Furthermore, in the special symbol and special electric character control process, the main control program causes the normal gaming state to shift to the big hit gaming state when the winning conditions are satisfied as described above, and further, an example of the transition conditions When the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the state is also shifted to the probability change gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (playing state control means).

  Here, the main control program may shift to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state, substantially without paying out the game balls substantially in the big hit gaming state. It should be noted that, as the specific gaming state, a time saving operation condition as another example of the transition condition may be established and the time saving function may be in operation, or both of It may be a gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs the normal symbol and normal motorized product control process (step S88). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and performs gate winning processing based on the input information.

  In this gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the judgment result, the main control program extracts the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol judgment and uses the main control built-in RAM as gate information Store in the gate information storage area of

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. . For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas.

  Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads out the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol from the read gate information, and performs main control It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as a "normal lottery"). The main control program determines whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (lottery result by normal lottery).

  When the main control program causes the open / close operation based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in the open state, and the game ball becomes acceptable to the second start port 2004, and the game is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state. Furthermore, the main control program determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned decision based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation pattern, and creates various commands divided into general drawing synchronization effect related, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area as the transmission information, and the above output information Store in the output information storage area.

  The main control program, when the value of the random symbol determination for per normal symbol taken out matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, creates various commands relating to the regular electric circuit production effect The transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

  On the other hand, when the main control program does not match the determined value per normal symbol stored in the main control built-in ROM, the value for the extracted normal symbol determination random number per random pattern variation pattern random number described above Based on the normal symbol variation pattern is determined. The main control program creates various commands classified into a common figure tuning effect relation and stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and turns on the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol variation pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

  Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and outputs various signals based on the output information.

  The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is used as the payout control board 951 When it is a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2103, and a starting opening solenoid 2105 which opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 2106. 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time information output information during start And outputs various information (game information) signals regarding the game, such as a mouth winning information output signal to the payout control board 951.

  Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as a command or data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as the main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 (command Transmission means).

  The transmission information is classified into various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various commands classified into special figure 2 synchronous effect related, and big hit related Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on detection signals from the special winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is detected) , Various commands divided into power-on, various commands classified into general drawing synchronization effect related, various commands classified into ordinary electric circuit related product related, various commands classified into notification display (door frame open command, door frame Various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified as status display, closing command, body frame open command, body frame closing command, etc. Bikomando and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes.

  Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program transmits a frame state 1 command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navi command from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the error release navi command is issued to the peripheral control board 1510 Send. In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program transmits the main body frame open command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main body frame open command.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program transmits the main body frame closing command to the peripheral control board 1510 . In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame open command from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program transmits a door frame open command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program transmits the door closing command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, whereby the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. Thereby, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 1310 a stores the contents of the general purpose register in the stack in a hardware manner and saves it. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the main control side main processing.

  At step S96, the contents stored in the stack and read out are read out and written in the original register. After returning from step S96, the main control MPU 1310a sets the interrupt permission.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control substrate 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on, and FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on of FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit subsequent to FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing, and FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball look determination process, and FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for a winning ball. FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball, and FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing an example of a stock monitoring process. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball look-up operation setting process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, and FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing an example of the error release operation determination processing, and FIG. 229 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball coverage determination processing, prize Ball prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, withdrawal ball look operation judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball look operation setting processing, retry operation monitor processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described.

  By the way, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball sight determination processing, prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball viewing operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is done as a process. In addition, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, award ball stock number addition processing for award balls, The priority order is set in the order of the winning ball stock number addition processing for the rental balls, the stock monitoring processing, and the payout ball looking-up operation determination setting processing.

10-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 is controlled by the payout control MPU 954a, as shown in FIGS. Perform processing at the time of input.

  When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 954a to set an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 954a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, settings and the like of various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 954a are performed.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the supply of power stops temporarily), the voltage decreases and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 reports a power failure warning signal Notice signal is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310.

  The wait timer process 1 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on (step S506). In the present embodiment, for example, 200 milliseconds as a waiting time (wait timer). (Ms) is set. In the determination of step S508, the payout control program executes based on the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 952 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, it is judged that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear and the operation switch It is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated when it is determined that it is instructed to perform the RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW while it is determined that the 952 is not operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514).

  In other words, the payout control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, also referred to as "RAM with built-in payout control") built in the payout control MPU 954a for a predetermined time after power-on. (Discharge control side power on operation control means).

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 954a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The number of ball stock numbers PBS, the number of real ball counts PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the logic of the PRDY signal logic stored in the CR communication information storage area This flag is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set, and is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. Be done.

  The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 954a.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the payout control program sets a stack pointer (step S520). This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. Indicates an address stacked on the stack for temporary storage. The payout control program advances the stack pointer next each time the stack is stacked.

  In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and is set to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value 1 (step S528).

  The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information, checksum value, etc. is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout control unit power-off process normally ends, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally ended. .

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is ended normally, the payout control program sets the working area of the payout control internal RAM as the power recovery time. (Step S530).

  In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from a ROM (hereinafter also referred to as a "dispense control built-in ROM") built in the payout control MPU 954a, The power recovery time information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power recovery" includes a state where power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, as well as a state where power is turned on after the power is shut off.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) in step S522 (that is, when the payout information is erased), the checksum value does not match in step S526, or When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 in S528 (the value is 0) (that is, when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally), the payout control program The entire area is cleared (step S532).

  That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear processing triggered by the detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (payout control side power on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control program sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the working area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or when a power failure or momentary stop occurs, the power failure notification signal (disbursed power failure notification signal) is sent to the main control board as a power failure notification when the voltage drops below the power failure notification voltage. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of 1310. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In step S540, when there is no input of the power failure advance notification signal, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms described later, and is set to a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, while 2 ms has not elapsed Sometimes it is set to the value 0.

  In step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (payout failure notice signal) Determine if

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 in step S542, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read out from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are outputted from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 954a based on the various information.

  In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 834 is performed. Various information such as drive information, ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 834 actually paid out the game balls, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 953 are stored.

  When the payout control program normally receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a based on the output information, a payout ACK signal is sent to the main control board 1310 It outputs or outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834, or outputs the number of balls for which the payout motor 834 has actually paid out the gaming balls to the external terminal board 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout Every time the motor 834 actually pays out 10 game balls, it outputs a prize ball number information signal to the external terminal board 784.) and outputs a display signal to the error LED indicator 953.

  Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 954a are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 952, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, a detection signal from the counting switch 838, a detection signal from the full switch, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal A main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 1310 for notifying that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the payout control program is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the ball is in a state where the ball is dispelled by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is set when the game ball stored in the winning ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is discharged, and the skipping judgment time set when the fixed position judgment of the payout rotating body is not performed. Ball out determination time, fullness determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit is full with stored gaming balls, ball out detection sensor 827 Is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the Performing the sphere depletion determination time time management such as it is. In addition, in this timer update process, the payout control program is inconsistent between the number of balls of the gaming ball received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotary body and the number of balls actually detected by the count switch 838 When it is determined whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to monitor whether or not the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the repetition is repeated, the inconsistency counter set as the determination condition Manage time of reset judgment time.

  For example, when the ball judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the payout control program subtracts the ball judging time by 2 ms each time the timer updating process is performed, and the ball judging time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming 0.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full determination time is 504 ms, the ball out determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (approximately 2 hours). The payout control program subtracts the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time by 2 ms each time the timer update processing is performed. The payout control program accurately measures the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time when the subtraction result becomes the value 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above Determine The payout control MPU 954 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure.

  Thereby, even when the payout control program is executing the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, even if the instantaneous stop or power failure makes it impossible to continue the payout operation, At the time of power recovery, since the payout operation can be continued, the gaming balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency.

  In other words, while the payout control MPU 954a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 951a causes a momentary stop or power failure while paying out the game balls to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game balls can not be continued, the number of ball stock PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery The values such as are stored as the delivery backup information, and are restored to values such as the number of ball stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC and the like immediately before instantaneous interruption or power failure. As a result, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the payout of gaming balls continues. It can be carried out.

  In this manner, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. It has become. Thereby, various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  The various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the payout control program is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery, and the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM Read out the PRDY signal output setting information from. In this CR communication process, the payout control program sets the read PRDY signal output setting information to the state of the logical value of the PRDY signal, for example, indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is not possible. If yes, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  The payout control program is executed as one processing of the main operation setting processing, for example, in the retry operation monitoring processing, it is included in the payout backup information and of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. Based on the value of the mismatch counter INCC, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. When the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program determines that the retry operation is abnormally operating, that is, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is abnormal. It is determined that there is, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1.

  The payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 in the payout ball look-up operation judgment setting process, for example, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is not possible when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The state (LOW) of the logic value of the PRDY signal which indicates the presence is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the state of the logical value of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. Output to CR unit 6 from the terminal.

  Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of power recovery, it is extremely early after power recovery. At the stage, a PRDY signal can be output to the CR unit 6 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is not possible. At the same time, it is possible to inform the CR unit 6 that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic value is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko gaming machine When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball connection device board 869, the game is paid out In order to indicate that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  On the other hand, when the logic value is LOW, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are connected via the game ball connection device board 869. When not electrically connected, the payout control program sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the predetermined output of the payout control MPU 954a. Output to CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the port.

  Note that the state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the dispensing control board 951 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored as CR connection information in the state information storage area.

  Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the payout control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, the accommodation of the far cover unit 270 described above by the detection signal from the full switch. It is determined whether or not the space is full with stored gaming balls, or the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 described above is predetermined by the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 It is determined whether it is more than a number.

  For example, the determination as to whether or not the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270 is full with stored gaming balls uses a timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to complete the full switch and full out of ball check processing at this time. When the detection signal from the full switch and the out-of-ball check process in the previous (2 ms ago) was turned off, that is, the detection signal from the full switch transited from OFF to ON. At this time, the payout control program starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552.

  When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the payout control program determines that the detection signal from the full tank switch is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine if there is. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch is ON, the payout control program describes the full tank information to notify that effect that the storage space of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming ball stored therein. It stores in the status information storage area.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch is OFF, the state information storage area is full information that informs that effect that the payout control program is not full with the gaming ball in which the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270 is stored. Remember to

  It is also determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to run out of balls in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is OFF to ON When it is transitioned to the timing of the ball out determination time (119 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started.

  When the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, the payout control program detects the out of ball detection sensor 827 in this full and out-of-ball check process. It is determined whether or not it is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is ON, the out-of-ball information notifying that the number of balls of the gaming ball taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is a predetermined number or more While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is OFF, the out-of-range ball is transmitted to notify that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, the payout control program receives various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310, such as a prize ball command and a self check command.

  When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lent balls, ball removal and ball sighting are performed, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. Do.

  Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 of the payout control board 951 is created, and it is stored in the above output information storage area as LED display information. Remember.

  For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on the ball out information, the corresponding display data (when the ball number of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number) In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various types of information are read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame) classified into state display based on the various information A close command, a frame state 1 command, an error release navi command and a frame state 2 command are created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the out-of-ball information when the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number. And sends it to the main control board 1310.

  In this command transmission process, the payout control program, for example, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, information on a portion where the error occurred in the payout operation (hereinafter referred to as “error The frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including the occurrence position information (1) is generated (error occurrence command generation means).

  On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-described error occurs when the payout control program determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is the value 1, that is, the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 is detected. A cancellation navi command (first error cancellation command) is output (command transmission means).

  The payout control program transmits a main body frame open command when the main body frame open detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 is input. On the other hand, when the main body frame closing detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input, the payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command.

  The payout control program transmits a door frame open command when the door frame open detection signal from the door frame open switch 618 is input. On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command.

  The payout control program reads out the error information including the error content from the above-mentioned state information storage area in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), and the machine number information for identifying itself and other pachinko machines and the error An error information signal based on the information is output to a hall computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 784.

  When the hall computer receives the error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk is identified based on the machine number information. In the pachinko gaming machine of the number, it can be grasped that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). In step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, whereby the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. Thereby, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control program returns to step S539 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and in step S540 determines whether or not the power failure notification signal (delivery power failure notification signal) is input. judge. If there is no input of this blackout notice signal (payout blackout notice signal), the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 in step S542, and this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG If the value is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, and the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546.

  The payout control program performs port output processing in step S548, and performs port input processing in step S550. The payout control program performs timer update processing in step S552, performs CR communication processing in step S554, and performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556. The payout control program performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, performs main operation setting processing in step S562, and performs LED display data creation processing in step S564.

  The payout control program performs command transmission processing in step S566, sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and repeats steps S539 to S568. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 954a fluctuates. In the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 954a preferentially outputs, to the main control board 1310, a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. As a result, the payout control MPU 954a secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when there is an input of the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 954a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a executes the power-on process of the payout control unit again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 954a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit is normally ended. I'm examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

10-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and switches (saves) the register (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control program sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

10-3. Rotation angle switch history creation processing]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 840 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 displays the rotation angle from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 217 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610).

  The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of detection signals from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In step S612, the input information is read out from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. When there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is determined that the optical axis of the is shifted from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non blocking state to the blocking state.

  If it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, the payout control program performs shift processing of rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2 , B 2 B B 1, B 1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B 0, etc., shift from the least significant bit B 0 to the most significant bit B 7 by one bit at a time.

  Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, shift processing of rotational angle switch detection history information is performed (step S618). In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the payout control program performs the same process as the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information of step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. B7 B B6, B6 B B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 最 下 位 B1, B1 最 下 位 least significant bit B0, etc. from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  As described above, each time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit According to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit changes the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state The value 1 or the value 0 is set. Therefore, a history of detection signals from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is created.

10-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip process]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In the sprocket fixed position determination skipping process, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is at the regular position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is completed. This makes it possible to reliably start the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control substrate 951, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 954a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether FLG is the value 0 (step S630).

  The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and the value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping) The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when not skipping).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (does not skip) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotary body is performed, the payout control program determines the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control internal RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634).

  This fixed position determination value is stored in the dispensing built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value 0 and the lower 4 bits. B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value 1, the detection slit is the light of the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the axis is in the state of transitioning from the blocking state to the non-blocking state.

  At the occurrence of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps. The rotation of the dispensing motor 834 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the discharge rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 834.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control program creates the history of detection signals from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the rotation angle switch history creation processing and creates the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, and the created rotation angle Based on the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 due to the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles, the fixed position determination of the payout rotor is performed. .

  Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps, so it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash. Can. Therefore, since the erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body due to the backlash can be prevented, the rotational position of the dispensing rotating body can be properly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Thereby, it can be set so as not to perform fixed position determination of the payout rotating body (skip). Note that the payout control program sets the rotational position of the payout rotary body at step S636 to the home position of the payout rotary body.

  Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the number of concave portions of the dispensing rotating body, and is formed to be equally divided (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. The rotation of the dispensing motor 834 is, as described above, the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is configured to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 to transition from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as "edge detection state"); The state where the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determined state”) and (3) the detection slit blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detecting switch 840 from the non-blocking state It manages in three states of the state ("fixed position determination skip state") which changed to the state.

  Each state corresponds to the following rotation. That is, in the edge detection state of (1), it corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 834, and in the fixed position determination state of (2), it corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 834; In the skip state, this corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 834. Thus, the rotational position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotational position of the payout rotating body, is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps.

  In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit changes the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 834 The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  Since the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, subtraction of the skip determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). The payout control program subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is Do. The home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 954a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. Generally, when the game balls rub against each other and are charged by friction, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise.

  For this reason, the dispensing device 830 is affected by noise and is in the file environment. A blade rotation detection switch 840 is provided on the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the payout device 830, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the gaming ball. The wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control substrate 951 and the in-prize ball case inner substrate 754 in the payout device 830 is also susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the gaming balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit interrupts the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state In the state of transition to, the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is enhanced. In addition, since the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained in advance by calculation, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

10-5. Ball sight judging process]
Next, the ball look determination process will be described. In this ball sight judging process, it is judged whether or not the ball sighting state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball judging process is started, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU 954a to control the rotation angle switch detection history from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 219. The information RSW-HIST is read out (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the home position determination value.

  The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above. In the present embodiment, “00001 111 B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, the upper 4 bits B 7 to B 4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B 3 to B 0 have a value 1. In step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The detection slit changes the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and it is assumed that the ball is not seen. finish.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value in step S642, the payout control program Sets the value 1 to the flag PBE-FLG while the sphere is in sight (step S644). The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotary body, and is set to a value 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing a blind motion. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 when the ball is not looking down.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball sighting determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. By making the ball look determination time effective, subtraction of the ball look determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process).

10-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing and a winning ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. The winning ball stock number adding process for the winning balls is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a winning ball command described later from the main control substrate 1310, and the winning ball stock number adding process for the rental balls is CR unit 6 It is a process which adds the number of balls paid out based on the lent ball request signal from. First, a winning ball stock number adding process for winning balls will be described, and then, a winning ball stock number adding process for rental balls will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the winning ball stock ball number addition processing is set to be performed preferentially. After the game balls corresponding to the number of the ball stock numbers added in the ball for the number of balls for the ball for prize balls are paid out by the payout device 830, it is set to perform the process for adding the number ball stock balls for ball for rental There is.

[10-6-1. Prize Ball Stock Ball Addition Number Processing]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 receives the prize ball command as shown in FIG. 220 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether there is any (step S650).

  This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S 560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads out the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  The payout control program ends this routine as it is when the received command information is not the winning ball command in step S650, while when the received command information is the winning ball command in step S650, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball command. The PBV is read out from the winning balls number information table (step S652). Although this prize ball number information table will be described in detail later, the prize ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. There is.

  As a result, the winning ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the winning ball stock number PBS is read out from the winning ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the winning ball number PBV read in step S652 to the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the award ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[10-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls]
Next, a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball will be described. When the winning ball stock number addition processing for the rental balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 requests the rental balls as shown in FIG. 221 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether there is a signal (step S660).

  This determination is performed based on the lent ball request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the rental ball request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a rental ball request signal.

  The payout control program ends this routine as it is when there is no rental ball request signal at step S660, while when there is a rental ball request signal at step S660, the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM The stock number PBS is read out (step S662). The payout control program adds the rental ball number RBV to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and ends this routine.

  The number of balls to be lent RBV is a fixed value, and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of balls to be lent RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the rental ball request signal read out in step S660 from the input information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, since the prize balls are prioritized (the prize balls and the lent balls are differentiated and managed), the lent ball request signal is held even when there is a lent ball request signal, and the prize With the completion of the delivery of the balls, the balls are paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning balls stock number PBS is set to 0 and the payout of the rental balls is performed.

10-7. Stock surveillance process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. The stock monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether the player continues to play the game in a state of being filled up (stocked state) with the game ball in which the accommodation space of the far cover unit is stored during the game.

  When stock monitoring processing is started, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 222 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Step S670) It is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the dispensing built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold value TH.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and terminates this routine. The caution flag CA-FLG causes the player to start stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the far cover unit, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of award ball stock numbers described above) reaches the caution threshold TH or more. It is a flag indicating that the threshold value is 1 and is set to a value 1 when reaching the caution threshold TH or more and a value 0 when the caution threshold TH is not reached or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

  If the game state is a big hit and the player is relaxed and looks forward to the effects unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, the player is carelessly for one round The game ball paid out as a winning ball may be forgotten from the lower plate 322 by the operation of the lower plate ball extraction button 354. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with gaming balls, and the gaming balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space of the far cover unit.

  When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is filled with gaming balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH, and various items provided in the door frame 3 as a caution effect Several LEDs on the decorative board blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to tell the store clerk in the hall that the player's game is to be watched. Thus, the store clerk in the hall can notify the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 322, and the player can play the game while filling the lower plate 322 (the space for storing the far cover unit) with the game ball full. Can be prevented from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 which can be represented by one byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the store clerk in the hall that the player's game should be watched as early as possible.

[10-8. Disbursement ball look operation judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball look-up operation judgment setting process, whether the game ball is paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate by the payout motor 834, the ball is made to move, or such payout or discharge is not performed It is processing to set to either.

  When the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 is under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and the rotation angle switch history information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S680).

  Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S 680 matches the home position determination value. The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above. In the present embodiment, “00001 111 B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, the upper 4 bits B 7 to B 4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B 3 to B 0 have a value 1. In step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match, the payout control program It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described below is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry) When the operation is operating normally), the values are respectively set to 0.

  If, in step S682, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. If the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, the retry operation is not in an abnormal operation, the payout control program determines whether the ball watching flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 or not. It is determined (step S686).

  The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the ball for the payout motor 834 is spherical A value of 1 is set when the operation is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball is not looking down.

  When the flag PEB-FLG is not 1 in step S686 (ie, the value 0), that is, when the ball is not moving, the payout control program determines whether or not the prize ball information storage of the above-mentioned payout control internal RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 834.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit is full with the reserved game balls. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the fullness information stored in the fullness and step-out check processing of step S 556 in the payout control unit power-on process (disbursement control unit main process). Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit is full with the stored gaming sphere.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the fal cover unit is not full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program performs payout setting processing described later (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out the gaming balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the fal cover unit is full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped when the gaming sphere filled with the accommodation space of the far cover unit is full. If a winning ball occurs while the dispensing motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the dispensing motor 834 increases, and the winning ball stock number PBS is added and increased by the winning ball stock ball addition processing. Become.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not larger than 0 (is the value 0) at step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. Thus, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the ball is in-flag flag PBE-FLG is the value 1, that is, the ball is moving, the payout control program performs the ball setting operation processing described later (step S700) Finish. In this ball facing operation setting process, a ball facing operation for eliminating the state of the ball due to the dispensing rotating body of the dispensing device 830 is performed.

  On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is in abnormal operation, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S702, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not in communication with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present (CR unit 6 Holds the state where the logic of PRDY signal is LOW, that is, it falls, and the state of the logic of PRDY signal is used as PRDY signal output setting information. The setting is made and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, the payout control program stores the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 215. The PRDY signal output setting information is read out from this, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic value is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954 The signal is output to the CR unit 6 through the device connection terminal plate 869.

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program The logic state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, the payout control program outputs the EXS signal from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. The output setting information is read out, and the read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logical value is maintained, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 Output to CR unit 6

  Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic value of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic value of the EXS signal When HI (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

[10-8-1. Disbursement setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to perform setting for paying out the gaming balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 controls the number of drive commands DRV from the RAM with built-in payout control as shown in FIG. 224 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV is used to command the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, and is equal to the number of ball stock numbers PBS. The number of drive commands DRV is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S710, the number DRV of drive instructions is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is a value 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive instruction number DRV whether or not the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of balls of the game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (stop ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S714, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. Although this detailed description will be described later, this count is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process). The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. At step S 718, the real ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read out in step S718 from the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 in the award ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720) The real ball count PB is set to the value 0 (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are the value 0, at step S722, the value of the award ball stock number PBS read out at step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive instruction number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of gaming balls to be dispensed by the payout motor 834, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts (decrements, only 1) the drive command number DRV by 1 and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the process when the payout control unit is turned on (payout control unit main process).

  Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S 728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds (increment) the real ball count PB by the value 1 (step S730), and ends this routine. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is the case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, and there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination of step S728. In the case where the ball count PB is not incremented, it is assumed that one game ball can not be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. to decide.

  Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS in the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again.

  Thus, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real sphere count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one sphere to be paid out may be included in the prize sphere stock number PBS. Yes, in other words, since the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, it is possible to perform a retry operation to again pay out the one ball to be paid out. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game balls will not be paid out to the player, and the disadvantage of the player due to the non-payment of the game balls can be prevented.

[10-8-2. Ball clasp movement setting process]
Next, the ball look-up operation setting process will be described. In this ball facing operation setting process, setting is performed to eliminate the state where the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

  When the ball setting operation setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 passes the ball judging time as shown in FIG. 225 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not it has been (step S750). This determination is performed based on the determination time of the ball subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process). Specifically, the ball judging time is stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the determination time.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads out the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 matches the home position determination value.

  As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value do not match, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 is set so that the ball can be turned on (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S754, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following the step S758, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the ball watching operation ends (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 834 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are The value is set to 0 when the operation is not being performed (the end of the ball leaning operation).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S750 that the ball is determined to have passed, the payout control program sets a stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S762, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, when the payout control MPU 954a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present, the logic value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, held down, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and the CR communication information storage area is set. Remember.

  Thus, the payout control program stores the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM in the CR communication process (step S554) of the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 215. The PRDY signal output setting information is read out from this, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic value is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954 The signal is output to the CR unit 6 through the device connection terminal plate 869.

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program The logic state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR communication process (step S 554) in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the payout control program stores the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The EXS signal output setting information is read out from this and the read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logical value is maintained, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a Output to the CR unit 6.

  Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means, as described above, that when the logic value of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, When the logic value of the EXS signal is HI (the EXS signal is held rising) it is to maintain that logic HI.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the end of the ball watching operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[10-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the gaming ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 matches the home position determination value. The home position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001 111 B (" B "represents a bit)". In the fixed position determination value, the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S772, the payout control program determines whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Do.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 (increment, step S774).

  The incoincidence counter INCC receives the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 It is a counter for calculating the difference. This misalignment counter INCC normally has a value of 0 because the number of gaming balls received and dispensed by the recess of the payout rotating body matches the number of balls detected by the count switch 838. Become.

  The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process, and the retry operation causes the number of balls of the gaming ball to be received and paid out by the depression of the payout rotating body, and is actually detected by the count switch 838 It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls, which are inconsistent due to the inconsistencies of the ball numbers, are repeatedly paid out.

  The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776).

  This determination is made on the basis of the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 or not.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts the value 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778) .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unintended gaming ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about a few millionths, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  In the processing (step S530) for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the payout backup stored in the payout control built-in RAM at power recovery as described above. Information to be used in the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the information, which is the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to a value such as the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. can do. Thereby, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the gaming ball by the payout device 830, which has been performed immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery.

  Therefore, for example, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, for example, immediately before the instantaneous interruption or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device It is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by 830 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is normal by the determination of step S780.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S780 that the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is abnormal. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state by the determination of step S780 even at the time of power recovery.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program The payout control built-in RAM described above is configured to set retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED indicator 953 which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 951 to notify that “is”. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782).

  On the other hand, when notifying that it is "in prize ball stock", the payout control program sets the prize ball in-progress information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 953 and incorporates the above-mentioned payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S 782).

  Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784).

  In this step S784, the mismatch counter INCC is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Is initialized when this internal factor occurs.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM at power-on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of the external factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 as a RAM clear signal.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a, the main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and outputs a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the RAM clear notification sound from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3.

  Following step S784, the payout control program sets the retry error flag RTERR-FLG to the value 1 (step S786), and the routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally or not, and is set to a value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, while the retry operation is not operating abnormally. The value is set to 0 when (the retry operation is operating normally).

  The payout control program controls the payout control unit power supply under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and sets (stores) the retry error information (or the prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the entry process (dispensing control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  The payout control program creates display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, and stores it in the output information storage area as LED display information. As a result, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 953 based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process, and the number "5" is output to the error LED display 953. Is displayed.

  In the main control board 1310, the main control program transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The periphery control board 1510 is a door frame side lighting blink command for outputting a lighting signal for emitting a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The light is output to the frame relay substrate 911 or the door frame left side decoration substrate 160, and the plurality of corresponding LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color.

  The store clerk or the like in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs, as described above, opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the numeral “on the error LED display 953 mounted on the payout control board 951 It is possible to confirm that, for example, a “retry error” has occurred by visually observing that “5” is displayed.

  As a result, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks the malfunction of the count switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 951 from the count switch 838, contact failure of various connectors, etc. in order to investigate the cause. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 953 are not notified, it can be performed extremely quickly.

  By intentionally deactivating the count switch 838, the retry operation described above makes it difficult to detect the game balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed by forcibly generating Since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk or the like in the hall notices this issue mode and rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. Even if the value of the inconsistence counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls As a result, it is possible to minimize the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the count switch 838.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is initialized when an internal factor that has become an event has occurred.

  Thus, the mismatch counter INCC is not initialized, for example, in response to the occurrence of an external factor such as operating the operation switch 952 to clear the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is altered illegally and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 954a, the incoincidence counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an unauthorized action. Absent.

[10-10. Mismatched counter reset judgment processing]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this misalignment counter reset process, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 It is a process which determines whether the inconsistency counter INCC which calculates the difference of, is reset.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time is under the control of the payout control MPU 954a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether it has elapsed (step S790).

  This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process (step S552) in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S 790, the payout control program reads out time management information from the time management information storage area, and determines whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S790 that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program ends this routine. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours).

  Subsequent to step S 792, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the above-mentioned award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S 794). Finish.

  As described above, the misalignment counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the gaming balls normally received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 Because it does, it becomes the value 0.

  The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, so that the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by the retry operation. It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls which are inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 and the number of balls are repeatedly repeated.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a frame such as the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is replaced by replacing the game board 5 It is configured to be able to change the specification. For this reason, a payout control substrate 951 for controlling the payout device 830, a drive power supply of the payout device 830, and a power supply substrate for generating a control power of the payout control substrate 951 are provided on the frame side as a common function.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 determines whether the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC as described above. It is configured to be able to determine the action. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored when the power is shut off, while the process in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process In the power-on setting), the processing is started again from the stored mismatch counter INCC when the power is turned on.

[10-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 952 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951 causes the operation switch 952 to release an error as shown in FIG. 228 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800).

  This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, determines that it does not instruct to perform error release. Control switch 952 is not operated, while when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, the operation switch 952 is operated judging that it is instructed to perform error release. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program checks an error flag state confirmation process. Perform (step S802).

  In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the dispensing device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, while the retry operation is not abnormally operated (the retry operation is operating normally). Sometimes it is set to the value 0. For this reason, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a.

  Following step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred in the state of the error flag based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag Are set (stored) in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Thus, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout controller main process), the payout control program reads various information (state information) from the state information storage area, and the read state Based on the information, a state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the payout control program has an error in the retry operation. The retry error information that indicates the occurrence is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), the payout control program creates a retry error status command and sends it to the main control board 1310. .

  The main control board 1310 having received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process, and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board 1510 The sub control program performs a retry operation error notification process to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation.

  In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Please check the winning ball unit.” And “Please check the harness of the payout control board.”, For example, is repeated twice the main unit frame 4 The information is notified to a store clerk or the like in the hall by being reproduced from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in and the speaker of the door frame 3.

  The store clerk or the like in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation fails in the count switch 838, breaks in various harnesses extending to the payout control board 951 from the count switch 838, contact failures in various connectors, etc. As compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 573 or the pair of lower speakers 921, confirmation can be made extremely quickly. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, the plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, release setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred in the state of the error flag based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information checked in step S802, the error flag The error corresponding to the has already been forced to stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 953 which is a segment indicator that is already mounted on the payout control board 951 or that it is in a state where it can lend a ball. In order to transmit to the CR unit 6, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held HI, that is, held up, and an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954 Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, the payout control program already has an error LED indicator. In order to forcibly stop the numeral “5” indicating that “retry error” displayed by 953, retry error information stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is It forcibly overwrites the information on which the graphic "-" notifying "normal" is displayed.

  In order to inform the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is held HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the payout control program is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. From the game ball, etc., to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and the routine ends. In this error flag initialization process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred in the state of the error flag based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information checked in step S802, Initialize the error flag.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is maintained at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215, PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic value is LOW, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a through the lending device connection terminal board 869 of the game ball etc CR unit 6 Output to

  As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or larger than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, as determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process, the payout control program determines this internal factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S786 of the same process triggered by the occurrence of the external factor At the same time, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized.

  The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated when the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 952 is operated to clear RAM to cancel the error. As in the case where the switch 952 is operated, initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the main control side main processing from the time the power is turned on when the operation switch 952 (operation switch), which was originally to be used for canceling the error that occurred in relation to the payout operation Operation for causing the RAM clear function to start initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until it is It functions as a department.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation of the game ball after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the store clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko gaming machine, if even the position of the operating switch 952 on the back of the gaming machine is remembered, according to the timing of operating the operating switch 952, If it has passed a predetermined time since the power was turned on, the function to release the error generated in connection with the payout operation of the gaming ball is exhibited, while according to the timing when the operation switch 952 is operated, it is Within a predetermined time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited.

  Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error and can cope appropriately without losing the switch operation, so the game is interrupted. It is possible to resume the game before the player who has lost the game loses the will to play.

[10-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 215 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6.

  First, signal processing at the time of a dispensing operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently, an input signal confirmation process from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of gaming balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen is performed twice as the amount of money) is the number of lent balls, The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described.

  The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the input information read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In the CR communication process, the payout control program confirms the logic state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms which is an interrupt timer cycle.

10-12-1. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball rental]
The payout control program reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. When the read out PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the payout control program is executed as shown in FIG. As shown in d), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, to raise and hold the signal to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, that is, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954. The signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H0).

  In this state, for example, when the player operates the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360 by the player, the ball rental sensor 365b is turned on (turned on), and this ball rental operation signal is TDS. The frequency display plate 365 is input to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the amount of balls for 200 yen as the amount of money. 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 954a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 954a to which this BRDY signal has been input, the payout control program is, as shown in FIG. 229 (b), from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to ) Until a lapse of 58 ms), a predetermined number of lent balls (for example, 25 balls) are paid out from the CR unit 6 in a single payout operation via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It monitors whether or not BRQ, which is a request signal for starting a single dispensing operation, rises.

  Since CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the game ball for 100 yen to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the rental ball number among the ball number of the game ball for 200 yen as an amount, FIG. 229 (b As shown in), until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal thereof Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c) wm, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 954a causes the BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (this embodiment Then, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the state in which it has been raised is kept to be paid out in order to indicate that one dispensing operation has been started until 20 ms ± 1 ms has elapsed. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 954a, and outputs it as the EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input is from the timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (which is set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed. The BRQ that has been raised and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c), the payout control MPU 954a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses from timing H4. It goes and pays out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the number of balls for the predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of gaming balls for 100 yen as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from timing H3 is held low with its logic, that is, held in the lowered state, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. , EXS are output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the game ball for the remaining 100 yen out of the ball number of the game ball for 200 yen as an amount to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the lent ball number, FIG. ) Until the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, it is set to 268 ms at maximum) from the timing H5, the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board from the CR unit 6 The signal is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 954a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c), the payout control MPU 954a similarly pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of gaming balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls using the method described above. The EXS signal which has been raised and held is held with its logic as LOW, that is, in a lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and as EXS, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 stands from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 229 (a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 954a) through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The loan request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the payout monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are processed when the dispensing control unit is turned on. The timer updating process in step S 552 in (Payout control unit main process) is performed.

  In addition, the payout control program is out of communication with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is out, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (BRDY logic value from CR unit 6 is LOW) That is, when falling and held), the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing H1 has its logic LOW. That is, the payout control program is held in the lowered state and is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and as the PRDY, the CR unit 6 is connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output (timing H9).

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the payout control program maintains the logic state of the EXS signal. , And output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. The payout control program is output as the EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic value of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic value of the EXS signal is HI If at all (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

  As described above, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control program (the payout control MPU 954a). This CR unit 6 performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen twice as the number of game balls worth 200 yen twice, thereby making the game balls with 50 balls the number of lent balls as the upper plate 321 Pay out to the lower plate 322.

  When a store clerk or the like in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper tray 321 or the lower is used as the number of balls for the game ball for 100 yen. When it is set to pay out to the plate 322, the payout control MPU 954a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once, and the upper bowl is used as the number of gaming balls for 500 yen as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control program performs the payout operation of 25 balls for the amount of 100 yen five times, while lending the ball number of the game balls for the amount of 1000 yen. If the number is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout operation of 25 balls for the amount of 100 yen is performed ten times.

[10-12-2. Confirmation process of input signal from CR unit]
The payout control program causes the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even if the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed, and Even when the signal is not activated or the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 receives BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the payout control board 951 Output to If the CR unit 6 does not lower its signal, or if the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE has passed, the CR unit 6 sends a BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to the payout control board 951. When the CR unit 6 does not raise its signal or the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 sends BRDY from the CR unit 6 to a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to the payout control board 951. When the CR unit 6 does not lower the signal, the CR unit 6 uses the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS to check whether the BRQ and BRDY are normal or not.

  Specifically, when the payout control program determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA (200 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) elapses from this timing J0. The logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, held down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and as PRDY, CR via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It is output to the unit 6 and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, held down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and as the EXS, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 To the CR unit 6 (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control program causes the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J1 and held, to have its logic HI, after a predetermined period JB (200 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) elapses from timing J1. That is, hold it in a raised state and output it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and output it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control program raises the logic of the PRDY signal raised from timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J2. (Ie, hold it in the lowered state and output it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and output it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J3).

  Subsequently, the payout control program causes the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J3 and held, to have its logic HI, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J3. That is, hold it in a raised state and output it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and output it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control program raises the logic of the PRDY signal, which is raised and held from timing J4, after a predetermined period JE (100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) elapses from timing J4. (Ie, hold it in the lowered state and output it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and output it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J5).

  Subsequently, the payout control program causes the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J5 and held, to have its logic HI, after a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J5. That is, hold it in a raised state and output it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and output it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process).

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 234. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 232 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1530 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1530 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310, and any of the plurality of decorative symbol variation patterns can be made to appear by referring to the game information. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol is made to appear in the effect display device 1600, and the effect display (background and hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed Control for operating the movable member is performed. In the decorative symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol is variably displayed for the variation time of the special symbol, and it is suggested that the jackpot is won when the special symbol combination appears as a result of the variable display.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[11-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1530a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 1530a in an extremely short time. be able to. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1530a becomes a state where interrupt permission is set, for example, a command or pachinko relating to control of a game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of gaming machine 1. Further, in the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a itself, the peripheral control MPU 1530a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the sound source built-in VDP 1540a to write, for example, "0" in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c compares the effect backup information (1 fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area, The effect backup information (1 ms) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) is compared, and the contents backed up in Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area The effect backup information (1 fr) is compared, and the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) is compared, and the compared content is When it is in effect, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank 0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c, and Bank0 (1ms) Copy back each effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), and make it a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match) Is a storage area normally used for the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents backed up to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area of the peripheral control SRAM 1530 d is also compared. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area is compared. When the compared contents are identical, effect backup information (SRAM) which is a content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1530 d (see FIG. 20) ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1530 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c (see FIG. 20) and cleared to zero. Then, after performing the initialization setting processing, peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and peripheral control external WDT 1530e (see FIG. 19) so that peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. There is.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the effect control program acquires calendar information for specifying the date from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 15654a of the RTC control unit 1565, while acquiring time information for specifying hour, minute, and second. Further, the effect control program is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit and as the current time information in the time information storage unit.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a when power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e after performing the above-mentioned current time information acquisition processing, thereby preventing the peripheral control MPU 1530a from being reset.

  In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600 is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control MPU 1530a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, and becomes the brightness of the LED included in the obtained brightness setting information. Then, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

  The luminance setting information is, as described above, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the range of 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game. And the brightness of the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing.

  V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V described later that is executed when V blank signal indicating that it can receive screen data from peripheral control MPU 1530 a is input from VDP 1540 a. The value 1 is set in the blank signal interrupt process.

  In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and peripheral control external WDT 1530e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not.

  By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1530a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is started, lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 in the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c A game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later.

  Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board at request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game stored in the head address of lamp drive board side transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the panel light emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via the external bus 1530 h, peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and peripheral bus 1530 ai. Write.

  Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  When the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa does not use the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac generates a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port, and the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area Of the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via the external bus 1530 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and the peripheral bus 1530 ai. The lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by transferring to and writing to the transmission shift register, and transmits it in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. 1 byte data of shift register, 1 bit One transmission begins, and subjected to continuous transmission by the serial I / O ports for the lamp driving substrate.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the door frame relay substrate 911 and the door frame left side decoration substrate 160. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a.

  When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, a plurality of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal to the LED of is generated and set in a lamp data generation process described later.

  The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the transmission data storage area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address is sent via the external bus 1530 h, peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and peripheral bus 1530 ai to the frame I / O board LED serial I / O. Transfer and write to the O port transmit buffer register.

  Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED is 1 byte each, the external bus 1530 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and Frame decoration drive amplifier board L via peripheral bus 1530ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for D, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first decoration surface unit 532 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the third decoration rotating body unit 530B. And various information obtained by acquiring the attitude mode of the second decorative surface portion 533 and the operation of the operation button 410 (for example, the first decorative surface portion 532 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotator unit 530) And monitor the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c in which the posture mode of the second decorative surface 533 and the operation history information of the operation button 410 etc. are set. And the state of operation of the posture mode and the operation button 410 Whether to appropriately determine that.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of VDP 1540a in display data creation processing to be described later from the channels CH 1 and 2 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and door It outputs to the frame side effect display device 460A.

  Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed which exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1540a, the drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated is the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device Cancel outputting to 460A.

  Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 by the lamp data output process of step S1012 and Effects of multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 with a plurality of LEDs and effects of BGM and sound effects according to various effects from a pair of upper speakers 573 and a pair of lower speakers 921 by sound data output processing described later It has become a mechanism that can give priority to synchronization.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1540 c the audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as BGM and sound effects set in the VDP 1540 a in the sound data creation process described later. The audio data transmission IC 1540c may output the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the sound effects as serialized audio data.

  The audio data transmission IC 1540c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1540a as a serial signal of the difference system in which the right audio data is converted into a plus signal and a minus signal. And the left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal as the serial data of the difference system toward the door frame relay substrate 911 and the door frame left side decoration substrate 160). To send. As a result, in addition to stereo reproduction of BGM and sound effects adapted to various effects from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data at the top of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the scheduler data for screen generation set in the scheduler data storage area, what screen data is output to the VDP 1540a? Update the pointer to indicate.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series configuring the scheduler data for light emission mode set in the scheduler data storage area, what number light emission data from the light emission data at the top from the light emission data of the top Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, sound instructing sound data such as BGM and sound effects and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, arranged in time series constituting scheduler data for sound generation set in the scheduler data storage area Among the command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1540 a from the sound command data at the top.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up electric drive source scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area, The pointer is updated to indicate whether the second drive data is to be output. Drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electrical drive source scheduler data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing.

  That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is to be instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data to be essentially instructed in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means).

  That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing start of start opening winning effect, number of reserved normal symbols (0 to 4 ) A game symbol is accepted in the special winning opening 2103. A symbol memory command for identifying a symbol, a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, Large winning a prize opening 1 count display command (big winning a prize opening count command) which is output every time, or frame status 1 command which shows the contents of full shown in Figure 36 (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence command) It is analyzed whether or not it is (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently.

  In this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command or the door frame close command It is analyzed whether it is or not.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. In the reception command analysis processing, the effect control program The various commands stored in the received command storage area are analyzed.

  The various commands include various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effects, various commands classified into big hit relation, various commands classified into power on, Figure related to various effects that are divided into related effects, general commands related to various effects related to various effects, various commands that are divided into notification display, door frame open command described above, door frame closed command, body frame open command, and main body There are various commands divided into status display such as frame closing command, error cancellation navi command and frame status 1 command, various commands classified into test relation, and various commands classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning processing, when the effect control program further includes various commands to be classified as notification display in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 as described above, various abnormality notifications are executed. The scheduler data for screen generation, the scheduler data for light emission mode generation, the scheduler data for sound generation, the electrical drive source scheduler data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for the peripheral control ROM 1530 b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral It extracts from various control data copy areas of the control RAM 1530 c and sets 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c.

  In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. Do. By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning processing, after the predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, various commands are divided into state display, the command analyzed in the reception command analysis processing (step S1022) described above by the effect control program. For example, in the case of an error release navi command (second error release command), for example, the game board side effect display device by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 in a mode different from the normal production mode accompanying the rendering operation. Visually warn the outside using 1600 (render device), door frame side effect display device 460 (render device), and lamp (render device), or use a pair of side speakers (render device) to aurally external Alert to (error notification means).

  In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navi command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 despite being in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, cheating against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following the above-described step S1024, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026).

  In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired by the effect control program in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c The time information stored in the information storage unit is updated.

  By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect data control program, and the pointer points out of the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the scheduler data for light emission mode generation Control the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data While extracting from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b of peripheral unit 1530 or peripheral control RAM 1530c, and setting in the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c, various decorative substrates provided in door frame 3 Lighting signal, flashing signal or gradation point to multiple LEDs of The door decoration light emitting data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or peripheral control RAM 1530 c of the peripheral control unit 1530 and created, and the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c Set in the transmission data storage area for the side LED.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data generation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is data constituting scheduler data for screen generation in peripheral control MPU 1530a and is arranged in time series. Among the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and is output to the VDP 1540 a.

  When VDP 1540a receives screen data from peripheral control MPU 1530a, VDP 1540a extracts at least one character data from liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data, and sprite data from the extracted at least one character data Is generated, and drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation scheduler data. Sound command data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and is output to the VDP 1540 a.

  When sound command data is input from peripheral control MPU 1530a, VDP 1540a extracts sound data such as BGM and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and controls the built-in sound source, based on the sound command data. After the reproduction channel to be used is determined according to the sound control by the automatic channel system described later, reproduction is performed on the determined reproduction channel.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1530 ak rotates the position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510 a each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed). The voltage divided by the resistance value at is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023.

  In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively.

  Audio data transmission IC 1540c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above by controlling the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 BGM and sound effects are reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The notification sound and the notification sound are reproduced without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob at all, and the VDP 1540 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. It can be controlled and adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1032 shown in FIG. 232, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c to the backup first area and the backup second area and backs up, and is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. The contents are copied and backed up to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, Bank0 (back-to-back target) is processed for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area, that is, each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Contents stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, the reception command storage area, the RTC information acquisition storage area, and the scheduler data storage area included in 1fr) The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the rendering information (1fr), which is the above, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area at high speed as presentation backup information (1fr), and Bank3 of the backup second area. ( fr) and Bank4 (1FR) to peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed.

  The high speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and designates copying of the backup first area to Bank1 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1fr), from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and specifies the copy to Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area, and the top of Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), all predetermined addresses (for example, 1 byte) are successively arranged in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area. make a copy.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and designates copying to Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area, and Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored in the start address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively arranged in order from the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area. Copy all

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and designates copying to Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area, and the top of Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), all of the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially arranged sequentially from the start address of Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area. make a copy.

  In the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1530 d is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 1530 da, that is, whenever peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac copies the rendering information (SRAM), which is the stored content, as Bank backup information (SRAM) to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area at high speed, and then backs up. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac copies the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the second area at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa of peripheral control MPU 1530 a stores in Bank 0 (SRAM) in response to the request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac Specify the contents to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the predetermined addresses (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area in succession, and the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa is connected to the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area to Bank 2 (SRAM), and use the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to end address of Bank0 (SRAM) Are sequentially copied in order from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area to Bank 3 (SRAM). From the contents stored in the start address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively arranged in order from the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in the backup second area Copy all

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area to Bank 4 (SRAM), and the top of Bank 0 (SRAM) From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), all predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively arranged sequentially from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area. make a copy.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530 e so that the peripheral control MPU 1530 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later.

  That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed at first in step S1009, and the effect control program sets 1 ms in step S1010. Interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed and the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 Setting will complete.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal is transmitted from the VDP 1540 a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530 a can be received. A value 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control to be executed triggered by the fact that a V blank signal is transmitted from the VDP 1540 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530 a of the peripheral control unit 1530 can be received. The section V blank signal interrupt processing will be described.

  When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control power on and reset process is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process It is set to the value 0 when execution is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. At step S1050, the value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. This is because if the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 while peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, step S1008 in the peripheral control power on and reset processing is performed. It is intended to prevent the peripheral control unit steady processing from being executed from the beginning by forcibly canceling the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed on the way as the peripheral control unit steady processing to be executed in the determination. It is because it is like.

  That is, the peripheral processing unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the peripheral control power on and reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). Peripheral control unit steady processing by setting the value of the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control power on and reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) while conveying to the control unit V blank signal interrupt processing Is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, That is, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the present cycle, when the processing is not completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control power on and reset processing is performed next time. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input.

  That is, the time for executing the peripheral control unit steady process of the current cycle which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control power on and reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is performed when the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle which has been described above is performed although the processing is executed only 32 times for the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle. Instead, it runs only 32 times.

  That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[11-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in step S 1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing at peripheral control power-on and reset processing, will be described. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a in the peripheral control unit 1530 ( Step S1100).

  As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing at the time of peripheral control power on and reset processing, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral is this routine. The control unit 1 ms is a counter that counts the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

  That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after activating the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing of the next cycle is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times until

  Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is as it is Finish.

  If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  After the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing at the time of peripheral control power on and reset processing. That is, the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid driving processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in a time series forming electric drive source scheduler data set in a scheduler data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c outside peripheral control MPU 1530a. Among the drive data, the effect control program drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and updates the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, The pointer is updated each time motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door frame relay substrate 911 and the door frame left side decoration substrate 160. Here, the effect control program performs serial I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a.

  When serial I / O port serial transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source scheduler data set in the scheduler data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c outside peripheral control MPU 1530a Among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, a frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor based on the drive data pointed by the pointer, While extracting from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b of peripheral control unit 1530 or peripheral control RAM 1530c, it is set in transmission data storage area of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor in peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the transmission data storage area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first byte of the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1530 h, peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and peripheral bus 1530 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port.

  Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac is a frame decoration when the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa does not use the bus every time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port is generated. Frame decoration is performed via the external bus 1530 h, peripheral control bus controller 1530 ad, and peripheral bus 1530 ai for each byte of the remaining frame door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area for drive amplifier board side motor. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. Transfer the door side motor drive clock signal ST One byte of data for synchronization with the transmit shift register and -CLK, bit by bit to start transmission, and subjected to continuous transmission by the serial I / O ports for the frame ornamental driving amplifier board motor.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting electrical drive source scheduler data set in a scheduler data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c are started. Game board for outputting a drive signal to a motor or a solenoid for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive source such as The side motor drive data SM-DAT is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b of peripheral control unit 1530 or peripheral control RAM 1530c, and is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530c. .

  Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of serial I / O port for motor drive board at request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game stored in the head address of motor drive board side transmission data storage area Transfer the first byte of the board side motor drive data SM-DAT to the transmit buffer register of serial I / O port for motor drive board via external bus 1530h, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and peripheral bus 1530ai And write.

  Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  When the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa does not use a bus triggered by the generation of a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac generates a motor drive board side transmission data storage area. Of the remaining game board motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the transmission buffer for serial I / O port for motor drive board via external bus 1530h, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer to register and write.

  Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Subsequent to step S1104 as described above, the effect control program performs movable body information acquisition processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is created by determining whether detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and peripheral control RAM 1530 c It sets to the movable body information acquisition storage area of From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area, it is possible to acquire the original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

  Following the above-described step S1106, the effect control program performs operation unit information acquisition processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decoration rotating body unit 530 are input (for example, operation buttons Operation history information 410 and posture history information related to the posture mode of the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are created and set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c.

  Based on the various types of history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area, the effect control program determines the posture status (rotational direction etc.) of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and whether or not the operation button 410 is operated. It can be acquired.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108), as described above, the effect control program is any one of the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display adjustment function, and the player-side light amount adjustment function described above. When the adjustment function is in operation, when the operation button 410 is operated, operation history information of the operation button 410 is created as the history information of the detection signal output along with this, and the operation unit information of the peripheral control RAM 1530c In the acquisition storage area, the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display adjustment function, and the player-side light amount adjustment function are independently set.

  That is, each operation history information created above is divided into a player volume adjustment function, a player display adjustment function, and a player light volume adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, It is written whether or not the operation button 410 is operated while the function is in operation.

  The effect control program determines, for example, whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated while the player's volume adjustment function is activated (for example, whether there has been a volume adjustment operation or not) based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area. Not understandable).

  Subsequently, the effect control program performs the drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and the main prize ball number information output process (S1112), and then performs the backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c are copied and backed up to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d are backed up Copy and back up to 1 area and backup 2nd area respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, backup is performed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is this routine is executed, for the backup control RAM 1530 c. Transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, motor drive board side transmission data storage area, movable body information acquisition storage area, and operation unit information acquisition storage area included in Bank0 (1 ms) that is the subject The peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac copies at high speed the Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area as the presentation backup information (1 ms), which is the presentation information (1 ms) which is the stored content. Second area Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed.

  The high speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and designates copying to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area, Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the start address of) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a request for the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and designates the copy to Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area, and the beginning of Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), all predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially arranged sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area. make a copy.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac and the copy to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area, and sets Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially arranged from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) in the backup second area. Copy everything to

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac, and designates copying to Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area, and starts the beginning of Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), all of the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially arranged sequentially from the start address of Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area. make a copy.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing at the time of peripheral control power-on and reset processing, various processing relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effects is executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started In order to terminate this routine as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is reactivated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly generated by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. Start .

  That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  As described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, and the periphery control MPU 1530a and VDP 1540a are mounted Even in the manufacturing lot of the control substrate 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. Peripheral control MPU 1530a of peripheral control unit 1530 starts transmission of various commands from main control board 1310 as serial data, and triggered by this, main control board serial I / I for incorporating main cycle serial data in peripheral control MPU 1530a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed.

  In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port built in the control MPU 1530a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204).

  The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212.

  By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko island facility. Since the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1530 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum Value) is determined, and it is determined whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310. ing. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the reception command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c (step S1216), and this routine is ended.

  This reception command storage area is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU 1530a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[11-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing will be described. The peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt process is executed when the blackout notice signal (peripheral blackout notice signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) is input. It is determined whether or not (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds.

  If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is turned off, excitation to a motor or solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of pachinko gaming machine 1 by this, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which peripheral control MPU 1530a can operate even if the power of pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off. .

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1530a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. stand by. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command storage area (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1 fr) in the backup management target work area are transferred to Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) of the backup first area as peripheral control DMA. The controller 1530 ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area.

  The high speed copying of the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of peripheral control MPU 1530a includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) at the request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area Specify the copy to the receive command storage area, and from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr), the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) Are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 1 (1 fr) of the backup first area in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in the backup first area Bank 2 (1fr). Specify the copy to the area, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr), All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 2 (1 fr) of the backup first area in succession.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530 aa receives the content stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1 fr) at the request of peripheral control DMA controller 1530 ac included in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area From the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) specifying copying to the command storage area Are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in the backup second area Bank 4 (1fr). Specify the copy to the area, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr), All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area in succession.

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and peripheral control external WDT 1530e. If it is determined in step S1312 that a power failure notice signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset, “0” is written in the storage area of the built-in VRAM as an example to initialize it, and the peripheral control power on and reset processing are started again from the beginning .

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1530a is not reset.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so the clear signal is sent to peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and peripheral control external WDT 1530e. The output is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 232) already described, the description of automatic channel sound control which is a part of the process is described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In general pachinko machines, it is intended to realize an effect that draws the player's interest by outputting various sounds from the speakers in each scene according to the progress of the game. For example, even if the reach is to improve the player's expectation, some reach various sounds depending on the type and others do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a typical pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, there may be cases where a sound to be reproduced can not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds, for the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing the vacant channels and enhancing the interest of the player. While each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the output means and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is If it exceeds the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output in the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1530a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B) respectively show an example of sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object to the present embodiment. FIG. 235 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control based on the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 235 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used as shown in the figure. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels in the case of output in stereo, and one channel in the case of output in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are allocated as a pair, and sound overwrite is prevented. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel allocation method, as much as possible, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing does not suffer.

  In the fixed channel sound control, when a new sound is outputted to the same channel being outputted, the sound being outputted is muted and a new sound is outputted. With regard to sounds that would be harmful if overwritten, separate channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 236 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, manage the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 237 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the reproduction channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 238 (A) shows an example of a presentation time chart, FIG. 238 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 238 (C) shows that each sound can not be reproduced when trying to reproduce each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 238 (A) to 238 (C), the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 238 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis as "the first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In "the first half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. If there is a “winning”, as shown in FIG. 235 (B), “held winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channel 14 and 15 as “half notice A”, so “half notice A The “previous first-notice A” sound output is stopped because the reproduction sound of “1” is overwritten with the hold winning sound (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 235 (B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channel 14, 15 as "full screen preview", so "full screen preview "" Is reproduced by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen advance notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 239 (A) and 239 (B) respectively show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as the present embodiment.

  FIG. 239 (A) shows an example of the reproduction channel of sound, and in the above-mentioned sound control by the fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel becomes an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” shown). The point is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that control is made so that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is automatically assigned in accordance with the rule described later (described above. Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 239 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the automatic channel sound control, as shown in the figure, priorities are individually assigned to the respective sounds. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one sound requires one channel in outputting in monaural. Become.

  In the “informing sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the drawing, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter referred to as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play a sound for the AUTO group. When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if a vacant channel (unused channel) exists in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. The effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel if there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound itself being reproduced, and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 240 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, reproduction channel numbers such as sound control by fixed channels as described above, left and right pan initial values, upper and lower pan initial values, volume initial values, for each sound category and sound name. Identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting (also referred to as "playing priority"), initial left / right pan, upper / lower pan initial, initial volume, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effects"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("half notice sound effects" to "second half notice sound effects"), and hold winning sounds with a priority of "01" And In this way, when there is no vacant channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, there is no need to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) The notification sound is to be preferentially reproduced using the channel currently being reproduced).

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and for example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Also, as described above, upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, upper and lower upper and lower speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). The sound localization initial position of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, and additionally “1” (0x1FF in the third byte) By setting one or more volume control devices included in the gaming machine, it is not affected by the volume change, and it is always reproduced with the volume set at the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, “0” is set as “seek point” in the “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect” as this seek point, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” Each sound is set to [1]. Such seek points allow registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered when exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

  The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 241 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 242 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 242 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 242 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, "the first half of fluctuation", "the second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In “the first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced from the reproduction channels 00 to 01 from beginning to end Corresponding to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any other sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "held sound reproduction" in the figure), and so on. Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, when trying to play a hold-up winning sound as a new sound because there is a start-up winning (corresponding to "held on-hold winning" in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without any sound being played back being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to “hold sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), a notification (corresponding to “information 2 generation” shown) is generated after that, for example, and the notification sound with the highest priority of “25” as the new sound ( When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 242 (B). Therefore, among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing, the sound with the lowest priority is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, although the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to "information sound 2" shown in the figure) to be reproduced next is next. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 243 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a work and a pan control work, and has corresponding information.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is "0", while the channel is automatically allocated when it is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later) Equivalent to Here, for example, “1” indicates that the automatic allocation group is the AUTO group 1, and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing the sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time, assuming that the registration time of the desired reproduction sound is “0”. Note that the elapsed time since the registration is one of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when trying to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic assignment are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans described above.

  FIG. 244 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 244, the channel is abbreviated as "ch".

  The presentation control program confirms the automatic assignment group related to the new sound (step S1102) when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1100), and the fixed assignment is performed when this automatic assignment group is “0”. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic assignment group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic assignment is automatic assignment, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108), and if there is a vacant sound (monaural) Of the new sound on the channel) (step S1109), while if it is not present, the reproduced sound has the same or lower priority as that of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

  In the effect control program, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, during the corresponding channel based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration, the reproduction time of the sound with the longest reproduction time from the registration is being reproduced. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels and there is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound in the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition (step S1116).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural in step S1106 described above, it is determined whether there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120). If the effect control program determines that a vacant channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step S1124), since the process is terminated when there is no sound, overwriting of the sound being reproduced by the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126).

  The effect control program starts output of the new sound in the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there is not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned is described when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIGS. 245 (A) and 245 (B) to 248 (A) and 248 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playback of normal BGM with priority 15 and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, and reproduces the reproduced channel 02 to 03 Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to a request for reproduction of a button depression sound having a priority of 20, and searches for reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a space, reproduction of the button depression sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_B in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 06-07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to a playback request for a big hit determined to have a priority of 20, and searches the playback channel 08 to 09. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit fixed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice C having a priority of 05 as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and causes the playback channels 12 to 13 to be searched. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the on-hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 and sets the reproduction channel 14 to 15 to the reproduction channel. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  FIGS. 249 (A) and 249 (B) to 252 (A) and 252 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing the annunciation sound 1 with a priority of 25 and there is an available channel in the playback channel 02 to 03. As it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program then, as shown in FIG. 250 (A), is triggered by the generation request for reproduction of the full-screen notice sound having a priority of 10 as an idle channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the generation of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 250 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (vacant)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel, triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the annunciation sound 3 having a priority level of 25, and causes the playback channel 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a trailer sound with a priority of 10, and plays back the playback channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the feature preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, as shown in FIG. 252 (A). Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 but there is no available channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which are reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the above-mentioned output schedule with higher priority is searched Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and to increase the interest of the player.

  FIG. 253A and FIG. 253B to FIG. 254A and FIG. 254B respectively show an example of the specific content of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 253 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 becomes vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 253 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, as shown in FIG. 253 (B). Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play a symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 as shown in FIG. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the generation of a big hit BGM playback request having a priority of 15, and makes the playback channel 00 to 01 free. Therefore, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it may be possible to do so.

12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control based on the automatic channel method has been described as an example using all reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 255 (A) to 255 (F) are diagrams showing variation examples of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of respective channel schemes or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 255 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the fixed channel scheme for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 255 (B) shows this The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 255 (C) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are allocated to reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 255 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group and sound control is performed according to the above-described fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 255 (E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to assign channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and to perform sound control according to the above-described fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 255 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  In FIG. 255 (F), while using one automatic channel group, channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed according to the automatic channel system, and sound according to the above-described fixed channel system is performed for some reproduction channels. Although control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 255F will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it becomes possible to adopt an inexpensive sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[13. Game control process]
FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process shown in FIG. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the first and second starting opening winning process shown in FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart of the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing an example of the during-variation process shown in FIG. The main control program executes timer interrupt processing, for example, every 4 ms.

13-1. Special symbol and special electric role control processing]
In the special symbol and special motorized product control process, the main control program first executes the first and second starting opening winning process (step S6110). In this first and second starting opening winning process, the main control program determines whether the first starting opening sensor 3112 detects the gaming ball and accepts the gaming ball in the first starting opening 2002, or The game ball is detected by the second start opening sensor 3113, and it is determined whether the game ball is accepted in the second start opening 2004 or not.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and when the processing flag is 0, the variation control process is executed (step S6130). Note that, for example, the processing flag being 0 indicates that the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information that has already been stored in the start storage information storage area described above. In this variation start process, the main control program performs setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not the predetermined winning condition is established as the lottery for winning the big hit, etc. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 1 (step S6140). If the process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern or stop symbol (special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator based on the result of the big hit judgment and the current gaming state etc. After the big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc. are determined and set, the processing flag is updated to "2". In addition, this fluctuation pattern represents the fluctuation time etc. from the start of fluctuation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) on either the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 until the stop display. ing.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 2 (step S6170). If the process flag is 2, the following process during variation is executed (step S6180). In this fluctuation processing, the main control program monitors the fluctuation time already set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S6150) by the timer, and the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display is triggered by time out. The variation display of the special symbol using the special symbol display 1405 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the jackpot condition of the big hit game is satisfied in the big hit lottery in the above-mentioned change start process (step S6130) and is selected, the processing flag is updated to 3. If the main control program determines that the winning condition of the small hit game is satisfied in the big hit lottery in the fluctuation start process (step S6130) described above and the winning is performed, the processing flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control program has not met any winning conditions in the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is re-executed from the fluctuation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 3 (step S6190). If the processing flag is 3, the main control program executes a big hit game preparation processing (step S6200).

  In this big hit game preparation processing, the main control program operates the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, and performs processing to determine the mode of the big hit game, and this determined big hit game Set the mode (for example, the number of rounds), and operate the character continuous operating device to update the processing flag to 4.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 4 (S6210). If the processing flag is 4, the following big hit game processing is executed (step S6220). In this big hit game process, the main control program is one of the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit game set in the big hit game mode determination process (step S6607), the number of open times, the open time and the number of game balls limited in number. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to zero.

  Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as a set big hit game, and executes the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member in the first special game While restricting the opening operation of the other opening and closing member, in the second special game, the opening and closing operation of the other opening and closing member is executed and the opening and closing operation of one opening and closing member is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 5 (S6230). If the processing flag is 5, the following small hit establishment process is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of times of opening and the opening time to control the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member as a small hitting game mode.

  Then, based on the set number of times of opening and the opening time, the main control program closes the opening / closing member of one side or the other side of the opening / closing member only once for a very short time as a small hitting game mode. Control to be in the state, and then update the processing flag to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the variation start process (step S6130) is performed again. Although this small hit game is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like a big hit game, it is a kind of a big hit game and one opening member or the other opening member is opened for a very short time, for example It refers to a game of an aspect very similar to the game (so-called short opening big hit game).

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, an effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 It is possible to determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach display is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed. The effect to be played is executed. The out-of-reach reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is judged that the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and the reach judgment is based on reach random numbers, and in the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, decoration An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally displayed so as to display the off symbol for a definite stop. Out of change fluctuation is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and it is not judged that the reach judgment will be performed by the reach judgment based on reach random numbers, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through reach effect An effect is carried out in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally released so as to display the off symbol for a final decision. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to this, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, in addition to causing the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol to appear in the effect display device 1600, processing is performed to change the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation. Or, each effect sound according to the progress of the effect display (the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the notice effect, the movable object effect, the button operation effect, etc.) is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced, or the movable member is operated. Execute control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control program executes the small hitting establishment process S6240 depending on whether or not the processing flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special motorized symbol control process shown in FIG. It is possible to choose one. That is, when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 5, the main control program can be made to have gaming characteristics including small hitting games, but when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 4, small hitting games are not included. It can be playable.

  As such, since the special symbol and the special electric combination product control process includes a program code for the small hitting game which can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hitting establishment process S6240, It is considered not to be unused program code.

  That is, even when the small hit establishment process S6240 is not executed, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead. With such a program configuration, the program code can be made common even between models having different gameplay of whether or not the small hitting game is included, and, for example, different models depending on whether or not the small hitting game is included. There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and thereafter, , This special symbol and special motorized prize control processing ends.

13-2. First and second starting opening winning process]
FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning process (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first and second starting hole winning process (step S6110) is a process related to the determination as to whether or not a gaming ball has been received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and that the acceptance has been made. The process concerning the update of the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is included on the condition that is determined.

13-3. Entry of the game ball to the second starting opening]
First, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113 (step S6201), and if it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113, the second start port It is determined that the gaming ball has been accepted in 2004 (hereinafter, also referred to as "start winning combination") (the starting condition of the second special symbol is established), and the following step S6202 is executed. In step S6202, the main control program acquires various random number values for the second special symbol lottery (random number for big hit determination, random number for big hit symbol, etc.) triggered by the start winning.

  It is to be noted that this main control program is combined with the jackpot determination random number etc. triggered by the start winning, instead of acquiring the jackpot game mode determination random number value (for example, the round number determination random number value). Before deciding on the release mode, first determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop symbol, and advance the game. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that the game ball has passed the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. The random number value for big hit game mode decision is acquired with the opportunity.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process described later.

  First, in the second start reserve storage process, the main control program is acquired when the game ball is received by the second start port 2004 as a start memory information (random number for big hit determination, random number for big hit symbol, etc. ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the special symbol type and the order of suspension (step S6203).

  That is, the main control program relates to the second special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied yet, and the start condition is satisfied for each type of special symbol A predetermined number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program, when the game ball is newly accepted in the second starting opening 2004, that is, when the starting condition is satisfied (at the time of starting winning) it is also the second starting memory information second starting memory information If not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately established, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second start opening 2004 in the transmission information storage area, and the start opening in the command transmission process described above A winning command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Furthermore, the main control program triggers that new second starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned second starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of second starting memory information of the second special symbol has increased). It is determined whether or not the following advance determination condition is satisfied (advance condition determination lottery means).

  As the precedent determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area It can be illustrated that the random number value stored in the combination is read out and the read random number value matches the second special symbol pre-reading judgment value stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter referred to as Called "preceding judgment lottery").

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol pre-reading judgment value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol If it does not match the pre-read determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a command for sending a command for preceding determination, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, whereas the following command sending processing for a preceding determination is performed when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Run.

  In this precedent determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command instructing start of the precedent determination effect for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area, and has already been described. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following pre-reading information in the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetching command, a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 2 fluctuation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetching command Or any one of these, or any combination thereof, is a command that generically includes pre-read information described later. The pre-reading information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the information on the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  The special symbol 2 type pre-reading command includes information on the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type referred to here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is lost It is information which shows whether it is any of. The special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern number of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information on the variation type number of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command includes variation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, as described later, the effect control program that receives the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command to make an advance determination described later. A presentation can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding” The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition is satisfied is suppressed (preceding determination suppressing means) over the determination suppression range.

  That is, in the main control program, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the advance determination suppression range after the gaming state is shifted from the probability fluctuation state to the normal gaming state in this manner. It restricts the writing of (preceding determination instruction command). Thus, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is suppressed from being transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process described above.

  On the other hand, in the holding history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second holding number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Furthermore, in this hold history update process, the main control program is a start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the first or second start storage information storage area in the second special symbol storage display 1187. In the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 in a manner that can specify the at least one first or second starting memory information until the establishment of For example, the light source is turned on, blinked, or turned off, and then the priority start memory information of the at least one first or second start memory information stored by the first or second start memory information storage means is addressed. In response to the establishment of the start condition for stopping, the derivation of the pending display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the first or the first From the start memory information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

13-4. Entry of the game ball to the first starting opening]
On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second starting port sensor 3113 in step S6201 or when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 as the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program Determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3112 (step S6205).

  When the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3112, the main control program determines that the gaming ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2002 (hereinafter, also referred to as "start winning combination") (first special symbol) The following step S6206 is executed. In step S6206, the main control program acquires various random number values for the first special symbol lottery (random number for big hit determination, random number for big hit symbol, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start memory information storage area The value of the number of first start storage information (corresponding to the above-mentioned various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area among them (hereinafter also referred to as the “first hold count counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit Determine if there is any. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In this first start reserve storage process, the main control program specifically acquires start storage information (such as a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number value) acquired by the game ball being received at the first start opening 2002. It is stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in the first start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the type of symbol and the order of suspension (step S6207).

  That is, the main control program relates to the first special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol Are stored in the first start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, first start storage information storage means) up to a predetermined number in a manner that can be specified. Therefore, when the game ball is newly accepted by the first starting opening 2002, that is, when the starting condition is satisfied (at the time of starting winning), the main control program has one or more first starting stored information as the first starting stored information. If not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately established, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the first start opening 2002 in the transmission information storage area, and the start opening wins in the command transmission process described above. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to execute an advance determination effect, which will be described later, using the starting opening winning command.

  Furthermore, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned first starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of first starting memory information of the first special symbol increases). It is determined whether or not the following advance determination condition is satisfied. As the precedent determination condition, for example, any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area or It can be mentioned that the random number value stored in any combination is read out and the read random number value matches the first special symbol pre-reading judgment value stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as "preceding judgment lottery").

  By the way, as the preceding determination process described above, the main control program executes the preceding determination lottery based on the game information determined based on any predetermined random number as described above, and the lottery result is displayed. It is configured to be able to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 as an advance determination instruction command (any one of a special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command and a special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command) (prefetching first step determination).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol pre-reading judgment value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol If it does not match the pre-read determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a command for sending a command for preceding determination, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, while transmitting the preceding determination command as follows when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute the process

  In this advance determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command for instructing the start of the advance determination effect for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area, and has already been described. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following pre-reading information in the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command is, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetching command, a special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 1 fluctuation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation sorting table information prefetching command Or any one of these, or any combination thereof, is a command that generically includes pre-read information described later. The pre-reading information has a symbol type of the first special symbol, a variation pattern number, a variation type number, and variation distribution table information.

  The special symbol 1 type pre-reading command includes information on the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type referred to here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is lost It is information which shows whether it is any of. The special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern number of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information on the variation type number of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, as described later, the effect control program that receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command to determine the advance determination described later. A presentation can be performed.

  In this peripheral control board 1510, the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command indicates whether the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the prefetch display effect based on the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command or not, an expectation of a big hit Whether to execute or not is determined according to the ratio. Although the pre-reading effect is the effect continuously across a plurality of changes, whether or not to perform this pre-reading effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning combination, and at that timing At the same time as determining which display mode to use from a plurality of display modes of effects performed continuously, a display mode that changes across multiple changes is also determined (a scenario is determined in advance).

  As the display mode, based on the result of the preceding determination process, the effect is immediately started based on the result of the preceding determination process, and based on the result of the preceding determination process, in the case of the change, the effect is kept waiting to be executed. It can be exemplified that the continuous effect is started with the start. Furthermore, even when it is determined that such a continuous effect is to be started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change in any way to the state before starting the continuous effect (for example, a normal display mode , Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode).

  Although such continuous rendition changes in stages, the expectation to the jackpot with the display mode to be displayed next to the previous display mode may be the same, or it is a display mode which has been raised. It is also good. Furthermore, the display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is lowered may be executed. In such a case, the expectation of the big hit may actually be higher than that of the display mode in which the degree of expectation gradually increases (that is, it corresponds to "the breaking of the law"). The final form of the continuous advance notice is a mode in which the player can distinguish the information represented by the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command, for example, a big hit decision, a definite variation decision (transition decision to probability fluctuation state), a ball withdrawal decision, etc. It may be an aspect of

  On the other hand, in the holding history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the start storage information storage area) (step S6208). Furthermore, in the hold history update process, the main control program causes the first special symbol storage display 1184 to hold the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area. The hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking or extinguishing) is derived in such a manner that the at least one starting memory information can be specified over time, and then the at least one starting memory stored by the starting memory information storage area When the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among the information is met, the derivation of the pending display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority is given from the start storage information storage area. Clear the start memory information to be stored (hold and digest control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program, when the game ball is not accepted to the first starting opening 2002 in the above step S6205, or the counter value of the first hold number counter reaches 4 which becomes the upper limit in the processing of the above step S6206. If yes, the first and second starting opening winning process is ended.

13-5. Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start process shown in FIG.

  In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two pending number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301) . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number value) stored in the first start storage information storage area of the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The value of the pending number counter of the second special symbol indicates the number of second starting memory information (random number value) stored in the second starting memory information storage area among the starting memory information storing area described above .

  If the main control program determines in step S301 mentioned above that the value of the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both 0, then the starting conditions for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both. After judging that the variation start process is ended and the special symbol and special electric combination product control process is ended, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. The fluctuation start process may be the same as the precedent determination process, and the same result may be obtained as the determination result at the fluctuation start time and the precedent determination time, so that the result may be a prefetch effect command.

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number of held counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0 at all, the start condition is at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is assumed that the start condition is not satisfied but the so-called start suspension state is established. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the holding number counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of pieces of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start storage information is not zero, the main control program acquires second start storage information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above A predetermined number of pieces of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area are shifted and stored (step S6304).

  Specifically, second start storage information (random number value) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality of main control programs. Are stored in the (n-1) -th storage area. As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and it is possible to store new starting storage information of the second special symbol in the storage area where the free space is generated.

  At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" (step S6305) and subtracts one from the value of the second special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of second starting memory information (step S6306). At the same time, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage indicator 1187 so as to indicate the number of second start storage information after the subtraction (the number of reserved second special symbols). In addition, about the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way, after the said fluctuation | variation start process is complete | finished, for example, when a processing flag is updated to 0, it is reset.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start storage information is zero, the main control program acquires the first start storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) before the above A predetermined number of pieces of first start storage information stored in the first start storage information storage area are respectively shifted and stored (step S6308).

  Specifically, four storage areas (first to fourth sections) are provided in the first startup storage information storage area and the second startup storage information storage area, respectively. In each of these storage areas, a big hit determination random number storage area for storing a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number storage area for storing a big hit symbol random number value, and a reach determination random number value A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and variable pattern random numbers 1 and 2 storage areas in which variable display pattern random number values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored are provided.

  The main control program divides the first start storage information storage area into a plurality of n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) second start storage information (random number value) stored in the storage area Shift and store in the storage area of As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and new start storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the free space is generated.

  At the same time, the main control program sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts "1" from the value of the number of pending counters of the first special symbol, that is, the number of second starting memory information. (Step S6310). At the same time, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start storage information after the subtraction (the number of reserved first special symbols). The special symbol variation flag thus set to "2" is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0" after the variation start process is completed.

  In the above manner, although the same determination processing as prefetching is performed for determination at the start of fluctuation, the information determined by prefetching is the same again without using all or part of the information. By repeating and executing the process, it is possible to obtain the same result as in the pre-reading determination. It should be noted that even if the same process is executed at the start winning game and the change start to determine the game information, the pre-read command (special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of the change are information of each other In order to be distinguishable from each other, the same command value is not used.

  Next, the main control program confirms the content of the big hit flag, and determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (step S6312). If the gaming state is not the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the probability fluctuation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of becoming a big hit (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the probability fluctuation function activation determination table in which the probability of becoming a big hit is set high (step S6314).

  Next, the main control program determines whether the first special symbol random number value or the second special symbol random number value (hereinafter also referred to as "big hit determination random number value") acquired in step S6303 or step S6307 is a big hit based on the selected table. It is determined whether the value (random number value corresponding to the big hit) matches (step S6315).

  That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the establishment of the start condition (lottery means). If it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is a jackpot type of the jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number value, that is, the type (state type related to the gaming state) of operating at least one of the probability variation function and the time reduction function Whether or not is judged (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the big hit flag corresponding to the determined big hit type to ON (step S6317).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot determination random number value acquired in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

13-6. Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

  First, the main control program determines which big hit flag is ON (step S6401). If it is determined that one of the big hit flags is ON, the main control program executes a big hit variation pattern table setting process (step S6402).

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern table (big hit variation pattern table as a win variation pattern table) for setting a big hit is set, and a variation for making a big hit if a winning condition is satisfied. A pattern (wining variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means and has already been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control internal RAM and the start condition is satisfied. A reach condition as a condition to execute an effect (reach effect) that implies that a predetermined winning condition may be established for stored information, that is, a special lottery may be won, or this reach It is determined whether the specific reach condition is satisfied among conditions (step S6403).

  It should be noted that the reach condition referred to here is a reach effect in the normal mode in which the player is relatively weak and unlikely to expect the player to be elected to the special lottery because the possibility that the winning condition is established is relatively low. An example of a normal reach as an example of the reach effect of a specific aspect that is relatively likely to hold a player relatively strongly an expectation that a winning condition has been established relatively high and a special lottery has been won. It is a condition for any one of the example super reach to be implemented. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as "reach lottery".

  By the way, the main control program stores the probability of winning such a reach lottery, that is, the probability that a reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as "the probability of winning a reach lottery") in the start storage information storage area of the main control internal RAM. It is controlled to change gradually according to the number of finished start-up memory information. Specifically, if the main control program is, for example, 1/15 if it is 0, it is 1 according to the number of start memory information (so-called number of reservations) in which the winning probability of the reach lottery is stored. Is controlled to 1/14 in the case of two, 1/13 in the case of two, 1/10 in the case of three, and 1/10 in the case of four.

  Furthermore, the main control program writes a reach lottery result command including the result of the reach lottery described above in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above, and transmits it in the command transmission processing described above (random number range information control means ). That is, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM instead of transmitting the determination reach random number itself to the peripheral control board 1510. And send a reach lottery result command regarding the result of the reach lottery.

  In addition, this reach lottery result command corresponds to the first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information on the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information on the second special symbol Is a command name that generically

  If it is determined that the above-described reach condition is established, that is, if it is determined that reach effect is to be performed, the main control program executes reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting processing (step S6404). In the reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a fluctuation pattern table (reach loss fluctuation pattern table) for executing reach effect and losing.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether the time saving function is operating. If the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is operating (time saving), the variation for executing the above-mentioned reach effect and causing a loss A variation pattern table (a short time reach loss variation pattern table as a short time non-winning variation pattern table) including a pattern (short time non-winning variation pattern) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is not operating (in the non-time saving mode), the above-described reach effect is executed and A fluctuation pattern table (non-short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table as a non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (non-time short non-election fluctuation patterns) for setting is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table and the non short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table will be collectively referred to as a "reach loss fluctuation pattern table".

  In the present embodiment, the main control program is not only "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" as the lottery result of the lottery, but also "time loss" function is activated on the variation pattern of the special symbol. It is separately controlled whether it is "non-short time loss" as "loss" in the state where it has not been done and "time loss" in the state where the time saving function is operating.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not established, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed, the main control program executes non-reach losing variation pattern table setting processing (step S6405). In the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) in which a loss effect is not performed. A plurality of types of non-reach loss variation pattern tables are prepared in association with each other according to a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, a table in which shortening variation is easily performed when the number of reservations is a predetermined value or more It has become.

  Thus, when it is determined that the reach condition is not established, the main control program similarly determines whether the time reduction function is operating, and whether the time reduction function is operating as described above. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed in accordance with. That is, when it is determined that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is operating (time saving), the main control program does not execute the above-described reach effect but does A fluctuation pattern table (time shortening non-reach losing fluctuation pattern table as a time shortening non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (time shortening non-election fluctuation patterns) for setting is set (a fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is not operating (in the non-time saving mode), the above-described reach effect is not performed and the loss is made A fluctuation pattern table (non-time short non-reach non-reach lost fluctuation pattern table as non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern) for setting is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), and the pattern command of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol thus determined and the winning information A command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, the pattern command and the winning information command are collectively referred to as "variation pattern command". The pattern command of this variation pattern includes information on the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a hit result on the big hit.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets, in the timer, a value of fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern table set as described above (step S6412). That is, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a big hit variation pattern table, the main control program changes the big hit variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the big hit variation pattern table. Set to timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the small hitting fluctuation pattern table, the main control program performs the small hitting according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the small hitting fluctuation pattern table. Set the fluctuation time for the timer.

  When the variation pattern table set as described above is the short reach reach variation variation pattern table, the main control program determines the time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the short reach reach variation variation table at this time. Set the fluctuation time for reach in the timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the non-short reach-loss fluctuation pattern table, the main control program responds to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the non-short-time reach loss fluctuation pattern table Set the fluctuation time for non-time short reach in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is "loss", the variation time of the special symbol is made to differ depending on whether or not the time saving function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time as data of 2 bytes each as the fluctuation time of such special symbol, and the maximum fluctuation time which is the total value of these times is managed It is set as 262.144s (65536x4ms) x 2 = 524. 288s, and the variation time of the special symbol of twice the length is realized than before when those times were managed by 1 byte respectively.

  When the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, next, the main control program sets the special figure 250 ED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special view 250 ED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is identified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, triggered by the establishment of the start condition. In accordance with the determined fluctuation pattern, at least one of the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means) starts the variable display consisting of the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs (Symbol variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414), and ends the variation pattern setting processing as described above.

  As described above, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program causes the pattern command and the winning information command to be written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. It is read out and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

13-7. Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing an example of the during-variation process shown in FIG.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the timer in step S6412 (see FIG. 259) described above has expired (step S6501), and the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed out. If it is not, the process is ended while fluctuating.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up, the main control program sets the special view 250 ED operation flag set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program causes the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display) in accordance with the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above. Means to stop variation display (variation of special symbol) consisting of variation pattern of lighting, extinguishing or blinking of 7-segment LED using at least one of the means), and according to the above-mentioned established condition, the said variation The stop symbol consisting of is displayed (symbol variation control means). That is, the main control program starts the variation display of the special symbol triggered by the establishment of the start condition after the establishment of the start condition, and determines the winning condition triggered by the passage of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern thereafter. A stop symbol according to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a decision stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended and the predetermined stop symbol has been fixed. The main control program reads the decision stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S6504). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S6505), and ends the fluctuation processing.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is accepted by the start opening and the start condition is satisfied, the start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a hold ball) whose start condition is already satisfied is not present. The variation display of the special symbol is started, and the stop symbol is displayed when the predetermined variation time has elapsed.

  In addition, in such a general gaming machine, after establishment of the start condition, a special lottery is executed thereafter, and when it is won in this special lottery, transition is made from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state (already existing See the first reference mentioned)). In this way, when the gaming state has shifted, for example, the game content associated with the stored holding ball before the transition of the gaming state may be executed after the transition of the gaming state. It also seems likely that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the processing flag is updated to 3 as described above (that is, triggered by, for example, transitioning the gaming state), it is determined that the main control program is shifted next. After writing a command (hereinafter referred to as "transition destination command") representing a playing state into the transmission information storage area, the main control program then executes this transition destination command on the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92). Send to

  As will be described later, the main control program maintains the gaming state as the normal gaming state when the winning condition is not established, but when the winning condition is established, the main controlling program responds to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state. It shifts to an advantageous gaming state, and then shifts to a normal gaming state (gaming state control means).

  Therefore, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a transition destination command indicating that the game state has been shifted to the peripheral control board 1510 in response to the transition of the game state (transition state gaming state notification means) . On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, based on the transition destination command received from the main control substrate 1310, in consideration of the transitioned gaming state, it is difficult for the player to feel discomfort due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition. Control the rendering operation.

  Usually, in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU 1530a normally causes the main control board 1310 to execute the rendering operation without receiving any particular restriction, when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied.

  As a first example for making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 1310, the fact that the gaming state has been transferred based on the transfer destination command is Since it can be grasped with certainty, the control of the main control board 1310 is triggered by this to restrict the execution of rendering operations such as the preceding determination rendering effect and the reach rendering described above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the rendering operation to give a sense of discomfort to the player due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

  On the other hand, as a second example for making it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, starts conditions based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 1310. If the game state at the first point of time when the start condition is met is different from the game state at the second point of time when the start condition is met for the start memory information for which the is satisfied, the rendering operation is performed in consideration of the transferred game state. It may be controlled.

  By doing this, in the peripheral control board 1510 which receives the transition destination command later, when the gaming state is shifted, the peripheral control MPU 1530a can immediately grasp that the gaming state is shifted, so the transition is made. It is possible to control the rendering operation so that the game content interlocked with the gaming state does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 1310, and for example, when it is determined that the next gaming state is the probability change and the time saving state, predetermined winning conditions for the stored start storage information In the case where it is not a winning class that activates the probability fluctuation function (in the case of a so-called normal big hit), the above-mentioned prior determination effect is generated for the next and subsequent start memory information stored subsequently to the previous start memory information. It may be regulated not to execute.

  By the way, the state in which the processing flag is 3 indicates that the variation display of the special symbol is in the processing stage stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won. Although not shown in the flowchart, along with the processing of updating the processing flag of step S6505 to 3, 0 is set as an initial value in the status identification flag for identifying the gaming state in the big hit game preparation processing described later.

  The main control program was established using the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means) according to the special symbol that was variably displayed as described above A stop symbol corresponding to the winning condition will be displayed (stop symbol control means).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508), and ends the fluctuation processing. In this case, since the main control program does not involve the transition of the gaming state, the main control program regulates the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. Note that the fact that this processing flag is 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has not been won.

13-8. Jackpot preparation process]
As described above, in the big hit game preparation process, the main control program activates the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, and performs processing for determining the mode of the big hit game and this decision Set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the played big hit game, and operate the character continuous operating device. Then, the effect control program updates the processing flag to 4 and sets the status identification flag to 0 to return to the initial value, and ends the big hit game preparation processing.

[13-9. Big hit game processing]
Next, the big hit game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  In the big hit game processing described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big winning opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the special winning opening 2103 is open, the main control program determines whether the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 (the elapsed time after opening) has reached the opening / closing operation time limit set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). If it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed, the main control program closes the opening / closing member to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program causes the same winning opening 2103 to be opened after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls entered is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, nine) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804, and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the open / close operation restriction time set in step S6802 has not yet passed, and the number of gaming balls accepted by the special winning opening 2103 in step S6803 has not yet reached the upper limit, the main control program The big hit game processing is ended while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the special winning opening 2103 is not open, the main control program sets the number of opening of the special winning opening 2105, 2106 by the opening / closing member (the number of round games) in the above step S6803. It is determined whether the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program operates the opening / closing members according to the winning conditions established as described above, and opens the corresponding special winning opening 2103 (step S6806), and the big hit game processing Finish.

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds in step S6805, the main control program stops the operation of the bonus product continuous operating device to indicate that the winning condition is established. It shifts to a state of restricting the execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member that is executed as the condition.

  That is, in this case, the main control program executes step S6807 to step S6812, and for example, stores it in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) separately from the big hit flag in step S6317 (see FIG. 258). The big hit game processing is ended after setting the gaming state after the big hit game on the basis of the big hit winning type taken as an opportunity for the execution of the big hit game.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807) Then, the winning type of the big hit that is the execution trigger of the big hit game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, it is determined whether or not the main control program is a winning type (for example, the jackpot symbol is 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9) for operating the probability variation function. That is, in this main control program, whether or not a probability change transition condition is established to determine whether or not the gaming state (probability fluctuation state) should be relatively high in the probability that the winning condition is established than in the normal gaming state. To determine whether it is (winning probability control means).

  The main control program changes the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and transfers the transfer destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command representing a game state determined to shift next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program causes the game state to shift to the game state other than the probability change state (winning probability control means) and to determine the next transition when the probability change transition condition is not established (winning probability control means). The transfer destination command is written to the transmission information storage area as a command to be represented. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process (S92) to the peripheral control board 1510.

  That is, when it is determined in step S6808 that the main control program is not the winning type for operating the probability changing function, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without operating any of the probability changing function and the time saving function (step S6811).

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning type (so-called probability variation big hit) to operate the probability variation function, the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition is established to determine whether or not the probability fluctuation state should be relatively high in the probability that the above-mentioned winning condition is satisfied than in the normal gaming state. When the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to the probability change state set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over the predetermined number of times of change display While this probability fluctuation state is continued while fluctuating display is made, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state if the above-mentioned probability change transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, after activating the time saving function (Step S6810), the main control program stops the operation of the condition device (Step S6811). When activating the time saving function, the main control program selects each time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group whose variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the number of times of variation of the special symbol determined in advance. The value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set in the timer shorter than the value of the specified fluctuation time in correspondence with the length of the fluctuation pattern determined from the time variation pattern table concerned (time shortening function control means) .

  The main control program writes the transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating the gaming state determined to be transferred next, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92). You may do so.

  At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second start opening 2004 in accordance with the predetermined opening and closing pattern until the predetermined number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is reached. The gaming ball flowing down the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is easily received by the second starting opening 2004. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812), and ends the big hit game processing.

  As described above, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the large winning opening 2103 by repeatedly opening and closing the large winning opening 2103 in the opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds predetermined in step 805 is reached. In the state, an instruction of the winning ball operation according to the number of gaming balls accepted by the big winning opening 2103 is issued.

  Here, in a general game machine, game balls fired in the game area flow down between a large number of nails provided in the game area, and part of them enter the starting opening or the general starting opening On the other hand, the remaining gaming balls are discharged out of the gaming area from the outlet (so-called out port) formed at the bottom of the gaming area, but in such gaming machines, they are provided within the gaming area at first glance It is also conceivable that the circulation of the game ball is unlikely to be a suitable state that should be originally intended, depending on the arrangement of the character and nails.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the above-mentioned winning condition is established, the main control program sets at least one of the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means) determined above. After controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning) determined as described above, the winning condition is triggered when the fluctuation time at the time of winning corresponding to the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning. The stop symbol according to is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not established and the time saving function is activated. At least one of 1405 (variable display means) is used to control the variation display of the special symbol according to the above determined time variation non-winning time variation pattern, and then the variation time according to the time non-winning variation pattern at this time The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed on the occasion that the fluctuation time has elapsed (symbol fluctuation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not established and the time saving function is not activated. After the variable display of the special symbol is controlled according to the determined non-time-short non-winning time variation pattern using at least one of 1405 (variable display means), the variation time (non-time short time according to the non-time short non-winning variation pattern The stop symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the non-winning time fluctuation time has elapsed.

[14. Precedence determination process]
The effect control program described above analyzes the command received from the main control board 1310 in the reception command analysis process described above and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (command reception means), and the command is the special symbol 1 storage command Or when it is a special symbol 2 storage command, the start hold display mode which implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command triggered by the reception of this command Is derived by the game board side effect display device 1600 (display means) (start hold control means).

  That is, if the received command is a special symbol storage look-ahead effect command (special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command), this effect control program is read ahead included in the special symbol storage look-ahead effect command Based on the information (for example, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol is exemplified), for example, information indicating the type of the big hit game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command or the special symbol 2 The game board side effect display device 1600 is caused to derive a start pending display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start memory information corresponding to the stored look-ahead effect command, and thereafter corresponds to the new start memory information Termination of the start pending display mode (start pending control means .

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command or the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is received, the effect control program displays the start withhold display mode (for example, as the hold display mode in which it is difficult to hold the expectation to the big hit) A special start hold display mode (for example, a high start hold display mode) is easily illustrated from the beginning of the above derivation or from the middle of the above derivation as an example of a hold display mode which is very easy for the player to expect the jackpot. To execute the preceding determination control to be derived by the game board side effect display device 1600 (preceding determination control means).

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, by changing the assignment of sound to each channel dynamically as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the vacant channel and reproduce many sounds, but In recent diversified game machines, since hundreds and thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  Also, by overlapping and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to execute preview effects in duplicate or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of sounds and reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are output in duplicate. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Further, the sound includes a sound such as a notification sound which should be output prior to the effect sound and a sound which is continuously output like a BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to assign the channel dynamically. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 255 (C) and 255 (D), and has the advantages of the respective methods. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . Also, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed for channel numbers, "division" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" for each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 262 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 262, the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and the channel configurations of 24 to 29 are as shown in FIG. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Furthermore, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically allocating the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a channel for reproducing BGM is a fixed channel system, and only BGM is output. As a result, control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of a vacant channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the advance notice effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the preliminary effect production is the AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first searches for a vacant channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or stage sound. It is used to output BGM by overlapping 4 sounds or to output a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notification effect output by the automatic channel method.

  Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which a holding tone is output. The holding tones output in the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, sounds that are output regardless of the lottery result at the start winning, or may be sounds that are output with priority, such as when a big hit is determined. A sound or the like based on the lottery result at the start winning is output from the channels 24 to 29, as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. The channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning, and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of the big hit determination even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, and the player's attention is drawn. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a channel of the fixed channel system is allocated when the output is continuously continued as in BGM, or when it is necessary to reliably output as in the case of an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel system is applied to the sounds to be outputted adaptively according to the game state etc., thereby preventing the sound from being outputted while the empty channel is generated, and the limited number of channels It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for a free channel of the sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound of the present embodiment. Although FIG. 244 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 263 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the vacant channel search process shown in FIG. 263, in the processes of step S 1108 and step S 1120, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not the vacant channel exists in the channel of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the same channel group, the result of steps S1108 and S1120 is "No".

  Furthermore, in the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 263, when there is no idle channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118, step S1132). The channel selection condition for stopping the sound reproduction will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the effect of stopping the output of sound is continuously performed without stopping the image display and the operation of the special effects.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of sound (stopping playback of sound, opening it) when there is no channel available at the time of output of a new sound in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in sound during playback, etc., and the playback time of the sound at the channel selection time, It also includes the remaining time to play. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 244, a channel with a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total reproduction time set in advance regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Prioritize and select. On the other hand, the load of sound control may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large change in dynamic sound image localization position.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, the large (small) number of the tone number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. You may

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so as not to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without replacing the channel. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 264, the conditions of 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied singly or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel satisfying more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition to sequentially apply the conditions.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Subsequently, an example in which control is performed to assign a channel based on the priority assigned to a newly output sound will be described. Here, an example will be described in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. FIG. 265 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows a timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows a channel where each sound effect is outputted. ing. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an example of the priority of sound effects in the example of the effect of the present embodiment.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 265, the first half advance notice A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, a first half advance notice B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 266, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. It is muffled to (black out production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effects of each preliminary presentation effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the first half fluctuation of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents a time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents a volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, the preset volume V_A of the effect sound of the first half notice A is output.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button depression sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T and the effect sound of the first half advance notice B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  After that, in the first half advance notice A and the first half notice B, the effect is continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half advance notice C ends at time t8, and the first half of fluctuation ends.

  In addition, during the period when the rendering effect sound is muffled, the output of the rendering effect sound may be continued while the volume is set to 0, or the output of the rendering effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the entire rendering effect sound may be set to 0, and the sound output of the first half notice _C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, sounds with high priority can be output with priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel scheme are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a rendering effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels, for example, by performing a previewing of the fluctuation pending on the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the fun of the game can be maximized by outputting the rendering effect sound with low priority while replacing the rendering effect sound with high priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2 the effect sound relating to such a hold display (hold sound), it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice play relating to the fluctuation display. it can. Also, unlike in the case of the notice effect in the variable display, compared with the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the number of effect sound effects outputted simultaneously does not greatly exceed, so the output of the effect sound stops There is less chance of being In addition, even in the case of being canceled, the output of the rendering effect sound with low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel scheme is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel scheme is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of free channels and to preferentially output sounds with high rendering effects.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each of the rendering effect sounds (channels), it is possible to emphasize and execute the rendering with high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume, if the low priority effect previously executed is continuing even after the high priority effect is finished. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are the preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set in the fixed channel scheme are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing effects including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of a screen configuration of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 268 is the advance notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurrence.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and effects (multi-screen effects) for displaying different scenes on each screen are executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output. The selection of the scene may be made by lottery or may be made by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. Also, assignment of default channels is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. So, in this modification, the channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and arrangement | positioning of a channel is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in a modification of the embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when multi-screen effect execution is performed. The default configuration of FIG. 269 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 262 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 269 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 269 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the multi-screen effect start, while all the scenes are displayed, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced. At this time, if all the BGM is output with a normal volume, the volume is too high, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 270 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the latter half of fluctuation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) is output timing of effect sound, (B) is volume change of each effect sound Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 270, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is from the default state (FIG. 269A) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 269 (B) It is changed to)). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 268, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 269 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which rendering is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 270, the scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  It should be noted that, after the multi-screen effect is finished, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from the channels 10 and 11 to the channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the change of the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, a background change, etc.) may be changed.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 255F) performing sound control in the fixed channel method and the automatic channel performing sound control in the automatic channel method And the number of “variable AUTOch” (255 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more informing sound, BGM, or sound effects reproducible according to the situation, and, for example, to output more types of informing sound in a non-playing situation In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

[16. Control of sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped, and sounds to be output are managed by being associated with each group. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition, and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. And, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, in the case where sound is newly assigned to a channel and output is performed, control of changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel or the like will be described.

  After the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound by BGM during reproduction and other effects is regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of a predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect that performs such control, there is a blackout effect that controls the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is released and the sound output newly is resumed by resuming the output of the sound due to BGM or other effects To draw the player's attention and to increase the player's expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is allocated to a vacant channel and output instead of canceling the allocation of a channel to which a sound effect is output and newly allocating a sound. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sound of different group is being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. The following describes the case where a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a higher priority, when the sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 271 is a diagram illustrating an example of a channel group-specific volume control table indicating the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) It is divided into five groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority among groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound being reproduced when the sound is reproduced by the channel belonging to the group having the low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. If "0" is set, control is made to mute the other sound being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when the numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being%. Note that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to make the volume larger than normal.

  Further, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 271. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel scheme and the automatic channel scheme are mixed. In the fixed channel, a sound that is output with priority given to a notification sound, BGM, or the like or that is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of effects are assigned.

  In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced on the fixed channel 1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch 1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or an employee of the game arcade to the outside as shown as a reference reproduction sound, and specifically, detection of the magnetic abnormality or It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch 1, the output of the rendering effect sound or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output in order to make the occurrence of the cheating or the failure be a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of the other sound having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 271, the group volume priority is set to "4" which is the lowest. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, even if the sound reproduction on the fixed ch 2 is started, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound played on the fixed ch 2 is mainly BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the BGM is being output, and the effect sound etc. that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol etc. Is output.

  In the AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds in reproduction other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone.

  Specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit finalization sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like as shown in the reference reproduction sound. The big hit decision sound is a sound notifying that the result of the variable display will be a big hit at a predetermined timing such as the start winning, and is a stage effect sound that maximizes the sense of expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound notifying that the game ball has won the V zone, for example, that it is decided to shift to the high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved similarly to the big hit determined sound. It can be done.

  The blackout effect sound is an effect sound which is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound at the time of executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be performed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. For the jackpot decision sound and the V prize sound, the output of the sound suppressed for a short time after the sound output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the case of the blackout sound effect, the player is focused on the blackout effect by setting no sound effect by another effect for a predetermined time after outputting the blackout effect sound. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed by the change, for example, the blackout effect is executed by the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect is executed by the second fluctuation You may

  In the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the sounds being reproduced in the group having the priority “4” or less are halved (50% Suppressed to the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of drawing the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely turning off the BGM. Specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 2 are, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

  In the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, “50” is set as the suppression volume value, so when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced to half. At this time, when the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch 2 is already halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, and the volume is further halved (one-fourth of the original volume). May be

  The specific sound output in the AUTO group 3 is, for example, a hold winning sound at the start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, etc. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when the game ball enters the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output even during the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control process]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart of a procedure of group volume control processing of performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound belongs according to the present embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 230, step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1401). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1401 is "No"), the processing at step S1420 and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume control table by channel group. From (FIG. 271), the suppression volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result at step S1403 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1530a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result at step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing at step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result at step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1410 and subsequent steps.

  The control on the sound being reproduced will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

  The sound control performed in step S1410 and subsequent steps will be described. If the sound to suppress the output of the sound being reproduced has already been registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a generates a new reproduction request The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S 1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a requests the new reproduction request. The volume of sound that has been dropped is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S 1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a performs the new reproduction. The work area is overwritten with the sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S 1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a sets the work area While maintaining the contents, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 have been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417) or after the process of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are work It is determined whether it is registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have already been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has ended (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. Are erased (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1423 and S1424), and the process ends.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Subsequently, volume control of sound will be described in time series. FIG. 273 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 273, an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch 2). As shown in FIG. 271, the fixed ch 2 has a group volume priority of “4” and a suppression volume value of “−1”. In the normal BGM, since the suppression volume value is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without the sound number of the normal BGM, the group volume priority, and the suppression volume value being recorded in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding prize is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2 and the group volume priority is "3" and the suppression volume value is "50" (steps S1402 and S1403 result is "No") . Since the parameter is not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half advance notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half advance notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is made in advance. A set volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the first half variation effect sound (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the sound based on the parameters of the first half announcement A effect sound is Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed by the establishment of the predetermined condition (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of the step S 1411 is “>”), the contents of the work area are blackout effect The above parameters are updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the normal BGM being reproduced and the effect sound effects of the first half notice A are lower in group priority than the blackout effect, the group priority of the sound effect of the blackout effect is lower than the blackout effect (result of step S1415 is “Yes”). The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of the step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in the muted state and the blackout effect Continue until the end of the

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening, a hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S 1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the on-hold winning sound is output as usual.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A and the second half advance notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B is ended (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while sound effects with high group priority are being output, it is possible to highlight a specific effect by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority. Furthermore, with the volume control based on the suppression volume value, it is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time, and a group effect effect sound that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation like a big hit decision sound By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute without impairing the rendering effect.

  In addition, when a sound with a high priority is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value The volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppressed volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. It is also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or based on the contents of effects such as the length of reproduction time of the effect sound. The amount of change may be set for the time to reach. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to highlight the effect sound, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target A time reaching the value may be set long to reduce a sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly-output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during reproduction such as BGM can be faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly-outputed effect sound more prominent without breaking the tempo of the game.

  Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound ends and the output of another effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value) Instead, the start value (volume during regulation) and the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of normal BGM is suppressed to 50% at the time of sound effect reproduction in the first half notice A, but when the output of normal BGM is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, control is made to fade in based on the amount of change for a specified amount of time) as the volume suppressed to 50%. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort while enhancing the switching of the effect sound effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the rendering effect sound as an example, the present invention can be applied to the case of an alarm sound or an alarm sound as well. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the presentation effect sound but also a notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) ( For example, the output of an alarm sound of a ball jam may be regulated. On the other hand, when a fraudulent act is performed while a low notification sound of low importance (priority) is output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high notification sound (alarm (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to the output time of the sound like the effect sound, and the output of the sound is continued until the cause of the alarm and the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a plurality of types of alarm sounds and alarm sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another alarm sound is output. . At this time, the next higher priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
In the above, the control of the sound output overlappingly by the priority between groups was demonstrated. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume Control Table by Sound Effect]
FIG. 274 is a view showing an example of a sound effect-based volume control table showing volume (sound volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sounds in the present embodiment. The use reproduction channel (ch), the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 271, the use reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, as in the example shown in FIG.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to the end of the output of the sound effect. When -1 is set as the total reproduction time, the effect sound is output with a volume set in advance without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect can not be suppressed.

  When 0 is set to the total playback time, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is a number other than this (a positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of another sound effect that is simultaneously output, as in the example illustrated in FIG. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time- Suppress (silence) the output of 1) except for sound effects that are set. In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the allocated sound effects are also the same. It is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 274, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total reproduction time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are to be reproduced, the other being reproduced All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or the employee of the game arcade to the outside, and is an effect sound to be outputted since it is caused by the occurrence of an illegal act or a failure etc. And the output of sound effects during other playback is forcibly suppressed (cancelled, muted).

  Since the total reproduction time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" in the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effects are repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect the other sounds being played. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 2 are mainly BGM in games.

  In the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, a value (reproduction time) set for the total reproduction time for each sound effect, and “0” for the suppression volume value, the notification sound output from fixed ch 1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone. As specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 1, as shown in FIG. 271, there are a big hit confirmed sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like.

  For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the value for which the total playback time is set for each sound effect (play time) and the suppression volume value of “50” are set. When the sound is reproduced, the outputs of the other sounds being reproduced are all halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound to be output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while halving the output of BGM and continue the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Sounds, etc., and specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, the hold winning sound at the start winning, the hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and the pressing of the effect button It is a button depression sound etc. to inform.

[16-2-2. Volume control process]
In the present embodiment, the output of sound effects reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIG. 275A and FIG. 275B are flowcharts showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. The procedure of output control of sound effects in the present embodiment will be described below.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1501). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501 is "No"), the processing at step S1530 and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request was made, and the volume by sound effect The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 274) (step S1502).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result at step S1503 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1530a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1504 is "Yes"), the processing at step S1506 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result at step S1504 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1506 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1507). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result at step S1506 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510 and subsequent steps.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested for new reproduction is “−1”. (Step S1510). If the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is "-1" (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output at the time of occurrence of abnormality, etc. Forbids suppression of the volume of the playback sound, and forcibly suppresses the output of sound effects during other playback.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1511). Further, the work area is overwritten with the sound number requested for the new reproduction, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1512).

  Then, the periphery control MPU 1530a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1513). If the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing of step S1530 and subsequent steps is executed (step S1514).

  On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is not "-1" (the result of step S1510 is "No"), peripheral control MPU 1530a does not receive the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether a sound number is not set in “−1” or the work area (step S 1520). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or no sound number is set in the work area (the result at step S 1520 is “Yes”), the processing at step S 1530 and subsequent steps is executed.

  When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1530 a It is determined whether the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result at step S1521 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a generates the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time already held in the work area (step S1523). If the total playback time of sounds for which a new playback request has been made is shorter or the same as the total playback time already stored in the work area (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is longer than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (the result at step S1521 is "No"), the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced Then, the volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value recorded in the work area, for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526). When the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is "No"), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527).

  When the processing of step S1526 and step S1527 is performed on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the processing of step S1530 and subsequent steps (step S1528).

  When volume control for the sound requested to be newly reproduced and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507, step S1514, step S1524, step S1525, step S1528), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. It is determined whether or not is registered in the work area (step S1530). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530 is "No"), this processing ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not (step S1531). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1531 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1530a generates the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It erases (step S1532). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1533 and S1534), and the process ends.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effects in the present embodiment. Subsequently, sound volume control will be specifically described in time series. FIG. 276 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the rendition, and (b) shows the volume of each rendition. In FIG. 276, an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are performed will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started and a normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output on the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. Also, normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503 is "Yes"), the parameters of the normal BGM are not registered in the work area. Then, a volume value set in advance is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507).

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly required to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half advance notice A is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503 is "No").

  In addition, since no parameter is registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504 is "No"), the sound number of the sound effect of the first half notice A, the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are held in the work area ( Step S1505).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506 is "Yes"), and the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510 is "No"). The sound effect parameters for the first half notice A for which reproduction has been requested have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1520 is “No”, the result at step S1521 is “No”, the result at step S1523 is “Yes” ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524).

  Subsequently, at this point, the normal BGM is being played back, and the volume is not suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100" and is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the previous notice A recorded in the work area. (The result at step S1526 is "No"), the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half advance notice A (step S1527).

  Subsequently, since the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531 is "No") , This process ends.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1 and the total reproduction time is "8000" and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result at step S1503 is "No"). At this time, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506 The result is "Yes").

  Furthermore, the total reproduction time of the sound effects of the first half notice A held in the work area is the total reproduction time “8000” (the result of step S1510 is “No”) for the blackout effect sound effect for which the new reproduction request has been made Is “15000” (the result at step S 1520 is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested for the new reproduction is “0” (step As a result of S1521, the work number is overwritten with the sound number of the blackout effect sound requested for new reproduction, the suppression volume value "0" and the total reproduction time "8000" (step S1522).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523 is “Yes”) A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the preliminary presentation effect sound (step S1524).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played back is normally BGM "50", the sound effect of the first half notice A is "100", and the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound recorded in the work area "0" (“NO” in step S1526), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half advance notice A is set to “0” (step S1527).

  After that, when the game ball is won in the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request of the hold winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total reproduction time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result at step S1503 is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound, the normal BGM, and the sound effects of the first half notice A are being outputted. Yes (result of step S1506 is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  In addition, the total winning time for the pending winning sound requested for new playback is "2000" (the result at step S1510 is "No"), and the total playback time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is "8000". (Result of step S1520 is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request is made is “50” (the result of step S1521 is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the on-hold winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523 is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound is continued.

  After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531 is "Yes"), so the blackout stored in the work area The parameters of the effect sound are erased (step S1532). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A whose sound reproduction has been suppressed (volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533). At this time, the BGM is normally suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of another sound effect being reproduced and to make it possible to highlight a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) while the effect sound of the effect sound is generated during the muffling period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effects is suppressed. To notify the player while the output of sound effects is continued until after the end of the mute period, by suppressing the output of the sound effects of the corresponding effect during the mute period, the execution of a specific effect is made distinctive be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of empty channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game-related interest will be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the effect design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when new sound data allocation conditions are satisfied when there is no space in the channel (a situation in which the number of empty channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. Based on the priority order, by controlling to discard the sound output of lower importance more selectively, it is avoided that the aspect of the sound output unintended in the effect design appears, and the game interest is reduced. It was suggested to be suppressed. However, it is also important to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear in a situation where there is no space in the channel (a situation where the number of free channels is zero).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to effect sound (effect sound), various types of output are not made as long as proper gaming is performed. With regard to the notification sound of the above, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content etc. by only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving control structure is adopted for output of various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 277 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X and the like) of the limited number of channels prepared as sound control according to the fixed channel system for various notification sounds (dispense notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. 7 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, manage the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and definition of output type setting doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the descriptions of other definitions such as the notification sound and the effect sound are omitted. As for the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 236, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter to be used for determining which one of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output condition, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is allocated to and output from the channel X regardless of the state of the notification sound to which the numerical value of the priority is low for the channel X. Although described later, when the priority order is the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output It will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 278 is a table showing the notification contents, notification modes, and notification times and conditions (cancellation conditions) under which the notification is ended for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 277 according to the type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound, but in order to effectively use a single channel X, this is used as much as possible for the idle channel. It is a treatment for maintaining in the state and for suppressing the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 278, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which the magnetic sensor 2404 detects the magnetism (state in which the possibility of fraudulent action using a magnet is high). To inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetism has been detected” And lighting by means of various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of fraudulent action by the dodging act being high is high) The notification sound 2 (vibration abnormal) to notify that it is in the state), and the first large winning opening sensor 2403 or the second large winning opening sensor despite not being in the big hit gaming state (the state that the big winning opening is opened) Notification sound 3 (large) to indicate that detection by 2402 is being performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in the closed state and winning a game ball) The prize failure is regarded as belonging to the first informing group when there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and the informing sounds belonging to the first informing group Aspects and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected” and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 as notification time While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when there is a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps As for the lighting by the above, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “boooo big prize abnormality detected”, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A display (for example, "a big winning prize has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, In contrast to the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after the detection by the first large winning opening sensor 2403 or the second large winning opening sensor 2402, About the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, until the “power on again” which is the release condition is satisfied So that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). In addition, with regard to the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “booboo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of fraud is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of notification is made is adopted. The alarm sound consists of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning under the stressed injustice situation, and the message sound consists of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the first notification group (state in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is high), it is possible to respond to the fraudulent activity on the hole side rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “booo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, but they belong to the first notification group Since it is possible to recognize that it is highly likely that it has been performed, it is expected to accelerate the initial action of the hall side response to the fraud. Furthermore, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is to follow the notification sound of "booboo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hole side can be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state where the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (a possibility of fraudulent action by the door open being performed However, it is reported that it is in a state where the door may be opened by the abnormal handling by the hall side. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “door is open” And the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as notification time, about loop processing which outputs notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" repeatedly from the time when there is detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (equivalent to the notification sound repetition for 3 times In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 is used to open the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is satisfied.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame open switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that cheating by opening the main body frame may be performed, the notification sound 5 (open frame) notifying that the main body frame may be opened by the error handling procedure by the hall side) There is an intermediate possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and this is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when it is in a state where it can not be denied. With regard to notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notification The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open" and lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, while the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, And for lighting by various lamps, the frame closing detection (the main frame opening switch 619 is used to close the main frame 4 to the outer Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the first notification group. In addition, with regard to notification sound to be subjected to loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of the notification is (a unique sound), and those belonging to the second notification group To adopt a sequential output combination with an alarm sound used in any of the alarm sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping pong ping pong” which plays a role of informing that the possibility that There is.

  That is, when notifying those belonging to the second informing group (a state in which there is an intermediate possibility that fraudulent acts have been made), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to perform the hole side abnormal treatment promptly to some extent. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to a third notification group described later, a message sound notifying which notification type is to be output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound although it is an alarm sound different from that belonging to the first notification group. So that it makes it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgusted, it is an output mode when it belongs to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from the case where it belongs to the first notification group By performing notification by lighting of various lamps that are not turned off, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hole side can be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, although the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-short state, the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. It is in a state where the passing is detected by the gate sensor 2401 (a game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in a proper manner (left strike)) To inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “return to the left” And “) are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, in a non-time-short state, both the loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 When the detection by the gate sensor 2401 is performed, the process is ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in addition to the notification sound 6 (left hitting guide) (lower plate Informing sound 7 (ball removal guidance) notifying that it is in the state where it is necessary to perform the ball removal of the game ball in 322, perform the game guidance for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low It is regarded as belonging to the 3rd informing group when it is in the proper state, and regarding the informing sound belonging to the 3rd informing group, setting the informing mode, the informing time, and the cancellation condition to those in common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output a notification sound such as "Please pull the ball of the lower plate", and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate" as notification time while display (for example, "Please pull the ball on the lower plate") is executed respectively, and the game board All of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, with regard to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 2401 or the full tank detection sensor 279, they are terminated in 20 seconds. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, 5 seconds of silence after the message sound of 5 seconds has been output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound is output (silence output), and loop processing is performed to repeat a notification sound for 10 seconds including the message sound and the silence data as a set It has become. Then, in the notification sounds 6 and 7, since silence data is output for the same time in both cases, it functions as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the hard-to-hear message sound portion in the noisy hall. Regarding silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning it to channel X.

  By the way, although there may be silent parts in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these may be very short for providing an “interval”. It is apparent that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long-time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period interposed between the player and the player. In this way, it is possible to give a notice on game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 277 and FIG. 278, regarding the notification sound belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is made different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group You may do so. In addition, although loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced is adopted as the reproduction type setting, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and 1 SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. . In addition, with regard to “booboo” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the first notification group and “ping pong ping pong” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the second notification group, one having a connection with the message sound The alarm data may be prepared separately for each notification sound as the sound data, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined at the time of output is created It may then be assigned to a channel.

  FIG. 279 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 279 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output now, main control The MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that there is magnetic detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that magnetism has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is sent to a process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no alarm sound is output, magnetic detection information If it is found that the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 230) (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of “booboo magnetic detection detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is allocated to the channel X, the scheduler data for sound generation according to the magnetic detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and peripheral control is performed. It is set to 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the RAM 1530 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetic detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts scheduler data for screen generation corresponding to magnetic detection and scheduler data for light emission mode generation corresponding to magnetic detection from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530b or peripheral control RAM 1530c. By setting 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously performed until the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality is performed.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as "booboo magnetic detection detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic detection is detected And the lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), step S84 is performed at timing tα2 at which the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, since 60 seconds have not elapsed from timing tα1. It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. At this point, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection was performed, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration detection was performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that vibration detection information is included, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 230). I do not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly allocated to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side of the allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the setting of the sound generation scheduler data itself according to the vibration detection is not performed at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation scheduler data according to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) not set yet at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound according to the vibration detection Scheduler data for generation is set, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and alarm sound in the notification mode (here, a loop of “booboo vibration detected”) It is supposed to be played back.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation scheduler data according to the vibration detection at timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation scheduler data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection By extracting scheduler data for light emission mode generation corresponding to the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and setting them in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c in 1530 cae These are performed for lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection is set, since the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same, The lighting mode of the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection already in the set state is reflected by various lamp lights, and the lighting mode of the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection is various It is not reflected by lamp light respectively. The scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that) as the scheduler data for sound generation.

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection and the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, either of them is selected Even when the light is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After that, at timing tα3 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce a single notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has a time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and is well cut off.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the sound generation scheduler data according to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a time (a time obtained by subtracting a time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “booboo vibration Will be performed in the "loop detected".

  That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, the alarm sound of “booboo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “booboo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be finished and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boo-boo”) of the notification sound such as “done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied (see FIG. 279 (a), the sixth alarm sound (here “booboo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic is detected”) have been reproduced, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "booboo" was reproduced. As a result, "a booboo magnet is detected" and "a booboo vibration is detected" is connected at a strange place and it becomes impossible to recognize an unauthorized notification in a tense situation (for example, If notification sound 1 ends with "booboo magnetic" and notification sound 2 starts with "motion detected", meaningless notification such as "booboo magnetic movement detected" Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the situation (which may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and finished at the alarm sound of “boooo”, and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is ended and is not reproduced at a halfway timing. In the case of a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good turn off). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is prompted to confirm the display in the liquid crystal, and “displayed magnetism” and “detected vibration” are displayed on the liquid crystal display respectively. By being displayed, it can be properly recognized that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 279 (b) shows the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 279 (a). Processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when the above-described processing (one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) with reference to Is almost the same as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), frame open detection by the main body frame open switch 619 within the processing of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at timing tβ1 at which no alarm sound is output now If there is an event, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been detected. Then, information indicating that there is a frame open detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that frame open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information is included, the alarm sound 5 (frame open) shown in FIG. 278 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 230). Start notification sound reproduction in a mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation scheduler data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b or the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. It is set to 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the control RAM 1530 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in peripheral control MPU 1530a, scheduler data for screen generation corresponding to frame open detection and scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to frame open detection are extracted from various control data copy areas in peripheral control ROM 1530b or peripheral control RAM 1530c. By extracting and setting 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the frame closing detection which is the cancellation condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1 and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is "Open" and lighting by the various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are respectively executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1, and at timing tβ2 when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S82. Alternatively, it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the door open detection has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame open detection has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door is open is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that door open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided to the processing regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the command is analyzed in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that door open detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. It does not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly allocated to the channel X Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (the frame open) on the side of the already allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the sound generation scheduler data itself according to the door open detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation scheduler data according to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not progressed without being allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) not set yet at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) did not time out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) ended, the door open was detected. The scheduler data for sound generation is set, and alarm sound 4 (door open) is allocated to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, the door is open "Ping pong pong" loop) The notification sound is to be reproduced.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation scheduler data according to the door open detection at timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation scheduler data according to the door open detection, The above liquid crystal is extracted by extracting scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to door open detection from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530 b or peripheral control RAM 1530 c and setting in 1530 cae in scheduler data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530 c. The inside display and the lamp lighting are performed as described above.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection is set, the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the frame open detection is already set and the priority is the same. From the above, the lighting mode of the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the set state is reflected by various lamp lights, and lighting of the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the door opening detection The aspect is not reflected in various lamp lights. The scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection may also not be set at timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), similarly to the scheduler data for sound generation.

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the frame opening detection and the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the door opening detection have the same data contents, There is no change in lamp lighting even when reflecting either.

  After that, at timing tβ3 at which 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, an alarm sound such as “the frame is open ping pong pong” is based on the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping pong ping pong” is set to 10 seconds here, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) At time t.beta.3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been reproduced three times, and the timing is good.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the sound generation scheduler data according to the door open detection. By allocating the notification sound 4 (the door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds) to the channel X, There will be an announcement sound playback in the (loop of ping-pong).

  That is, while the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to the door open detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound of “the door is open ping pong pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open” It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as ping-pong ping-pong.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 279 (b), the third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open"). As a result, "the frame is open and the door is open" and "the door is open and the door is open" will be connected in a strange place, and it will be impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation It becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer according to the door open detection becomes short, and even if the alarm sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. To ensure that the door is open can be grasped with certainty.

  FIG. 279 (c) shows the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 279 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no alarm sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-short state in the process of step S84 or S88 (FIG. 212). If it is detected by the gate sensor 2401 that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center character 2500 in the area 5a (detection of right hit in non-shorting state), the main The control MPU 1310 a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. Thereby, in the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is provided to the processing regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. It will be. Note that regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information on right-handed detection of is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230) A timer (for setting notification sound) (in this case, "Please return to the left" loop) to start the notification sound reproduction and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) ( Set 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with regard to right-handed detection in the short time state, information to that effect is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command in this embodiment, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 It is determined whether the detection by the gate sensor 2401 has been performed in a non-time-short state on the side of the peripheral control MPU 1530a so that only information indicating that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 2401 as a command. And the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 2401 in the non-short time state.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the short time state is copied to various control data copies of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The area is extracted from the area and set to 1530 cae in the scheduler data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, scheduler data for screen generation corresponding to the right hitting detection in the short time state is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, By setting 1530 cae in the storage area, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display is also executed. Execution of the in-liquid crystal display is the end of notification (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being time-out) which is the cancellation condition of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) Will continue to run. In addition, with regard to the processing of the third notification group with low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid the hindrance to the progress of the effect, and the scheduler data of light emission mode generation according to the right strike detection in the non-time-short state is set It will not be done.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed until the alarm sound is ended. Display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left") will be performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (c), step S82 or step S82 is performed at timing tγ2 at which a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in the state of loop playback. In the processing of S84 (FIG. 212), it is assumed that the lower tray full tank detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is detected. At this point, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that lower-side full-tank detection has been made as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 at which rightward detection in the short time state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S 92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower counter full detection) is provided to the processing regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530 a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) is performed at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the bottom plate full detection is included, in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 230), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) shown in FIG. It does not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) is not newly allocated to the channel X By doing this, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side of the already assigned state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the setting of the sound generation scheduler data itself corresponding to the bottom full detection at the timing tγ2 is not performed. Therefore, the sound generation scheduler data according to the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (20 for counting the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) not set yet. For the second), and when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out and the lower tray is full. Set the scheduler data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time and allocate the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction in the “loop” is performed.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation scheduler data according to the bottom fullness detection at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), it is for screen generation according to the bottom fullness detection. Scheduler data is extracted from various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1530 b or peripheral control RAM 1530 c and set in the scheduler data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1530 c to be executed in 1530 cae so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. ing.

  It should be noted that in the liquid crystal internal display, a display according to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the left hitting guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the scheduler data for sound generation according to the bottom plate full detection. , And by allocating notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" will be executed.

  That is, while the timer of notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is set at timing tγ2, it is not set for the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to the bottom dish full detection, and it is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Since at the timing tγ3 the notification sound of “Please pull the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head at the timing tγ3, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (guide for removing the ball) times out Such that the loop processing is terminated and not played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "Drop the ball on the lower plate") of the notification sound such as "Please pull the ball on the lower plate" It will be possible to prompt.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 279 (c), the second message sound ("Please return to the left" here) has finished playing, the third message sound ("Please pull the ball of the lower plate" here) It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if reproduced. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange places, and the occurrence of situations where the notification content can not be recognized can be suitably suppressed. Will be able to

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silent data of 5 seconds is interposed. Because the message sound of another notification sound comes to be played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, and the notification content can not be recognized. It will be possible to avoid it.

  FIG. 280 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, the magnetism Regarding the processing (magnetic abnormality processing) corresponding to the detection, the same processing as the case described with reference to FIG. 279 (a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detection detected” is started, and the timing (time of 60 seconds) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) timer is up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and it is cut off. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state In the processing of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212), it is assumed that there is a door open detection by the door frame open switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 277). ), Even when door open detection occurs, processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Then, normally, as for the processing on the low priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. A process is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation scheduler data itself.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group” in which the possibility of fraud is moderate. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection nor the scheduler data for sound generation is set. , Set only the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at timing t-3, on the basis of the flag being set, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection and the sound generation scheduler data according to the door open detection respectively. With setting, alarm sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X and alarm sound reproduction is started in the notification mode (here, the loop of “the door is open: ping pong ping pong”) . The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, "booboo magnetism is detected even though there is door open detection by the door frame opening switch 618 in a state where an alarm sound such as" booboo magnetism has been detected "is being played back in a loop. "From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection is played back for 30 seconds," the door is open ping pong ping pong " The loop processing is ended at a good timing of cutting when the alarm sound such as has been reproduced three times. In this way, notification sound 4 (door opening) according to door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from processing based on normal priority, and notification belonging to the second notification group Although it is the content (here, the "door is open" loop of ping-pong ping-pong), it will be expected to promote the recognition that it is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound that “booboo magnetism has been detected”, the notification content is started from the message sound (the door is open), so the first notification group in the most tense situation is It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs is ended. On the other hand, the alarm sound of “ping pong ping pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it can be easily recognized that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 280 (b) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (b), it is assumed that there is door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 within the processing of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output With regard to the processing according to the door open detection (the door open processing), the same processing as the “process according to the frame open detection (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t.delta.1 and the step is performed at the timing t.delta.2 in which the notification sound such as "the door is open" is in the loop reproduction state. In the processing of S84 or S86 (FIG. 212), it is assumed that the gate sensor 2401 detects a right-handed hit in a short time. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state Therefore (see FIG. 277), even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-shortened state occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as when the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 279 (a) to (c) is overlapped. The process is performed to set only the timer of, and not to set the sound generation scheduler data itself.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), while the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set at timing tδ2, the sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state Scheduler data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, sound generation scheduler data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is allocated to the channel X by a minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, a loop for “return to left”).

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "Please open to the left" has not been included at the good timing of the cut. Since it can be reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has become low while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type which has been reproduced up to that point has ended and the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be.

  FIG. 280 (c) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (c), it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the processing of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door open detection (the door open processing), the same processing as the “process according to the frame open detection (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tε1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), 30 seconds has not elapsed from timing tε1 and at timing tε2 in which a notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S84. It is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 is performed in the process (FIG. 212). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 ( (Refer to FIG. 277), giving priority to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 and processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) The content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, with regard to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound and lamp lighting, it has been set up at that time at timing tε2. The sound generation scheduler data and the light emission mode generation scheduler data according to the door open detection may be canceled from the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the scheduler data for screen generation according to the door open detection but also the sound generation scheduler data and the light emission mode generation scheduler data according to the door open detection at the timing tε2 Are kept in the set state, and the scheduler data for sound generation, the scheduler data for screen generation, and the scheduler data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection whose priority is higher than their respective data are set respectively Put in a state. Then, sound generation scheduler data according to magnetism detection, light emission mode generation from content based on sound generation scheduler data according to door open detection and light emission mode generation scheduler data, allocation for channel X and various lamp operations By switching to the content based on the scheduler data for processing, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 is output content in any of the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting Is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), at timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (the process at the time of door opening). It is possible to realize change of notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door open process, magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), at timing tδ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is started, and the timer for alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "Booboo Magnetic Detection Detected" has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is immediately performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection having a high possibility of the fraudulent activity being performed. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "booboo" is first reproduced as the alarm sound, the alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that it has switched to a tense situation It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 280 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 2401 is performed within the processing of step S84 or S86 (FIG. 212). If it exists, processing similar to the case described with reference to FIG. 279 (c) is performed regarding the processing (left-handed guiding processing) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short time state. Therefore, at timing tζ1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously executed until the timer-up of the notification sound which is the cancellation condition of the left-handed guidance.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), step S82 or at timing t 又 は 2 at which a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in progress during loop playback because 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tζ1. It is assumed that there is door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 within the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection Therefore (refer to FIG. 277), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left turn guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will not be done. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator in the process of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance), right-turn detection in the non-time-short state which has been set up at time tζ2. A process may be performed to cancel the sound generation scheduler data according to the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at timing t 画面 2, not only the scheduler data for screen generation corresponding to the right hitting detection in the non-shorting state but also the sound scheduler data for sound generation according to the right hitting detection in the non-time short state Also keep the state of them in the set state, the scheduler data for sound generation according to the door open detection whose priority is higher than this as well as the scheduler data for screen generation according to the door open detection and the light emission mode Set each of the generation scheduler data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation scheduler data according to the right strike detection in the non-short time state to the content based on the sound generation scheduler data according to the door open detection. In the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (d), at time tζ2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (left-turn guidance process), It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guide process, door open process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), at timing tζ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and in the alarm sound 4 (door open). The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). In addition, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection occurs in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound is played first from the message sound (the door is open), it is possible to make the person playing the appropriate game not feel disgusted, but then The notification sound belonging to the 2nd notification group is given by the alarm sound by “Ping Pong Ping Pong”, and it is expected to quickly notify the hall side that it has switched to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. Even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for notification sound, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group which has a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of a fraud may be higher than a medium condition depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that control based on the priority order of the above is properly notified of the current state of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection that is highly likely to have been tampered with, but also when there is an abnormality detection that is less likely to be fraudulently performed. is there. In other words, if there is a high probability of an anomaly being detected, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with an anomaly detection that is less likely to be conducted. If there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the convenience of the hole side (such as recovery from various errors), the alarm sound output is not necessarily required even if the detection state is continued. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 281 to 286, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priority order, special conditions are taken into consideration, and the state of the gaming machine It is decided to realize the notification in such a manner as to make it possible to express appropriately. Hereinafter, special notification processing will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 281 to 286.

  In the example shown in FIG. 281, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no alarm sound is output. Then, the sound generation scheduler data corresponding to the door open detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation scheduler data and the light emission mode generation scheduler data corresponding to the door open detection are also allocated. It will be set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 4 (the door opening) is set, and the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played over a second.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is maintained until the timing tα 16 when the door open is not detected by the door frame open switch 618 comes.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 281, the magnetic sensor in which the priority order regarding notification is relatively high at timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection is finished and the channel X is in the idle state Magnetic detection by 2404 occurs. Therefore, for lamp emission according to door open detection started from timing tα11, scheduler data for light emission mode generation is maintained in the set state until the above timing tα16 comes, but with regard to allocation to various lamp operations At timing tα13, it is switched to the lamp emission mode according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, the sound generation scheduler data according to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation scheduler data and the light emission mode generation scheduler data according to the magnetic detection are also set. They are put in the set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, and for the notification sound according to the magnetic detection, 60 seconds until the timing tα 14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp emission according to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are respectively maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 281, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is ended and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic sensor 2404 Detection of magnetism has occurred. In such a situation, a person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in an open state, and then waits for notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection to end, It is assumed that the magnet may enter the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 momentarily when trying to secretly place the wrong purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in the cold state, and it is extremely malicious. Since it is an action, it is feared that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only to perform alarm sound processing according to magnetism detection. On the other hand, since the state of the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 has already been turned off, the magnetic detection can not be used as an opportunity even if some measures are taken.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing is used, Based on this, "scheduler data for sound generation according to door open detection" whose notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to channel X It is decided to carry out special processing to reassign to. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", so that a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and everyone's attention will be gathered. In addition, as a person who does fraud, it is already relieved that "when notification of magnetism is over, all notification sound reproduction is over and it can be finally made inconspicuous that you are doing fraud" " Since an alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection that should have ended is reproduced, and an unexpected alarm condition occurs, it is expected that recognition that there is an excess of risk is too large. It will be.

  Although described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and in the period during the notification process belonging to the second notification group, other channels are used. A process (a process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and the gaming sound other than that being assigned. The specific value may be volume 0. While the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation assigned to the other channels and the volume of other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, in a period during which the notification process is being performed (a period in which the volume is to be suppressed), whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 281, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16. A process (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that is performed, and the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed in the period of timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the game sound other than that (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the running period, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. In the period, processing may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of informing states only by confirming the effect sound other than the informing, and it is expected to further accelerate the initial movement on the hole side.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the game sound other than that is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that leads to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", there is a possibility that extremely malicious action has been performed In view of the above, even when the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended is reached, the volume of the effect sound in the symbol change or the game sound other than that may be suppressed without being suppressed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, as apparent from the processing according to the door open detection, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is a period during which the notification sound according to the door open detection is reproduced. The period to be performed and the period to light the lamps in the manner according to the door open detection are made to have the same start times but different end times. As described above, by operating the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. Even if there is, it will be possible to appropriately notify of abnormal contents and game guidance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 282, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 2401 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike in the example shown in FIG. 281, since the possibility that a very malicious action is performed is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right hitting detection in the non-time-short state is ended. At timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound according to the door open detection (timing t α 21 to t α 22) ends, it is extremely malicious even if the frame open detection occurs instead of the right hitting detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 2401. Since there is a low possibility that a false action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection which is already in the end state is not reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is ended.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 283, the example shown in FIG. 281 is that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends. Is the same as However, in the example shown in FIG. 283, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at timing tα 34 in the period during which the alarm sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 283, at the timing tα 35 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is nothing to be reproduced in a connected form. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 283, as in the case shown in FIG. 281, after the person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and makes it open, Wait for the notification sound reproduction according to the end, and when trying to secretly arrange an illegal target magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold, the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 It is assumed that it is in the situation where it entered. However, after timing tα34, the door frame 3 is closed, and in view of the non-incorrect state where the magnetic detection is not generated either, according to the magnetic detection although it is in such a non-incorrect state It is considered that the notification sound is played continuously until the timing t.alpha. 35 arrives, and that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and channel X is idled when more notification sound processing is needed. It can be said that it is more useful to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 283, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance and the like while using only a single channel (channel X) for various notification sounds.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 284, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at timing tα 43 after the notification sound (timing t α 41 to t α 42) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 284, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at timing tα 44 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 284, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to end, an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state. Even when the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 and the alarm sound of the magnetic anomaly is reproduced according to this, the magnet does not fall in such a situation and the magnet falls within the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 It is assumed that they are trying to place it again, and there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at timing tα 44, while the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, the notification sound 1 ( A process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time until the lapse of 60 seconds starting from the timing t α 44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred from when the first magnetic detection occurred Can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. Finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism is detected" ends, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as "Booboo magnet detection". As a result, it will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing great discomfort in the hall.

  Furthermore, at timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed based on timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred, notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation scheduler data corresponding to the detection is set again, and the special process of re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been ended is reproduced in a form linked to the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", and in addition, the "booboo magnetic detection" It is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" in which the loop processing is finished at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it was reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the magnetic detection halfway. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. 281. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated at the timing tα 54 in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 285, when an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state while waiting for notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection to end In spite of the fact that the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud may have occurred. Therefore, in this example, at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection” At timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form further connected to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα 54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated, a timer (60 for not counting the sound generation scheduler data according to the vibration detection and clocking the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Is set, and at the timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished, the scheduler data for sound generation according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X .

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” does not end its loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop at half-time timing such as “booboo vibration detection”. Since the processing is to be finished, it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered.

  Furthermore, at timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to door open detection The scheduler data is set again, and the special process of reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is further connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection" connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection". As well as being played back at the beginning of the loop, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “booboo vibration detection”, and it is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it were reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the vibration detection halfway It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 286, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame open detection ends instead of door open detection. doing.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 286, it can be said that the situation where magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is in a situation where it is highly likely that some fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent action, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since it does not exist, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic sensor 2404 may be erroneously detected when the hole side uses a magnet for the purpose of ball clogging elimination in a ball tank, a dispensing passage or the like.

  Therefore, even in the example shown in FIG. 286, at the timing tα 64 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection which has already been in the end state By reproducing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing t α 64 to t α 65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hole, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, thereafter, at timing tα 66 when the main frame 4 is closed and frame open detection is ended, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also according to magnetic detection A special process is also performed to end each notification process (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp).

  According to such a configuration, the notification processing corresponding to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection can be performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when the false detection on the hole side is performed while suitably performing the function against the fraud As it becomes possible to terminate all notification sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp), it is expected that the response on the hole side to the false detection can be speeded up and the atmosphere in the hole can be suitably maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 286, the frame open detection is also performed when the main frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. At the end timing, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also each informing processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetic detection It is also possible to perform a special process to end the process.

  By the way, as described above, the player's side volume adjustment function is installed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1530a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 232), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the player's setting value (player's setting value) is reduced with respect to the speaker volume, it is determined by the player with regard to the speaker volume when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated. A process is performed to increase the value (player set value). Also, when the player's set value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output with the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the volume actually raised is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pipi!") Is output at the volume value after the increase. The volume adjustment is completed, and it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output in the case of decreasing the volume value and in the case of increasing the volume value. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when the empty channel is exhausted (for example, the output sound volume of the effect sound ( It is possible to more reliably transmit that the volume of the audible sound has changed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, such volume adjustment processing is not performed during the time when the symbol variation according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (a demonstration display etc. Not only the period that can be played, but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and the more important effect appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value at any time, etc., it is intended to maintain the amusement of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation where the channels of various performance sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic abnormality or door opening, processing is performed to assign and output a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel. At this time, channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, and the process of notifying the progress of the effect of reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not discontinued. From the above, it is possible to enjoy the effect again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is ended.

  However, in the above-mentioned effect development lower notification processing, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of display effects is not to be canceled, the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel at a normal time More channels will be used than in the unannounced state), and there will be no empty channels to which no sound data has been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (informing state) of the specific annunciation sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no vacant channel to which sound data has not been assigned at a stage prior to the end of channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, either of the sound data at that time Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (informing status) of a specific notification sound is ended thereafter, the sound data that can not be assigned to a channel can be reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest may decline.

  With regard to concerns about free channels related to the presentation sound, there is no direct problem if the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether to adopt the automatic channel system or should be determined from the design viewpoint of the game and the effect, even if any channel system is adopted as the above-mentioned effect development lower notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program, in order to ensure cost reduction and reliability improvement for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound that is being produced is not variable but is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("Pip!" Or "Pipi!") Even if the player has performed an operation while the effect development lower notification process is being executed It is hoped that this will give more room to the channel and help reduce the risk of losing free channels.

  However, although the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when, for example, more important effects appear, the setting of the output volume is performed while the notification processing under the progress of the effect is performed. If the change is judged to be disallowed, and the notification processing under presentation progress based on the notification by false detection or convenience on the hall side (door opening etc.) is executed, the volume appropriate value according to the contents of the presentation progress is appropriately set. It is inevitable that the game's interest will decline due to the fact that it can not be changed. In addition, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the process of notification of the progress of the presentation, as a result of the occurrence of a large deviation between the sound volume appropriate value and the actual setting value according to the content of the presentation, After the setting change of the sound volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to receive a plurality of operations to change the sound volume to the proper value. As a result, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the fact that the effect sound can not be properly output due to the lack of available channels despite the fact that the informing progress lower notification process has finally ended.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being performed, the value decreases to a specific value. While the output sound volume of the effect sound being played (sound volume of the audible sound) is not made variable but is maintained, the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be accepted by itself. When the informing progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended, it is collectively changed to an output volume (sound volume of an audible sound) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, a new operation can be performed if the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is received in accordance with the progress of presentation while the process of notification of progress of production is being executed. It is possible to collectively change the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the informing progress lower notification processing is finished without performing. As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over a plurality of steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing ends, and a situation occurs in which a shortage occurs in the vacant channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when a batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value is executed when the effect development informing process is ended, the game during the period in which the effect informing process is under execution. Although the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change, regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, this volume adjustment completion sound is normally It may be made to output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of a special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the informing progress lower notification process is ended, the number of times the player setting value has been changed during the period in which the informing progress lower notification process is being executed It is desirable not to play back the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) at the same time the presentation progress under notification processing is ended regardless of the number of operations etc. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described for the processing from the execution of such notification processing under effect development to the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed.

  FIG. 287 is a diagram for describing the contents of the in-progress development informing process separately for the informing state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the informing progress lower notification processing to the output sound volume (the volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed, the contents of the in-progress development lower notification process are described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation of Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 277 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 287, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression aspects (a first volume suppression aspect and a second volume suppression aspect) are prepared as volume suppression aspects of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppression mode, in the setting value (player setting value) change by the player regarding the volume, the output sound volume (volume of the audible sound) change of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” Among the possible effects, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in this particular example, the process according to the output itself is performed without the effect sound being performed. It is illustrated as something to be

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any is performed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the side of high suppression degree. Moreover, even when abnormality detection is turned off, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, In the second volume suppression mode on the high suppression side until the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality detection, the output volume of the presentation sound (the volume of the audible sound) This process is continued without stopping the process of suppressing.

  In this explanation example, when notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the volume of the sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, abnormal vibration, It is set to.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression In the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the above, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is performed, when abnormality detection is turned off immediately after abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first sound volume suppression mode on the side where the suppression degree is low.

  On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball pulling guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is performed, The process of suppressing the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this explanation example, the suppression mode is made to differ depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Are not necessarily different from each other, and the output sound volume of the rendering sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed A process of suppressing (the volume of the audible sound) may be performed. However, with regard to the termination condition of the process to be suppressed, it is different if the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make

  FIG. 288 shows the contents of the processing regarding volume adjustment associated with the operation of the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the processing regarding the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is made variable by “1” in the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. As the value is smaller, the volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller. In addition, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the player setting in the state where the above-mentioned suppression mode (the first sound volume suppression mode and the second sound volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 288 (A), with regard to the volume of the effect sound, the player set value is “3” among “1” to “5” and no notification flag is set It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” that is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the big hit determination is not made and is in the start prize waiting state, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is simulated. The displayed image 331a and the displayed image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH to the effect that volume adjustment can be performed through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which one of "1" to "5" the current player set value is Ru. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be always displayed, or during a specific period such as super reach effect which is a reach effect to be executed in a state where the background image is changed. When the operation is performed by the player, at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may be displayed when the player performs an operation. Further, both of the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 288 (A), when the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20” at the same time. In addition, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge display indicates by the gauge display which one of the current set values is among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 288 (C)) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The person setting value is kept at “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is kept at “20”). Therefore, even when the player setting value is “1”, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 288 (B), the decorative symbol SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this point, in the sound volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 288 (a period in which a demonstration display etc. can be performed) but also the variation in symbols according to the big hit determination when the game is started. Even during the execution period, acceptance by the player is permitted. For example, when more important effects such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, it is configured to enable setting change.

  That is, FIG. 288 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 288 (B). In the first operation of them, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times of those While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at "80" which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, player setting is made. The value is changed from “4” to “5”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed to “80” to “100” which is 20 times of those. Volume adjustment completed at "100" which is the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, among the “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set value. A second volume value display OH2 indicating which one of the current setting values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This makes it possible to clarify which setting value is currently set with respect to “1” to “5”, which is a range of player setting values, even in a stressed situation in which more important effects appear. An object of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as repeated execution of the operation on the effect selection right button 332 although the player set value is “5” which is the maximum value. In the gauge display, numerical value ranges of “1” to “5” are displayed steadily in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change in the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 288 (D), the second volume value display OH2 starts from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 288 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the screen is hidden, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if it is an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value) When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. As a result, it is more suitably prompted that an operation mistake such as an operation to the right for effect selection right button 332 is repeatedly performed does not occur even though the player set value is “5” of the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 289, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door open detection is generated during the symbol fluctuation execution period and the processing related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

  The situation shown in FIG. 289 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (A). If a start winning is generated in such a situation and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 289 (B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing regarding the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is open ”and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  Further, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed, in the first volume suppression mode Informing processing under notification progressing processing is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), although the player set value is maintained as "3" as in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (A), the effect is displayed The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a first predetermined specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player set value). The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first specification is performed when an operation is performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while such effect development lower notification processing is performed. The output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound that has been lowered to a value (here "10") is not variable but is maintained, while the player's set value for the volume (player's set value) Accept the change acceptance of itself, when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is finished, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected It is as mentioned above that it is made to make a batch change.

  That is, FIG. 289 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice by the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 289 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the first predetermined specific value (here, “10”) lower than the set value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the first specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and processing regarding notification sound 4 (door opening) and presentation progress down notification processing (output volume up to a specific value Upon completion of the process of decreasing), as shown in FIG. 289 (D), in response to the end of the process, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that point. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Because it is changing, even if it is the output volume (the volume of the audible sound), “80” according to the first operation from the first specific value (here “10”) originally, the second operation In this case, the first specific value (here, “10”) is to be collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanation example, when the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once (“10” → “100”) along with completion of the notification processing of the progress of effects, a change occurs in the output sound volume. Even though the volume adjustment completion sound channel assignment does not do itself. According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 290, when the state detection occurred in FIG. 289 is not the door open but the magnetic abnormality, processing for the notification sound according to this is executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying right button 332 being operated.

  The situation shown in FIG. 290 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 289 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 290 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), during the execution period of the symbol variation, the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed according to this. Specifically, loop processing (60 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the occurrence of the magnetic detection that occurs in the first notification group is performed, the second volume control mode is performed Informing processing under production progress is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), the player setting value is maintained even though it is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (A). The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a second predetermined specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player set value), The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this respect, even when the process for notifying the progress of the effect on the lower side according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, the second specific value (here, “0” is selected when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed. The output volume of the effect sound reduced to “)” (volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself The change acceptance of is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is ended, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected As described above, the batch change is made.

  That is, FIG. 290 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 290 (B). Although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (mute)”) lower than the user set value (20 times the set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is the second specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “0”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example of the explanation, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until the predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection Informing process lower notification processing for suppressing the is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and the process for notifying the progress of presentation progress (specify the output volume When the process of reducing the value to the end is completed, as shown in FIG. 290 (D), in response to the end of the process, the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Since it is changing, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” according to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), the second operation The second specific value (in this case, "0") is to be collectively changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  In addition, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (D), the game board side effect display device The display (in this case, “magnetic detection”) in the display area of 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is ended, the effect sound deviates from the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, according to the player setting value. In the notification process according to the door opening, while the notification sound is ended, the effect sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the in-liquid crystal display and the notification by the lamp are continued while the notification processing according to the door opening is reflected. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when the magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is permitted even during the period when the effect development lower notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game until the informing processing lower notification processing ends. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume is also output when the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once ("0" → "100") with the completion of the notification processing under the effect development due to the magnetic abnormality. Even though there is a change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed itself. According to such a configuration, it is not possible to enjoy the appropriate presentation due to the lack of the vacant channel, even though the presentation progressing downward notification process caused by the false detection is finally finished. Can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 201, for the notification sound according to the door opening such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound according to the magnetic abnormality such as "the booboo magnetism has been detected", as shown in FIG. Since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the value, playback is always performed at the volume set with the initial value regardless of the player set value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is executed, the notification processing is not executed, so during the execution of such notification, the player is set Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the volume initial value as shown in FIG. It always plays back at the volume set with the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set to the third byte of the volume initial value. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

  Moreover, about each processing demonstrated in FIG. 289 and FIG. 290, the state detection not only during the execution period of symbol variation but in the form before the symbol variation is started and the timing across the start and the end of symbol variation Even when the notification process according to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  Further, in each process described in FIG. 289 and FIG. 290, after the informing progress lower informing process is ended, as in the case in which the in-advancement advancing lower informing process is started, effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “P!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  In addition, although the suppression mode of the effect sound in the period during which the in-progress development processing is performed is different between the process described in FIG. 289 and the process described in FIG. 290, the suppression mode is not necessarily limited. It does not need to be different, and the output sound volume of the presentation sound (the audible sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of

  In addition, in the announcement progress under notification processing, although it will suppress the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) of various game sounds, the game ball is in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 among these game sounds. Some game sounds such as a sound reproduced in response to winning (prize sound) may be reproduced with the volume set as the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hole side to easily grasp whether or not the game is continued despite the occurrence of the abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some of the sounds (winning sounds) reproduced in response to the game ball having won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 when the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that can not be output when the in-progress under-notification processing is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 277 to 290, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving control structure that can appropriately report abnormal content etc. only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds. (The situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, a situation (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs in a situation where there is no vacancy in a channel to which a presentation effect sound (a production sound) is assigned. There is still concern over the appearance of the above unintended sound output aspect.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the technical sound channel assignment also has various technical features before the occurrence of a situation where there are no channels available (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). I am trying to devise a device. Hereinafter, various technical devices applied to the output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. In addition, when adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, it is not necessarily adopted about the control structure of the above-mentioned channel saving type which enables an alarm content etc. to be appropriately notified only by a single channel regarding various alarm sounds. You do not have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority may not necessarily be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.
[Channel reservation process]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "the act of praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1" or "button operation" has been performed. Detection is made possible by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound does not show any degree of expectation such as a sound corresponding to silent data consisting only of silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0) By assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is maintained so as not to be used by other sounds. On the other hand, while channel reservation processing is being performed in this way, even if special rendering conditions such as a big hit finalization rendering effect or a pre-reading rendering effect are established as a result of the game ball being received in the specific winning combination, for example At this time, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation processing to end, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and reproducing the channel (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which special sound can be assigned is pre-secured (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation due to a specific action by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to output a special sound due to a lack of channels despite the fact that a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the winning.

  As for the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot decision sound that is executed only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly expected presentation mode (for example, a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination according to the prize) , A high expectation notification sound to be executed when a high expectation notification effect to be performed during reach effect execution, etc. is selected, or when a predetermined determination result is obtained by a predetermination determination according to a winning combination Although it is possible to illustrate the pre-read notification sound etc. which are executed as an effect, the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output What is necessary is

  FIG. 291 shows that when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, quein) matched with a so-called read-ahead effect as a "special sound" The channel to which the special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing secured beforehand from time to time.

  First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, general pre-reading effects which are known techniques will be briefly described.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 has a prize, the predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. The first and second starting opening winning processes shown in FIG. 257 are performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), and it is applicable when it is determined that the winning is achieved As described above, processing such as increasing the number of reservations on the special symbol side is performed.

  However, in reality, in the first and second starting opening winning processes, although not shown, pre-reading processing for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning starting opening side is also executed (for example, the first starting opening 2002) If it is the side (the first special view side), it is executed as the processing between steps S6204 and S6205, and if it is the second starting port 2004 side (the second special view side), it is executed as the processing between steps S6207 and S6208 It has become so.

  Here, the prefetching effect on the first special view side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the prefetching effect on the second special view side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special view prefetching process, information (such as crash information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required to determine the presence or absence of preview rendering effects and the contents of effects on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in peripheral control board 1510, determination processing as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and variation in the design thereof are not digested, and information is obtained from the above-described read-ahead command when they are put on hold ( Based on the information related to the prefetching effect on the first special view side and the information related to the prefetching effect on the second special view side, an expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result It is possible to carry out pre-reading effects that suggest the degree in advance.

  More specifically, peripheral control MPU 1530a first determines whether there is a situation where a starting winning combination has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control relating to a pending display or pre-reading effect according to the starting winning combination. And after that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped gaming situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processing. Among them, in the control relating to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning combination in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue and a relatively high expectation red) It is determined whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the pre-reading expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and an aspect according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the blue, red, or pre-reading effect is not performed In the normal display mode of (1), the process of performing the suspension display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the pending display is digested, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such pre-reading effect, when making a pending display (including a big hit confirmation pending display) appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation, an output of a special sound (for example, quein) may be performed according to the pre-reading execution. There are many. However, since such special sound (prefetch effect) is reproduced at the winning timing of the gaming ball which occurs irregularly, winning of the gaming ball occurs at timing when there is no space in the channel, and it is determined in the prefetching determination. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special indication is not reproduced even though the pre-reading judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode (blue or red) with high expectation. It is feared that the game interest will decline without it.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 291, as described above, prior to making the game ball win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and outputting a special sound (pre-reading effect), the special sound is Since the channel to which it can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is possible to execute the channel reservation process secured in the.

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 291, the number of big hit determinations (pending number) currently placed on hold status is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of game board side effect display device 1600. Under the condition that the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed under the condition, the player usually wins the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) to be played. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, up to four big hit judgments are put on hold according to those winnings, and those big hit judgments are Every time the game is put on hold, a process relating to a hold display or pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first winning combination (first hold) and the second winning combination (in the order of winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. Then, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning the pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the pre-reading determination is made by winning). Will cause a pending display to appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also the first winning (first suspension) and the second winning (for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing of winning), but this is maintained in the execution waiting state After waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become empty, the special sound (for example, quein) is output. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing of outputting the special sound (for example, quein), or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold made in the pre-reading determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold that has won the pre-reading determination occurs, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being performed and the channel reservation process are not being performed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can be made to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor). Detects this as an object, and is triggered to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 291, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, a prayer effect mode is generated based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and "countdown of A process of assigning "voice" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. The voice of the countdown is, for example, started from "30" and is ended when it is counted down every second and becomes "0". Further, even during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for “Shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and “voice of countdown” in a predetermined channel. It can be generated as a trigger (detection by a sensor) as a trigger only by itself, and it is not related to the contents of the rendering (representation that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation under execution, It does not depend on the result of the big hit judgment at all. Therefore, the display or sound generated when the player holds the hand may be changed to another content as appropriate, but by performing such processing, the predetermined time (30 seconds) can be obtained. The channel can be maintained in the use state (in this case, the use state by the "countdown sound" not showing any expectation) until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which another sound is assigned to a predetermined channel that does not know when it will end (channel reservation processing).

  Then, in this way, the player plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation processing is being executed elapses (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown voice" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetch winning) indicating that the prefetch effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, quein) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and is stored as a waiting state. In this way, the special sound (for example, quein) which has been made to wait for execution is output as a post-notification sound that is output later than at the time of winning at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period (timing tY11 to tY12) from when the player holds his hand up and starts reproduction (channel reservation processing) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention and is ended. If there is no, or if a special prize has not been obtained but a special judgment result has not been obtained (if it was not won in the pre-reading effect), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends is reached The sound is not played back.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from when the player holds up his hand and starts the reproduction (channel reservation process) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention until it is ended (timing tY11 to tY12) If a special winning result (pre-read winning) may be obtained by making a winning combination and the determination according to the winning combination, the special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the "countdown voice" It is ended and it will be executed as a notice effect after aiming at timing when a channel becomes vacant. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound can not be output due to the absence of an idle channel despite the fact that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cuein) according to this is a timing at which an empty space occurs in at least one channel. Since it is intended to reproduce by aiming at tY12, if it is confirmed whether or not the special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, a special judgment result (look-ahead in a relatively long time of timing tY11 to tY12) It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the winning) has been obtained.

  In the case of outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post-notification sound, reproduction may be performed by allocating to any channel among the channels in the idle state at the timing tY12. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been assigned, channel reservation processing and an announcement effect according to that are performed for only one channel. It can be said to be beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of effects can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, for prayer mode background display in which “Torii of the shrine” is displayed as a background image, timing tY12 when reproduction of “voice of countdown” is ended, and reproduction of special sound (cuein) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to cause the channel reservation process to occur again each time the number of reservations decreases. From the point of view that it seems that there is a benefit when the hand of the “Shrine torii” is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be reproduced at a later notification timing is higher). The prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition not related to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a release operation by a button). However, in fact, even if "the shrine's torii" is displayed as a background image, the player holds his hand even if "the shrine's torii" is not displayed as a background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for the predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (voice of countdown), so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "voice of countdown" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) as the post notification sound is ended.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period from timing tY11 to tY12, the "countdown voice" playback time from the second detection until the predetermined time (here 30 seconds) elapses. May be extended, and a special sound corresponding to the prefetch win may be output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the detection of the specific action by the player even when the symbol variation is not in the changing state, as well as when the symbol variation is in the changing state. You may do it. In addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation.

  However, when the special sound (cuine) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ((quened) as compared to the case where the special sound (cuing) is output at the time of winning. 2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold) It is difficult to grasp whether a special judgment result (prefetch win) has been obtained by hold, so it is win-ahead There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to being put on hold without recognizing that the hold is pending. On the other hand, the content to be reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Quin”), but the first winning (first hold), the second winning (second holding), the third winning (second It is also conceivable to make the setting differ depending on which hold of 3) hold) and 4th prize (fourth hold) has been selected in advance. However, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the prefetched winning itself by changing the content from the sound (here, “Quin”) reproduced by the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed. There is concern that it will be lost.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the special judgment result is obtained for the winning at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). In accordance with whether (prefetch winning) is obtained, processing is performed to vary the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started from timing tY12.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 291, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, the special sound (here, “Quin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 292, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the second winning (second suspension) winning at a relatively early timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. Although assumed, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Quin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Quin") is played for 6 seconds, "Quin" is played twice Sound is output in a manner such as "quenching".

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the third winning (third suspension) winning at a relatively late timing in the timing tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Quin” once, if “Quin” is played for 9 seconds, “Quin” is 3 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of "cu-cu-ins" are output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 294, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at an extremely late timing between timings tY11 to tY12 However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play "Quin" once, if you play special sound (in this case, "Quin") for 12 seconds, "Quin" is 4 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of “cu-cu-in-cuin” are output.

  According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that the special determination result (prefetching winning) is obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained by a winning that has occurred. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning that occurred earlier in the timing tY11 to tY12. In addition, it is suggested that the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning at the later timing of the timing tY11 to tY12 as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is longer. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result can be obtained according to the winning, but also in this case, according to the timing at which the winning occurred. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the number of reservations is limited to four at the maximum, when a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Quein" 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the play time of the batch, if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the play time of "Quin" 2 times regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Quin" regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is regardless of the winning timing May be set to the playback time of "Quin" for 4 times.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading winning is obtained, “cuine” is reproduced as the special sound, but the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when winning. The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed according to which of the low read-ahead winning) and the second determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation is obtained) is obtained in a pre-read determination when winning a prize, "Quin" is reproduced as a special sound, but a pre-read when a prize is won When the second determination result (predicted winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading prize is obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively low degree of expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively high degree of expectation) It will also be possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is made by the look-ahead determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning in the very early timing among the timing tY11 to tY12. On the assumption that the second judgment result (predicted winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained by the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at a very late timing. However, in this case, after the special sound is reproduced in the form of "cuin" for 3 seconds from timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the form of "docan" for further 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize winning at a very early timing between timings tY11 to tY12 ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is that the prefetching winning was won in the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (the prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) being obtained by the prefetching determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the manner of "docan" after the completion of one "cuin" played back, second look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize (the fourth hold) It becomes possible to predict that the judgment result (the look-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prediction winning on the first special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound and If the second determination result (prediction winning on the second special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second start port 2004, "docan" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the situation, it may be desirable to play "cuin" or "docan" as a special sound.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 295 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, The first winning (winning with the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing is a winning on the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (first special view It becomes possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is also pre-read winning even in the look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (prefetch win for the first special view side) being obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the form of "dokan" after one "cuin" played back has been played, the 4th prize (the 4th hold) is the second starting port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special view side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning combination while the channel reservation process is being performed. In the pre-reading effect, it was decided to illustrate the case where the pre-reading winning is obtained. However, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 295, the point is that the gaming machine is subjected to the determination process when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) that can avoid that a channel shortage occurs and can not be output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained, which has technical features in itself Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching in the prefetching effect.
Channel Usage Limit
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game, and when this number is less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is made to be high (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, for at least part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it is possible to make the number of free channels hard to be zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation according to the big hit determination in the suspended state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the symbol variation that is digested is Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is a vacancy in the channel, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the channel limitation with such symbol variation as one unit is By performing this operation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level values become higher, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound becomes higher.

  FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Now, in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 230), it is determined that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, first, as shown in FIG. 296, the value of the channel restriction level set previously is reset in the process of step S3101. In addition, about this reset process (step S3101), you may make it carry out, when symbol fluctuation is complete | finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the classification of the first half of the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of variation (for example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of reach effect, Specify "X" which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) with reference to the timing when the channel becomes most vacant in the period from when the fluctuation start to reach the symbol stop and so on) Do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the presentation pattern of the second half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the symbol fluctuation stop) Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is at its lowest.

  However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped is selected without the reach effect being started from the start of the symbol variation, the symbol variation corresponding to “the second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the process of step S3103 is not performed, and the next step process is performed, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number “Y” of empty channels in the process of step S3103 (numerical value not subject to channel restriction) Will be set.

  Then, next, as the process of step S3104, "X" specified by the process of step S3102 is compared with "Y" specified by the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" The channel restriction level is set based on the value of the side where the minimum number of vacant channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of vacant channels), at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended. Thus, between the start and the end of the symbol variation to be determined, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. It is expected that the number of empty channels will not easily become 0, and it will be expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum number of free channels” provided for the determination is separately specified in the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This is because the contents of the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of the symbol change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by multiple effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.) In many cases, if the minimum number of free channels is specified in units of the first half of fluctuation, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced. .

  However, the minimum number of vacant channels to be used for the determination of setting of the channel restriction level may not necessarily be separately identified in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and effects from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop The number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is least occupied in the period in which the effect pattern is executed, with the pattern as one unit.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances (a symbol stop related to BGM related or a big hit determination, a big hit determination It indicates how many channels are left as idle when they are assigned to each channel for the corresponding sound effects, etc.). Therefore, a button press sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound associated with winning at a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The effect pattern (representation content) to be judged is developed, such as the sound associated with the winning of the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the common electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol) These sounds are not included in the judgment of various sounds that are not necessarily executed only by

  FIG. 297 shows values of channel restriction levels set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104, and also shows an example of restriction contents determined for the channel restriction levels. .

  As shown in FIG. 297, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, a block winning sound (a winning for a general winning opening) among various types of game sounds is first made as a sound to be subjected to channel usage restriction. Sound with accompanying), hold winning sound (sound with winning in the first start opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004), general power effect sound (sound with the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no spare channel available, at least those game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) of various types of game sounds. Channel usage limitations may occur.

  More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is in a situation where there is a margin in the vacant channel and it is in the situation where the symbol variation is executed, the channel use restriction target sound (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of the above are restricted, and if there is a winning on the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is allocated to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and the first starting opening 2002 or the execution of the symbol variation If there is a winning on the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the spread according to the effect The effect sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound according to this is divided into the predetermined vacant channel. Devoted to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completion, etc.) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with a slight margin in the vacant channel is executed. Among the sounds), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning on the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, if this is detected, the winning balls are paid out by the number corresponding to the winning, but the block winning sound is It will process so that it does not allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to play the block winning sound itself without setting the sound generation scheduler data according to the winning on the general winning opening.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". That is, in this case, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect, volume adjustment, etc.) are considered to be subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation is executed with relatively little spare time in the empty channel. Channel completion (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of block winning sound and hold winning sound among completion sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction for the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, the quantity according to the winning is detected Although the prize balls are paid out for a minute, and the above-mentioned first and second starting opening winning processes are carried out, the processing for holding on hold sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined vacant channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation scheduler data according to the winning on the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and not to play the on-hold winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Set to "3". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with no margin in the vacant channel is executed. Generate a channel usage limit (100% limit) for all of the sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on block winning sound described above and the restriction on holding winning sound, even if the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, this is the case for the general effect sound Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, although the volume adjustment according to this is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined vacant channel. It will be. At this time, also for the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the corresponding scheduler data for sound generation and do not perform the reproduction of the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than the predetermined number while the game is progressed, the number of vacant channels is predetermined As compared with the case where symbol variation that is not less than a number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of at least a part of various types of game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, with respect to some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 Since the execution of related processing is limited, and the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected that the occurrence of such a situation should be suitably suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction among various types of game sounds is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "sounds associated with winnings". , “A performance sound related to normal determination”, and “a sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation can be suitably executed without being limited. The decrease in the game entertainment when the channel use restriction is applied is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various types of game sounds, a plurality of types of sounds that are considered to be candidates for channel usage restriction are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general effects sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level increases (as the minimum number of vacant channels decreases as the symbol changes), the number of types of sounds subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, there is a method to limit the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0 and to increase the rate of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. For example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 298 may be employed.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing another example of separately defined restriction contents of channel restriction levels.

  As shown in FIG. 298, in this example, the channel use is made according to the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. Make a limited lottery about whether or not to limit. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel usage restriction are not prepared, and a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound Etc.) is limited to channel use.

  For example, in this example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is 0/100. A restriction process for channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is increased as the value becomes larger, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel The probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 50/100. The same probability in the case where is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0 and 1) is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process concerning the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number while the game proceeds, the number of vacant channels is equal to The ratio of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is increased compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed. That is, in this case, with regard to some game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds) of the game sounds, there is a restriction to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. As the number of vacant channels is increased and the execution restriction rate is increased as the number of vacant channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation where the number of vacant channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected to suppress.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum vacant channel in the execution period of the symbol variation It becomes possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it becomes possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298, after the determination processing for various advance effects is executed based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of available channels is specified from the occurrence status of those advance effects, and the specified minimum free space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since it is possible to estimate in advance for each effect pattern, it is possible to predetermine how many sounds are simultaneously channel-assigned at the same time during the symbol variation period, so the possibility of occurrence of channel shortage is classified in advance Keep it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be higher as the probability of occurrence of the channel shortage in which the effect pattern is classified in advance is higher. That is, in this case, when a special type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels simultaneously is executed, there is actually no button operation or various winnings are not generated, and many channels are not used and empty channels. Even if there is a margin in the number of events, there will be situations where the execution of processing related to the output of game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed, but the empty channel can be achieved by simply performing the processing. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid that the number of objects becomes 0, and even when such processing is performed, "the number of free channels in the pattern change is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which the process related to the output of the game sound is limited is high, and when the number of free channels in the symbol change is relatively large, it is related to the output of the game sound It is only a phenomenon that the rate at which the execution of the processing is limited is reduced, and there is no particular sense of discomfort from the player's side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether the sound is limited, it becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to be short of channels.

  In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and the other examples thereof, although the channel limitation is performed with the symbol variation as one unit, the channel is performed while the effect contents are developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied to perform channel restriction in accordance with the channel restriction level in each case. Alternatively, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, a channel restriction level is made unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations when a predetermined limitation condition is satisfied, and the channel limitation level is set. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

  By the way, in the configuration exemplified in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and their other examples, as the sound subject to restriction of the channel use, it is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that We decided to adopt only "sound associated with winning", "arrangement sound related to normal judgment" and "sound related to volume adjustment". However, since these sounds include those whose frequency of occurrence is lower than that of the effect sound, it is important to consider the jackpot determination in order to realize the restriction processing that can secure the empty channel more effectively. It is desirable that “rendering sound” be adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is performed on "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination", there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, and the effect may be reduced to a lack of excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some situations, the interest in playing the game may be reduced.

  In this respect, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and other examples thereof, among the "arrangement sounds related to the big hit determination", only the "arrangement related to symbol variation in the hold state and to be digested in the future" If the channel use of sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 298 or another example), for the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt an effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a target of restriction without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 occurs during a period in which symbol variation is being executed and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, the hold is normally made A determination process is performed as to whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed in relation to the state of the big hit determination. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) is suggested to suggest in advance the degree of anticipation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to be a big hit. Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties (such as a state where the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 and symbol variation is in progress), the channel usage is restricted. If the effect sound corresponding to the effect on the symbol variation to be digested in the future is targeted, winnings on the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occur, and the big hit judgment according to this is suspended Even if it is put in the state, the judgment processing for the pre-reading effect itself regarding the big hit judgment being put on hold is not executed, so that both the pre-reading effect and the sound according to this are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion to be used for rendition relating to the symbol variation in the future which is not the symbol variation in progress is being executed Because it becomes possible to supply to the production sound regarding the fluctuation of the character, the production sound with high frequency of occurrence can be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation under execution You will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only the "representation concerning the symbol change in the future in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is subjected to restriction, it will be restricted if it is reserve digested in the future Since the effect during symbol fluctuation not being turned on (content of the effect according to the effect pattern) is always executed, the decrease in the amusement of the game due to the restriction of the effect is suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when "rendering sound related to the big hit judgment" is the target of restriction, if only the sound of the effect (display of the effect, sound of the effect) is the target of restriction (no sound output), it will fall into the effect lacking in excitement In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties about the vacancy, the player wins and the jackpot determination is put on hold Judgment processing for pre-reading effect When this itself is not executed, it is made not to perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding pre-reading effect, therefore special result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained in pre-reading judgment The situation is the same as when playing (pre-displayed when pre-read effects are not executed), and it is preferable to suitably avoid a decrease in game interest due to the execution of effects lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  It should be noted that when the effect sound related to the big hit determination is targeted for restriction, the judgment process for the pre-read effect when the winning and the big hit determination is put on hold does not execute itself, but the effect display and effect regarding the pre-read effect Although I did not do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "play sound related to the big hit determination" is a target of restriction, the judgment process about the pre-read effect is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained until the specific timing in the symbol change comes Restricts both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect without executing them, and when the specific timing during symbol variation comes, only the restriction to the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound To do this. That is, in this case, the effect display relating to the pre-read effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from when "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination" is not the restriction target (at the time of normal) Since the pre-reading effect is executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is performed while suppressing the decrease in the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

In addition, as a process regarding future effects in a situation where channel use is restricted, · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Until it is done, both the effect display and effect sound concerning the pre-read effect are not executed but these are limited, and when the specific timing in the symbol fluctuation comes, for the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is taken as the first restricted processing.
・ When the prize is won, the judgment processing for the pre-read effect is not executed, and the game is progressed when the second limited process is to execute neither the effect display for the pre-read effect nor the effect sound. Among them, when the symbol variation is performed such that the number of empty channels in a state where sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the symbol variation is not performed that the number of empty channels is less than a predetermined number. To increase the rate at which either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is executed, and the symbol variation in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed Let the expected value of the number of channels used in “A” be the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in execution when the second limited processing was performed “B” When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and a greater anxiety arises due to the vacancy, both the effect display and the effect sound are subject to restriction instead of the first limited processing under which only the effect sound is the object of restriction. Since the ratio under which the channel restriction is applied is increased by the second limited processing described above, it is expected to more suitably suppress anxiety when the number of channels used increases.
[Channel special open processing]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced. A process may be performed to end the assignment of the specific gaming sound to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound whose assignment to the channel is continued (channel special open process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at timing at which it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the aspect of the channel allocation of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). To reduce the number of channels (increasing the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, the number of channels in use is reduced even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is not output.

  FIG. 299 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 299, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing tk11 during a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed The sound of “normal BGM reproduction” according to is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction) and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “reproduction A” is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and is being reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect At timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are disconnected and the playback is ended. As described above, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the stage of effecting, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern is obtained by performing the process of terminating the assignment of the effect sound from the channel and changing it to an empty channel promptly. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to assign a new sound and play it out due to a shortage in an empty channel.

  However, as described above, when there is a predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) when the assignment of the effect sound is removed from the channel and this is changed to an empty channel The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the corresponding effect pattern may be reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), first, the sound of "reproduction A" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and the timing tk13 before the end of the reproduction comes. From “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after timing tk13, the sound of “effect B reproduction” according to effect B displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 It is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 to be in a state of playback (here, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 299 (b), timing tk13 in which “reproduction of A effect” is ended within the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state in this way. In accordance with the arrival of the "effect B reproduction", a process of reducing the volume (volume reduction process) is performed while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are allocated to the channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (c), the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” in this explanatory example is output as a rendition sound corresponding to a step effect that can be developed up to four times in the content of the effect. After the effect content has been developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect as to whether the effect content is further developed according to step 4 is executed. In the state where a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” corresponding to the step effect are allocated to the channel, processing (volume suppression processing) to decrease the volume is performed. In addition, when the high expectation performance aspect which develops further to the production contents according to Step 4 appears when this volume reduction processing is ended and returned to the normal volume (a performance with relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of the step 4 is outputted as the sound of “reproduction B reproduction”, it does not develop into the effect content according to the step 4 and the step concerned with the effect content according to the step 3 When the low expectation effect mode in which the effect is ended appears (effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume control process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and in the process of the volume control process, “process A” Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “play A” is not played back. Can be made harder to notice.

  Particularly, in the example shown in FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (c), the content of the rendering with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the rendering developing to step 4) and the content of the rendering with a relatively low degree of expectation (step The above-mentioned period (period in which it is unclear whether development will be made or not) in which presentation contents (representation of whether or not development to step 4) appears that leads to any of the presentation contents that do not develop to 4) The volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the reproduction is ended. According to such a configuration, not only in the situation where the volume of the effect sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of “reproduction B reproduction”). Then, since the effect A (sound of “reproduction A reproduction”) comes to an end, the volume of the effect sound that has been targeted for volume suppression including the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is then returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced, the effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the effect content developed to step 4) and the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is no longer reproduced by drawing interest in which of the presentation contents not developed to step 4 appears.

  Moreover, in the volume suppression processing according to this explanatory example, although the volume is reduced while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” are allocated to the channels, all the effect sounds are The volume is not reduced, and the specific effect sound (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is continuously reproduced with the normal volume. That is, in this case, with regard to a part of the rendering sound (the sound of “normal BGM playback”), the volume of the plurality of rendering sounds is lowered in the normal playback without the volume being suppressed, and thus the listening of the sound Since the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" comes to an end while it becomes even more difficult, the sound of "effect A reproduction" can be made harder to notice by not being reproduced. It will be.

  Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is not terminated immediately, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is ended. That is, immediately after the volume suppression processing is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" has occurred, but the volume is lowered to a specific value. Since it is assumed that such interest is diminished when the state which does not change at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, the sound of "play A" is aimed at such a timing. By terminating the reproduction of the above, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process is gradually reduced in volume, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silenced). As a result, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 299, the sound of “effect B reproduction” is started to be reproduced while the sound of “effect A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppression state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be ended.

  The effects A and B are not necessarily effects accompanied by the effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as effects of only sound, for example.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “effect B reproduction” is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit judgment, but It is not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started to be started, and the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. May be ended in the manner described above.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process may not necessarily be reduced stepwise. Also, conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if it is suppressed to a volume lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, a specific effect sound according to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) is excluded from the target of the volume suppression processing, and the volume at the normal time remains Although the reproduction is continuously performed, the volume of all the effect sounds may be reduced when the volume reduction processing is performed. Also, conversely, the sound of "effect A reproduction" may be maintained without reducing the volume when the volume reduction processing is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. In the situation where the player is interested in the sound of "reproduction B reproduction", the reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended and then the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is also included. Content with a relatively high degree of expectation even if the sound of “play A” is not played back when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned (step 4 We are interested in which one of the rendering content (which develops into 2) and the rendering content with relatively low degree of expectation (the rendering content that does not develop to step 4) appears, and the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is reproduced Can be made harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least while the volume reduction processing is performed during a period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A reproduction” and “effect B reproduction” is performed (after the volume of “effect B reproduction” is reduced from the normal value Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a win is made to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” more suitably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. In addition, even if a special result (preread winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is hit, the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, the sound reproduction of “effect A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the effect sound is reduced in volume, and when the period ends, the channel is allocated to the channel in the state of reduced in volume. In addition to this, the special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel until the end of the period is added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played back (play back at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, an interest is gathered whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the sound volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it harder. Moreover, if the number of channels being used after volume return is reduced compared to before the volume drop, there is a concern that it may seem as if the expectation for the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation has decreased, but special effect sound Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (reproduced with the normal volume), so that it is the same as before volume reduction and after volume return, or more (two or more effect sounds for the channel (When newly allocated), it becomes possible to keep the channel in use, and it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the degree of expectation decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel is newly assigned to a channel and played back when the volume is returned, the channel that has become idle due to the sound assignment of "play A" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of effects with less channel resources.

In addition, such channel special opening processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the processing described with reference to FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 As “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of vacant channels is, the less symbol variation (when the number of vacant channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel anxious feeling of lack of channels, it is possible to continuously output "production A" without ending on the way become.
[Control sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing for advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel to reproduce Do the process of Then, when the display effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is allocated to the predetermined channel and the state is output in the suppression mode or silence ( The volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output. When an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as operation button 410) is detected in this state, the symbol fluctuation causes a big hit symbol A special effect sound that suggests an expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressing mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special rendition may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is allocated to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state although In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  By the way, when it is intended to output a sound in a suppression mode or silent while keeping a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (a sound of “BGM playback”) allocated to a channel, it is generally allocated to a channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of a certain sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“ It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player (generate an effective period of effect reception) after setting the sound of “reproduction of BGM” to a state of being output in a suppression mode or silent.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. Whether it is random (depending on the player) can not be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched with this at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified as time series specified by the corresponding scheduler data for sound generation. Perform processing of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned scheduler data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence compared to the other sections The data content that specifies that the specific sound data is to be performed is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation It is made to become a time-series relation in which the effective period of the effect receptionist occurs within the period). In addition to this, even if the player performs an operation at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial period), the special period from the special period (partial period) The sound of "BGM playback" is a special effect sound according to the reception of presentation across the two sections in the specific sound data in the period (other section) after the (partial section) ends. It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super The volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed only by performing processing of sequentially assigning sound data etc. in the latter half of reach production to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the corresponding scheduler data for sound generation. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted in the "suppressed mode or a state (special period) output in silent mode" created in this way, special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM play” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is output in the “suppression mode or silent state” (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, a section (suppression mode or silent sound output) of a specific sound data (one sound material) is ended in a form of being incorporated into the special effect sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the suppression mode or silence, an aspect of non-suppression of special effect sound by a process of high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  FIG. 300 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such a process sound output process under suppression is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 300, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 300 (a), there is a period during which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing ts11, the specific effect being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. It may be reproduced based on the sound generation scheduler data as sound material), or the whole period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each separate sound data prepared for each of those periods is It may be reproduced sequentially based on the scheduler data for sound generation corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 300, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03, and are in a state of reproduction.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 300 (a) and 300 (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and being in a reproduction state is The data content of silence is set at timing ts12 before timing ts13 at which the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) occurs is given, which gives an operation opportunity that is a trigger for producing a production sound It is made to be in the reproduction state in a part section. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed with respect to the sound of “BGM reproduction”, it is possible to output the sound in silence while assigning it to the predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is a possibility that there is a margin in the channel usage status While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound in a state where anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and may not be able to output a special effect sound" is removed. Will be able to control the decline in game entertainment.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is ended even if the player does not perform the operation. Before the timing ts15 comes before the arrival of the key, the period is ended so that the effect by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the operation effective period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state in the partial section set as the silent data content. While the atmosphere of the use condition of the yoke channel is likely to be provided, it is possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. Note that the operation valid period is ended not only when the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

  And, in this explanation example, it is assumed that the player's operation is accepted for presentation at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated based on the fact that the presentation is accepted. , 03 are assigned to special effect sounds for channels 08 and 09 to be reproduced.

  In this respect, in this example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation effective period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period is ended at this maximum time. Within the operation valid period, when “BF” is the time until the end of a partial section where silent data content is set as “BGM playback” sound (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) Even when the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is allocated to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction for a fixed time of “SY + α (> BF)”.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM playback" as a non-suppressing mode in the form of being incorporated into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted until the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as the non-suppression mode is variable. The buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in the non-suppressing mode of the sound of "BGM playback" (The sound of "BGM playback" is restored in the non-suppressing mode by being mixed into the special effect sound By making it difficult for the player to notice that it is not possible to restore the sound of “BGM playback” as a mode of non-suppression when the operation by the player is accepted, and the sense of incongruity by returning after the predetermined time It will be difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound in this way, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode when timing ts17 comes. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended.

  In the above example, the "timing to start the reproduction of the special effect sound" and the "timing to end the reproduction of the special effect sound" are controlled by the player as shown in FIG. 300 (b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, they will be variable within the range shown by the dotted arrow, however, even if they correspond to any timing, timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state It is apparent that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is to be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, the user further remembers "uncomfortable feeling by returning the sound of" BGM playback "as a non-suppressed mode when the operation by the player is accepted as a non-suppressed mode". In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, when an operation by the player is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing ts14, and the effect is accepted when the effect by the player is accepted within the operation effective period. The predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced based on the information. And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). Will be set to arrive after the According to such a configuration, a silent period (according to the operation timing) after a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends and the sound of BGM reproduction is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Can be generated as a buffer period). In addition, if it is set in such a silent period that a resurrection effect in which the expectation (or 100% may be high) can be generated, it will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. It is also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by simultaneously performing a movable effect for moving a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to make the sound of reproduction secretly transition to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and an aspect suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. What is output by is good. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, by setting a time-sequential period in which the suppression mode or silence is set to the sound data of “BGM reproduction” allocated to the predetermined channel itself, It is possible to create a suppression mode or a silent output state (special period) only by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" allocated to a predetermined channel does not necessarily have to set the time-sequential period set as the suppression mode or silence to itself, for example, at timing ts12 Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (process of returning to the initial value of volume) is performed. I will not. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts 16 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is raised from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced as in the other example described above. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial value of the volume) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified with a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is finished. You may make it perform processing (processing to return to volume initial value) to make it rise from, or even if the said symbol variation is ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, a restriction process is performed to make it more difficult for new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 arrives to timing ts16 It is desirable to In addition, as such restriction processing, for example, it has nothing to do with the result of whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation under execution such as block winning a prize sound, holding winning a prize sound, general sound effect sound, adjustment sound etc. It is desirable to set a specific game sound as a target of restriction and prevent the reproduction of the specific game sound not to be newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, a specific effect sound (BGM in a channel different from the channel 02, 03 before the timing ts12 comes To play the background music, not the music, but it is desirable to be an effect sound or an effect sound such as a speech), and while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, the timing ts12 comes and the BGM is reproduced. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it can be made difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state. In addition, for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is to be ended before timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output (at timing ts14 or before timing ts14). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special directing sound is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the rendering sound on a plurality of channels until a timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including special effect sounds are output, the sound of BGM reproduction can be easily incorporated into those effect sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is normally It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the aspect.

In addition, such suppression operation sound output processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed, and, for example, in the processing described with reference to FIG. 297 and FIG. 298. Adopting "Sound of BGM playback" as the restriction target, the smaller the number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the number of free channels in symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The ratio at which the operation sound output process under suppression is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, the BGM reproduction sound is output without making the suppression mode or silence in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output due to the channel shortage. Will be able to
[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which sound data is not allocated is triggered by the detection by the detection means. It is possible to execute (channel assignment cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created in response to an operation by the player, the player performs an operation by the player at a timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it is possible to reliably output the player's favorite rendering sound and special sound through the vacant channel secured in advance in this way.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this explanation example is not limited to the “button operation”, and the action of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 for prayer, etc. The point is that the contact or non-contact type predetermined sensor can detect any state change that occurs when the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to be detected is performed. It is sufficient that the processing in which the sound in the state assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction end is performed in response to the detection.

  FIG. 301 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when the process related to such a channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 301, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing tw11 during a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM1 playback” according to (for example, the presentation effect sound to be played during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (here, stereo playback) and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the effect mode (for example, one music continuously played across a plurality of fluctuations in a short game state etc.) is assigned to the playback channel 02, 03 and played (here, stereo playback ) Is in the situation.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), among the sounds in these reproduction states (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) It is considered to be subject to forcible termination of channel assignment at the time when a symbol is detected, and during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is An acceptable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected such as “Operate a button and secure a vacant channel” in the display area of gaming board side effect display device 1600 (channel allocation cancellation operation) An operation instruction image prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 301 (a) shows the assignment status of each channel when the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of the timing tw12 to the timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection unit is not performed. It shows.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 comes, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. In addition, at timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure a vacant channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduce it. In this example, the vacant channel is previously secured in another channel (reproduction channel 10, 11) even if the reproduction channel 02, 03 is not changed to the vacant channel by the detection by the predetermined detection means. It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. There will be concerns.

  FIG. 301 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period of timing tw12 to tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection unit. It shows.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301 (b), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channel 02, 03 is detected at the timing tw12a when the detection is performed. "BGM2 playback" sound will be removed from. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure in advance a vacant channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) which can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) until timing tw 13 arrives. The concern that it will not be possible to reproduce and output a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) will be eliminated. In addition, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended, and in this case, the music or the speech as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Because it will be considered that the reproduction ends at a halfway point without being reproduced, until a good point), the player remembers the feeling that the vacant channel was secured in advance by the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) This makes it possible to easily make it possible to safely wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) is reproduced.

  In addition, at timing tw12 a detected by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is forcibly ended and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (The button is operated to secure the vacant channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the effect of the specific action (the channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance as empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channel 10, A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is assigned to 11) and reproduced. However, when there is no space in another channel at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determined sound) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, there is a vacancy in another channel Also, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) may be allocated to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, a effect sound (here, here) different from the predetermined effect sound for the specific channel , BGM 2), it will cancel the assignment state at that point in response to specific action detection (channel assignment cancellation operation) such as button operation, so that one channel (specific channel) Only by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM 2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit finalized sound) respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction resource which is a limited resource .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), although the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit determined sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the timing after the timing tw13 The predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the big hit finalized sound, a good effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears, a good effect sound indicating that the big hit is missed, etc. may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that a big hit has been missed, even if the timing tw13 comes, no effect sound may be output, and the idle channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, as a sound whose channel assignment is ended when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, it is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the reproduction state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content and there is no hindrance. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), although a predetermined period within the symbol variation has arrived, a reception period in which the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated. It is not limited to. For example, at least while the specific sound as a target to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. May be eliminated. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after the specific sound is put into a reproduction state, such as a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has passed, maintain the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played back.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forced to be terminated, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. 0) may be used in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned empty channel at that time. The channel assignment of the specific sound may be canceled by assigning it in the form of overwriting the same channel with a very short assignment cancellation reception tone (such as one second). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, a new sound is generated at least in a period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception. Specific game sound (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound, etc.) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation so that the channel is not used uselessly. It is desirable not to output the pre-read effect sound etc.).

In addition, the specific sound targeted for forced termination (the sound of "BGM2 playback") is to be reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is reproduced for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easy to remember the fact that the vacant channel was secured in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the reproduction is ended at a halfway point without being reproduced to the end. .
[Anomaly notification in the middle of the stage corresponding to the stage pattern]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, the specific alarm sound according to this is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that the event occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin and promotes reduction of the risk of empty channels disappearing. Will be expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it is the timing when the predetermined movable decorative body should be at the specific position (origin position), it is not at the specific position (origin position) Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "the movable body abnormality has occurred", etc.), and the game Abnormality display (for example, “occurrence of abnormality in back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 or the like”) in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 can be executed. In addition, although it is desirable to perform as abnormality indication in a display area so that it can be specified in which of a plurality of movable decorative bodies an abnormality has occurred, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped, It may be a mode of specifying which of the groups the movable decorative body to which the abnormality has occurred. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 (for example, back front decoration unit 3100 or If the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-left movable effect unit 3300, back-to-right movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, back-to-back movable effect unit 3700 etc.) are provided respectively The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified on which side of the decorative body and the movable decorative body on the panel side the abnormality has occurred. The plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having different driving sources and provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by the failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly probable that the player side is likely not to make any mistakes, but it should be dealt with when notified. Because there is no, during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed and the notification process is sometimes executed and displayed, it is in the effect being executed An adverse effect is exerted on the player, which is a start for the player. In addition, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not enough in the number of empty channels, so that the player may be anxious not to be able to output a new sound. , There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment.

  On the other hand, however, failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs frequently when the movable decorative body operates, and in some cases it is difficult to assume a situation where it suddenly fails when it is not operating at all. In this case, when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, the movable movable body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a dog or an approach when a movable body abnormality occurs If there is a possibility of being in a detected situation, and it is possible not to output an alarm sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality even under such a situation, it may encourage cheating, From the point of view of players who are interested in the

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, display at abnormal time in display area of game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, processing (fluctuating pattern (rendering pattern) to operate the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 during a period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed And when the movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern in the big hit game or the like is performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the abnormal time in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed. The external output (information on the hall side) of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not displayed explicitly and does not adversely affect the presentation, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to cause a failure in the movable decorative body (due to the peripheral control board 1510 even within a period during which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed. Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control (the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (rendering pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc.) When it occurs, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound can be performed, but at least in the situation where failure is likely to occur in the movable decoration (during the rendering operation of the movable object) Since notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound is not performed when it occurs, it is suppressed for the person who performs the cheating to perform the cheating. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, assignment control of effect sound to a channel, abnormality occurrence The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It becomes to be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing to operate the corresponding movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality is to be performed or not Regardless, it is possible to execute restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the corresponding movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the period of execution of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decorative body.

  In addition, although the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation to move to a specific position (origin position)) to the corresponding movable decoration is executed, the movable decoration is specified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 302 shows the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed And it is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 302 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. In addition, when operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is not detected within operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control which operates a specific movable decorative body after timing ti14 is performed You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 302, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for effecting the specific movable decorative body is performed (FIG. 302 (b). Refer to FIG. 302 (a), and effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  Here, as the movable body drive processing, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body drive processing is ended without performing any driving since the restoration processing has failed and no restoration can be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when driving of the specific movable decorative body is finished, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, The movable body driving process is terminated when it is determined based on the information that the state has been returned to the specific position (original position). However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body drive processing, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed. After that, the movable body drive processing is ended. At this time, if the restoration processing fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With this movable body drive processing, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. However, in this example, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation at the timing ti15 within the period in which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can not operate. In FIG. 302 (b), the dotted range indicates a period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the drive (drive for rendering operation) to the specific movable decorative body is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body In addition to the determination of abnormality, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, with the specific movable decorative body operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, the situation where abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of having occurred due to the failure of the decorative body, in this example of the explanation, it is not performed to assign and reproduce the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality to the channel. That is, in this case, for the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has occurred abnormally As it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the rendering in progress.

  Note that at timing ti18, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the usual movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and recovery is failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued thereafter, the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation next time, even if the timing when the movable effect using the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect pattern comes, it is The rendering operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body remain to emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decorative body itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted thereon is operated (lighted) in the operation mode, and the movable effect is not performed. It will be expected to suppress the game interest.

  As described above, when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit determination at least during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, the movable body By not allocating the abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as the example shown in FIG. 302, this movable body abnormality is When it occurs at a timing different from when moving a specific movable decorative body by effect control (rendering pattern), an abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  In FIG. 303, the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment in the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment condition of each channel at the time of being detected, and the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 303 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side rendering The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern being developed by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) at which the operation opportunity is given to the player is maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 when such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operation based on the rendering pattern) It is assumed that the movable movable body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11 b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 303 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is performed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is ended, and at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to a specific position (origin position) (movable body If it is determined that the abnormality has been eliminated, the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and thereafter, it will be possible to execute the usual movable effect without any abnormality notification being performed. Become so. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti12 to timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, so the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is Not being performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is received within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is made by the above-mentioned restoration processing. If canceled, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this example, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration processing according to this is performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a situation where the restoration process is being performed, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, the specific Although the rendering operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305.

  However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 303, it is assumed that recovery is unsuccessful because it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that movable body abnormality has been eliminated) at timing ti13a. doing. Therefore, after timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined recovery operation is not performed and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation where an abnormality (a movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected due to the specific movable decorative body being removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a cheating action such as a dog-sticking action or a wire entry. Furthermore, timing ti13a means that even a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is in a situation where the movable body abnormality has not been resolved by some external force, and there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

  So, at this timing ti13a, although it is in the midst of execution of design fluctuation (specific rendering pattern), it is decided to execute notification processing according to movable body abnormality. That is, in this case, in addition to the various presentation sounds corresponding to the specific presentation pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the development of the presentation contents, in the channel, the abnormal alarm sound is reproduced over a predetermined time, the reproduction channel 00, 01 Will be assigned to Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back" and the like will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to movable body abnormality, while making some light emitting parts emit light in the abnormal time aspect, the other light emitting parts are in the normal mode according to the development of the effect contents It will be made to emit light.

  According to the example of FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one pattern change, a period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed at least If the movable body abnormality occurs during that, there is a low possibility that cheating has taken place, and there is also the possibility of a failure at the time of rendering operation, so the rendering will be output with priority over the anomaly notification. . On the other hand, when the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the rendering It is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output a notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 303, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a after the restoration process is performed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. Decided to However, at timing ti11b, despite the fact that the specific movable decorative body can not operate based on the rendering pattern, the movable body abnormality is detected, and even with this it is possible that fraudulent acts such as dodging or entering a wire Since it can be said that the possibility of being locked is high, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality may be performed at this timing ti11 b.

  The point is that in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, within the period when the symbol variation is performed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, and the specific movable decorative body is Is made to be executed as a necessary condition, and that "the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the effect pattern" It is important not to be executed under the condition that the player is sufficiently executed, thereby making it possible for a person who has made a fraudulent activity to be executed for a legitimate player while suppressing the conduct of the fraudulent activity. It will be expected to avoid the adverse effect on the rendition of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification process according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, but the specific movable decorative body After adopting at least the occurrence of an abnormality in the body, for example, “a failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “an occurrence of an abnormality that occurred under a specific situation” Etc. can be adopted as a further condition.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, in the process which operates a specific movable decorative body according to an effect pattern, it was determined whether abnormality generate | occur | produced in this specific movable decorative body. However, when an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality is not performed with this as a trigger, and thus the specific movable In the process of operating the decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at predetermined timings or at predetermined time intervals.

  Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 302, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 303, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body at timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

  Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, although the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, the specific movable decorative body is specified at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. May be operated.

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the condition that "a specific movable decorative body is abnormal based on the effect pattern and the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body", the condition is not determined. Also, it is desirable that abnormality notification is not performed as long as power supply is continued without clearing at least the RAM even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and is left. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoring operation.
[Recovery processing of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if the movable body abnormality occurs in any of the plurality of movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative bodies having different relationships with the drive sources being different from each other), the common abnormal sound data (one abnormality By assigning sound data) to channels for reproduction, the number of used channels is prevented from being unnecessarily increased even under conditions in which movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously with respect to a plurality of movable decorative bodies. The Note that the movable body abnormality means that the movable body can not operate properly and can not operate properly, and it is the same as that exemplified in “Abnormal notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted in game machines has increased, and it is only necessary to associate common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies. It is becoming difficult to appropriately report the status of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormal notification sounds are used as channels depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies belong to. By allocating and making it possible to reproduce, even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing, it is possible to appropriately notify the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  Also in this example, when the movable body abnormality occurs, it is as described in the above-described example of “the abnormality notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern being performed” (see FIG. 302 and FIG. 303). Processing is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even if it is generated during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, and the like are executable. Also, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being performed, processing (fluctuating pattern for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 In the case where a movable body abnormality is detected while (movable effect drive processing for operating the movable decorative body) based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc., notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( It is configured not to output an alarm sound, display an abnormal time in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, turn on an abnormal time by various lamps, and the like.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and made to be in the reproduction state is only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, it is assumed that the processing for performing the restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is performed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that, even in the case where a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channel has a margin and a reduction in the risk of empty channels disappearing. As well as being able to become a part, it becomes possible to make a rapid abnormal recovery for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time through the efficiency improvement of the processing when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, about the contents of restoration processing, and each processing at the time of success or failure, the example of the above-mentioned "abnormal notification in the stage according to the presentation pattern" is performed (see FIG. 302 and FIG. 303) It is the same as in the case of).

  Here, as a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, it is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, for example, provided on the door frame 3 side A plurality of frame-side movable decorations not shown and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back inside movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back In the case of grouping into two groups of the right movable effect unit 3400, the upper back movable effect unit 3500, the lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body which can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal Can be transmitted to the hole side depending on the type of the alarm sound, whether abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative body which is considered to be difficult to contact if the door frame 3 is not opened. So is the ability. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the movable side decoration on the panel side, it is more likely that the injustice is being performed by the portion where the contact is difficult than in the case where an abnormality occurs on the frame side movable decoration. From the above, by making the notification sound output based on such grouping, although it is a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the player side is not noticed by the type (not feeling unpleasant It is possible to secretly transmit to the hole side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  And also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movable body abnormality occurs, as the notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the abnormal time in the display area of the device 1600. In this respect, in this explanation example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups even as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, and any of those groups It is desirable to perform different notification display depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to the above. However, while the above “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality than the above “notification by sound”, it is excellent in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in more detail. It has the following characteristics. Therefore, in the above "notification by display", the above grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited in a mode different from the case of performing the above "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof. In this case, it is desirable that different displays be provided depending on in which of the individually divided groups the movable ornaments belonging to the group are abnormal.

  That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped in any of the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B Depending on whether there is an "Any movable body abnormality occurs, the notification sound displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 160, even though the abnormality notification sound is assumed to be the same. Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and "the second notification mode in which the error notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also the same as each other even if any movable body abnormality occurs" And “a third notification mode in which the notification content in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also different from each other occurs even if any movable body abnormality occurs” It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 304 shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel and the situation on the movable ornament side when a movable object abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (period of timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control is performed to operate a specific movable decorative body after timing tj15. You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the demonstration operation is performed, and the channel An effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to 08, 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force (operation not based on the rendering pattern), and the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation more than timing tj13. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 304 (b) and FIG. 305 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. In the relation to the restoration processing, even if the player's operation is accepted at time tj 14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 304, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 The movable body abnormality is generated for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side Each situation is assumed to occur.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 304, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing modes are different between D, E and F. For example, with respect to the movable ornaments A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable ornaments are disposed in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Thus, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other's operation, including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that rapid abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, while the door frame 3 side is In the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided in the above, their restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (the effective period for effect reception) for giving the operation opportunity to the player is ended. It is assumed that neither restoration processing of A, B, C, nor restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is ended. Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the above operation is effective Even when the effect is received at any timing within the period (the effective period of the effect reception), processing is performed so as not to perform the effect operation triggered by the effect when the effect is received.

  That is, in this case, if the effect reception is generated within the period when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body can not be made to produce operation with this as a trigger. Even if the effect reception is generated after the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is finished, the movement between the other movable ornaments on the other side is still in the process of executing the restoration processing. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, in the case where the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15) Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body that has generated an abnormality perform the movable effect It will only be emitted in the light emission mode when being used. The point is that, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, all of their restoration processing is completed (all restoration processing is successfully completed) The execution of the rendering operation is permitted only when the timing at which the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed has come.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) the effect is accepted, it is processed to change whether or not the effect operation triggered by the effect is performed when the effect is accepted. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation after the restoration process ends (success in the restoration process). However, there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D and F may interfere with them even if they are in the process of restoration. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even in the case of being displayed, a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, and a display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed for the channel. In the light emission mode when the various effects are performed, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which is reproduced by being assigned the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the is performed are performed and the abnormality is generated It will be emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, an operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the end of the restoration process within the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decoration is The effect operation of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has generated an abnormality will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (success in the restoration process) of the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are subjected to the restoration process Because there is no concern that interferes with them even if it is under execution, the usual production control (moveable body, display production, performance sound, light emission) including the rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is ended (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is selected, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed on the channel. The effect sound of the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration which has generated an abnormality are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed It will stay in

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 304 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side in notification of a notification sound according to movable body abnormality , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that movable body abnormalities simultaneously occur in the panel-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation can not normally occur while proper gaming is progressing, and can not occur as a result of cheating, so the hall side is for operation check and repair of the feature It is likely to be in a special situation, such as hand-tapping all movable decorations manually. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification processing itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is detected that movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decoration side are started simultaneously with those restoration processing, while the notification sound output is the frame side movable Assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decoration D, E, F side to the channel, and assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative A, B, C to the channel It is made to keep in mind to output.

  That is, the time during which the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative object to be notified is eliminated or the predetermined predetermined after the abnormal alarm sound is output It is set as a time until time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, which has a longer time to complete the restoration process By assigning only the common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C side” It becomes possible to end restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative objects D, E, F while being reproduced, “common notification on the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative objects A, B, C side After the output of the sound is finished, it is avoided that the request for the output of the “common error notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side” is obtained. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, while restoration processing is being performed on the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, During the period up to the timing tj 18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are ended, “common abnormal alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative objects A, B and C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced As a result, the "common abnormal alarm sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned "information notification by sound" is performed utilizing the difference in property from the notification sound described above. In the aspect different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups belongs to the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, assuming that the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed. The “informing by display” is maintained as it is, and the “informing by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is finished. Therefore, even if the restoration process of a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution situation concerning the restoration process of the movable decoration that is grouped with the specific movable decoration, it may be more effective than the specific movable decoration. It may happen that "notification by display" is ended first according to the movable decorative body for which the restoration processing is ended later.

  According to the example of FIG. 304, a plurality of alarm sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the alarm sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative objects corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but for the restoration process, the reproduction state Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. In addition, as the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are in the abnormal state, the movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to the predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body which does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state as compared with the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to return all the movable ornaments from an abnormal state to a normal state while one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, and a second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a panel-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is simultaneously performed. It is not limited to. The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the like) which can operate without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies For a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) that are classified into the frame side and that restoration processing can be performed independently for each of the groups, and at least one of them (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is possible to restore all at the same time by selecting them as movable ornaments that can operate without being influenced by the operation situation of each other, refer to FIG. 304 and FIG. 305. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs the operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. It may be made to

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 304, movable body abnormalities occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although the situation has been described as being assumed, the symbol variation may not necessarily be performed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game, or when the special symbol game is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen, etc.) Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, respectively, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on the predetermined order in which all the board-side movable decorative objects A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side are determined. And However, in the case where a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when operating simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative body is based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be simultaneously performed only on some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the movable-body abnormality in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination as to occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 305, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Even when the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is ended at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B, C ends. As long as the relationship is satisfied, after the output of "the panel side common alarm sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative members A, B, C side" is finished, "frame side movable decorative members D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request for the corresponding frame side common alarm sound is required.

  Also, conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after it is determined that movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, movable body abnormality occurs in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C The processing structure may be determined to determine that the processing has been completed. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F And wait until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C, and then corresponds to the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C side It is desirable to perform restoration processing of the panel-side movable decorative objects A, B, C and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F while the notification processing is performed. In addition, as a result of waiting for determination processing whether movable body abnormality has occurred on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, movable body abnormality does not occur on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed.

[17. False detection of signal from detection sensor]
Then, the structure for preventing the misdetection of the signal from the detection sensor by contact resistance is demonstrated. The gaming machine described here is, for example, a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine or the like, and relates to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game.

  BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION A gaming machine (for example, a so-called pachinko machine) is widely known to play a game by driving a game ball into a game area and rolling down a game ball hit in the game area. In the game board of such a gaming machine, a prize detection sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball to a prize opening (a starting opening, a big winning opening, a normal winning opening, etc.) and an illegal gaming action for the gaming board are detected. Many detection sensors, such as a sensor for (for example, a vibration detection sensor and a magnetic detection sensor), are arranged (for example, JP, 2009-165673, A).

  In the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor sets a plurality of locations in the gaming area (for example, each is arranged near the starting opening, winning opening, winning opening, out opening, etc.). Therefore, for electrical connection between a detection sensor and a detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor of a panel relay substrate) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor, connection using a connector member is generally performed. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust gets into the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when vibration is given to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down, such as when right-handed and playing a game, contact resistance is thereby generated. There is a risk.

  If current flows in the contact resistance generated due to such a cause, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises and there is a possibility that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor by contact resistance.

  The gaming machine according to [means 1] includes a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position, and a relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board, In order to solve the problem, the main control board switches on / off of the output of the detection signal corresponding to a first voltage output from the voltage output unit or a second voltage lower than the first voltage. The relay circuit includes a detection circuit unit, and the relay substrate outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and the second voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Between the voltage output unit that outputs the voltage and the detection circuit unit of the main control board and the voltage output unit, and the second voltage at the second voltage in the second state by the detection sensor unit A predetermined voltage higher than the first voltage is added. Even if the detection circuit unit is provided with an avoidance unit for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit, the detection sensor unit and the voltage output unit are electrically connected via the connector member, and the detection unit is via the avoidance unit. The voltage output unit and the detection circuit unit are electrically connected.

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 1], the detection sensor portion is at the second voltage in the second state, and current flows in the contact resistance of the connector portion, whereby the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a predetermined lower voltage is added, the avoidance unit avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit. Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit portion is not affected, when the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear of the connector member, the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor by the contact resistance can be prevented. .

  A gaming machine according to [means 2] is the gaming machine according to [means 1], wherein the avoidance portion is configured to include a zener diode whose zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. is there.

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 2], the detection sensor portion is at the second voltage in the second state, and current flows in the contact resistance of the connector portion, whereby the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a lower predetermined voltage is added, the Zener diode remains nonconductive because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. That is, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit is avoided by the zener diode.

  Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit portion is not affected, when the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear of the connector member, the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor by the contact resistance can be prevented. .

  According to the above-described gaming machine, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor caused when contact resistance of the connector member is generated.

[17-1. Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 306 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g. The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is the same as the magnetic sensor 2404 described in FIG.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is formed of, for example, a magnetoresistance effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when not detecting magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when detecting magnetism above It does not (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thus, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thus, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  Main control input circuit 1310 b includes pull-up resistor NR 1, resistor NR 2, and transistor NTR 1, and one end of pull-up resistor NR 1 is connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR 1 in the front stage of panel relay board 4161 via connector CON 2. The +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12 V is applied. In addition, detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit configured of pull-up resistance IR2 connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR0 and to which +12 V is applied, and transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR0. Is the case.

  Further, in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit including the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay substrate 4161.

[17-1-1. Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled up to +12 V (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1 and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the form of a table in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust gets into the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact types and bellows contacts in the connector member depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contacts The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is open, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

  Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when the player is playing a right-handed game, when slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from a specific part of the gaming area where many gaming balls are continuously concentrated and flowing down being applied to the connector member. Also, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay substrate 4161 The operation of will be described. For example, in FIG. 306, when the contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 times to 1000 times that in the case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will lift. In FIG. 306, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, although the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161, when the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

[17-2. First Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 307 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310 b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  Note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in the non-detected state in which the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second State), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) by which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side, An avoidance unit 4166 is provided to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 having +12 V applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[17-2-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 through the Zener diode ZD0, whereby a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal determines that the logic is HI, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control. An error command is transmitted to unit 1530, and processing for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1530 reports an abnormality with the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the sound, or the like.

17-2-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism (in the second state), the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, whereby the built-in The transistor STR turns on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 307, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener It will be applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 remains nonconductive because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1530, and the peripheral control unit 1530 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, a sound, etc. notify that an illegal game action using a character has been performed or that a break occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 Do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

17-3. Second Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 308 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second end whose other end is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and whose other end is grounded. And the resistor IR3 of FIG. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 306, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is disposed at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 which causes a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 having +12 V applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[17-3-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to the series resistance circuit configured of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows in the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

17-3-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 308, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, It will be applied to one end of the 1 resistance. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and the current also flows through the second resistor IR3 to the ground. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current due to a voltage obtained by adding a second predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is substantially grounded. Then, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the rear stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

17-4. Third Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 309 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage. It comprises IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, in place of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 which are connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit. Connected That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 which cause a current to flow to the ground to drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and is connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as being one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 whose +12 V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end.

[17-4-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of pull-up resistance IR0, resistance IR1 of avoidance portion 4166, resistance IR4 and resistance IR5, and pull-up resistance IR0, resistance IR1 of avoidance portion 4166, resistance IR4 and resistance A current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows in the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. Thereby, the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage is turned on.

  When the rear stage transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, as the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

17-4-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 309, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage by causing a current to flow through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit in the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. It does not flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is also not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 311, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  When any one of the magnetic wire connection between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on in the same manner as the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. In addition, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, each provided with a voltage output unit 4163, for example “TD62083AP” Product) can be used.

  As mentioned above, although the sensor signal input part 4162 arrange | positioned at the panel relay board 4161 of this embodiment was demonstrated, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input part 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, A connector member Any sensor may be used to transmit the sensor signal from the detection sensor, and various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to Examples 1 to 3. However, the gist of the present invention, that is, the voltage output unit 4163 is used to change the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166. The disposing portion on the substrate for the avoidance portion 4166 and the detection circuit portion 4164 can be variously selectively changed and disposed as needed. Several variations of the arrangement example are shown below.

17-5. Example 4]
FIG. 312 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board 1310. In this example, a voltage output unit 4163, an avoidance unit 4166, and a signal relay transistor ITR0 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161. The basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 312, the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay substrate 4161, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control substrate 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connectors CON2. Are electrically connected.

[17-6. Example 5]
FIG. 313 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161, the signal relay transistor ITR0 transfers the location to the main control substrate 1310, and is provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. There is. Also in the fifth embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 313, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. It is connected.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 312 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 313, a harness in which the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310 are provided with connector members at both ends (in FIG. It is electrically connected by). For this reason, there is a possibility that contact resistance may occur also in the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid the erroneous detection of the signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example in the fourth embodiment, other than the bullup resistor NR1 having +12 V applied to one end of the circuit on the rear side of the connector member CON2 Another avoidance portion may be provided between the connection point of the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as in the avoidance portion 4166. According to this, the false detection of the signal can be further reduced, and the reliability of the signal detection is enhanced.

  In the present invention, the example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 in which +12 V is applied to one end in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is described. In essence, this selects one that is advantageous for control according to the difference in logic (HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected in the latter stage. For this purpose, a circuit comprising a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, which is disposed upstream of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, the other end of the bullup resistor NR1 to one end of which +12 V is applied is connected to the signal line, and the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, and the emitter terminal is grounded. What the main control input circuit 1310b itself having a collector terminal connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, ie, the main Since the detection can be performed by the control input circuit 1310 b), the present invention sufficiently holds.

17-7. Example 6]
FIG. 314 shows an example in which the avoidance part 4166 and the detection circuit part 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. The location for the signal relaying transistor ITR0 is also transferred to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the sixth embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 314, a signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay substrate 4161 is connected, and an avoidance portion 4166 of the main control substrate 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

  When the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are configured as in the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the panel relay board 4161 is used as a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. Regardless of the type of the system), there is an advantage that it is possible to make it common.

  From the standpoint of assemblability, it is desirable to use the relay board, but convenience is provided for the first starting opening sensor 4002 and the second starting opening sensor 4004 provided in the starting opening that brings a lottery to the player. Even if it is lacking, it may be preferable to connect directly to the main control board 1310 with a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment functions properly.

[17-8. Example 7]
FIG. 315 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are disposed on the main control board 1310. Also in this example, the transistor ITR0 for signal relay is also moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the seventh embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 315, the panel relay substrate 4161 is only formed with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) simply relaying the signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 4161. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control substrate 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is incorporated via the connector CON1 and the panel relay substrate 4161 at the front stage of the connection portion. And the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

  In FIG. 315, although the relay substrate provided with only the connectors (CON3 and CON4) is used, the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control substrate 1310 without using the relay substrate. You can also.

  Also in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the presence of the avoidance unit 4166 does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (because there is no change in voltage), the connector member When the contact resistance is generated due to the fine sliding wear, etc., false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance can be prevented.

  In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 4161 through the connector CON3 (represented by a square in the figure) provided on the panel relay substrate 4161, and further, the panel relay substrate 4161. It is electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the contact resistance may occur at three points of the connector CON3, the connector CON4 and the connector CON1.

  Taking this into consideration, the voltage due to the current flowing in the contact resistance generated by the loosening of the connection part (CON3 and CON4 shown by squares in the figure) of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the contact resistance RR of the part of the connector CON1. (Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state (the addition of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connections described above), the avoidance unit 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, when the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear of each connector member, the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is prevented. Can.

  In the configurations shown in the fourth to seventh embodiments, the zener diode ZD0 is described as the avoidance unit 4166. However, the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the zener diode ZD0, and has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 308 (Embodiment 2) and the avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 309 (Embodiment 3) can be used.

  In the panel relay substrate 4161 shown in the seventh embodiment, only signal lines (for example, printed wiring) for simply relaying the signals from the detection sensor unit are formed. There is an advantage that printed wiring is formed so as to be independently integrated in the panel relay substrate 4161 and integrated into one connector member, and connector connection with the main control substrate 1310 is made.

[17-9. Electrical connection of detection sensor unit, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, electrical connection of the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 316 is a block diagram mainly showing the basic configuration of the electrical connection between the detection sensor unit, the panel relay board and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 collectively refers to various detection sensors disposed at predetermined positions of the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second The start opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like correspond thereto.

  The main control board 1310 is for controlling the progress of the game, and is a board on which a main control MPU 1310a which is a control subject is mounted. The panel relay board 4161 is a board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control board 1310.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. In addition, panel relay board 4161 and main control board 1310 are harnesses in which connector member 4502 provided on panel relay board 4161 and connector member 4503 provided on main control board 1310 have connectors for connection at both ends. Are connected electrically by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay substrate 4161 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control substrate, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

[17-10. Arrangement position of panel relay board 4161 and main control board 1310 in gaming machine]
FIG. 317 is a front view schematically showing each example of the arrangement position of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310 in the gaming machine 1. In FIG. 317 (A) to FIG. 317 (D), the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are the back of the game board 5 which is a position not recognized by the player, and basically the game board side effect display It is disposed below the device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) 1600. Note that reference numeral 300 is a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 etc. and operated by the player, and reference numeral 410 is provided at the lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. And an operation button pressed and operated by the player for presentation.

  FIG. 317 (A) shows that the main control board 1310 is disposed at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 4161 is the lower rear part of the game board 5 to the right of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern. In FIGS. 317 (A) to 186 (D), specifically, on the rear surface of box-like back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of plate-like transparent game panel 1100 partitioning the rear end of game area 5a. In contrast, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are attached.

  In FIG. 317 (B), a panel relay board 4161 is disposed at the center of the lower rear portion of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is the lower rear of the game board 5 on the right side of the panel relay board 4161 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern. In FIG. 317 (C), the main control board 1310 is disposed at the center of the lower rear of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 4161 is the lower rear of the game board 5 on the left of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern.

  In FIGS. 317A to 317C, the positional relationship between the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 in the front-rear direction is the same as that of the main control board 1310 or in front of the main control board 1310. 4161 is located.

  FIG. 317 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161 are overlapped in the front-rear direction and arranged at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5. In FIG. 317 (D), a panel relay board 4161 is disposed in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D) shown above, the arrangement of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310 is determined based on various conditions.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. In addition, panel relay board 4161 and main control board 1310 are harnesses in which connector member 4502 provided on panel relay board 4161 and connector member 4503 provided on main control board 1310 have connectors for connection at both ends. Are connected electrically by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay substrate 4161 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control substrate, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor by contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on a panel relay substrate or a main control substrate in consideration of the positional relationship between the vibration source and the control substrate.

[17-11. Arrangement Example of Avoidance Unit]
FIG. 318A to FIG. 318C are diagrams showing an arrangement example of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310. In addition, the avoidance unit 4510 shows a circuit configuration including an avoidance portion 4166 for avoiding the addition operation of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance portion 4166, which has been described above with reference to FIGS. 307 to 309, causes looseness in the connection state of the connector member in the circuit portion disposed upstream of the avoidance portion 4166, and contact resistance occurs in this portion. By doing this, even if the voltage is added due to the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit disposed downstream of the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

  As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 is increased due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIG. 317 (A) to FIG. 317 (D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310 in the game board 5 is usually determined based on various conditions. At that time, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source to be influenced, in addition to the collision between the game ball guiding path member and the game ball disposed in the right area of the game area 5a by the right strike described above, for example, effect buttons (operation button 410 B) a ball hitting operation, a ball hitting operation of a ball hitting device of a ball launching device, sound from a high output speaker, and the like.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and the contact resistance is generated due to the looseness of the connector member, and the evasion unit for avoiding the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately disposed on the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

  FIG. 318A shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on a panel relay substrate 4161, and a connector is applied by applying a vibration to a connector member 4501 electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay substrate 4161. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the false addition of the voltage due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. It is.

  FIG. 318 (B) shows an example in which the main control board 1310 is provided with the avoidance unit 4510, and vibration is generated in the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. Even if the connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened by the addition and the contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, it is relayed from the panel relay board 4161 by avoiding the addition operation of the voltage by the contact resistance with the avoidance unit 4510. The false detection of the output signal is avoided.

  FIG. 318C shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on each of the panel relay substrate 4161 and the main control substrate 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay substrate 4161. The vibration is applied to the member 4501, and the vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control substrate 1310. Thus, the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector Even if the member 4503 is loosened and contact resistance occurs due to the loosening, the addition operation of voltage due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510 to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000, And the signal relayed and output from panel relay board 4161 It is to avoid erroneous detection.

[17-12. Specific Example of Vibration Source and Arrangement Example of Avoiding Unit 4510]
FIGS. 319 (A) to 319 (F) are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration source in the gaming machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310. In each of the drawings, a member serving as a vibration source is indicated by hatching. FIGS. 319 (A) to 319 (C) show a game in which a large number of right-handed game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down to the right area of the game area 5a when playing with right-handed game. In the case where a ball sliding path unit 4200 is provided, and a slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 being applied to the connector member, a contact resistance may be generated thereby, as an example. There is.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (A), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the panel is against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Since the relay substrate 4161 is disposed close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 318 (A)] of the panel relay substrate 4161 is easily influenced. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

  In the case of the gaming machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (B), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the main against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Since the control board 1310 is disposed close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 318 (B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily influenced. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the main against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 are also disposed close to each other, the connector members of either board [the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 and the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 318 (C)] also vibrate Susceptible to Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (C)].

  FIG. 319 (D) shows the case where the vibration source is the operation button 410. For example, when the player concentrates on the game, the operation button 410 is pressed to perform a strike operation, or a message of "continuous hit" is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of a specific effect, and the player In the case where the player has beaten the operation button 410 continuously by recognition, or the like, the operation button 410 becomes the vibration source when the vibration source is an operation on the operation button 410 for effect. Is assumed. In such a case, in FIG. 319 (D), since the main control board 1310 is disposed close to the operation button 410 serving as the vibration source, the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503 shown in B) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 317 (B) to FIG. 317 (D), not only in the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (D), FIG. 318 (A) to FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

  FIG. 319 (E) shows the case where the vibration source is the hitting ball 683 (see the specific arrangement position in FIG. 91) of the ball launcher 680. For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the hitting force (elastic force) on the game ball launched by the hitting ball 683 of the ball launching device 680 becomes large, and the impact at this time becomes the vibration source. With respect to such a case, in FIG. 319 (E), since the panel relay board 4161 is disposed close to the striking ball 683 which is the vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. The connector member 4501 shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

  FIG. 318 (A) is not limited to the case of the gaming machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (E), and even in the case of the gaming machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 317 (B) to FIG. 317 (D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 318C can be employed.

  FIG. 319 (F) shows the case where the vibration generation source is the speaker 921 for sound output (the specific arrangement position is shown in FIG. 91). For example, although a large volume sound effect is output from the speaker 921 in order to boost the gaming state at the time of the specific effect, it is assumed that the vibration of the speaker 921 at this time is a vibration generation source. In such a case, in FIG. 319 (F), since the panel relay board 4161 is disposed close to the speaker 921 serving as a vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. 318 (A The connector member 4501 shown in the above is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

  Not limited to the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (F), even in the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (A), 317 (B) and 317 (D) The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318A to 318C can be employed.

  The members that become the vibration generation source described above are not limited to one in the gaming machine 1. For example, a member including a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and a hitting ball 683, and a member including a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and an operation button 410, etc. It is expected to change. That is, a game machine provided with a plurality of members that become vibration generation sources is assumed. Even in such a case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318A to 318C can be employed.

  As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately disposed on the panel relay board 4161 or the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from 4000 and the panel relay board 4161.

  As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when vibration is given to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down, such as when right-handed and playing a game, contact resistance is thereby generated. There is a risk.

  If current flows in the contact resistance generated due to such a cause, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises and there is a possibility that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

  Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor is increased. However, usually, the layout of the panel relay board and the main control board is determined in the game board from various conditions. At that time, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source that affects, in addition to the collision due to the game board and the game ball by the right-handed mentioned above, for example, the one by strike operation of the presentation button, the hit operation of the hit ball of the ball launcher, high The loud sound etc. by the speaker of an output etc. are mentioned.

  Therefore, the embodiments described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor by contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration source.

  The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [means 1] is
A detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board And to solve the above problems,
In the right side area of the game area where the game balls are hit, a game ball guide path unit is arranged in which the game balls that are continuously hit to the right when the game balls are hit flow down,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the gaming ball guide path unit, and a contact resistance is generated on the connector member on one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage adding action,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 1], the avoidance unit is appropriate to either the panel relay board or the main control board, taking into consideration the positional relationship with the gaming ball guiding path unit as the vibration source. Can be placed. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 2] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board At the machine
Has an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation for presentation,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the operation button, and addition of a voltage due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is added to one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the action
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on any one of the panel relay substrate and the main control substrate in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button as the vibration source. be able to. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 3] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board At the machine
It has a ball launcher that launches game balls toward the inside of the game area in response to an operation to the hit ball handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to a hitting ball of the ball launcher, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member on one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the effect of voltage addition due to
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 3], the avoidance unit is set as one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the hitting ball of the ball emitting device as the vibration source. It can be arranged properly. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 4] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board At the machine
Has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the speaker, and an adding action of voltage due to contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on any one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high output speaker as the vibration source. can do. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

  According to the gaming machine of each of the above-described embodiments, the avoidance unit may be properly disposed on any one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the game members as the vibration source. it can. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

  Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, it is generally provided that a plurality of movable effect bodies (movable role objects) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effects are provided in recent game machines. . The volume and operating range of these movable parts tend to increase, and depending on the operating range and things, the operating speed also tends to increase, and the movable method is also complicated. Therefore, it is possible that the movable part itself becomes a vibration source, and the connector member is loosened, which causes contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

  By the way, when the plurality of movable roles are not at the initial position, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect can not be normally started.

  Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, the origin position detection sensor (a photo sensor consisting of a light emitting type and a light receiving type is often used) is directly incorporated into the movable effect body or the drive motor. In this type, these detection signals are fed back to the control entity and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for presentation and the drive board is also realized by the connector members and the harness connecting them.

  The specific illustration has already been carried out in large numbers, so the illustration is omitted, but the arrangement position of the movable effect combination on the game board is, for example, behind the top of the game area 5a (initial position), behind the left side of the game area 5a (Initial position), an effect movable body divided into right and left at the central portion of the game area 5a is united effect at the central portion of the game panel, or an initial position at the lower center of the game area 5a (e.g. The arrangement position changes in various ways to appeal the feature of the gaming machine depending on the difference between the model and the version, such as when the object moves upward.

  By the way, if it becomes impossible to transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it and the origin detection signal correctly, not only there is a possibility that the error can not be detected but there is also a possibility that erroneous transmission may occur. . Here, it is considered to provide the above-mentioned avoidance unit 4166 on the drive substrate in the latter stage of the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or to provide it on the signal input side on the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the control side.

  As described above, even when performing an effect in which at least two movable members are combined rapidly, there is a possibility that vibration due to a collision at that time may be transmitted violently, and in this case, it is necessary to resist appropriate measures. As one specific example, as shown in FIG. 320 (C), in the case of carrying out the intense heat effect that the left and right movable members shown by hatching unite at the central part of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board, the left and right It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the effect movable body. .

[17-13. Electrical connection of origin position detection sensor unit, drive substrate and peripheral control substrate for controlling it]
FIG. 320 (A) is a block diagram mainly showing the basic configuration of electrical connection of the peripheral control board 1510, the drive board 4161, the drive means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effecter. is there.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is for controlling the progression of the rendering, and is a substrate on which the peripheral control MPU 1530a, which is the main body of the rendering control, is mounted. The drive substrate 4161 is also a substrate that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  In FIG. 320, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the main control for rendering, and the drive board 4180 outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the initial position of the movable effect body (origin The information of the position detection sensor is input, and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this. The drive substrate 4161 is for supplying a drive current according to a drive signal to the drive means, and in addition, it is a drive substrate for detecting an origin position for detecting an initial position for supplying a drive current according to a movable effecter. Deliver to 4161. As shown in FIG. 320 (A), transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505 and 4506.

  The positional relationship between the movable member for effecting the vibration source and the positional relationship between the peripheral control board 1510 or the connector member connecting the drive board 4161 and the origin position detection sensor are various, so Taking into account the appropriate effect of the occurrence of loosening, "the avoidance unit 4150 is placed. As shown in FIG. 320 (A) or 320 (B), they can be disposed as appropriate. As a result, the connector member becomes loose due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated due to these, the signal from the origin position detection sensor 4000 or the drive substrate by the contact resistance is erroneous. It is possible to avoid detection.

  In addition, when operating the movable part, the loose connection of the connector in the drive means, origin position detection sensor unit, drive board and peripheral control board, which are connected by the connector, was regarded as a problem, but of course, right-handed, operation button This also applies to the case where the ball launcher and the speaker are considered as vibration sources.

[17-14. Grouping of movable roles for multiple effects]
As described above, in the gaming machine, generally, a plurality of movable effect members (movable role objects) electrically driven by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effect are provided. The volume and operating range of these movable parts tend to increase, and depending on the operating range, depending on the operating range, the operating speed also tends to increase, and the movable method is also complicated. further. There are also cases where movable ranges of different movable roles cross each other.

  At present, when a failure occurs in one of the plurality of movable parts, the operating state of the other movable parts is hardly considered. If the return operation is performed only with a movable combination in which a failure occurs without considering other movable combination, there is a possibility that the other movable combination may interfere with the return. If this happens, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious and reduce the interest of the game.

  Here, in order to use the movable part for the effect, it is necessary to return all the movable parts to the initial position. In addition, when the bonus is unintentionally stopped in a place that is not the initial position due to some reason, the action to restore the movable bonus to the initial position is performed, but when a plurality of bonus is not in the initial position, As in the case where it is not considered that the movable ranges of movable characters cross each other, when performing the return operation, it physically interferes with other movable characters and returns all movable characters to their initial positions. You may not be able to In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from usual may occur due to the physical interference of the movable part, but since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. In the substrate 1510, false detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

  Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to ensure that the plurality of prizes return to the initial position, the physically interfering prizes are collectively managed as one group, and the prizes in the group By performing the return operation in accordance with a predetermined operation sequence, it is possible to reliably perform the return from the place which is not the initial position.

  In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable items is movable within an operation range from an initial position at which the operation is started to an operation position at the time when the operation is ended. Also, in the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of movable roles are divided into a plurality of groups in which the operating ranges do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, a plurality of movable roles in which the operating ranges interfere with each other Contains things.

  In addition, the plurality of movable roles are provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting an initial position preset for each of them. The peripheral control board 1510 operates in advance when there is a problem that the initial position is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable roles in the group including the plurality of movable roles in which the operating ranges interfere with each other. In accordance with the sequence, all movable objects in the group are returned to their initial positions.

  FIG. 321 is a front view conceptually showing grouping of a plurality of movable role products for effect provided in the gaming machine 1 and a plurality of movable role products. As shown in FIG. 321, a character group 01 (code 5000) is disposed in the central part of the gaming machine 1, and a character group 02 (code 5002) is disposed in the right side of the gaming machine 1, A character group 03 (code 5004) is disposed on the left side of the machine 1, a character group 04 (code 5006) is disposed substantially at the center of the upper part of the gaming machine 1, and The character group 05 (code 5008) is disposed. That is, the gaming machine 1 has five feature groups.

  The five role groups 01 to 05 do not physically interfere with one another within the operating range. More specifically, the character group 01 is composed of a mask character, a torso deformation left character, a torso deformation right character, a torso storage-appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, and a lower liquid crystal driving character. There is. The character group 02 consists of the right shoulder character only, the character group 03 consists of the left shoulder character only, the character group 04 consists of the face character only, and the character group 05 consists of the pop-up character only It is done.

  Therefore, the physically interfering items are in the same group. In the above example, the masked character belonging to the character group 01, the torso deformation left character, the torso deformation right character, the torso storage-the appearing character, the upper liquid crystal driving character, and the lower liquid crystal driving character Are supposed to interfere with each other.

  In this example, in the case where there is a problem that even one of the plurality of movable roles belonging to the role group 01 does not detect the initial position, the peripheral control board 1510 follows the predetermined operation sequence within the group. Return all movable parts to their initial positions.

  More specifically, if it is determined that even one of the movable parts in the same group (the character group 01) is a photo abnormality, all the parts in the group stop their operation. Note that the photo abnormality means that the movable part has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The character correction operation in the group is a problem by operating all the movable characters in the group using not only the movable characters in the problem area but also predetermined character correction motor sequence data. To restore the correct initial position of the movable part.

  The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the driving order of the motor to be driven and its operation time (in other words, the drive start timing and the drive end timing), etc. The peripheral control ROM 1530 b of the peripheral control board 1510 Is stored in In the case of the above-mentioned role group 01, there are six movable portions, so the motors as drive sources for driving these six movable portions are respectively motor A (masked portion) and motor B (body deformation) Left part) Motor C (Torso deformation right part) Motor D (Torso storage-appearance part) Motor E (upper liquid crystal drive part) Motor F (lower liquid crystal drive part) Do.

  When the recovery operation to the initial position is performed, the motors to be driven may be sequentially driven one by one. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and in the case where physical interference between movable roles can not occur, A plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start time may be shifted and driven together, or a plurality of drive may be simultaneously driven.

  For example, it is assumed that a photo anomaly is detected for the torso storage and appearance character (motor D). FIG. 322 is a timing chart in the case of performing the recovery operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 322, the recovery operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is driven first, and at time t1, the drive of the motor A is stopped.

  At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, at time t2, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously driven. After this, at time t3, the motors B and C are simultaneously stopped driving. Thereafter, at time t4, the motors E and F are simultaneously stopped driving. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Then, at time t5, the drive of the motor D is stopped. That is, the recovery operation to the initial position is ended at time t5. The stop of driving of each motor is a condition that the photo detection is normal.

  In addition, since different groups do not physically interfere with each other, return operations may be performed in parallel.

[14. Effect control by scheduler]
In the game machine, various effects are performed during the game by voice output, lamp lighting / blinking, image display, etc., and various effects are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is an effect control device based on the command output from the main control substrate 1310 and executes effects according to the gaming state of the game Do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that performs signal transmission in a single direction.

  In order to cooperatively execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technology for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect display can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designations. In this case, by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

  However, in the gaming machine, a more elaborate presentation is required. In the above-described prior art, it has been difficult to interlock various effect devices such as voice output, lamp lighting, image display, etc. to perform various effects. For example, BGM could not be changed while executing image display according to scenario data. In addition, when outputting a sound effect according to the user's operation in the middle of the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped, and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effects is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp are controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display according to the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and Outline of Each Function]
FIG. 323 is a functional block diagram for explaining the configuration and outline of functions for executing effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080 is provided.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030, and determines block control information (effect block number). A layer will be described. In the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as background or character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Output Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (action) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity of the effect data (scheduler data) can be reduced, and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing effects. With scheduler data, in order to control effects in each effect device, a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes requested according to the effect devices are stored in the order to be executed It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing effects to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal symbol block data” for fluctuating display of identification symbols on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of "sub effect block data" for controlling lamps, features and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured as software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1530a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by The effect control unit 5020 may be configured as another arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of modules etc. for realizing the respective functions described above will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module and the like in the periphery control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530. However, a part or all of the components may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules regarding effects. Further, a presentation control unit 5020 is included to create presentation device control information for driving each presentation device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one set information, and the command status value, the command mode value, and the check status value of the command status and the mode value are sequentially arranged from the first byte, and divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and discards the received command if it is not determined that the received command is correct. If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing the contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, it is possible to include in the main command the presence or absence of a game ball on the starting winning opening, the special pattern lottery result, the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door open and other sensor outputs, operation of the start lever and the stop button, rotation or stop of the reel, success or failure of the role at the time of stop may be mentioned. In addition, the command mentioned here is an illustration and can contain various commands according to the model of a game machine, and the contents of an effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command relates to the effect. If it is determined that the command relates to the effect, it is delivered to the effect control unit 5020.

  Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data table. Then, a block data number (rendering block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and a block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the rendering block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing an effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting / blinking of a lamp, operation of a character, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is block data for performing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for liquid crystal display includes a liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying rendering elements such as background and characters, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal presentation block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) through the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540 a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by a method of expanding character data designated by the liquid crystal display list command in a designated position on a frame buffer.

  When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 executes sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for performing effects of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub rendering scheduler data, each rendering device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub rendering scheduler data.

  The sub rendering block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various rendering devices, and executes the sub rendering scheduler data included in the sub rendering block data. The scheduler executing unit 5060 for controlling various rendering devices includes a sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5333 that controls the rendering device at one frame intervals, and a sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5334 that controls the rendering device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specification of the rendering device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it becomes possible to synchronize sound output and the action of a character with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it is possible to promptly cope with a problem in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, but in this embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting / blinking of a lamp, and operation of a prize explain. Note that the rendering control by the sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5333 and the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

  First, the case of executing effects by sound output will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output to execute the scheduler data. Then, when the function (for example, SPLAY) for sound output is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel by controlling the outputs of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921, 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, the case of performing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs the data to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600 and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the lamp data output will be the next operation of the lamp data creation to increase the lamp control processing time by increasing the lamp system or overlapping the lamp layers. With the cycle, the process relating to the creation of lamp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated ramp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to output the previously generated lamp drive data, and the respective lamps are lit and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting and blinking of the LED is the same as the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise noted.

  Finally, the case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for drive control, the scheduler execution unit activates a drive scheduler (motor scheduler) to execute the scheduler data. Then, when a drive control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The driver module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1530a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the output timing from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after completion of serial transmission of all motor data, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period It is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission, it is realized that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used by the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission completion can be set to 0 similarly. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the driver module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1530a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function may be provided to capture other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes the other scheduler data specified by the call function, and continues the process of the original scheduler data Will run. By doing this, it is possible to utilize general-purpose effects in various situations, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects specific to gaming machines, as will be shown next. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call function, such subtle differences can be eliminated, and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game.

  The scheduler data may include, as another configuration, a conditional branch function that switches the effect contents according to the gaming state. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of execution of the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command, and executes the contents of effects according to the gaming state . By doing this, it is possible to cope with variously diverging gaming states with one scheduler data. Examples of the game state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game and the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by a player. In the case of the roll-to-roll type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state to the start winning opening may be used. Further, the condition may be branched depending on the occurrence of an error in the game.

  The contents of the effect after conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. In addition, after the predetermined processing is performed by the conditional branch, the processing may be returned to the processing before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after processing for temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

  As described above, the gaming machine can include various rendering devices, and as one example, can also include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, a plasma display, and the like can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing apparatus is an apparatus that develops an image into a bit map in accordance with a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like which is displayed on the screen as a character ROM prepared as a bit map can be used.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 325 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case of a sub-effect, which is mainly performed by executing scheduler data including functions, is described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output is described as an example.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device at the time of effect execution. Scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

  The sound function executed at the time of sound output includes "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level at the time of phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the function for sound, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data, and outputs the sound source drive data to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but in order to facilitate understanding, the number of channels will be described as four. In addition, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management work 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated at the lower right of the figure. In the work 5507, a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute are stored. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

  As described above, FIG. 325 shows the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment, taking sound output control as an example. The sub rendering scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, and driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Flow of data in presentation control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Subsequently, a flow of effect control from reception of the main command to acquisition of scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for presentation control]
FIG. 326A is a diagram for describing a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described in FIG. 324, when the main command is received from the main control board 1310, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, the fluctuation pattern layer (layer performing the effect related to the fluctuation pattern), the hold layer (layer performing the effect related to the hold effect), the game instruction layer (game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each layer, communication error layer (layer for notifying communication error), notification layer (layer for performing various notification), and abnormality notification layer (layer for notification of abnormality). And performs acquisition and update management of effect block data numbers corresponding to each layer. Further, the effect block data number acquired is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a change pattern layer, the change pattern by liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by change pattern, the change pattern by liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the change pattern by sub effect block data Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common effects in a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop). In addition, block data including control information such as presentation contents for each presentation apparatus and presentation time is defined for each block. By controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers, effects by the respective effect devices can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layer on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is the rearmost, the anomaly notification layer is the frontmost, and this is displayed on the front as important information It is a configuration for

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, a scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block corresponding to each layer) The corresponding block data (liquid crystal rendering block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub rendering block data 5053) are acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data contains, as described above, scheduler data for executing effects.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the holding layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying a hold on the liquid crystal display screen or sub effect block data for outputting sound effects at the time of starting winning. 5053 is obtained. In addition, at the start of change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted to specify a change pattern layer. Furthermore, when reporting the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command is transmitted to specify an abnormality detection layer. Also, by performing effects for each layer, it is possible to simultaneously overlap and perform a plurality of effects.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal rendering block data 5051 from the liquid crystal rendering block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal rendering block data number, and then the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs the liquid crystal. Activate the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. Then, the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071 is executed on the liquid crystal rendering 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the instructed function based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540 a, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540 a, and the gaming board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal rendering 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 is acquired from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, liquid crystal symbol block controller 5311 executes liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution portion 5332. The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated by The liquid crystal symbol 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is executed on the liquid crystal symbol 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the instructed function based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540 a, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540 a, and the gaming board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 or the like. Then, when the execution period is one frame, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution period is 1 millisecond, the sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 generates the sub effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub rendering 1 f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub rendering schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub presentation schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data to be commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to promptly cope with the change of the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be simultaneously executed by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same kind of problem at a plurality of places, and realize the reduction of data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 326B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal rendering effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. In step-up notice, four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 are executable, and by performing an effect in which the effect contents are developed step by step, the player is expected to see the result of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Suggest a degree.

  In the step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect is ended. In step-up notice 2, step-up 2 effect occurs immediately before the end of step-up 1 effect, and after step-up 2 effect ends, the advance effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the end of the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, the advance effect is finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In order to output different sounds at each step of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress state (step) of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp presentation, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up presentation, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, since the next step-up notice is started immediately before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage when the liquid-crystal effect of the step-up notice progresses to the next stage, a plurality of step-up effects are performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period of As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers It has become. Therefore, when performing the same effect at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect occurs which is started shortly before the end The advance ramp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH 02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed simultaneously (overlapped) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the effects of the same pattern can be performed in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to carry out.

  The sub rendering 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls up modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the rendering device to be controlled, and defines in sub rendering schedule data 5073 Indicate the processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function whose execution is instructed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

18-4-2. Execution Summary of Scheduler Data]
FIG. 327 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the time of execution of scheduler data according to this embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main substrate) command by the command analysis module 5200, and the various effect devices are configured by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 327 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect numbers is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table is provided with an effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the effect management pointer is prepared for the number corresponding to the effect number, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 327, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. indicate storage addresses of effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and It is sufficient to carry out the processing. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required to process the scheduler data can be reduced.

  Each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter as shown in FIG. The function is, as described above, an instruction for controlling the rendering device, and for example, is for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. In addition, you may provide the function which does not need to specify a parameter.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives) and users. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. Specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 330 to 332.

  In the example shown in FIG. 327, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the group of sequence control, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. The scheduler executor 5060 can temporarily return to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-described saved pointer value.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function next to the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, an audio operation number is set at A32, and a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3 n. When the rendering command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where the "call" is specified, and shifts to processing of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to capture the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the capacity of scheduler data and to reduce its creation load. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, according to the present invention, general-purpose effects can be utilized in various situations by calling, so that such subtle differences can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict lottery results and the like. It is possible to suppress the loss of the interest of the game.

  Thus, although it is possible to use the "call" function, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the program of the interpreter. As described above, the main function used in scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "character item operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "lamp operation number set". This is because it merely indicates the very limited functions that the scheduler execution unit 5060 can realize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 327, NOP (wait) is executed next at the address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the designated number of frames and continues processing of scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] has elapsed. As described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0. Perform processing to shift to the next address function.

  In this embodiment, a work of the same format as that of the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 326A is used to designate a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the specification of scheduler data. Further, a layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 326A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel among these layers.

  The scheduler data is similarly defined by the functions and parameters after the address A11 of the conditional branch. In the example shown in FIG. 327, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the rendering (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the above-mentioned block BL1, the bonus command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be fetched by the "call" function.

  In scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number may be generated to switch the effect contents, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 327, when the condition “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is attached to the address A2, the effect of the addresses A31 to A3n is executed when this condition is satisfied. In addition, if the condition A1 (random number value ≦ Th2?) Is added after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) and the address A41 (not shown) is called, the address A31 and subsequent ones are added according to the value of the random number. Different effects are performed. As described above, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the effect contents can be switched at random by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching of the contents of the effect in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in the present specification.

  In the effect lottery, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device may all be switched, or only a part may be switched. In the case of switching all, it is sufficient to designate all the display, sound and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, only the part to be switched is specified in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and the other parts are specified uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

  In addition, conditional schedulers and "call" functions may be used to specify different scheduler data to be called according to random numbers for effect drawing. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very colorful, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the display, sound, lamp, and the result of the effect drawing of the drive device, in order to realize an effect without a sense of discomfort, it is preferable that these effects end simultaneously. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the effects end in the same time, and the effects of these effects may not be the same.

  The effect lottery with scheduler data has various advantages as well as an advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device. For example, when the effect lottery is instructed, the drive device is executing the figure-like distribution operation of 8 and the other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery on the drive device. May be Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited according to the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In addition, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of a part of scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the contents of the effect by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510 to the last, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this manner, it is possible to realize effects that are more diverse than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance interest.

[18-4-3. Outline of sound (sound) output control]
Subsequently, the function of the sound module for controlling the output of sound will be described. FIG. 328 is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from the plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for speech. Further, in each scheduler 5502, work 5507 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the voice operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table to specify scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which the sound pointer and the sound layer are associated with the voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. As the voice operation number, any identification information can be used, but as in the case of the effect number described above, the capacity reduction of the voice operation number table and the processing load reduction at the time of referring to the table are more effective Has the advantage of making it possible.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

  In the example shown in FIG. 328, the “call” function is defined at the address SA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to the address SA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  In the address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. Scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to phrase number 00H designated by the parameter, and reproduces this.

  In addition, an example structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each piece of phrase data. Although any identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated at the time of phrase reproduction. The left and right panpots and the upper and lower panpots are the left / right / upper / lower output balances of the speakers provided in the gaming machine. Volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out the sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. A loop is a designation as to whether or not to repeatedly reproduce sound. Stereo is specification of whether or not to output stereo.

  A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is operating or not. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 which the scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 328, as the processing proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2, SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505 and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nests and the number of loop nests indicate the number of nests of calls and loops multiply specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is two. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same goes for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop top address is the top address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop top address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Outline of lamp output control]
Then, the function of the lamp module which controls the output of a lamp is demonstrated. FIG. 329 is an explanatory drawing showing the function of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / blinking control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive and process requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with the lamp layer for the lamp. In each scheduler 5602, work 5603 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which the lamp pointer and the lamp layer are associated with the lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table, as in the case of the effect number described above. It has the advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the ramp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 327), is composed of functions and parameters. A function used by scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 329, the “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

  The gradation pattern setting is defined at the address LA3. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sets gradation pattern data 5606 stored in address LA11 designated by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is provided in the lamp scheduler 5602 in association with each other, and lights the lamp with the designated gradation data 1, and when the time designated by the timer value elapses, Lights up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more gradation data are designated, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1 n, the lighting of the lamps is ended. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the process of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the process of the next address up to the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether or not the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp performs the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until execution of the next gradation data when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 329, when executing the gradation data defined at the address LA11, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, transition from gradation data 1 to gradation data 2 is made. When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is ended, and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 which the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 329, as the processing proceeds, the values of the ramp pointers sequentially transition to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 which the gradation scheduler 5604 is executing. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of repetitions of the loop, and the loop top address is the top address of the loop range. As in the case of sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Outline of Drive Control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive module 5700 for controlling the operation of the drive will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600 and is not shown. The drive unit module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs operation control of the drive unit. The driver module 5700 can also receive requests from multiple schedulers to perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. Furthermore, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop at the limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically restricted) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotational speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed step-wisely at the start and stop of the rotation.

  Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data to control the drive will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. FIG. 330 to FIG. 332 are views showing an example of the function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function Details (Sequence Control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 330 shows an example of the function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

  "STOP" is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a function for waiting which waits for a time according to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of times of execution differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the "NOP" function, and in the case of execution in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in 1 ms cycle, it will also wait for about 30 ms if the execution number is specified as 30. "NOP_F_VALUE" takes the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and terminates the "NOP_F_VALUE" function when the conditions based on scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, If not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), designates the loop top, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, when "0" is set to the number of loops, it becomes an infinite loop. “LOOP” is a function for specifying the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes processing from a designated address (block), and information specifying an address value, a label, etc. is specified as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after the process of the call destination is executed, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of the call destination is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the call source (the process following the "SUBC" function).

  "SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

  "REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler designated by the parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. "REQF" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by the parameter, as "REQ", and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter has elapsed. Prohibit launching. In "REQ", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" can be made to be independently executed during a designated scheduler data process, for example, other scheduler data to operate the bonus in the case of bonus initialization is executed and controlled. It can prevent becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 331 shows an example of functions relating to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp tone data reproduction processing to light the lamp based on the tone data specified by the parameter. In “HPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

  "KPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data designated by a parameter, as in "HPLAY". In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp in progress is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function that executes a lamp tone data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the tone data using parameters. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. "KPLAY2" is a function that performs a lamp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the gradation data by using parameters, as in "HPLAY2". The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  "HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated lamp tone data reproduction processing for reproducing the lamp tone data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY" Continue without interrupting the playback of the. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is performed.

  “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer to reproduce the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter in addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, and the process is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer is designated by the parameter.

  "KPLAY2" has the same processing as "KPLAY" except that in addition to the function of "KPLAY" described above, a layer to reproduce lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function Details (Sound (Sound))]
The functions belonging to the group of sounds are functions for controlling the sound output. FIGS. 331 and 332 give examples of functions relating to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset, and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter, similarly to "SPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the sound continues to be reproduced without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

  "PAN_PH" is the phrase in playback specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the "PAN_PH" function execution, using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter as well, the panpot end It is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time designated to the coordinate position. "PAN_PH2" allows you to specify the panpot start coordinate position with parameters in addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, as with the "PAN_PH" function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time specified from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter up to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase or decrease the volume value at the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" allows you to specify the fade start volume value with the parameter in addition to the function of "VOL_FADE_PH" function, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution It is a function to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function that performs increase / decrease of the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function to mute the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase is already reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "SCPLAY" and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without being interrupted at the time of reproduction by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played back, no particular processing is executed.

  "PAN_CH" performs a panpot targeting a phrase, while "PAN_PH" performs a panpot targeting a ch (channel), where ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Processing is the same as "PAN_PH" except for "PAN_CH2" also performs the panpot targeting the phrase while "PAN_CH2" performs the panpot targeting the ch, except that ch is designated by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch "PAN_PH2 Processing does not change.

  "VOL_FADE_CH" fades to a phrase while "VOL_FADE_PH" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, ch is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the phrase is changed to a channel and designated by a parameter. Processing does not change. "VOL_FADE_CH2" also fades to a phrase, while "VOL_FADE_CH2" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, with "VOL_FADE_PH2" except that the phrase specified in the parameter changes to ch. Processing does not change.

  "VOL_CH" increases / decreases the volume value for "ch" while "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for "phr", while "ch" is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to "ch" The process is the same as "VOL_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above performs mute (mute) targeting a phrase, mute (mute) targets ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above performs cancellation of mute (mute) targeting a phrase, cancellation of mute (mute) targeting ch is performed, ch is a phrase specified by a parameter The processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function Details (Motor)]
The functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the outputs of the motors and solenoids. FIG. 332 gives an example of functions relating to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes motor regeneration processing for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The functions belonging to the group of users are functions for executing control which does not belong to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 332, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes motor output buffer scheduler work value set processing for setting the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND 0" are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a or the like. For example, a command for starting drawing on the liquid crystal display device is issued. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND 0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the scheduler work area being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Subsequently, a scheduler for calling each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary to execute a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions, schedulers for sound can execute functions related to lamps, and schedulers for features There is no difference between the processing cycles (frame or 1 ms) other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) which can execute the function for sound and a plurality of schedulers provided for each application, and it is also possible to mix and execute all functions. Further, the number of executions of the schedulers is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an example of a scheduler definition according to the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified by state transition or a device to be controlled. The following outlines typical types of schedulers.

  First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special view state scheduler (special view state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling transition of the gaming state of the entire game. In effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, transition of the gaming state is controlled based on a command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special view state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  Also, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, etc. For example, when the player operates the effect button, wins an execution lottery for effect, or transits a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, it transits to another state Do. The processing cycle of the sub state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  The scheduler for the sound is a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, the scheduler for executing the symbol sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and it is output at the time of notice effect execution. There are a scheduler (SND_SCH 02, 03) that controls the output of the raku sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH 04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  In the related schedulers for lamps, as in the case of the sound-related scheduler, a background for controlling lighting / flashing of lamps accompanying background display or variable display of symbols, a scheduler for executing symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01 There is a scheduler (LMP_SCH 02, 03) which controls lighting / flashing of the lamp at the time of the preview effect execution, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH 04) which controls lighting / flashing of the lamp at the time of the preview execution by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the ramp is 1 f (frame).

  In addition, a scheduler is also defined which controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other. A sound / lamp notification layer that executes sound output and lamp lighting / blinking to notify such a scheduler as a notification such as ball breakage or ball clogging or alarm detection due to abnormality detection by a magnetic sensor etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that is generally used to perform effects in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are interlocked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  For a motor-targeted scheduler, a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing a system operation, and a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing setting at the time of RAM clearing MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor role initialization scheduler data for initializing arrangement of role, etc., motor role correction scheduler data for performing position correction of the role. Scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by presentation etc.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the prize or the like by the performance etc. is a general purpose used independently of the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the particular prize or the kind of the prize and the like. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the management of the gaming state, the processing cycle of the scheduler for sounds and lamps (this embodiment 1 f = about 33.334 ms) It has become.

  Although the number of schedulers controlling each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased according to the game state or the notice. As a result, each scheduler can be started independently of the number of effects provided to the gaming machine or the number of effects, and the restriction for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (stage 1)]
Although the functions used in the effect control and the outline of the types and functions of the scheduler performing a series of control combining these functions have been described above, specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 334A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled using scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 334A, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, right star character 5002c), and a public character 5003. Is placed.

  A logo title 5001 is disposed at the upper left of the game area. When the logo role object 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the effect is completed. Furthermore, in addition to the movement in the vertical direction, it is also possible for the logo combination 5001 to perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

  The star character 5002 is disposed above the game area, the left star character 5002a is on the left, the middle star character 5002b is on the center, and the right star character 5002c is on the right. Each star character 5002 is operable independently of one another, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the effect.

  The left star character 5002a moves downward to the left and is movable to a position slightly lower than the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star character 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to the center of the game area slightly lower right. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the halfway position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The prison cast 5003 is disposed at the upper center of the game area. The prison object 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and the lower position. The player moves from the initial position to the middle position and stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position all at once in accordance with the operation of the effect button by the player or the lottery result of the prisoner notice effect. An operation mode is set. As in the case of the logo character 5001, it is possible to perform the effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement of the prison character 5003.

  Subsequently, the flow of the notice effect performed in one symbol change will be described. First, step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star feature notice and button (BTN) logo drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 334B. In addition, the flow of the preliminary announcement presentation including the preliminary announcement presentation will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 334B shows an example of execution timing of notice effect performed in a series of variable display from the start of fluctuation of special symbol to the stop in this embodiment, and a diagram for explaining scheduler and scheduler data used at this time is there. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 334B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, group announcement, star announcement and button (BTN) logo combination announcement is executed. For each advance notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, and operation of special effects are executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of scheduler data for executing each preliminary announcement effect will be extracted, and the control by the scheduler data and the function configured will be described. Specifically, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 335) for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 336) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, star product in the star product notice Motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 337 to 339) for controlling the operation of 5002 and motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 340) for controlling the operation of the logo symbol 5001 in the button logo feature falling notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control at step up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed such that the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp changes in stages according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 334B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH 02”.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that performs lighting / blinking control of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the lamp is turned off when the advance notice is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. Scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY) by designating the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the background, symbol ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. Scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step Execute the wait process of Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process next to the caller (the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. is there. Depending on the contents of the advance notice, there are also cases where the range of lottery result values is several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, "SUBC" solves the above problems easily by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, although the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one in the present embodiment, a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by providing a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "CALL", so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after the "SUBC" function is executed, and there is no need to list the number of scheduler data after branching, By describing one scheduler data, it is possible to execute the same process after every branch. Further, in order to cope with the problem of the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be ended without performing the branching process.

  That is, the function "SUBC" can select scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of branch destinations, but with function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to handle additions and changes to the contents of presentation, and can improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control at button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 334B. Since the step-up notice belongs to a different notice group and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

  FIG. 336 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated lamp is lit (flickers) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, a ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. In order to correspond to one frame per loop, 90 cycles correspond to 3 seconds. In loop processing, functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to a function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

  To describe the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, “0: button OFF” when the effect button is not operated, and “1: button ON” when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is rewritten with a program for button processing other than the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button cut-in advance notice button OFF lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” Ru. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the caller. Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set to button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", button cut-in notice button ON button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" in button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" Is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" Is executed as a parameter.

  An address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". Specifically, SUBJ_NON indicating the address of the scheduler data, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the lamp is turned off when the advance notice is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lighting pattern (color, lighting time) of the lamp corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating a button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and wait processing of 150 frames is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

  Note that the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not called CALL but is called JUMP, so execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the caller scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT” do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

  The button cut-in advance notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there is also a thing that the range of lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in the bifurcation like IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage correction etc. . "SUBJ" solves the above problem easily by indexing the work memory contents. Further, although the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one in the present embodiment, a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by providing a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "JUMP", so it is possible to execute different processing for each of the branched scheduler data after the execution of the "SUBJ" function. Also, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to cope with problems in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, branch processing is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended. You may do so.

  That is, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and the selected scheduler data It is possible to make the process transition to and obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

  Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to execute the processing of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for selectively executing the process. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed is different depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being repeatedly executed by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the calling destination process is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

  Therefore, by using the functions "SUBC" and "SUBJ", the structure of the scheduler data can be simplified and the structure can flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it is easy to cope with additions / changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve development efficiency and to easily cope with specification changes of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star feature announcement]
Subsequently, control of the star character preview performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variation display of the special symbol, and when it shifts to the second half of the variation, group notice occurs, and star feature notice is executed independently of group notice. For the star character preview, there are three types of star characters 5002 (in this embodiment, left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, and right star character 5002c) operable by a driver (motor). By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star character 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 334B, the star character preview of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star role trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star title scheduler data scheduler) as shown in FIG. 334B. Be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH 02 to 04) for operating the star character 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09). .

  FIG. 337 to FIG. 339 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star symbol preview according to the present embodiment. Fig. 337 is scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" for controlling the whole flow and left star character 5002a, Fig. 338 is scheduler data for controlling the right star character 5002c "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2", and Fig. 339 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star character 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star work preview work area “YKK_HYA” with reference to the designated star work advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”. . The star character work preview work area "YKK_HYA" stores a lottery result value of the star work trailer notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star work branch notice call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

  The address of star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the feature is made inoperative when the advance notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are scheduler data addresses for executing star feature announcements. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only left star feature 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is left star feature 5002a and right star feature 5002c SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

  In this embodiment, a lottery result value indicating execution of a star character preview for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character work work area "YKK_HYA" "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In the case of operating only the left star character 5002a, the lottery result value of the star character preview is "1", and in the case of operating the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c, the star character lottery "2" is set as the result value.

  The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies a parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star character 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor reproduction process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" on which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” appearing as right star character 5002 c by function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter by the scheduler specified by a parameter as well. Here, the right star character 5002 c appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star character 5002 c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the mid-star character 5002 b appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by the function “REQ” using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In the present embodiment, motor reproduction processing (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star character 5002 c and the middle star character 5002 b is performed in the same frame as the motor reproduction processing for the left star character 5002 a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the schedulers to operate the respective star characters 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing “NOP: 300”. During this weight time, the left star character 5002a operates in a designated manner. After the end of the weight processing, the function "RET" is executed to return to the calling star character trailer motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1", and the function "stop" ends the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

  Next, control of the right star character 5002 c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star character 5002c appearing scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for the right star character 5002c scheduler data designated at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

  When scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 338, a parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of right star character 5002 c is designated to execute motor reproduction processing “MPLAY”. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the right star character 5002c. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  Finally, control of the star star product 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The mid-star character 5002 b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 339, a parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of middle star character 5002 b is specified to execute motor reproduction processing “MPLAY”. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the middle star character 5002b. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star character 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star character 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the mid-star character 5002b are function "REQ". By using this, it is possible to operate each item in parallel. That is, the operations of the respective prizes can be executed in parallel without special control by executing the individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of having scheduler data run in parallel is that, first, a single feature operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to a notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of prizes are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more prizes in parallel as long as there is no problem in the operation of the prizes. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of prizes in parallel without the need for complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notice of drop of logo and features]
Subsequently, control of the logo combination falling notice performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo feature drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star feature notice. The logo combination falling notice is a notice effect that operates so that the logo combination 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine vertically falls in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual Indicates that is high.

  As shown in FIG. 334B, the logo combination drop notification according to the present embodiment is performed by driving the logo combination drop notification motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo combination scheduler data scheduler). To be executed. The general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09) can also operate the logo combination 5001.

  FIG. 340 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo combination falling notice according to the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo feature 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. Ru.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of button logo combination preview work area “YKK_LGO”, the leading address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination Identify. The button logo feature notice work area "YKK_LGO" stores the result of the button logo feature fall notice lottery, and when the button logo feature fall notice lottery is out, "0: not executed", the button If the player has won the logo lottery item falling lottery execution lottery, "1: logo falling notice execution" is set. The result of execution of the button logo combination falling notice execution drawing corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While "0: not executed" is set in the button logo combination preview work area "YKK_LGO", the logo combination drop notice is not executed in the button logo combination drop notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and the motor scheduler is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" of the caller. Therefore, if the button logo combination falling off lottery is missed, loop processing is executed 90 times, and then the loop processing is exited, function "STOP" is executed, and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when it is elected to run button logo role fall notice lottery, button logo feature fall In the notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is selected at the time of the execution of the logo combination falling notice. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo feature drop notice button branch call address table It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination product drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it has been set, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo / feature drop advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is set to "0: button OFF", the button logo notice of falling button button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the logo notice of falling button OFF button motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" of the caller. This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times even if the player has won the lottery for the button logo function falling notice, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. The scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is ended.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor logo when the logo combination falling notice button is ON in the button logo combination falling notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo combination 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo character 5001. Furthermore, the weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo character 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo character 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 90", while the logo character 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the end of the weight processing, the execution of the logo character falling operation is ended, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, and the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed". The process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns to function "LOOP" but the button logo feature preview lottery result is rewritten as "0: not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping button logo features is executed The remaining loop count processing is performed, and execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

  As described above, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo character 5001 is dropped and at the drop timing of the logo character 5001 by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo character 5001. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of rendering devices and execute as needed at appropriate timing, and it is possible to perform a more entertaining rendering .

  In this embodiment, although the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal in the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source using the function "COMMAND", control is performed from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side. By temporarily returning, performing complicated processing that can not be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that can not be originally controlled by the function command can also be performed. Moreover, the merit of issuing a command in scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not necessary by setting the command issue timing as the processing timing as it is. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process an external input (a button, a jog dial, a touch pad) by a user not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but the content of the work area is to be transmitted as a command by designating a work area instead of a fixed value. May be

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 341 is a diagram for explaining scheduler data to be executed at the time of power on of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 outputs a power on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 drives scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH" when the power-on command is received.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. With the progress of the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. as shown in FIG. Be done. At this time, the main gaming state is in a standby state. When the standby state is ended, the game is started, and when the game ball is won in the start winning opening, the main gaming state and the sub internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[18-8-2. Power on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 342 is a view for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in game control on the main control board 1310, a main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. Ru. As described in FIG. 324, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, etc., and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute scheduler data.

  Also, when the function "COMMAND 0" (FIG. 331) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 as in the main command and analyzed by the main command analysis process. Be done.

  When the main command or the command output by the function “COMMAND 0” is received, a command for executing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include a command for activating the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub internal state due to the progress of the control on the peripheral control board 1510 Scheduler data for executing a rendering corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined such that various rendering devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, besides activating the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to activate another scheduler by the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command for controlling the rendering device (sub internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command or the like for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and are processed in order of storage from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, it becomes possible to componentize various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be implemented in parallel while realizing various effect control. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, such as making the debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, command analysis processing can be made common by command output by the function “COMMAND 0”. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic by command analysis and the function parameter determination logic, resulting in the problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data in the case of receiving a command at power-on from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 343 is a diagram for explaining the process of executing scheduler data at the time of power on in the embodiment.

  As described in FIG. 342, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler is executed. The activation process activates the substate scheduler, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, execute the function "COMMAND 0" and issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further output a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub internal state as necessary. .

  Specifically describing the scheduler to be executed, first, the state power on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH". In the state power on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the function “COMMANDO” issues a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", a standby state is established for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" of the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the waiting state, the function "COMMANDOO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and state anti-goto scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state anti-goto scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", a standby state is made for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, and the game is started, and this waiting state is looped until the gaming ball is won.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND 0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 has issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting a command with the function "COMMAND 0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (representation 2)]
Subsequently, an example will be described in which a jail object drop notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo part drop notice. The prisoner drop notices are divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described above is performed in that control is performed such that the parameter used in the first half of the previous notice is taken over in the second half of the notice.

[18-9-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from start of change to stop of special symbol in this embodiment, wherein (A) is an effect executed from start of change to end, and the related It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing presentation, and the scheduler performed, (B) is a figure explaining the position of the prison object 5003 in a prison object falling notice.

  In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 344 (A), a button (BTN) first half drop notice of a step up notice and a first half of a notice of dropping of a prison object is executed in the first half of change. After that, reach occurs, and in the second half of the change, the group announcement and the button prison object first-half drop notice continued from the first half are executed followed by the jail product second-half fall notice. For each advance notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, and operation of special effects are executed. The contents of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 344 (B), the contents of the prison object dropping advance notice will be described. As mentioned above, the prisoner falling notice is divided into a button (BTN) first half falling notice and a second half falling notice of the prisoner.

  In the first half, the first half of the button, the first half falling notice of a drop of a prison object, by operating the effect button, advance notice proceeds. Therefore, even if the player has won the execution lottery for the first-half falling notice of the button holding character, the falling effect of the holding object 5003 is not executed unless the production button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the second half, the second half falling notice is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half of the second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When the player has won the lottery for execution of the first half falling notice of the button prison object and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the prison object 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, when the prison character 5003 falls to the middle position and if the winning lottery for the second half drop notice of the prison character is won, the prison character 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the jail product drop notice, and is dropped to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. In addition, when it is elected to the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice, it falls to the lower part regardless of the position of the jail article 5003. In addition, when the prison notice is dropped, the prison control 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 344 (B), the announcement of dropping of the prison object is executed in six types of patterns. Specifically, if the result of the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button prisoner is not elected, it does not depend on the operation of the effect button, so the second half falling advance notice of the second run is not elected (pattern 1) There is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button prisoner first half falling notice and the prison second half falling notice are not won, the prisoner 5003 is not dropped and kept from moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, since the prison object 5003 does not fall but is located at the upper part without dropping in the case of the prison official falling notice, and since the winning lottery is won in the second half dropping notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 goes from the top to the bottom Fall at a stretch.

  When the player has won the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button, the presentation mode of the first half falling notice of the button differs depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the four types of presentation modes can be executed depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery for the second half falling of the prison object.

  If you have won the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, and do not operate the production button, and further, if the result of the selection lottery of the second fall of the prison drop is non-winning, the prison object 5003 does not fall Remain on top (pattern 3). If you win the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner and operate the production button, and further, if the result of the execution lottery of the second fall of the prison drop is non-winning, the prison object 5003 at the time of operation of the production button Drops from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the prison drop notice (pattern 4).

  If you have won the lottery for the first run of the first half of the button prison notice, and do not operate the production button, and if you have won the run lottery for the second fall of the prison, you have not operated the presentation button. The prison object 5003 is positioned at the top without falling until the second half falling notice of the object is started, and falls from the top to the bottom in the second half dropping notice of the second jail thing (pattern 5). If you have won the lottery for the execution of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, operated the effect button, and further won the run lottery for the second half fall notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 from the top at the time of operation of the presentation button It falls to the middle, and further drops from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice of the prison object (pattern 6).

  As described above, six patterns of effect modes can appear in the prison object falling advance notice according to the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the prison object 5003 in the jail article falling advance notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344 (A), a button prison object first half falling notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the prison object 5003 in the first half drop notice of the button prison object and the second half of the prison object The second half falling advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls the operation of the prison object 5003 in the falling notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the prisoner's drop notice]
FIG. 345 is a view for explaining the contents of a button combination first half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for performing motor control in the button first half drop notice of the first half portion of the first embodiment of the present invention. . As described above, when the player has won the lottery for executing the first half drop notice of the button prison object, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the effect button for 3 seconds, and operates the prison object 5003 when the effect button is operated. Execute the effect to make it. In the case where the execution lottery of the first half falling notice of the button is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if it is won, the operation is ended without operating the prison object 5003. A motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the buttoned prisoner first-half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 causes the prison object 5003 to rattle. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT", the specified operation is performed for one second. Specifically, the prison object 5003 rattles.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" takes as a parameter the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button interceptor first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" To be executed.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first half falling notice randomization result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the contents of button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1” Identify the start address of The result of the execution lottery of button first half falling notice is stored in the button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, and in the case of not winning the execution of the button first half falling notice of lottery, “0: In the case of winning the non-winning selection button and the first half falling notice of lottery execution of the button, "1: first half falling execution notice of the first half of prisoning execution" is set. The result of the execution drawing of the button first half falling advance notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button first half falling advance notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  When "0: not selected" is set in the button prisoner first-half falling notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner thing The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half falling notice is not executed. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button Combo 1st half falling notice lottery is "not won". End the execution of.

  On the other hand, when "1: First half drop notice is executed" is set to the button first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button lottery for first half drop notice is won. In the first half falling advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” of the button prisoner product, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution time of the falling prediction of the falling prison object. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button forged part first half notice button branch call address It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first-come-first-served fall advance notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo feature drop notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and “0: button OFF when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button combination first half falling advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first letter drop first notice button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" of the caller (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times even if the player has won the lottery for executing the first half drop notice of the button prison object, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “1: button ON”, the button jackpot first-half falling notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first-half falling notice button ON When the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. First, the content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues a command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect at the time of dropping the prison object, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution section 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is performed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler wedge position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to record that the prison object 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is ended by the function "STOP".

  When the button first half drop notice which is the first half of the jail drop notice is finished, the second half fall notice of the jail drop is started. FIG. 346 and FIG. 347 are diagrams for explaining the contents of a prison object late falling notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the second half falling alert of the prison object which is the second half of the prison warning of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the second half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" of the prisoner as in the case of the button first half fall advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect that suggests whether the prison object 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 or not. . Thereafter, weight processing “NOP: 90” of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the prison object 5003 falls, the player's sense of expectation is enhanced by performing the effect drawing for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the second half late notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters .

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the prisoner, and based on the contents of second half drop notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice is stored in the second half of the second half notice of work of the second half of the work area "YKK_NTA2". When the winning a prize for the second half of the jail dropping notice is selected, “1: running of the second half of the jail dropping notice is executed” is set. The result of the execution lottery of the second half falling notice of the prisoner corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the second half falling notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half.

  If "0: not selected" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the prisoner, the second half fall of the second half drop notice lottery result for the second run of the second run The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” is selected when no advance notice is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", and the value of scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the result of the second half falling notice lottery result of the prisoner object branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Branch based on

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the second half drop notice of the second half is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" at execution is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored.

  When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the case of the second half falling advance notice not executed in the second half fall notice lottery result branching call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Ru. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored. After that, the value of scheduler work position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is ended.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the prison character objects fall in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. When no notice is given and no notice is given, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the first half falling advance notice execution / second half fall advance notice non-winning condition of the prisoner, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” first executes weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the prison object 5003 is at the lower position, it is a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the prison object 5003 is originally at the middle position, it waits for four seconds.

  After the end of the weight processing, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the prison object 5003, the wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2."

  In addition, when “1: second half falling notice” is set in work area “YKK_NTA2” for second half late notice 2 of the prison character, the second half last notice lottery result of the second half of the jail item is branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected when the second half falling advance notice is won. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN", and branches based on the value of the scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the drop of the prisoner drop notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN" .

  When “0: initial position” is set in scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop notice of a prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” Motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of execution / second half falling notice.

  In scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 347), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed, and a command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 240", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, at the timing when the prison object 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the prison object 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Then, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop of the prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN” Notice execution, second half falling notice at the time of winning the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

  In scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 347), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed, and a command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

  Then, at the timing when the prison object 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the prison object 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, to match the timing when the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the prison object 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (approximately Execute wait processing for 4 seconds). This time is the time until the prison object 5003 moves from the initial position to the middle position.

  After that, as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  When the prison character 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed to set the value of the scheduler eyelid position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to “0: initial position” And update the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In the prison drop object, scheduler data is divided into a first half and a second half, and in the first half, the operation of the second prize is different depending on whether the player operates the presentation button. Therefore, the position of the prison object 5003 can be specified by writing the position of the prison object 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . As a result, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the prison object 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the operation result of the rendering button.

  Further, also in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the prison object 5003, common scheduler data is called up by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can write a fixed value to a predetermined area at the time of execution of scheduler data, and can refer to a common value by referring to the execution of other scheduler data. In this way, it is possible to specify, at the time of execution of each scheduler data, a value indicating a state or the like that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data. The process can be completed only by the definition of the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processes depending on the state, and it is possible to streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data and to facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is a function of writing a fixed value, but by designating a work name with a parameter of a function instead of the fixed value, data transfer from the program side or processing based on command information Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The unique feature of the function "MEMW" can be processed with respect to information not determined at the start of scheduler data execution including the function "MEMW" as long as the information is determined by the execution of the function "MEMW". This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of preliminary announcement effects has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Further, specific effect contents are drawn for each of the notice effects.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic presentation related to the series of preview effects and variation patterns (regardless of lottery other than preview effects) The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to a symbol effect that is rendered and has a one-on-one variation pattern will be described.

  In this embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (rendering section) divided in predetermined configuration units. For example, until the reach occurs from the start of the symbol variation, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (the first half variation), the block from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second variation) ), And the period from the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and an execution timing and an execution time of the advance notice effect within the allocated time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

  In addition, when the basic divisions related to the variation are compared with a plurality of variation patterns, the rule of block division divides the same basic representation part into common block data, and divides the part having a difference in basic representation of liquid crystal display into block data Do. Referring to FIG. 348A, in the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally changed for 6 seconds. It has become a loss, and normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a pattern effect of loss is performed. Since the six-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss-stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into liquid-crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for six seconds of normal fluctuation and liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of lost-stop.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is usually lost for 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the symbol effect of the loss is performed. Because the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, and the symbol effect of losing is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H" The liquid crystal effect block data of the stop of the loss is commonly used the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD 02_BLK) of the stop of the break which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”. As for the other variation patterns, similarly, with respect to the part which has already been block data-ized with respect to the basic effect, it is commonly used and block data-modification is newly performed with respect to the part having a difference.

  As described above, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data by performing blocking, and all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as big hit other than the variation are achieved by combining the unique liquid crystal effect block data. It becomes possible to realize all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as the big hit other than the variation. Although it is important that the total amount of effect data to be created is significantly reduced, the main purpose of blocking is the liquid crystal effect including a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is to be reflected in all variation patterns using block data.

  With regard to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, the format and function are completely different from the sound, lamp, and scheduler data of the feature in the present embodiment in order to control the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preliminary rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and special effects. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color related to a picture or movie displayed on the background, effects relating to a design Information, alpha information, etc. are configured with functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, and the type and execution timing of effects related to notice effects generated in block data Information to be shown is embedded.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, block data for causing the liquid crystal display device to variably display the identification symbol is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for fluctuating display of the identification symbol independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects. For example, even in the case where the shape of the identification symbol is changed and displayed variably, a common advance presentation effect is provided. It becomes possible to carry out with a liquid crystal display. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effects. In addition, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for preview effect related to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the aspect of the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 348A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 348B is a diagram for explaining liquid crystal symbol block data combination numbers (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by fluctuation pattern storing combinations of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 349 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-based sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers identifying liquid crystal rendering block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is configured by “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” that indicates the time of out of range stop. Be done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. Thus, the configuration of the basic effect and the advance effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 348, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in all the same effect sections. For example, when the first half fluctuation is usually 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal rendering block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal rendering block data can be uniquely identified for each fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 348B, the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern classified liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table. . Further, the sub rendering block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same rendering time) corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data of the same variation pattern number in a one-on-one manner.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 349, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is, like the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern number is defined by liquid crystal effect block data of the same change pattern number and liquid crystal symbol block data in a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to one-on-one.

  Next, an execution procedure of the notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, an execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 350 is a diagram for describing an overview of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

  As described in FIG. 326A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used and also determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and based on the determined block number, each variation pattern number “10H03H” The corresponding block data number is acquired from the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) and the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) Do. By setting all block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it is possible to execute all the renderings of the respective rendering devices synchronously.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the number of all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal graphic block data "ZUG03_BLK The sub effect 1 f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12 seconds sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal rendering block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal rendering 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits the DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, whereby drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  When processing liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated to execute drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal rendering block data.

  On the other hand, when processing of sub rendering block data is started, one or more sub rendering 1 f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub rendering block data are activated, and scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the execution cycle may be set at startup as shared.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data specification function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp ("KPLAY"), a speaker ("SPLAY"), and a character ("MPLAY"). The designated effect is configured to be executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation function in the defined order. The effect data specification function is transmitted to the modules (the lamp module 5600, the sound module 5500, the drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects are performed by the various effect devices by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". By executing the effect data specification function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Furthermore, control using a command instead of a function is possible by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND 0". For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specification function for controlling the movement of the character, the movement and drawing of the character cooperate with each other as in the case of the prison object falling notice effect described above. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing effect control using sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the control pattern start process for controlling sub-variation patterns according to variation patterns according to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

  In the effect block control unit 5040, the change pattern layer is selected by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and the control of the block data number by change pattern corresponding to the change pattern is changed. Control is started using the pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table (FIG. 349). The row position of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 349) is set to the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 349, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation pattern-sub effect block data combination number table row index and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set to the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table row index.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index to “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub rendering block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the fluctuation pattern-based sub effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, a scheduler for executing the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is activated, and scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data control activation process of this embodiment.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data combination number table based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, the process is started from the top record of the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data number table specified from the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 activates scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data number table (FIG. 354 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice) from the sub effect block data number table get. One or more pieces of scheduler data are registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the advance notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are made to correspond on the basis of the lottery result of the advance notice and the like.

  Furthermore, when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data ends, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes pattern It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of another sub rendering block data number table has been exceeded (step S 7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub rendering block data number table by variation pattern has been exceeded (the result of step S 7014 is “YES”), the sub rendering block data control activation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data number table row element number (the result of step S 7014 is “NO”), the next sub rendering block data is processed.

  FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control updating process of this embodiment. In the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process, within the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) configuring the variation-pattern-based sub effect block data number table Is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub rendering block data when the execution of all the scheduler data in the above is completed. The variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table row and column index (Step S7021). Thereby, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to advance notice) constituting the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub-effect block data It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is under execution (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to advance notice) defined in the sub effect block data for each variation pattern If the process is completed (the result at step S7022 is "NO"), the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END") or not Is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result in step S7023 is "YES"), since the series of effects has been completed, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result at step S7023 is "NO"), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts to execute the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data corresponding to the next column data. Then, the variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 348A, FIG. 348B and FIG. 349, the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data is defined in association with liquid crystal effect block data and liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing, By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize effect control by the drawing scheduler, effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and effect control by the plurality of schedulers. Also, by performing blocking, if the same variation pattern, the number of activations of the scheduler defined in the effect block and the effect block is always the same number regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the appearance of effects Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub effect schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices, and perform various effects without discomfort can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and confirmed in units of rendering devices and block data. Development efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 354 is a view for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and (A) shows the timing for executing the basic effect and the advance effect and the related (B) indicates the configuration of sub-effect block data by fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data includes background sub rendering block data and preview sub rendering block data for executing background rendering and preview rendering. Although FIG. 354 (B) shows a combination of two types of sub rendering block data of background block data and preview block data, the number of sub rendering block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 354, the sub pattern block data classified by fluctuation pattern constituting fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” It is constituted by the loss stop). The variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The variation pattern-basis sub effect block data “SCH 04 _BLK” corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the variation display is determined to be lost and the determined symbol is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 354 (A), in sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” according to variation pattern, sub-effect block data related to step-up notice, BTN logo part drop notice and notice of symbol stop notice, and sub-step pertaining to background Block data is defined. Further, in the sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”, sub rendering block data relating to cut-in notice and group preview and sub rendering block data relating to the background are defined. Furthermore, in the sub rendering block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub rendering block data relating to the background is defined without defining the preview rendering sub rendering block data. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not overlapped, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of advance notice effects. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect shown in FIG. 354 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 354 (B), two types of sub rendering block data in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" will be described.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data relating to the background, normal variation 12 seconds background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background are defined. Since the normal variation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  The function "NOP" and the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo combination drop notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to perform sub-rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. As step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data. The BTN logo combination falling notice sub-representation block data defines a sub-representation scheduler number and sub-representation scheduler data related to the BTN logo combination falling notice. The BTN logo combination falling advance notice sub effect block data has the same presentation time as the BTN logo combination falling advance liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal rendering block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal rendering block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal preview rendering from the end of the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to each liquid crystal preview rendering Between the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal advance notice effect (pattern stop advance notice) and the end of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern “SCH03_BLK” "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub rendering scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal rendering block data in the variation pattern-based scheduler block by the function "NOP", the scheduler etc. is sequentially scheduled by the program etc. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of data, it is possible to execute the effects of each of the effect devices corresponding to the liquid crystal advance notification effect at the designated timing. In addition, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

  The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the thing is defined as the common time for each of the notice effects. As a result, since the time from the start of control by the sub effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timings of the respective effect devices can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is managed not by the start of variation but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. Thus, when the same variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data has a presentation start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although different from that, since the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data, it can be processed without any problem. In the case of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal attraction block data, and similarly in the case of variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub rendering block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the background, normal short reach background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub rendering block data is scheduler data relating to the background, so it has the same rendering time as the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is ended.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the preview, a function "NOP", a cut-in preview sub rendering block data, and a group preview sub rendering block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. The cut-in advance notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in advance notice. The cut-in advance notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in advance notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the group advance sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group advance are defined. The group advance sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the group notification liquid crystal rendering block data. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub rendering block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  In addition, in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, the same as the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”, but the number of the sub effect block data sequence is the same. no problem.

  Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the lost stop background sub-effect block data is executed. In the sub rendering scheduler data relating to the background, missing stop background sub rendering block data is defined. In the user stop background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the background of normal fluctuation 12 seconds are defined. Since the lost stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 355 is a view for explaining the relationship between variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data and variation pattern-based liquid crystal symbol block data according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal rendering block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data by variation pattern are different only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub rendering block data Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 326B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 356 is a view showing an image for creating a drawing data file in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment with the video synthesis / motion creation graphic tool. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. In addition, as shown in FIG. 356, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the present embodiment in step-up rendering units.

  The reason that the drawing data file is not created in a one-on-one relationship with the liquid crystal preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in this embodiment. If it is executable, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines, and taking into consideration the work time required for the change and the risk of correction omission, drawing data files are created with a unique number for each step, It is because it is more efficient to implement the advance notice in combination.

  FIG. 357 is a view for explaining the configuration of effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effect and step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data will be described. First, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of fluctuation. Ru. If the lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is not selected, the step-up advance notice is not executed since the step-up advance notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-Up Notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when step-up 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is ended.

  In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02, and after waiting for the time designated by the parameter, step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2: Since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END” after the completion of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the presentation scheduler data of the preview in the minimum configuration unit.

  Subsequently, step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 357 (B). The step-up notice sub rendering block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data, the block configuration and the execution time all in one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the rendering devices with the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize the rendering with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub rendering block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the function executed by the sub rendering scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices in parallel and to define scheduler data to be executed at the same timing with the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect content such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data defined hierarchically is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be activated and schedule data can be independently executed by each scheduler, it becomes possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, and the development efficiency can be increased. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included in the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is updated), a common schedule can be obtained by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to presentation control of a gaming machine in the long run.

  The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated at the time of execution of the scheduler data may be stopped after use to release the memory use area. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be opened when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Then, the detail of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data which comprises liquid crystal presentation block data is demonstrated. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, like the sub rendering block data, is configured by a combination of functions for controlling the rendering target. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the drive device, and the like are controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
First, functions (scheduler functions for liquid crystal rendering) that constitute liquid crystal rendering scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that composes the liquid crystal rendering block data described above, and the command is embedded in the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a Send and execute the effect. Further, when executing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function, it is possible to change the attribute (for example, the color, the shape, the operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying the parameter.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
FIG. 358 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an outline of each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the group of coordinate setting will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, for specifying the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and setting the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” designate the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position to set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" designates the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" designates the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X axis and Y axis coordinate positions, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area to be specified to perform enlargement or reduction when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on a CGROM, or converting a unit of coordinates. It is to By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” specifies the X-axis value to set the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE XYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. It is not necessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation by storing only the liquid crystal display object as a reference in the CGROM and designating an angle to display, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the group of rotation angle settings. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. In addition, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by designating an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Subsequently, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is α setting processing, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating the degree of transmission, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not transmit the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front on the screen or moved to the back side. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is a background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information on the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents , To perform another rendition. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets presentation SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the moving image index number on the CGROM. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame rendering SW information to the entire liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information in which information of special control to be described later is defined in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the processing can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for liquid crystal effects]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Subsequently, parameters specified at the time of execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described by way of an example. FIG. 359 and FIG. 360 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. The group of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function and the group of parameters are divided into different groups. The group of parameters includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, and sub effect scheduler function.

  "AAD_FRAME" "AAD_POS" "AAD_POS2" "AAD_POS3" "AAD_ALPHA" "AAD_ANGLE" "AAD_ENTRY" "AAD_ENTRY" "AAD_ENTRY_B" "AAD_SKIP_B" "AAD_SCALE" "AAD_SCALE" "Etc. are included. Each parameter will be described below.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and is 8 bits in length. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for specifying the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for specifying the number of frames to be skipped in liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for specifying a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object in XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the effect SW include “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the presentation SW, and designates two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter for specifying the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered frame rendering SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing a frame rendering SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters of the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT” and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for specifying the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of symbol replacement related parameters includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for specifying a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the sub rendering scheduler function include “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for specifying a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, effect control in a game machine has been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs are described by program code representing the operation contents and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data are called up in a frame where effects are executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, advance notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for individual programmers and the number of development steps is increased, making it difficult to secure personnel (programmers) that are both qualitatively and quantitatively required. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effects to be executed in cooperation with liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by the tool for creating the liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for performing liquid crystal rendering effects is used by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped together for each variation pattern, jackpot, etc. to create an effect common block, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a fluctuation pattern or a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects to external input by the player occur, so only simply execute the combined effect common block as it is So, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating the effect common block with the above-described tool, the effect switch (effect SW for calling a program for executing effects at a predetermined timing or executing predetermined control) ) Can be set (built in). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM, and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, callback always occurs regardless of “ON” and “OFF” of the effect SW. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the predefined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image.

  When the liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the rendering block included in the rendering common block at the time of liquid crystal rendering, and detects the incorporated rendering SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected rendering SW (callback To do). Then, based on the information processed by the called back program function, a display list command can be created to realize ON / OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect. In the program function called by the callback, it is also possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of a role, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting of information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of a flag and updating of data of a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, effect and pattern replacement, and interactive effect to external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect called by callback and replacement of the effect is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530 and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting the presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets presentation elements such as images and videos at the time of presentation design, and calls a program function defined in advance. Complex rendering specifications can be realized. Further, by creating the presentation block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) in the composition unit of the presentation using the presentation creation tool, the development period can be significantly shortened, and in addition, the contents of the presentation can be obtained based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the presentation SW without performing the test, simplification of the test process and significant reduction of the time required for the test can be realized.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 361 is a view for explaining the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The presentation SW is uniquely identified by the presentation SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the presentation, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The presentation SW group is a set of presentation SW grouped according to the execution mode of the presentation, the presentation SW group ID is an identifier of the presentation SW group, and defines to which presentation SW group the presentation SW group belongs. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group, and the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF by specifying the effect SW reset group ID, and effects collectively belonging to the effect SW group are displayed. You can hide it. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group is configured of one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the leading group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the number of the leading group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW.

  The presentation SW attribute is information indicating an attribute of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information for specifying whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the presentation SW. In the passive, the presentation SW is statically evaluated, and in the active, the presentation SW is dynamically evaluated.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW start command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 363 exemplifies a presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and a presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 364 is a view showing an example of the step-up notice in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows a step where the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each step. An example is shown.

  The step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages as shown in FIG. 364 (A), and at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed. When the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1 which is the first step after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect is executed in which the display screen is filled with black ink. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the black color and the fill pattern. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation becomes high in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. Further, as the filling pattern, the more the position where the filling starts, the higher the degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation may change at the position where the filling starts. For example, when the filling is started from only one lower left, the expectation is low, and when the filling is started from two places, lower left and upper left, the filling is started from three places at lower left, upper left, and upper right In order, the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation is highest when the fill is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step-up notice is executed. In the development effect, the effect is executed in a common manner in the middle to increase the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the player actually develops to the next stage. In the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the screen is filled with a combination of the color of the ink and the filling pattern determined by lottery for the liquid crystal display screen. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes thinner) and characters for displaying in step-up notice 2 appear. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is discharged as it is and the display of characters becomes dark, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development rendition fails, the display of the characters does not become dark, and the ink is peeled off and not displayed.

  In the step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. The character pattern has high expectations in the order of "change", "silence", "feeling", "continuation" and "one shot kill". In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, with the characters displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, it shifts to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink gradually fades out before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and finally the ink completely slips off, and the displayed character disappears. It will end up.

  In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in the step-up notice 2, and from this state, an effect of gradually releasing the black is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of the ink expulsion. For example, when the ink is discharged from only one lower left, the expectation is low, and when the ink is released from two places, lower left and upper left, the ink is removed from three places lower left, upper left and upper right The degree of expectation is high in the order of cases, and the degree of expectation is highest when ink is released from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of the ink being discharged and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters have been developed, the development effect is successful, and the process shifts to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been released, the development effect has failed.

  The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has high expectation in the order of "match", "good chance", "development", "heat fight", "extensive heat", "happiness". In addition, the color of letters is expected to be high in the order of black, white, red and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed character is enlarged is performed.

  Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 365 to 367 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW according to the present embodiment. FIG. 365 shows the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 366 (A) shows liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for executing the step-up notice 1, and (B) shows a drawing image using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 365 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1 and is divided into each drawing (black drawing lower left, black drawing upper left, black drawing lower right, black drawing upper right, letter failure, character success), The names of the presentation SW and the contents of the presentation are described in correspondence with each division. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right and upper right drawing segments, and a total of 26 effects with a total of 10 effects with 5 failures for each of the character failure and character success drawing segments. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing segment is always one, and only one of the drawing segments "character failure" and "character success" is performed, so the maximum effect performed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of effects is 5 in total including the drawing division "lower left", the drawing division "upper left", the drawing division "lower right", the drawing division "upper right" and the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success".

  Also, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the method of determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the contents of the effect relating to the ink. Specifically, the effect contents relating to the ink are the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing section “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink appearing from the appearance location of the selected ink. . In addition, it becomes either the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success" and the contents of the character displayed at this time. In the present embodiment, in the lottery result of step-up notice 1, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the character in the drawing section "character failure" It has become a "power." Therefore, as a result of lottery of step-up notice 1, drawing division "lower left is red", drawing division "upper left none", drawing division "no lower right", drawing division "upper right is red", drawing division "letter failure is upset" , A command of drawing division "no character success" is issued.

  In addition, the effect SW of the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the contents of each issued lottery command. Specifically, "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "red at the bottom left", and "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "red at the upper right". Is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON with respect to the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "character failure is frustrating". On the other hand, the commands for Step Up Notice 1 Lottery Command Drawing Division “Upper Left None”, Step Up Notice 1 Lottery Command Drawing Division “Right Bottom None”, Step Up Notice 1 Lottery Command Drawing Division “No Letter Success” are not produced Therefore, neither effect SW is set to ON but is set to OFF.

  By the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" out of all the effects of the step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and "improvement" in the drawing section "character failure" The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Next, the configuration of step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and step-up notice 1 liquid-crystal effect scheduler data are executed without any control and step-up notice 1 drawing image will be described using FIG. 366 (A). . As mentioned above, the total number of effects of Step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but Step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data has lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, letter failure, and character success drawing divisions Only one effect data is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is executed without performing any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data are simultaneously executed, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image At the same time, black ink spreads simultaneously from the drawing section "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the character of "change" is displayed lightly in the drawing section "character failure" and the drawing section "character success". The character of "change" is erased by "character failure", and at the same time, the character of "change" is clearly displayed in the drawing division "character success".

  Further, in FIG. 366 (B), as mentioned above, the command of the lottery for step-up notice 1 in step-up notice 1 is: drawing division "lower left is red", drawing division "upper left none", drawing division "lower right none", Step-up notice 1 drawing image in the case of issuing a command of drawing division “upper right is red”, drawing division “character failure irritating”, and drawing division “no character success”. In the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the character "Iki" is lightly displayed in the drawing section "character failure", and then the drawing section The character "immature" is deleted by "character failure".

  Subsequently, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of FIG. 366 (A) while referring to FIG. 367, for performing the rendering according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1 of FIG. 367 (B), Explain the mechanism to perform the effect replacement.

  FIG. 367 is a diagram for describing master data defined on liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for each drawing section in the present embodiment, and a rendering SW corresponding to replacement data to be replaced with the master data. Specifically explaining with reference to the lower left black effect replacement group in FIG. 367, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is an index number on the CGROM of a moving image in which black black spreads from lower left. And the corresponding presentation SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the presentation SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the presentation SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation where white black spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the animation where red black spreads from the lower left It becomes the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI” corresponding to the index SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the ink of the rainbow spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black rendering replacement table. In addition, the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left black rendering replacement table.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command in order to draw effects, and is defined in step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data Triggered (detected) by the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”, a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SW registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. Do. In the present embodiment, since the effect switch "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON based on the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "lower left is red", red ink from the lower left corresponding to the effect switch "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The video number on the CGROM is identified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red black CGROM from the lower left specified to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 is a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, the display list command is created using a movie number on the CGROM corresponding to a movie in which red black appears from the lower left handed from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of replacement of effects by callback in the present embodiment is a low-level control structure (in the present embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure ( In the present embodiment, it is possible to separate the detection of replacement timing and replacement control by calling a program function for replacement, a program function that makes it possible to execute complex processes that are not suitable for change, by callback. It realizes to perform complicated processing using liquid crystal rendering scheduler data which is a simple data structure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for calling back (the on / off setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment), the processing is always executed by the callback. Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by callback, the structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side When effect control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code to be processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing a function, it is always required. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data needs to be changed. In this case, it is always necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the occurrence of a failure due to the change of control but also the function that operated normally before the change is affected and a new failure occurs. There is a risk of

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for callback (the on / off setting value of the presentation SW), callback execution is always performed by callback and a plurality of callbacks are executed. Determine the executability and processing content in the callback function of. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing a function, and a call corresponding to a new function It can be realized by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function remains in the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting the other callback functions and causing the failure is reduced. In addition, compared with the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is centrally executed with a single large program, the method of performing the execution analysis by using a plurality of callback functions for realizing each function and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data However, the structure and configuration of the program can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, specialization has been made to replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not only replacement of effects but also replacement of symbols, control of display or non-display of effects, and drawing target The present invention is also applicable to conversion of drawing data and execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left rendering replacement table explain. If you do not define the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's presentation SW in the presentation replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master presentation SW must be the liquid crystal presentation scheduler Only the data exists, and the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master and the index number on the CGROM corresponding only exist in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in several thousand. In a situation where changes in gaming specifications and addition of gaming specifications occur frequently between planning and development of gaming machines and being put into the market, consistency between index numbers of moving images (images) on CGROM and presentation SW It is extremely difficult to maintain

  In the relation between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, an index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be incorrectly defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It is possible that the upper index number is erroneously registered in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and the replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery . Since the degree of expectation is set for each of the effects, it is likely that a jackpot-only effect that does not appear in the fluctuation of the outset may appear, which is a fatal defect as a gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including index numbers on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, confirmation of consistency can be realized by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. Further, in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, even if any data in the replacement table is defined, it operates without any problem, so it becomes a control method extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In this embodiment, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used, A display list command is created using the index number on the master's CGROM defined in the replacement table, and an effect is drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters appear when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends. The effect of gradually removing black from the top of the display area is executed regardless of success or failure, so that 4 types of effect SW flags for 4 types of drawing patterns that gradually remove black per vertex (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of presentation SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development presentation are defined.

  The upper left black replacement group other than the lower left black replacement group, the lower right black replacement group, the upper right black replacement group, the letter failure effect replacement group, the letter success effect replacement group are the same as the configuration and control method. It is.

  In step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, a presentation SW flag (layer) according to the mode may be defined in the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of presentation SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the parameter animation type may be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the rendering effect pattern according to the appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the rendering SW flag corresponding to the rendering to be performed to ON. It is possible to carry out or combine effects. Since switching of effects and combinations are only switching the setting of the effect SW flag, it is possible to set parameters using tools, such as a planner who configures effects without requiring new techniques such as creating a program. Various variations of effects can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize several tens of types of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of the black and two types of display patterns as a result of the development effect. As a result, the type of program to be developed can be minimized, the development efficiency of the effect control program of the gaming machine can be improved, and the quality can be improved by, for example, the efficiency of inspection of the developed effect control program.

[20-3. Outline of control based on presentation switch]
Subsequently, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers rendering start from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues an internal control to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530 c is set to ON.

  The presentation SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is a presentation SW determination command sequence for turning on the presentation SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview are defined side by side. It has become possible.

  For example, even if the same mini character preview is different, when the mini characters displayed for different backgrounds are different by defining a plurality of commands side by side, the background command value is determined, and the background is identified and the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background, but a plurality of judgments are required for a few minutes of the command. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be made a mini character corresponding to the background. With regard to the effects defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effects can be specified in the same manner as the effects defined by a single command without the need to judge a plurality of times. Moreover, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, and is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs in combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 368, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIG. 365 to FIG. 367, a predetermined process is called up at the time of execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect. Be

  In addition, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 369 is a diagram for explaining an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  The LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON, from the steady program or the called back program. The LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the presentation SW not from the presentation SW activation by a command but from a steady program or a called back program.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the presentation SW from a steady program or a called back program. In addition, when the attribute “all reset” is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the effect SW to be reset based on the “target SW for reset effect group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all the presentation SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

  The LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for acquiring a frame time from activation of the active rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Subsequently, an implementation example of control using a presentation switch will be described. FIG. 370 to FIG. 375 are diagrams showing a part of program code for executing control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is described in C language.

  As described above, the rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, and each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image. In addition, since presentation SW is set to all the presentation blocks, the process based on presentation SW is always called back at the time of execution of a presentation block. The callback is executed even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, and it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not performed, and the callback function is ended.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of the effect SW control information , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group

  The presentation SW information table is configured based on the presentation SW information table management structure shown in (A), and the presentation SW group ID, the reset target presentation SW group ID, the presentation SW control information (presentation SW attribute), the presentation SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped by functions, such as effect SW for performing the same (same type of) preview effect, effect SW for pending display, or effect SW for notification. ing. The presentation SW group ID is represented by bits, and one presentation SW can belong to a plurality of presentation SW groups.

  The effect SW group ID to be reset is identification information for specifying an effect SW group for which the effect SW is set to OFF when “Reset all effect SW” is specified in “attrib bit assign” described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate effect SWs for which processing is to be canceled (reset) simultaneously at the time of switching of the effect SW or the like. Similar to the effect SW group ID, the effect SW group ID to be reset is expressed by bits, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

  The presentation SW control information is information defining the function of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive active information. Further, the presentation SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the presentation SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the presentation SW, and becomes “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0” and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when the command to activate the rendering SW is received multiple times during the period in which the rendering SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the rendering SW is performed only once, and in the active, the rendering is performed in the period in which the rendering SW is defined When the command for activating the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used, for example, when displaying a rendering effect corresponding to button pressing when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

  Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a callback function for replacement defined in advance is called up at the time of evaluation SW evaluation defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Be

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, at the time of the evaluation SW evaluation, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. 370 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and control and effect of a new effect SW are executed by the output command.

  The production SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the presentation SW control information (when “replacement is specified” is specified) The address of is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as effect groups. The effect group includes the effect SW group ID, the active effect SW top ID, the number of active effect SW, the passive effect SW top ID, and the number of passive effect SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active rendering SW is the number of active rendering SW arranged from the rendering SW corresponding to the active rendering SW leading ID. The passive effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW leading ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, if “effect SW all reset” is specified in “attrib bit assign”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID It becomes possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF.

  FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to an effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 371, specific numerical values are defined for the effect SW numbers using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated manner as described above, when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, it is not necessary to handle them directly as numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the presentation SW flag and presentation SW information table will be described. FIG. 372 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining an effect SW flag and an effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) showing an effect SW flag, and (B) showing an effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the process based on the corresponding effect SW on the callback function side that calls back (ON / OFF). As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The presentation SW information table is defined by the presentation SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 370 (A), and each element of the presentation SW information table is read when the program is executed, and the constant is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the presentation SW information table is stored in an array having the presentation SW number as an index as in the presentation SW flag, and data corresponding to all the presentation SW is stored.

  Subsequently, a presentation SW replacement table information and a presentation SW replacement table for performing presentation replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table, as shown in FIG. 370 (A). FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information and program data for defining a effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a effect SW replacement table information, (B ) Shows a presentation SW replacement table.

  FIG. 373 (A) is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The presentation SW master data is presentation SW data defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and corresponds to the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1” when the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data, and there is, for example, a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) or the like, and the material information is replaced with corresponding replacement data by evaluating the presentation SW.

  FIG. 373 (B) is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is one and the number of rows is four. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  The specific replacement method first refers to the presentation SW replacement table information, and evaluates all the presentation SW presentation switch master data and the presentation SW replacement data defined in the presentation SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued by the result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. In the effect replacement data, the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponding to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is a material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing the layer, it is possible to use the display result in a versatile manner. For example, by separating the background layer, even if the character to be displayed is changed, it can be drawn in a common manner.

  In this embodiment, by storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information separately, even if there is a change in some layers, other layers are not affected. Can.

  FIG. 374 is a view showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list for storing an address for storing each layer information table, (B) is a layer information table (background Show the contents of The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called by using the effect SW as a trigger, and whether to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 375 is a view showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (the first half of the notice), and (B) shows the layer information table (the notice The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half 1 and the second half 2 determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, as in the background layer information table.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 374 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, first half notice, jackpot effect, character operation, hold display, etc. are defined.

  Further, FIG. 374 (B) shows a layer information table for background, and in the effect in the present embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined, and further, a background (time Middle background, high background, middle background) are also defined. Furthermore, a variation such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

  FIG. 375 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, roulette preview, blackout preview, window preview are defined, and a command for preview clearing is also defined. FIG. 375 (B) shows the layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, step-up notice, button mini character notice, conversation notice are defined, and the layer table for clearing the notice as in the case of the first notice 1 Is also defined. The layer table for clearing notices is used to finish the drawing of notices executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined in “attrib bit assign”. Then, when the rendering SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, the rendering SW for all the notices belonging to the rendering SW group ID defined in the resetting target rendering SW group ID is set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the rendering SW Ends and is hidden. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty data since no effect is performed.

  At the end of the list storing the layer table and the area allocated to the table storing the layer information, the termination determination record is stored, and when the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It is possible to This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements in advance for each list or table.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect Layer Table / Liquid Crystal Effect Block Data]
FIG. 376 is a view showing an example of the liquid crystal layer table and the program data for defining the liquid crystal rendering common block in the present embodiment, (A) is a liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal rendering common block Shows the configuration of

  As shown in FIG. 376 (A), the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect is the total drawing of the liquid crystal rendering common block corresponding to the number of liquid crystal rendering common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal rendering common blocks It is defined in pairs with the number of frames and the presentation SW. In the present embodiment, a total drawing frame number (580), the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  As shown in FIG. 376 (B), the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined by the rendering SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the reproduction time, and the liquid crystal rendering block in this order. In the case, multiple lines are defined in the same format. A terminal (terminal) is set after the step-up notice 4 and is configured to be able to cope with increase or decrease in the number of steps. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  The effect SW performs the same control as the effect defined in the layer table. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of rendering frames of the liquid crystal rendering block, and it will be described using the step-up notice 1 of the first line (150) frames, and the liquid crystal rendering block of the step-up notice 1 will be reproduced (150) Define what to do with the frame. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame is to be restored after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the first row.

  The reproduction time is the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". Therefore, after the playback of the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is performed again. When loop reproduction is to be performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the total number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Since the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is (150) frames, the playback is performed in the total playback time if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the completion of the playback of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” This can be realized by defining a (250) frame of time (150) frame + loop playback time (50 × 2) frame and defining a (100) frame at the loop start frame position. An effect such as fluctuating fluctuation can be realized by using the function of loop reproduction without the symbol being determined at the time of the pseudo-series effect.

  Moreover, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of reproduction despite the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment being the same is that something is wrong The drawing is not updated when the next effect common block is not executed, and the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping.

  The control by the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 in this embodiment is performed by performing a lottery for notice related to effects in peripheral control board 1530 and then step up The peripheral control internal command related to the notice effect, the step-up notice 1 command, the step-up notice 2 command, and the step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, in response to the issued command, the step-up 1 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON. On the other hand, since the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is still set to OFF.

  After setting of the presentation SW, callback is executed based on all the presentation SW defined in the liquid crystal presentation common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and a callback function is called. In the called back function, it is determined whether each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. Since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks in the liquid crystal rendering common block and control whether or not the liquid crystal rendering block is to be executed using the rendering SW. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

  Subsequently, the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 377 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal rendering block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal rendering block is defined. The function used in the liquid crystal rendering block which is the number of execution frames, the function or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is the two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function for weighting by the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal rendering block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal rendering block will be specifically described. To explain with reference to the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since “LCD_NOP” in which the number of execution frames (120) is designated is given, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal rendering block. (120) After weighting for the frame, execute the next line in which the number of frames (175) is specified. In the next line, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  As described in FIG. 364, it is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the next step of the step-up notice at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not perform weight, and starts execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" uses the weight of "LCD_NOP", and after performing frame weighting (120), starts execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", whereby the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" executes. When a frame has elapsed since the start (120), the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts executing. Thereby, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next step.

  In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal rendering block, and when the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined continuously, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames To execute the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions, execute the function NOP to stand by while executing the step-up notice effect 1 and then execute the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2, for executing the step-up notice effect 2. Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is described. The same applies to step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
As mentioned above, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the step-up notice rendering has been described. Subsequently, an operation of the effect button is performed while the symbol is changing, and an effect that a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen will be described by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 378 is a diagram for describing an overview of button mini character presentation according to the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is performed when the main command is received or when the change start is performed, and the winning lottery is performed, and the game is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated in the reception period of the operation input of the button, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the reception period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  To explain further, when the player has won an execution lottery of the button mini character effect and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the button mini character first half period becomes effective. The button mini character first half valid period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) for prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the button mini character first half valid period. When the button is operated during the button mini character first half period, the mini character is displayed.

  When the first half of the button mini character effective period ends and 30 frames pass, the button mini character second half effective period starts. The button mini character first half effective period is 120 frames, and an image (moving image) for prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the button mini character second half effective period. At this time, the same image (moving image) as the button mini character first half period may be displayed, or a different image (moving image) may be displayed. In addition, different images may be displayed as images (moving images) only when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period.

  When the button is operated in the second half of the button mini character effective period, the mini character is displayed as in the second half of the button mini character effective period. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

[23-2. LCD Production Common Block]
FIG. 379 is a diagram showing an example of program data which defines a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 379, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal rendering common block corresponding to the number and the number of liquid crystal rendering common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table. It is defined in pairs with the number and the presentation SW. In the present embodiment, the total drawing frame number (180) frame, the rendering SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal rendering common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total drawing frame number (150) frame, the rendering SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed during the (180) frame. Thereafter, during (150) frames, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is ended.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal rendering common block of button mini character rendering will be described. FIG. 380 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks of button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 380 are the same as the rendering layer table and the liquid crystal rendering block data described in FIG. The presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call a callback function that is called back to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" have active attributes in the rendering SW control information It becomes the active production SW defined.

[23-3. Liquid crystal rendering block data]
FIG. 381 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal rendering block data for executing button mini character rendering according to the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal rendering block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 381 are the same as the liquid crystal rendering block data described in FIG. First, "LCD_NOP" defined at the top of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and weight is applied for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation, and the button mini character first half is valid The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” corresponding to the period is executed by (90) frame, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is ended. After that, "LCD_NOP" defined at the top of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half period is executed, and it waits for (30) frames from the change start to correspond to the button mini character second half period. (120) frame execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT”, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

  As described above, the presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" set the presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" to ON during execution of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" for the active presentation SW. When the command is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” is executed for the number of times issued. Also, a callback is always generated for each frame by the presentation SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame until the end of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution even after the end of the button pressing control. Control that sets a period during which callback is being executed as the button effective period without determining the button effective period separately by creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data that performs effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling with the active effect SW Is possible.

[24. Design liquid crystal effect scheduler]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents in accordance with the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be notified. Similarly, it is possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variably display game when predetermined conditions such as a gaming state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, and reels in which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are allocated to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode according to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame as in the case of the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the rendering SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the index number on the CGROM is defined as master data . A reel number is defined in the effect SW for identification symbol replacement. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol on the river background is R3, middle symbol Is R4, right symbol is R5, left symbol of mountain background is R6, middle symbol is R7, right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it becomes possible to correspond individually to the gaming state and effects, and it becomes possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. Identification pattern is displayed in order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 with reel arrangement and next to 0 is the design and identification symbol of the identification symbol when it is displayed back to 1 The reel index is defined as the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can also be defined.

  Further, as a table for replacing the identification symbol, there is a replacement symbol table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on a CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement symbol table of the identification symbol. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. Reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as if it were stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous change or the confirmation symbol number value of the identification symbol The identification symbol number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program in accordance with the contents of the effect.

  The identification of data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect switch for identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is in the call back function for identification symbol replacement. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Furthermore, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image in the identified table is corrected. Identify using index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the case of the effect replacement, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. A display list command is always created using an index number on the master's CGROM defined in the replacement table, and rendering contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by carrying out replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. In addition, by setting the reels according to the gaming state, it is possible for the player to grasp the gaming state regardless of the contents of the identification symbol even when a failure occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. The decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[25. Callback timing]
Then, the generation | occurrence | production timing of the callback at the time of presentation SW detection is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 382 is a diagram illustrating an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within a callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW according to the present embodiment.

  As for “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A”, a callback occurs after “Liquid crystal A drawing starts” before “Liquid crystal A drawing start” and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before liquid crystal B drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after liquid crystal B drawing start. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B become different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal B triggered by the drawing completion of the liquid crystal A or ending the drawing of the liquid crystal B It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A at the same time.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with a necessary background color before drawing by performing determination before the start of drawing, or instruct other rendering devices to execute effects when drawing is completed by determining the end of drawing. It becomes possible.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and in "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the start of drawing of a specific layer. For example, by performing determination before the start of layer drawing, when a plurality of notifications are generated when drawing a layer of notification, it is possible to enlarge and draw a display of a notification with high priority. Also, by performing determination after start of layer drawing, by drawing effects around a drawn pattern according to the timing at which a high expected pattern stops before starting drawing of a symbol layer, a pattern with high expected degree The effect can be displayed around the symbol only when the symbol stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing section and execute predetermined processing before or after the start of drawing or completion. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 382, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before common block drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after common block drawing completion. The execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes a liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped by performing determination before the start of common block rendering, and rendering of rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block It is also possible to execute the liquid crystal rendering common block different from the liquid crystal rendering common block to be executed which has been determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation by performing the determination after the drawing end.

  In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the liquid crystal rendering block in the liquid crystal rendering common block starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after the liquid crystal rendering block is completed. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to change the liquid crystal rendering block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing determination after the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal rendering block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing a single rendering. Furthermore, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of still image and moving image drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can be generated before starting still image and moving image drawing in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. By performing determination before the start of drawing of a still image or a moving image, replacement of various effects becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to add renderings of effects corresponding to replacement contents of various effects by performing determination after drawing completion of a still image or a moving image.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Effect switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect schedule data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and moving images are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of effects. Be done. Further, as described above, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer.

  When rendering is performed, an image or the like is rendered in parallel to the plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal rendering schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, drawing by step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 383 is a view showing an example of a drawing result of an individual layer and a drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of advance notice rendering according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are to be managed individually, there is a possibility that the processing becomes complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each of the layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

  For example, the presentation SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 383, an effect SW group background, an effect SW group symbol, and an effect SW group advance notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These presentation SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the presentation SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the category of the presentation.

  As described above, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when the symbol display and the hold display in line with the currently displayed background is changed to another background when starting a new change, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer in the division according to the background The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display matched to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and the hold display matched to the new background in a plurality of layers. It is possible to switch the drawing for only the necessary effect display from among a plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

  In addition, in the effect across the gaming state, for example, in the big hit effect after the start of the change from the start of the change, the symbol is not displayed, the background is changed to the effect of the big hit, but with regard to hold It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset object effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW all reset has been specified is a liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation or It can be realized by defining it as a liquid crystal rendering common block at the start of the big hit rendering.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment, in order to enhance the drawing control of the complicated game effect in order to enhance the interest of the player, all effects are managed as a common block in block units of a certain length. By selecting a rendering block in accordance with the variation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and drawing based on the selected rendering block, a series of rendering effects such as symbol variation display and a big hit have been realized. For the common block, a period divided at a predetermined timing from the start of symbol fluctuation to the symbol determination is set, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation, and are assigned to fluctuation patterns It was set according to the variation time of the symbol.

  By configuring in this manner, the common block can be generally used with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased by securing the independence between the preliminary announcement effect performed in the first half fluctuation and the preliminary announcement effect performed in the second half fluctuation.

  However, as described above, since the common block is divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize the effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks having a predetermined length. When performing rendering over such a plurality of periods, each common block is executed independently, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the subsequent common block are associated and the versatility is lowered. Therefore, there is a risk that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the presentation. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in this embodiment, not only the variation display of the symbol and the series of big hit of the design are performed by combining the effect blocks of a certain length in all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but allows a rendering block length according to the rendering period. Furthermore, rendering effects can be rendered by combining rendering blocks having different rendering times, and rendering blocks that straddle the combined rendering blocks can also be rendered simultaneously, thereby realizing rendering effects that continue from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation.

  The effects spanning a plurality of periods include, for example, a countdown effect of displaying a countdown of numbers with the start of fluctuation of symbols and continuing the countdown display across the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. FIG. 384 is a view for explaining an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods according to this embodiment, in which (A) is a display timing of a symbol and an execution timing of notice effect, and (B) is a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block. And a configuration of a liquid crystal advance presentation block by a common block spanning a plurality of periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 384, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach”, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 384 (A), step-up notice and BTN logo part drop notice are executed in the first half variation, and cut-in notice and group notice are executed in the second half variation. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect are as described above. Also, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

  FIG. 384 (B) shows the configuration of liquid crystal effect block data of advance notice effects (step-up notice, BTN logo part drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block. Each block data is as described above.

  The lowermost part of FIG. 384 (B) shows the effect block of the countdown notice performed during the period from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice. The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends, and the second half fluctuation ends after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP stands by until the liquid crystal effect announcement block data starts. The NOP executed before the step-up announcement starts in the announcement effect using the common block, and the function NOP stands by until the second half fluctuation ends. The same waiting time as the NOP executed after the end of the group announcement is set in the announcement effect using the block.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to more flexibly operate the common block. In addition, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence such as the execution timing of the other effect blocks being shifted due to the exceptional setting. The control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
In order to enhance the interest of the game and to shorten the processing time for drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is extracted from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. Thus, various rendering expressions are efficiently realized by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame.

  FIG. 385 is a diagram for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 385, conventionally, an image drawn in each layer is superimposed on a frame buffer and written, and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, the display buffer command is used to overwrite the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data of one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. An effect is newly added around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, and then written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the drawing data that has already been created. However, in such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of new drawing elements for a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to the enlargement and reduction of the whole liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing element drawn in each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why the image conversion can not be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, advance notice, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order, so It is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when drawn on the frame buffer, it is possible to overwrite the drawing element with another drawing element even if it is attempted to extract the drawing element in a rectangle. Because, the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

  At present, the need to reuse image data for one drawn liquid crystal display has become scarce due to the improvement of VDP processing capability, but diversifying the expressions of presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming In order to execute complicated drawing processing, an increase in load was expected.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform various effects, image data of one frame of liquid crystal display of a created frame buffer is captured, and deformation or new drawing on the captured image is performed. When drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding the image, dynamically change the image during drawing, in each effect display unit constituting the image data for the one screen of the liquid crystal display Realize complex rendering by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is provided in units of effect blocks in liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and a process (program function) is dynamically called (call back) based on the information of the rendering SW incorporated in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the corresponding rendering block in the called program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on the off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to the change of the image of the specific advance notice, the addition of a new image, and the replacement of the effect of the background only, the change of the image or the new image Additions can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration will be specifically described, in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 386 is a view for explaining the procedure for converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer according to the present embodiment and writing the converted file in the frame buffer.

  As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called an off-screen buffer different from the frame buffer are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

  Explaining further, the rendering SW is embedded in the liquid crystal rendering block data that configures each layer corresponding to the rendering and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that configures the liquid crystal rendering block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal rendering The callback function is called by the callback based on the selected presentation SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 386, first, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the presentation SW before the drawing of the background layer is started. Next, at the drawing timing of each rendering element of the background layer, a display list command for enlargement of each rendering element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the rendering SW. In this way, the enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the symbol layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element of the pattern layer Create display list command. By transmitting the display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before drawing of the advance notice layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing at which the rendering of all the rendering elements related to the preview layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the preview rendering of each rendering element of the preview layer is performed within the function called back based on the rendering SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and furthermore, the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all rendering elements of the holding layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  According to the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, not the image conversion for the entire screen, but the image conversion regardless of the drawing unit of each layer, the drawing element constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callback based on the same effect SW is performed multiple times at each drawing timing in a period from the start of drawing of a liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the type of drawing timing are as described using FIG. 382 described above.

  Further, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether the image being drawn is an object of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, an image is generated based on the result of the lottery result value of the advance lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the time of creating the display list command for drawing the image conversion target image. It is possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a processes the created display list command to perform drawing at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and external request DMA (transfer means) after the completion of display list command creation for one screen. Was used to send the contents of the buffer to VDP.

  However, at present, processing specifications such as the advance lottery process at the start of fluctuation increase while the rendering specification becomes complicated and the processing increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the number of motor systems increase. The processing time of the motor data creation process by the above is also increased similarly. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as rendition etc. is executed at a fixed cycle, there is a possibility that the process can not be completed within the cycle when the above-mentioned high load process is executed in duplicate. .

  In exceptional cases where processing can not be completed within a cycle, if processing can not be completed steadily within a cycle, game control by the main controller and effect control by the peripheral controller can not be synchronized based on the processing cycle. The progress of the game and the effects of the game by the respective rendering devices can not be synchronized, which may significantly reduce the interest of the game.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for processing with high load in peripheral control processing such as rendering. Therefore, in this embodiment, drawing processing with relatively high load in peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list command that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source A means for reducing and shortening the processing time of the peripheral control processing will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 387 is a diagram for describing a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the present embodiment in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 387, first, various liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data includes information (a parameter value corresponding to a VDP register number or a register number) related to a display list command to be transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Since it is not, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source can execute. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. In addition, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as needed, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU 1530a performs display list transfer setting to the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540 temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group of one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and the display list command group is output from the buffer to the VDP 1540 a using the external request DMA at the next processing cycle of creating the display list command group. It realizes drawing by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a large amount of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group is a large processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different makers are mounted on one game machine, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP for each maker. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a procedure for transferring a part or all of the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing in the peripheral control RAM 1530c will be described. FIG. 388 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a without storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c according to this embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 388, first, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b.

  Although the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, each liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is converted VDP native display list command group And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image in the frame buffer. Furthermore, analysis of the display list is interrupted at the timing of analyzing and executing the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group, and a transfer interruption request is generated to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1530a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral control MPU 1530 determines in the interrupt processing module that the interrupt cause is the interrupt by the interrupt display list command, and executes the callback. In the callback function, replacement of effects and replacement of symbols are performed with reference to the callback information table for liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using the above-described FIG. 373 and the like, and the symbol replacement method is also the same as the description using the above-described FIG. 373 and the like. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the rendering SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, and a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1530a transmits a display list command of display list analysis resumption to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes a display list command of display list analysis restart, generates a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts analysis of the display list command.

  As described above, by processing only the replacement part of the rendering using the callback function, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c (temporary storage means) is used without any conversion of the VDP native display list involved in all the rendering other than the replacement. Instead, transfer can be performed from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b to the voice generator built-in VDP 1540 a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

  By configuring as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the built-in sound source VDP 1540 a without storing in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1530a accompanying the display of the image, and to speed up the image processing. In addition, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, only the frequently used VDP native display list command group may be stored, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed according to a conventional procedure. As a result, processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, and overall processing speed can be increased, and an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530 b, and processing of different images is performed according to the conventional procedure according to the difference in model and version to improve development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used in game control and peripheral control (rendering control) of a game machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used with a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, and they are 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes in size, respectively. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type or a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes or 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for peripheral control of a gaming machine is either a CISC processor or a RISC processor, a byte capable of reading and writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte of data on memory (ROM, RAM) It is a machine. Note that the address for reading and writing multi-byte data is not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from the byte boundary, and an access violation occurs when the processor accesses the byte boundary. The behavior at the time of alignment violation occurrence depends on the processor, but for example, instead of continuing the processing, execution of the program may be delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or the processing may be interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I hate it.

  However, in the development of the current game machine, when a program for controlling a game is executed, the data structure including a plurality of pieces of information on the memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of the alignment. There were many cases. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur at the time of program execution, and the program execution speed may be reduced. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, since it was necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, a reduction in program execution speed may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. Data structures are adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure including a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area for storing. This adjusts the start position of data access by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, thereby preventing occurrence of an alignment violation and preventing a decrease in program execution speed. Can. It is a huge task to adjust the alignment to the data structure on all the ROM and RAM on the ROM, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and the RAM related to the control processing related to the liquid crystal drawing processing and the lamp control processing. Moreover, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-mentioned process.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In the above embodiment, in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the circumferential direction around the first axis line CL. Although what was arranged in a row is shown, it is not limited to this, and three or more may be arranged in a circumferential direction like a third decorative surface portion and a fourth decorative surface portion.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative rotator unit 530 is shown to be rotatable only in the angle range of 180 degrees around the first axis line CL, but it is possible to rotate within the angle range of up to 360 degrees. It may be made to be infinitely rotatable.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the first axis line CL, which is the rotation axis line of the decorative rotator unit 530, is shown to extend horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be extended vertically so as to be orthogonal.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame base unit 110 door frame base 111 through hole 320 dish unit 400B third effect operation unit 410 operation button (operation receiving portion)
411 button lens 415 frame unit 420 decorative substrate unit 520 third base unit 521 unit base 521 g left shaft 521 h right bearing 528 effect operation unit first drive motor (drive)
530 decoration rotating body unit 531 rotating body base unit 531b rotating body side left bearing portion 531c rotating body side right shaft portion 532 first decorative surface portion (decorative rotating body)
532d shaft member 533 second decorative surface portion (decorative rotating body)
533a rotating decorative portion 533b fixed decorative portion 534 effect operation unit second drive motor 535 first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 830 payout device 951 payout control substrate 1310 main control substrate 1310 a main control MPU
1510 peripheral control board 1510 peripheral control board 1530a peripheral control MPU
1540a sound source built-in VDP
1600 game board side effect display device 3000 back unit 3010 back box 3031 effect drive board 3032 panel relay board 3130 back front lower decoration unit 3131 back front lower central lens 3500 back up movable effect unit 3513 first fixed decoration lens 3514 back first Decorative substrate 3530 back second decorative unit 3533 second fixed decorative lens 3534 back second decorative substrate 3550 back third decorative unit 3553 third fixed decorative lens 3554 back third decorative substrate 3570 back on rotating base unit 3600 back elevation unit 3610 movable side unit 3611 movable side base 5001 logo character 5002 star character 5002a left star character 5002b middle star character 5002c right star character 5003 character character 5010 input command analysis unit 5020 effect control unit 5 30 layer data storage unit 5040 effect block control unit 5050 effect block data storage unit 5051 liquid crystal effect block data 5052 liquid crystal symbol block data 5053 sub effect block data 5060 scheduler execution unit 5070 scheduler data storage unit 5071 liquid crystal effect schedule data 5072 liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5073 Sub presentation schedule data 5080 Output module section 5100 System module 5110 Main command buffer 5120 Liquid crystal display list command buffer 5130 Ramp data output buffer 5140 Motor data output buffer 5150 Serial control IC
5200 command analysis module 5310 liquid crystal rendering scheduler control unit 5311 liquid crystal symbol scheduler control unit 5320 sub rendering scheduler control unit 5321 sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5322 sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5331 liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5332 liquid crystal symbol 1 f drawing scheduler Execution unit 5333 Sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5334 Sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5400 Liquid crystal module 5500 Sound module 5502 Scheduler 5600 Ramp module 5700 Drive module CL1 First axis CL2 Second axis

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main control device for controlling a game and an effect control device for executing an effect of the game,
The effect control device is
A display effect execution unit that executes an effect of displaying an image on a display device;
A program data storage unit storing program data required to display the image;
The program data includes one in which effect identification information for executing a predetermined process is set,
The display effect execution unit calls the predetermined process corresponding to the effect identification information set in the program data, and executes the predetermined process.
When the process by the program data is repeatedly and continuously executed for a predetermined period, the predetermined process corresponding to the effect identification information is called up each time the process by the program data is repeatedly executed, and the predetermined process is performed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute continuously.